Home

User Manual - Laboratory Systems Group

Contents

1. Shipper Holidays System New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel This area tells Lab Manager which holidays shipping companies are closed To create a list of shipper holidays ere go to the top of the screen and click on System Calendar and then Shipper Holidays This will show a screen on the next page Lab Manager comes with several shipper holidays already in the list To add your Calendar Company Holidays own shipper holiday names click on the Add New button at the bottom of the screen and then type in the eiai Shipper Holidays name of the holiday into the Description field Codes Production Calendar Admin Tools The Edit Shipper Holidays screen allows you to define information about your shipper holidays e Shipper Holiday ID This is the ID that the system automatically assigns to the Shipper Holiday e Description This is the name of the shipper holiday e Date Retired This is the date that the shipper holiday has been retired deleted e Show Retired This check box is used to show the retired Shipper Holiday in the list If the retired events are not showing check mark the box and it will add in the retired events Note If you are looking at the list of Shipper Holidays and do not see all of the items click the Show Retired check box at the top of the screen This will show all shipper holidays that have been retired along with current shipper holidays 80
2. Scheduling Product Production 1018207 ase ea IMOS Material Production Account Production Material Usage GEDE Material ReOrders Report Cases ata Glance Case Tracking Material ReOrders aastesial Rooadiess Materials Remake Usage ieg myoys fi Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Outsourced Cases Quotes Daily Delivery List 103290 ase Delivery Report Use this screen to print a Material Reorder Report which shows the materials that need to be reordered The report lists the vendors name and contact information along with a list of materials that need to be ordered Each material notes how much is currently in stock the set level when materials need to be reordered the set reorder quantity the estimated cost per item and the total projected Preview or Print the Material Reorders Report 1 Click on Reports Production and then Material Reorders 2 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Material Reorders The report lists Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes e Vendors Name and Contact Information Here e List of Materials to be Ordered Vendor ARGEN Phone 800 255 5524 Contact FaxNumber Each Material notes Address 380 MIRALANI DR Terms e Quantity Currently In Stock Instructions e Set Level When Materials Need to be SAN DIEGO CA 92126 Reordered e Set Reorder Quantity Material In Stock ReorderLevel Order Qty Cost Each ARGEN 77 13
3. Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 P m P t th l L b Invoices Labels that Need Printing review or rin e nvoice a e S CaseID AccountName CaseNumber Patient InvoiceID InvoiceDate DueDate NeedsPrinting LabelNeedsPrinting i x a gt 40 Dr George Frank 1112 0001 Smith John 46 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 X x 1 Click on Reports Labels and then Invoice Note The Invoice Labels a A nihnkidare A00ronoi Sn Sandy 47 TOTE J J screen is read only 36 Dr GeorgeFranks 1005 0001 Jones Sherry 48 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 X X 30 Dr GeorgeFranks 0902 0001 Johnson Jerry 49 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 X x 2 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen 9 DrJohntiidare 0801 0001 Miner Jessia S0 102m2 11 11 2012 3 Click Yes if the Invoice Labels printed correctly This insures that the a8 Dr GeorgeFranks 0809 0001 Jones Frank 51 10 12 2012 13 11 2012 EJ x 26 Dr John Killdare 0806 0005 Jackson Scott 52 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 X x same INVOICE label will NOT be reprinted 23 Dr John Killdare 0806 0002 Black Mark 53 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 x X 4 OR Clicking No will allow the INVOICE 21 Dr JohnKilldare 0106 0002 Crouse Robet 54 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 X X label to still print kF 20 Dr GeorgeFranks 0106 0001 White Racheal 55 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 X x La b Ma nage j E 19 Dr GeorgeFranks 0105 0012 Farquart Martha 56 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 X x 18 Dr GeorgeFranks 0105 0011 Nakasuji Frank 57 10 12 20
4. Confirm to Proceed This application is not signed with a digital certificate IF you allow unsigne access your file a different application could use the same application na misuse your data For suggestions about enhancing the safety of your co Help You have chosen to allow this unsigned application to access employee Sod Numbers customer credit card information and other personal data in yo company file without asking the user again To help protect your company s data Intuit suggests Always use signed applications Find out what data this application accesses Notify your employees that certain data may be accessed Inform the application developer that you prefer to use only signed appl Are you sure you want to allow this access QuickBooks Interface Configuration Simple Tab Once the connection between Lab Manager and QuickBooks has been established the final phase of creating the necessary General Ledger accounts can be completed The easiest way to accomplish this is to let Lab Manager create the accounts for you Lab Manager will display the following screens to help you create those accounts 1 Select the QuickBooks bank account that you want to export the Lab Manager data into using the dropdown list 2 Click on the Create Suggested QB Accounts button ieg jnNoyous JOye307 ase Access Confirmation You have chosen bo grant the application Lab Manager acoess bo the QuickBook
5. This report includes e Department ID Department List e Description Sorted By Department ID e Date Retired Filtered By DateRetired is Blank Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here ID Description Date Retired 17 Ceramics 18 Misc 19 Billing 20 Placeholder Account Accounting CB Crown and Bridge Dent Denture Ortho Orthodontic Ships Shipping 175 Reports Menu General Vendors List aXe elem cm cya mel Jalsle l mmm continued Vendors List Report System New Edit List Repurts Help Accounting General Accounts This report prints a general list of Vendors with their ID Name Address and Phone Num ber ieg yNd 10yS Billing Doctors Production Products Labels Materials List Marketing Date Retired Radio Buttons Choose One e Ignore Placing a dot in the circle will show both active and retired vendors on the re port e Active Only Default Setting Placing a dot in the circle will show only the active vendors on the report e Retired Only Placing a dot in the circle will show only the retired vendors on the report Employees Scheduling Departments 10 2 07 ase Vendors Doctor Preferences Calls Assigned To Account Exp Date Reminders Sort Radio Buttons Choose One e Vendor ID Placing a dot in the circle will sort the report by the ID of the vendor e Vendor Name Default setting Placing a dot in the circle i i i Syst N Edit List R rts Hel will sort the
6. Product Production poo asep j pes Imyuoys hz Material Production Account Production Material Usage Cases at a Glance Case Tracking Material Reorders Materials Remake Usage Outsourced Cases Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One Quotes e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Custom Place a dot in the circle to choose your own start and end dates e MTD Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fillin the pemean aT Month To Date MTD starting and ending dates e YTD Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates Cases At A Glance e Today Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 starting and ending dates with the current date e Fiscal YTD Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year e Unstatemented Place a dot in the circle the system will fill in the Daily Delivery List Delivery Report OENE Cases Glance Report ieg IMOS 1032307 ase start and end date for cases that have not yet been statemented Ex Show All Regardle
7. Easy Report Manager View Easy Menus View Case Locator View Shortcut Bar Edit Shortcut Menu It Show All Dock Bars Manage Reports Quickbooks Transfer Edit Employees Edit Salespersons Edit Price Lists Edit Company Prefs Edit OB Config Edit Doctors Items Edit Delivery Method Edit Material Unit Typ Edit Departments Edit Steps Edit Form Types Edit Steps Reporting Edit Calendar Edit Holidays Edit Shipper Holidays Edit GL Cats Edit Tax Collectors Edit Tax Rates Edit Tax Categories Edit Invoice Terms View Accounts GL Sta Run Aging Edit Marketing C Edit Pathe od Edit Case Codes Edit Vendor Cod Edit Doctor Codd Edit Employee Cq Edit Product Coq Edit Material Coq New Case New Account New Doctor New Product New Material New Vendor New Marketing New Time Card New Pickup New Payment Edit Account Edit Marketing C List Cases List Accounts List Doctors List Payments List Products List Materials Li dors List Marketing Co List Time Cards List Pickups Dr Account Locatii Case Search View Bulk Paymen List Statements List Invoices Report Account H Report Invoice De Report Account Le Report Taxes Colle Report Taxes By Ci Report ATB 2 Report Aged Trial Report Collection Report General Jo Report Taxes Colle Report Accounts Report Departmer Report Products Report Employees Report Vendors Report Doctors Report Salesperso List Purchase Orders Close
8. er Ea rine Edit Cases Hiau mages Maii Main Doctor Items Motes Cancel View the Image in High Resolution 1 After an image has been added to a case it can be viewed in high resolution To view the high resolution image right click on it and then left click on View Full 2 To close the image box use the Red X at the top of the pop up screen Deleting Images on a Case 1 In the case that needs to have a photo deleted click on the Image tab from the Case Entry screen 2 Click the Image that is already saved on the case 3 You will see a small menu containing the words Add and Delete Left click on Delete 110 4 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost Choose File View Full Delete O Include On Invoice m Include On Work Ticket New Menu Case NCEA CaO Otsbyeu continued Patient Codes Tab at the Case Entry Screen Patient Codes are user definable codes that you can use to categorize cases by patient type Exam Rus a ae ple If the lab performs some of its work for charity the charity patients could be coded as charity so that the lab owner could keep track of the amount of work performed for charity and non charity Description DateRetired Selected accounts The armed services categorize patients as enlisted personnel spouse of enlisted person TT nel or children of enlisted personnel
9. User Status dropdown list Optional This field can be used to as Dactor Date Finish Date sign a special status to the case Example If the case goes out for Ship By Date Pickup Date Try in use the Try In status and assign the case to it This makes it Ship By Time O Date Picked Up ro easy to know the exact status of the case and to create a list of cases by status You can create your own statuses by clicking on the or Pan Number Dar Donya list all statuses by using the L button to the right of the User Status AiticulatorTag Delivery Method fl field Also see User Status at System Codes and then User Shipping Zone Status Received This field indicates the date the case was received By default it is set to today s date The date can be changed by clicking on the drop down list button to the right of the date Doctor Date Optional This field indicates the date the case is to be returned to the doctor The date can be defined by clicking on the drop down list button to the right of the date Ship By Date Optional This field indicates the date the case is to be shipped to the doctor The date can be defined by clicking on the drop down list button to the right of the date Ship By Time Optional This field can be used to define a time the case has to be back at the doctor s office Pan Number Optional This field can be used to define the pan number and can contain both letters and numbers Articu
10. At the Edit Vendor Codes screen click on Add New button at the bottom of the screen o_o noes In the new line item in the grid under the Description column type the name of the Vendor Code Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until all new vendor codes have been entered Edit Vendor Codes You do not have to type a vendor code ID as an ID will be assigned automatically when the oR WON 6 Modify Existing Vendor Codes l 2 At the Edit Vendor Codes screen click on and modify the name in the Description column 3 Delete Existing Vendor Codes 1 Click on System Codes and then Vendor Senco 2 At the Edit Vendor Codes screen place a date in the Date Retired column Do this for all Se 3 go Show Retired changes have been saved Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Vendor Code Choices VendorCodelD Description DateRetired Click on System Codes and then Vendor Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost codes that need retiring Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost 90 System Menu Codes SCCM a Lem oTe stom continued i System New Edit List Reports Help Employee Control Panel Employees can be assigned codes to identify them when creating reports sorted or filtered by code Salary Part Case Entry Time Hourly etc To enter new employee codes or edit existing employee information click Sy
11. DBL DBLBL This prints two identical invaices cida hw ciel LSR This prints one invaice on the chast gt Syscem New Edit List Reports Help LSR QC This prints the invoice on the left and right sides and has a detachable Quality Control in the LSR QC This prints prints two different invoices side by side LSR QC This style prints one invoice per page plus a summary printed on the right hand side It can printed on blank pa per or use our QC form portrait 8 1 2 x 11 avail able at 800 677 1120 Our QC form has one verti cal perforation 2 3 of the way from the left 50 TAB This style prints one invoice per page plus a condensed copy on the right The two tear off tabs can create two address slips or an address slip and a quality control ticket It can be printed on blank paper or our TAB form portrait 8 1 2 x 11 avail able at 800 677 1120 Our TAB form has one vertical perforation 2 3 from the left and a second hori zontal perforation that cre ates two tear off tabs at the bottom of the form System Menu Control Panel Control Panel gt Case Entry Production Calendar Accounting Codes Admin Tools Exit TAB Invoice on the left and right sides a detachable quality control in the lower right and shipping Company Preferences and Settings Easy Report Manager gt Employees gt Price Lists d Quickbooks Transfer
12. Main List Tax Categories Edit Tax Ca ories 10 807 ase Description V DateCreated VY DateRetired W Imported FLAGST 01 03 2011 Imported Non Tax 01 03 2011 Imported YOUNG 01 03 2011 Tax Category Rates 1eg ynd 10ys Tax Categories are groups of Tax Rates for a given area Imported Non Tax 01 03 2011 A Tax Category can have Tax Rates for multiple Tax Collectors ge 08 31 2012 D i e A Doctor who s business is within the limits of the city of Phoenix would be subject to City of Phoenix tax for taxable items Additionally because the city of Phoenix is enclosed by the County of Maricopa the Doctor would also have to pay Maricopa County tax for taxable items The city of Phoenix is in the state of Arizona so the Doctor would also have to pav the State of Arizona lt 4 nities Oand or Search Field 3 Primary Value Close Export To Excel Export To PDF Collectors Categories City of Phoenix Taxable Non Taxable Charity Maricopa County Taxable State of Arizona ais Taxable Non Taxable I Show Retired E show sal Tax Categories Close Adding a New Tax Category continued on the next page 84 System Menu Accounting SET CcalemmaNereelsaliiale continued Sten Nen Et Ust Repos Han Tax Categories continued 1032307 ase Edit Tax Categories Desciptin aie i TaxRateID DateRetired Datei Tax Categories are groups of Tax Rates for a given 6 At the Edit T
13. Production Employees Calendar Price Lists Accounting Quickbooks Transfer Codes Call Tracking 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Show All Dock Bars Admin Tools Shortcut Bar 2 When the menu item is clicked it will not bring up anything but the Dock Bars should be made Exit ShortCut Menu Items available on the far left of Lab Manager Show All Dock Bars ManageReports QuickBooks Interface Toolbar Case Locator View Easy Menus Setup Wizard Manage Reports System New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel gt Company Preferences and Settings Case Entry b Easy Report Manager z Production Employees WARN N G WE DO NOT RECOMMEND CHANGING THE FOLLOWING ore ee SELECTIONS UNLESS YOU ARE ADVISED TO BY THE LABORATORY SYSTEMS Fe eee ees uaa GROUP SUPPORT DEPARTMENT T P Admin Tools Shortcut Bar Exit ShortCut Menu Items Show AIl Dock Bars This screen is used to assign individual parts of your reports to their proper places We do not recom Manage Reports mend using this feature without assistance To easily change your form type use the Easy Report QuickBooks Interface Manager found at System Control Panel and then Easy Report Manager Toolbar Case Locator The Manage Reports screen is where you can assign individual components of all reports DO NOT View Easy Menus change these unless you are familiar with it If you have a custom report item to assign find the label Setup Wizard for it and assign th
14. System Mew Edit List Reports Help ele Edit Products Edit Products TUS Bes gee eer E oe eee eee oan ye tal oa T za S Locator ID Prices We e ee cl ee ee l l l l l l m Dollar Amount Percent Add To All Price Lists l l l l l Steps Image Description Do O Product Class fg et w Change Prices 10j2307 3529 Special Codes Product Prices Department Price List Price a F Definah s i l ee section l Notes for Cas Edit Products i I l I l l l I l I l l I l I I I I l l See sections TABS Prices Related Products 1 Related Materials Codes l l I l l l I I l I l I I l l I I l I l l I l I l l I l mal Invisible Ea Include Product Notes Steps Images Ea Discountable Allow Remake Discount x Is Production Product FF Taxable aka Count Use this screen to define new products or l l E Allow Commission l l l l P gt tocedht existimg omes 47 memas Let de ede eee mim Al d ee I I Products are the labor items such as the I I I Section Edit Products e Locator ID This is the product ID number You can use this number to locate or identify a product This number can contain both letters and numbers If left blank Lab Manager will automatically assign it a sequential number starting with 1 e Description Ty
15. System New Edit List Reports Help GEIE Case Search Search ieg IMOS 10 2307 ase gnored Search Status User Status Account Doctor Patient Case Rx Pan Tooth Product Shade Material Shade Case Shade Case Code Articulator Lot E mark Wi inci E Include Statemented This causes Status to be ignored PO Received Date Start Date Doctor Date Chair Time Invoice Date Ship By Date Ship By Time Finish Date Delivered Date Pick Up Date Add New Export To Excel Export To PDF E include PO Received Date Start Date Doctor Date Chair Time Invoice Date Ship By Date Ship By Time Finish Date Delivered Date Pick Up Date Datirad Maka Retired Between oraz o pa o Between Has Any Value jor10 20122 ov10 2012 At the Case Search Screen fill in at least 1 criteria See full list of criteria with definitions on this and previous page Click Search and this will fill the grid with items from the search Hover above Search towards the top left corner to have the Case Search screen with search criteria reappears Click on Reset to clear the screen to find another case Once the case is located click on the Case Number in the grid to view the case Navigation Tools List Search Screens A short universal list search screen allows multiple search criteria fo
16. Continued on next page 160 Report Menu Accounting Aged Trial Balance lt olela mm cae mm Cexevel bial diate Mm continued Saved Job Tab at Aged Trial Balance La System New Edit List Reports Heip GEDE ATB Report e ATB Job Drop Down List Select an item Aged Trial Balance from the drop down list to see a previously Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Tray 0 viewed Aged Trial Balance The Aged Trial Balance Repor will show you the current e Delete Job Button Click this button to unstatemented amounts and the amount due for each account delete an ATB Job from the drop down list Helpful Blue Text Will Be Here Soon oe wiweieme Saved Jobs 10 12 2012 9 24 26 AM 10 12 2012 9 19 29 AM Delete Job Print or Preview a Saved Aged Trial Balance 1 Click on Reports Accounting and then Aged Trial Balance 2 On the Saved Jobs tab use the drop down list to select a saved Aged Trial Balance This report includes e Account ID Aged Trial Balance Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes e Account Name i Here e Address Line ID Account Address1 sLastStmt OverPaid Current Payments S C Due e Last Statement Balance 11 Dental Laboratory 123 Main Street 374 42 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 374 42 e Over Payment Amount Days Amount Past Due e Current Invoiced Charges 1 374 42 e Payment Total e Service Charges S C e Amount Due Total 374 42 Past Due 374 42 Dr Susan Smith 444 N 16th St
17. Create New Company Database 1 Before changing these settings please contact the LSG support department F ia aaah icin E Import v5 Data 2 To make your backups be sure you always have the same name instead of a different name F 3 Click the Make the Default Backup Name V6Backup bak check box Optional Tee ene 4 Click Save to save the changes Click Close to exit Tool Delete a Company DB Backup a Company DB Lab Manager erver Toc Change License Server Help Config Aging Scheduler Misc Admin Tools Copy Database Attach Company DB Default Backup File Path Change Path Path for Databases C LMDBs Change Path Root Directory for External Company Files C LMDBs ExternalFiles Change Path IM Make the Default Rackun Name V6Rackin hak Delete a Company DB Data Base gt Help Setup New Lab Manager Clear Logged In Users This function is used to delete an existing Lab Manager database Once a database has been deleted it can never be retrieved Upgrade Server Create New Company Database Delete a Company Database Reset Admin Password Lab Manager Server Toc e Double click on the Server Tool icon e Click on the Server Menu then on Delete a Com Import v5 Data H Server Help Backup a Company DB Delete A Company DB pany DB Restore a Company DB 1 Use the drop down list at Select the Company Note ALL users must be OUT of
18. Date Picked Up Age Discount Total C sow Pan Number sd Date Delivered Chair Time Tax Total 0 00 Articulator Tag Delivery Method f3 L RX i Grand Total C ssw Shipping Zone e Date Retired SubTotal Products Product SHIPPING amp HANDLING ADJUSTMENT ProductTeeth Related Unit Price UnitPriceDiscount 55 00 Quantity 1 0000 1 0000 1 00 Materials Material Quantity MaterialTeeth Related QtyTakenFrominy Shade Unit Price Unit Pric Doctor Date 12 15 11 Thursday count ID hee Bass Nimes 1100001 Print Quote Quick Return Return Findi Your Company Name Goes Here State ment Pen eaa osom at Leu company adress Goes Here ities 602 555 1234 Recai ur City State and ZIP Goes Here Billing Date 10 8 2012 I Dr George Franks Patien Your Company Name Goes Here Invoice Qty Product Description Schedule Tooth Your Company Address Goes Here Amount Enclosed 1 2 3 4 GOLD CROWN o Your City State and ZIP Goes Here Account ID 1 Dr Preferences Dr John Smith Notes 1234 N 10th St Items Received from Doctor Case 1112 0001 Phoenix Az 85016 Account ID 2 Inv Date 10 12 2012 Upper Arch Dr Gearge Franks Ship By 12 14 2011 728 S E 60 TH Shade A2 Please Return Top Portion With Payment Phoenix Az 85000 Ship Via Case Type Patient Reference Credit Charge Dr George Franks Patie
19. Production Steps are defined to produce a given product This step is only necessary if you use the Scheduling module Add New Review m Completed Step 11 Products Products are the labor items you make such as crowns bridges dentures orthodontic appliances etc If you use Scheduling you would assign Production Steps here Add Diew Ronen m ance Step 12 Materials Materials are the items you purchase from a vendor such as gold teeth and attachments Add New Review m Completed Step 13 Doctors Items optional This is a list of items you would typically receive from a Doctor that you would want noted on individual cases Items such as a bite block articulator and more could be placed here Add Die Renee m Esoasiii Step 14 Calendar Add holidays and other days your lab is closed to your calendar Note that this is only necessary for users with the Production or Scheduling module and that US holidays and weekends are already marked as Closed Users located in other nations with these modules should review these holidays Add New Review E Completed If you would like to keep this Setup Wizard from opening again click o hara 19 Step 1 Billing Terms Setup Wizard Step 1 Billing Terms Invoice Terms or Billing Terms are the terms you offer your accounts Examples include service charge rates for past due amounts If you allow an account to have a 30 60 and or 90 day past due balance OR Discounts for early payments
20. Transfer data to Quickbook Make sure you have backed up your QuickBooks company database before transferring your data from here Transfer Data to QuickBooks 1 Please backup your QuickBooks data before transferring data for the first time If the transfer does not go as intended the QuickBooks data can be restored back to the way it was before the transfer 2 In Lab Manager click on System Control Panel and then QuickBooks Transfer 3 While in the Transfer Data to QuickBooks screen click on the Load Financial Data button 4 Finally click on the Transfer Data button at the bottom of the screen 5 When finished click on the Close button and then click the Load Financial Data Button 1 Make sure that Quickbooksis open on this computerto the Company file that youwish to transfer data INTO Click the Transfer Data button dt the bottom of the fom Status Messages MessageID Message DateOfMessage Transfer Data Close on Save or Cancel wD TZ 60 System Menu Control Panel SET gn Cela Oke al igo i ad las gm continued Call Tracking Control Panel gt Company Preferences and Settings Case Entry Easy Report Manager Track calls made to doctors and potential accounts This information includes Contact Name Details of the Call Date and Starting and Ending Time Production Employees Calendar Price Lists Accounting Quickboo
21. WS Suppress Material Qty On Invoices 1 00 o Defaultto having the Credit Min Balance Default of Invoice Copies x Announce Dr Prefs On Work Ticket CheckedBox setto Checked Default of Statement Copies ATB Aging Default Do Nothing Simulate Aging Run Aging Show Bar Codes On Reports Place a check mark in the box to print bar codes on reports Applies to Scheduling Module only Work Ticket Header Select the header option for the top of your Work Ticket from None Pan Articulator Received Date Doctor s Date Finish Date or Ship By Date Applies to Production and Scheduling Modules only Default of Invoice Copies Change the number to specify how many copies of the same invoice will print out at one time Default of Statement Copies Change the number to specify how many copies of the same statement will print out at one time Aged Trial Balance ATB Aging Default You have 3 three options Do Nothing To create an ATB report with no service charges calculated select Do Nothing The report will not show or calculate aging even if you have services charges defined in the invoice terms screen Simulate Aging To create an ATB report that simulates and displays service charges but does not actually age or apply the service charge select Simulate Aging e Run Aging To create an ATB report that automatically calculates and applies service charges every time select Run Aging We do not recommend selection of R
22. show up If the box is left blank it will list 3 New ATB 2 Job MAE TTIRT every account E e Exclude On Hold Accounts check box By Exclude Accounts With No Activity Ed save Job When this has a check in the box ac EI beduie Gintteldccnunts counts that are checked On Hold on the Edit Accounts screen will not show up on the report If the box is left blank all ac Sot Bys Ap locator GANEN counts will show up e Save Job Place a check in the box to Aging Do Nothing FE save this ATB Job so that it can be printed simulate Aging at a different time Sort By Radio Buttons Choose one e Locator ID Placing a dot in the circle will sort the report by the Locator ID of the account Close e Account Name Placing a dot in the circle will sort the report by the Account Name in alphabetical order Aging Radio buttons Choose one e Do Nothing Place a dot in the circle if the report should not have aging features such as service charges e Simulate Aging Place a dot in the circle if the report needs to match the end of month reports with service charges e Run Aging Place a dot in the circle to actually run aging Print or Preview a New Aged Trial Balance 2 1 Click on Reports Accounting and then Aged Trial Bal 2 2 On the New ATB 2 Job tab select if the report needs to exclude include Accounts with no activity or On Hold 3 Select a sort order of the report from Locator ID or Accounts Select an option from the Aging catego
23. 1g 1 C Default 4 r Gutter 0 04 s J Portrait TEE Printer Settings B iane Printer Settings Landscape Collate Printer Default be Duplex Printer Default Paper Source Printer Default z H E Detail E GroupFooterl H E PageFooter Fields E Parameters AP Settings Invoice Global Settings Case ox Cancel OK Cancel Inv Ca ShowParamete True Ship By Watermark _ none EE Report Settings Properties This area shows the many properties related to the selected field report section or sub report Properties that can be Font name Arial m Layout Mode C None Snaplines Snap to Grid Font size 10 S Bold False 7 Page Setup I Show Grid Grid Columns 16 ape Italic False 7 modified here include fonts colors graphics on le _ word wrap visible or not growth properties A or i m rinter Settings and more Many times it is better to mark an i aise Ee J EE Stow dete Poms BackColor C None New Delete ForeColor 0 0 0 Export styles to file Horizontal Alignment Left l Import styles from file yaioa Top Script Westem bd Ruler Units Inches Preview Pages fio item as Not Visible instead of deleting it Global Settings Se
24. 46 CAST CLASP Misc 10 CAST POST Denture 29 CONQUEST Ceramics 21 COPING CRON Ceramics 172 Reports Menu General Materials List Xe elelacm cae me Jalsle 1 continued Materials List Report 2 This report prints a general list of Materials with their ID department that they are as General Accounts signed to type of unit cost and selling price This report can be sorted by Material ID j Billing gt Doctors and Description default Date Retired Radio Buttons Choose One e Ignore Placing a dot in the circle will show both active and retired materials on the report e Active Only Default Setting Placing a dot in the circle will show only the active materials on the report e Retired Only Placing a dot in the circle will show only the retired materials on the report System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting Production Products Labels Marketing Materials List Employees Scheduling Departments Vendors Doctor Preferences Calls Assigned To Account Exp Date Reminders Sort Radio Buttons Choose One e Material ID Placing a dot in the circle will sort the report by the ID of the material e Material Description Default setting Placing a dot in the circle will sort the materials on the report in alpha System _New Edit List_Reports Help betical order CEMER PED AAGE Materials List Report Materials List Report 2 Printer Brother HL 5370DW serie
25. 800 255 5524 1 800 424 2926 800 841 4522 503 692 3344 1 800 221 0166 800 243 4571 515 244 2100 800 533 6825 1 602 264 5913 238 5526 1 800 356 8141 Reports Menu General Doctor Preferences List aXe elelam cla mel Jalsle l continued Doctor Preferences Report System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting General Accounts This report prints a general list of Preferences that are assigned to Doctors It lists the ae a Hin octors Account Name Doctor ID and Name the Department and Preference e roauction Products Sort Radio Buttons Choose One ae pees tt e Department Default setting Placing a dot in the circle will sort the list by department e Preference Placing a dot in the circle will sort the list by preference e Account dropdown list Use the account dropdown to filter the report to only show preferences for a specific account e Doctor dropdown list Use the doctor dropdown to filter the report to only show prefer ences for a specific doctor Marketing Employees Scheduling Departments 1018207 ase es IMOS Vendors Doctor Preferences Calls Assigned To Account Exp Date Reminders System New Edit List Reports Help OENE EAGEN Dr Prefs Report Doctor Preferences Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Preview or Print the Doctor Preferences List Report Sort O Department Prefe 1 Click on Reports General and then Doctor Prefer ences Accoun
26. 84 00 98 00 77 00 1 200 26 Invoice Date 10 12 2012 10 12 2012 10 12 2012 10 12 2012 10 12 2012 10 12 2012 10 12 2012 10 12 2012 10 12 2012 10 12 2012 10 12 2012 10 12 2012 10 12 2012 10 12 2012 10 12 2012 Case Acct ID Acct Name 0105 0008 Dr 0105 0009 Dr 0105 0010 George Franks 0105 0011 George Franks 0105 0012 Dr 0106 0001 Dr George Franks 0106 0002 Dr John Killdare 0806 0002 Dr John Killdare 0806 0005 Dr John Killdare 0809 0001 Dr George Franks 0901 0001 Dr John Killdare 03902 0001 Dr George Franks 1005 0001 Dr George Franks 1007 0001 Dr John Killdare 1112 0001 Dr George Franks George Franks Farquart Martha White Racheal Crouse Robert Black Mark Jackson Scott George Franks Jones Frank Miller Jessica Johnson Jerry Jones Sherry Smith Sandy Smith John George Franks 182 Your Company Name Goes Here Invoice Total 23 10 85 54 125 84 568 69 125 84 76 98 108 20 186 20 93 66 36 80 93 66 85 86 93 66 109 27 85 86 1 899 16 Report Menu Billing Cash Receipts aX oleae TEA md ale mm Continued System New Edit List Reports Help Cash Receipts Report E The Cash Receipts Report lists payments made by your accounts between a selected time period This report should be printed at the end of the month to capture all payment credits and discounts for the month on a printed report Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One e S
27. Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One Cases ata Glance e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the Case Tracking date in MM DD YYYY format Material Reorders e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the Materials Remake Usage date in MM DDI YYYY format Outsourced Cases e Custom Place a dot in the circle to choose your own start and end dates Quotes e MTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and Daily Delivery List ending dates Delivery Report e YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fillin the Year To Date YTD starting and end ing dates e Today A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date e Fiscal YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year e Unstatemented A dot in the circle will fill in the start and end date for cases that have not yet been statemented Example Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want the date range of current unstatemented cases to start with the first unstatemented case dated 8 5 12 The system will System New Edit List Reports Help Elam Vendor OutSourcing Report Vendor Outsourcing Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 101207 ase ea myu fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of toda
28. Location Name fo Send Invoices to this Address J Editing an Existing Account ieee Send Statements to this Address lj 1 Click on System List and then Accounts Addes2 Cid ooo PAPER 2 To search for an individual account type their name Ciy State Zip once a into the Primary Value of Search Field 1 before click seh Foute ing Search At the bottom of the screen there is also an Contact Roest Add New button that will add a new Account Phone eef Deivey Hous 3 Click on the Account Name in the table of the account Phone J et Date Retired you wish to edit FAX Number Days Open 4 Click Save Changes or all your work will be lost Tax Category HR 2 a u Non Tax Category C9 Imported Non Tax PHOENIKAZ S aLa JM conse Editing an Existing Location 1 Click on the Location Name in the Edit Location column of the grid the Account Location Edit box will come up make your editing 2 Click Save Changes at the bottom 30 Setup Wizard Step 8 Accounts Doctors Location cont New Users Entering Starting Balances Step 8 Accounts Doctors Location cont Doctors are the individuals that work for one of your accounts Every account must have at least one doctor assigned to it All accounts need to have the doc tors assigned to them even if it is only one doctor Part C Assigning a Doctor s to an Account 1 At the Edit Account screen click on the Doctor tab 2 Click on the Add
29. NOTE Most laboratories should start by simply modifying the Standard Net Terms You can create your own but it is faster and easier to just customize the ones provided If you do charge a service charge on past due balances starting at 30 days from the invoice date you can simply change the Service Charge Percentage in the table to meet you needs By default the service charge rate is set to 2 per month 24 per year To change the percentage from 2 to 1 5 change the current rate of 0 0200 to 0 0150 in each of the lines You can also add additional Invoice Term Periods by clicking on the Add New button System New Edit List Reports Help GEDE List Invoice Terms Modifying Existing Invoice Terms 1 Click on System Accounting and then Invoice Terms 2 At the Search area will appear and you choose from 2 options Type in the name of the Invoice Term and click Search OR To see a whole list of Invoice Terms leave the search area blank and click Search 3 Click on the Description that you wish to modify and the Invoice Term Period grid will come up Make any necessary modifications to the de scription such as when things are due Step 3A 4 Click Save Changes at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Oand or Oand or E ShowRet Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Search Field 3 Function Function Function Export To Excel Export To PDF Close System New Ed
30. Press Delete on your keyboard and the line item will disappear To delete all accounts assigned to this technician click the Remove From All button This will clear the grid Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost Oo 01 B W DY 55 system Menu Control Panel ZARIEN aE continued Skip this page if you don t own the Scheduling Module Tech for Doctors Tab at Edit Employees Screen iat eee eines Tech For Doctors Meise This optional feature allows the selected employee to be assigned to a doctor when sched uling a case This feature is available in the Scheduling Module only e Add Doctor Button This button is used to assign individual doctors to this technician Doctors e Add To All Button This button is used to assign this technician to all the doctors and DoctorD it will fill the grid automatically he CASH at CASH ACCOUNT 2905 e Remove From All Button This button is used to clear the entire list of doctors that this employee technician is assigned to Assign Doctors to a Technician 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Employees 2 On the Edit Employee screen click on the Tech for Doctors Tab 3 Click the Add Doctor button and this will create a drop down in the grid Choose the 4 Doctor this technician needs to be assigned to Click again on Add Doctor to add more doctors one at a time If this technician needs to be assigned to all doctors c
31. System New Edit List Reports Helg Case Search Case ieg IMOS Payment Bulk Payment Statement Account Doctor 10 8307 3S2 101 New Menu Case Search CACO Otsbyeu continued Case Search at New Menu gt System New Edit List Reports Help Case Search Case Left Column Criteria Use these criteria when searching single or multiple fields ieg IMOS Payment Bulk Payment Statement Mark Check this box if specific cases have previously been selected using the Mark function Include Statemented This causes Status to be ignored Check this box to search for Statemented cases Include Retired Check this box when searching for retired deleted cases Status Use this dropdown to select whether the case is Open Invoiced Statemented or Not Statemented It defaults to Not Statemented e User Status Use this field to find cases that you have assigned a custom status Example Try In Die Trims If you have assigned cases to these custom statuses you can find a list of all of them here to insure you ae haven t missed any returns from your accounts search A ie anne e Account Select an account e Doctor Select a doctor Search e Patient Type ina partial or full name Recommend Hi Mark Include Statemented this causes Status to beignored J IncludeRetired Type in the last name only to eliminate the chance of ee Account Doctor e o o 1032307 ase Product Mat
32. Tax Categories Imported FLAGST 01 03 2011 Imported Non Tax 01 03 2011 1032307 ase Adding a New Tax Category 1eg yNd I0YNS 1 Click on System Accounting then Tax Categories 2 On Search Screen click the Add New button at the bot tom of the screen and it will bring up the Edit Tax Catego ries screen Add New 3 In the Description field type the name of the tax cate gory Ex Nirvana 4 Click the Save New button on the lower left of the screen to I view Tax Categories name 5 Add the tax rate to the tax category Then in the grid under the Tax Categories column select the name in the De scription from the drop down list 6 At the Edit Tax Categories screen click the Add New button and add additional Tax Rates if needed DateRetired 7 Select the Tax Rate Id from the drop down list T i ax Categories are groups of Tax Rates for a given 8 Click Save Changes at the bottom of the screen or all your area work will be lost Imported YOUNG 01 03 2011 aahon Tax 01 03 2011 D 08 31 2012 DEMERE Edit Tax Cats 103220 SL Edit Tax Categories Description Tax Category Rates ieg Myos System New Edit List Reports Help Eat aE eee elelstcme Edit Tax Cats 10 2307 SL Edit Tax Categories i TaxRateID DateRetired Tax Categories are groups of Tax Rates for a given Description a area A Tax Category can have Tax Rates for multiple Tax Calectors i e A Doctor who s business is wit
33. Taxes Collected with Product and Material Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Starting Date 09 04 2012 custom OUnstateme Ending Date 09 21 2012 Today Fiscal YD Taxes Collected with Product and Material Sales Filtered By Between 10 12 2012 AND 10 12 2012 Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Non Taxable Products Non Taxable Materials Taxable Products Taxable Materials 0 00 0 00 1 168 58 Taxable Total Non Taxable Total 0 00 County Maricopa 95 16 State Arizona 35 16 170 32 Total Tax for this Collector 534 70 1 703 26 City Of Phoenix Non Taxable Products Non Taxable Materials Taxable Products Taxable Materials 0 00 0 00 1 166 58 Taxable Total Non Taxable Total 0 00 City Phoenix 25 56 25 56 Total Tax for this Collector 195 88 Grand Total Taxes 194 534 70 1 703 28 Report Menu Billing FlighTags aeoo aae Jill lale mmm continued r System New Edit List Reports Help FlighTags Report s Accounting The FlighTags Report shows the award amounts earned during a specific time period hin a nvoices e Cut Off Date Select a date as the cut off to determine the amount of the FlighTags to dn ii aa Label i be awarded abels Cash Receipts Marketing Current Sales Scheduling A a A A x e Statements Year To Date Reports Product Sales Material Sales Account Analysis Product Price List
34. lt o1o a TALTE ea cece Toii ol 1E continued Work Tickets The Work Ticket is printed and attached to the case pan so the technician will know the work to be done and when it is to be finished The BOLD headings and color options are defined at Company Preferences screen The number of work tickets to print is listed on the Work Tickets screen Production Module Work Tickets These work tickets list a BOLD heading Case Number or Dates at the top Doctors information Case Number Patient Name all Products and Ma terials that make up the case Doctor Preferences Items Received and Notes Scheduling Module Work Tickets In addition to the items from the Production Module Work Tickets Scheduling prints Each Step Dates to Complete a Step Technician Name if it is assigned and a barcode if activated There are multiple styles of work tickets available To change the form style click on System Control Panel and then Easy Report Manager System New Edit List Reports Help OENE WorkTickets Report Work Tickets Workticket DBL Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 ieg yNdy0US 10 8 07 ase Count of WorkTickets that need printing 315 System New Edit List Reports Help 1018207 ase sea IMHOUS Report Menu Production Work Tickets Main Accounting General Billing Production Work Tickets Labels Lab Status Marketing Doctors Production YTD Scheduling Product Pr
35. ous Lab Manager versions for Case Entry amp Update Case Search Report Menu Maintenance Menu Help Quit Exit Setup Wizard This wizard takes you through the setup process step by step Calendar Price Lists 44 System Menu Control Panel SEC cla Ore al ige ml a lA fm continued System New Edit List Reports Help Company Preferences and Settings Screen Control Panel gt Company Preferences and Settings Case Entry gt Easy Report Manager Your company name was defined when you received the key that activated the program Use this Production Employees tab to define the company s contact information hours open type of aging etc To define your com f pany address and phone number click on System Control Panel and then Company Prefer ences and Settings Use these tabs to edit your company information Calendar Price Lists Accounting Quickbooks Transfer Codes Call Tracking Admin Tools Shortcut Bar When setting up PREFERENCES it is important that you define the fields that are in BOLD The BOLD fields are required The other fields are optional Exit ShortCut Menu Items Show All Dock Bars Manage Reports QuickBooks Interface Toolbar Case Locator System New ist Reports Help View Easy Menus OENE Compariy Prefs Setup Wizard 10Je207 ase Edit Company Preferences lobal Dr Prefs Case Related Account Defaults Us
36. reports sorted or filtered by this code DRV NET e Material Code ID drop down This is a list of all current material codes available in the system Note If a new code needs to be added to the material but it is not available in the drop down then it will need to be added at System Codes and then Materials Once this has been added it will be available in the drop h down list from the Material Codes tab at Edit Materials Adding a Code to a Material 1 2 3 4 At the Edit Materials screen locate the Material Codes tab and then click on the Add New button dd This will create a new line item in the grid Click on the drop down list under the Material Code ID Laten column and select the code that will be associated with the material Repeat step 2 until all codes have been entered Click Save Changes on the Edit Material screen or all your work will be lost Modifying Code on a Material 1 2 3 At the Edit Materials screen locate the Material Codes tab Find the code in the grid that needs to be modified Click Save Changes on the Edit Materials screen or all your work will be lost Deleting a Code from a Material 1 O AOUN At the Edit Materials screen locate the Materials Codes tab Find the code in the grid that needs to be deleted Click on the box to the left of the Code name This will select the line On your keyboard press delete Click Save Changes on the Edit Mate
37. 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Acct ID Account Dr ID Doctor Date Retired 2 Dr George Franks 2 Dr George Franks Dr John Killdare 5 Dr John Killdare Dr Fred Markus 4 Dr Fred Markus Tester Mc Testing 30 Dr Tester McTestings Dr John Smith 1 Dr John Smith Dr Susan Smith 3 Dr Susan Smith 171 aXe elem cm cla mel Jalsle l continued Reports Menu General Products List Products List Report System New Edit List Reports Help 2 i Accounting This report prints a general list of Products with their ID and Department that they are a General Accounts assigned to This report can be sorted by Product ID Description default or Depart Billing Doctors ment Production Products O Labels Materials List Note If the retired option is selected it will put a retired date to the right of the product a Marketing a a description z ii gt Scheduling Departments Date Retired Radio Buttons Choose One Vendors e Ignore Placing a dot in the circle will show both active and retired products on the Doctor Preferences report Calls Assigned To e Active Only Default Setting Placing a dot in the circle will show only the active Account Exp Date Reminders products on the report e Retired Only Placing a dot in the circle will show only the retired products on the report Sort Radio Buttons Choose One e Product ID Placing a dot in the circle will sort the report by the ID of the product e Produ
38. 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen E Marketing Contacts List Sorted By Name Thursday November 15 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here ID Name Address City Postal Code Phone 1 5 ABC Dental Studio 567 N Main Street Phoenix 85016 602 264 5913 8 Ceramics Studio 8274 S Main Street Phoenix 85016 602 264 5913 7 Denture Studio 8585 N Main Street Phoenix 85016 602 264 5913 6 Tooth Dental Studio 6825 N Main Street Phoenix 602 264 5913 220 Report Menu Marketing Marketing Face Sheets lt ole am cal Omar la Celt late Mm continued Marketing Face Sheet Accounting General The Marketing Face Sheet Report prints a face sheet for all or one specific Marketing Contact s with their ID Name Address s and Phone Number s Labels Bar Coding Multiple Marketing overview reports are available ies Lists All Contact People and Notes List Documented Calls for the Last 90 Days List of All Calls List Calls Between Specific Time Periods for Specific Marketing Contact Production Marketing 1012207 ase sea IMOS Marketing Contacts Scheduling Marketing Face Sheet Marketing Follow Up Call List Marketing Calendar Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One The date range is for the call grid that shows on the report e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calen dar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format Sys
39. 5 Optional Select an account from the drop rr L tux O a list if you only want to look at one ac Department Product Qy total Avg Qty Total count ara S 6 Optional Place a check in the box for only FULL CAST GOLD CR 5 00 367 83 73 57 0 00 0 00 production products to appear on the report s0o aers bm3s7 ooo 000 7 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen 3 4 GOLD CROWN 635 04 79 38 ALBACAST CROVN 91 00 91 00 ASSEMBLE amp SOLDER 33 00 33 00 759 04 203 38 This report lists e Products by Department e Quantity of Units e Total Dollar Value of those Units UPPER BITE RIM 41 71 20 86 e Average Cost per Unit 41 71 20 86 e Remake Quantity of Units and the Total Dollar Value Grand Total 1 168 58 297 80 201 Report Menu Production Material Production lt ole a Tal Mm ea cele Toii ol 1E continued Material Production Report The Material Production Analysis Report shows how many materials have been used over a specific time period Filter By Radio Button Choose One e Case Created Place a dot in the circle to filter the report by the date that the case was sa Date Place a dot in the circle to filter the report by the ship by date listed on the Do Date Place a dot in the circle to filter the report by the doctor s date listed on the Finish Date Place a dot in the circle to filter the report by the finish date listed on the case System N
40. Change the Tooth Chart to a Different Numbering System 1 On the case that needs to have the tooth numbering system changed click on the Notes tab from the Case Entry screen 2 Right click on the Tooth Chart to change the numbering system 3 Choose from FDI Palmer or Universal 4 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be los New Menu Case Imported Tooth Hs Imported Tooth Notes Lower Arch Current Numbering System Right Click Tooth Chart to change numbering systems t List Reports Help CEE Edit Cases Images Tab at the Case Entry Screen Photos scanned images and scanned prescriptions can be attached to a case To add an image make sure the image is in the computer where you can find it The My Pictures folder in your My Documents folder is a com mon place to put photos and scanned images 1 Main Doctor Items Compatible Image File Formats BMP GIF Jpeg JPG PNG and TIFF Note We recommend saving images to Case Images in the C LMDBs companyname Caselmages folder Lab Manager does NOT store any images It only displays those images you have pointed to It links to the image If you are adding images to cases make sure you save them at Case Images and backup associated files with the LM Server tool Adding Images to a Case 1 2 3 To attach a photo go to the Case Enrty screen and click on the Image tab Right click inside th
41. City Phoenix Taxable The County of Maricopa tax rate would be assigned to the tax collector authority Maricopa County Taxable The State of Arizona tax rate would be assigned to the tax collector authority Arizona State Taxable Non taxable rates are necessary for some tax collectors authorities because they track the sales of non taxable items So to do business with doctors in the City of Phoenix you would also need a Non Taxable Items tax rate that was assigned to tax category Phoenix Non Taxable Tax Rates are for only one tax collector authority System sew Edit List Repon Help imam List Tax Categories 1032307 ase Adding a New Tax Category Oand or Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Function Function Primary Value Primary Value 1 Click on System Accounting then Tax Categories 2 On Search Screen click the Add New button at the bottom of the screen and it will bring up the Edit Tax Categories screen 3 In the Description field type the name of the tax category Ex Nirvana 4 Click the Save New button on the lower left of the screen to view Tax Categories name 5 Add the tax rate to the tax category In the grid under the Tax Categories column select the name in the Description from the drop down list Description Function Export To PDF port To Excel System New Edit List Reports Help 3 System New Edit List Reports Help Edit Tax Cats Elim List Tax Categories search
42. Click Finish to exit the wizard C Show the Windows Installer log Installation and Setup Lab Manager Server Tool Setup New Lab Manager on a Server or Single Computer D Server Help Setup New Lab Manager Clear Logged In Users Setup New Lab Manager on a Server or a Single Computer When you initially open the Server Tools it will ask for your company name Enter this just as you would want it to ap pear on your invoice and statements This setup function is used only once after installing Lab Manager on a single computer or on the server to create a master Lab Manager database Upgrade Server Create New Company Database Reset Admin Password Lab Manager Server Tool Before you can use Lab Manager you need to Set up a Master Database using the Lab Manager Server Tool Server Help Import v5 Data Setup A New Server Backup a Company DB Restore a Company DB This operation should only be performed on the computer that is to act as your server 1 Right click on the Server Tool icon Path for Databases C LM6 ServerT oo LMDBs 2 Left click on Run As or Run As Admin Root Directory for Extemnal Company Files C LM6 ServerT ool LMDBs E xtermalFiles istrator If Run As is used you should see a check box with the text of Protect my computer and data from unauthorized program activity 3 Uncheck this box and click OK When the progra
43. Control Panel SET cl ale mm Ore al ige mar li mm continued Edit Employees Screen Control Panel Case Entry Easy Report Manager Production The employees area is used to define and classify your salespeople technicians drivers or all of the these positions To enter new employees or to edit information on existing employees click System Control Panel then Employees Employees Calendar Price Lists Accounting Quickbooks Transfer Codes Call Tracking When setting up EMPLOYEES it is important that you define the fields that are in BOLD The BOLD fields are required The other fields are optional Admin Tools Shortcut Bar Exit ShortCut Menu Items Show All Dock Bars e bLocatorID Use this number to locate or identify an employee This field can contain both let ters and numbers We recom mend leaving this blank as Lab Manager will automatically as sign it a sequential number starting with 1 e Name Type in the employee s first and last name This field is required but everything else below is optional e Address Optional Type in the employee s address here e City Optional Type in the city the employee lives in here e State Province Optional Type the state or province the em ployee lives in here e Postal Code Optional Type the postal or zip code of the employee here e Tax ID Optional Define the employees tax ID number here e Date Retired Leave this fie
44. Desktop version 2004 or above for additional reports Use Lab Man ager for all Accounts Receivable including Case Entry Invoices and Statements Technician Production and Scheduling work in the lab Use QuickBooks for General Ledger Accounts Payable and Payroll Together the two provide a complete solution that is perfect for the dental laboratory Laboratory Systems Group Inc supports Lab Manager data only Any ques tions regarding QuickBooks data or usage should be directed to Intuit Production Employees Calendar Price Lists Accounting Quickbooks Transfer Codes Call Tracking Shortcut Bar ShortCut Menu Items Show All Dock Bars Admin Tools Exit ManageReports QuickBooks Interface Toolbar QuickBooks Interface Initial Setup This is a brief one time setup process that creates the necessary General Ledger accounts in QuickBooks that Lab Manager will need to transfer its data into QuickBooks Desktop version 2004 or above and Lab Manager must be installed on the same computer 1 Please backup your QuickBooks data before transferring data for the first time If the transfer does not go as intended the QuickBooks data can be restored back to the way it was before the transfer 2 Start QuickBooks and select the desired company database you want Lab Manager information transferred into Before Lab Manager can transfer data to QuickBooks the QuickBooks program MUST be running and opened in the company database
45. Doctor Name at Account Name or Practice Name Dr Bill Jones DDS at South Dental Clinic een th DES ele nn amin DDS Dr Fred Miller DDS at South Dental Clinic Dr Jane Moore DDS at South Dental Clinic When setting up ACCOUNTS it is important that you define the fields that are in BOLD The BOLD fields are required All other fields are optional System Mew Edit List Reports Help ee Accounts Edit Edit Account Locator ID fo Financial Notes History Defaults Invoices Payments l Defnabie H l i Credit See section Referred By DO Special Codes Commission Aate Discount Aate Salesperson Reg Date Invoice Terms Reg Number ieg niyog IOJeIO7 259 Account Locations Doctors Dr Fref Defaults Technicians Add Location See section Account Locations Doctors An account may have multiple locations These locations might include different offices or they could be the locations to send the invoice statement and deliveries to After defining each account location use the List Doctors menu item to define the name of the doctor at each location 117 New Menu Account New Menu Account continued Section Edit Accounts mene ae CENE Accounts Edit Edit Accou nt Use this screen to Locator ID Data Bane O Name Defina Credit Limit Refened i picote ae OB comissonh Phone Ext Salespersq From the Edit Account screen define the name of the account price list invoice ter
46. GEIE List Tax Rates Example Search The City of Phoenix Taxable tax rate is assigned to the City of Phoenix tax collector Non Taxable rates are necessary for Tax Collectors that track the sales of non taxable items To do business with Doctors in the City of Phoenix you would also need a Non Description Y _TaxCofedonD Y _TaxCollector Y Rate Taxable Items tax rate that is assigned to tax category Phoenix Non Taxable Each Tax gt a ene ee Collector must have at least one assigned tax rate but some may have more than one as City Of Phoenix 2 City Of Phoenix 0 09300 signed rate State Arizona No 1 AZDOR 0 00000 Modify Existing Tax Rates System New Edit List Re Help 1 Click on System Accounting and then Tax Rates o dain List Tax Rates 2 The search area will appear and you choose from 2 options Type in the name of the Tax Rate and click Search or to see a whole list of tax rates leave the search area blank and just click Search 3 Click on the name of the Tax Rate item under the Description column 4 From this screen Click on the description Tax Collector Name and modify the rate E 5 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost z Add Additional Tax Rates 1 Click on System Accounting and then Tax Rates Maximum Tax 2 o Add New button at the bottom of the screen and it will bring up the Edit Tax Rates TEE EEEN E TT 3 In the Description field type the name of the tax r
47. If the Invoice dropdown displays Invoice LSR and you wish to use the DBL report form select Invoice DBL in that dropdown and then click Save Changes If a dropdown is empty it means that Lab Manager is currently configured to use a custom style for that category of report If you change a blank dropdown to one of the items in the list and click Save Changes you will reapply that standard report style to that type of report Invoices Tab Use this section to select a pre design invoice styles Choose a form from the dropdown list The basic styles are listed below and displayed after this section See the samples on the next page DBL DBLBL This style prints two identical invoices printed side by side on one sheet It is designed to give you a copy for the lab anda copy to be sent to the doc tor It can be printed on blank paper or use our DBL or BL forms landscape 8 1 2 x 11 available at 800 677 1120 Our DBL and BL forms have a vertical perforation down the center LSR This style prints one invoice per page It can printed on blank pa per or use our LSR form portrait 8 1 2 x 11 avail able at 800 677 1120 Our LSR form has a hori zontal perforation 1 3 of the way from the top of the form ieg yNIYWOYS 10 2307 3529 System New Edit List Reports Help GEINE Report Manager Report Manager Fev Work Tickets Statements Invoice Invoice DBL
48. In the To field type in a new company name 7 Click Run at the bottom of the screen and the grid will tell you when the procedure is done 8 Click Close to exit out Server Help Copy Company DB From Company DB Status Messages DateOfMessage Cancel MessagelD Message Attach Company DB Data Base WARN N G WE DO NOT RECOMMEND CHANGING THE FOLLOWING UNLESS Gear Logged In Users YOU ARE TALKING TO THE LABORATORY SYSTEMS SUPPORT DEPARTMENT Create New Company Database Reset Admin Password Import v5 Data 1 Right click on the Server Tool icon Backup a Company DB 2 Left click on Run As or Run As Administrator If Run As is used you should see a check box with the text of Restore a Company DB Protect my computer and data from unauthorized program activity Server Tool Config 3 Uncheck this box and click OK When the program opens click on the Server Menu then on Setup New Lab Seiden TEER Manager 4 Click on the Server Menu then on Attach Company DB 5 Click on Select File button and select the MDF file of the company database that you wish to attach 6 If at the Step marked 2 If this textbox isn t Read Only then the database already exists on the server If you Change License Aging Scheduler Misc Admin Tools still want to attach this database you will need to change the name Copy Database 7 We try to guess the log file based on the MDF file
49. In this case the invoice is made up of the Main por tion of the report along with two sub reports one for the details and the other for the tax totals DEDE Manage Reports 10 2307 2 eports Report Functions SERE aa a is ontrols which Report Items are assigned to reporting fur QuickBooks Interface Toolbar This screen is used to assign indiy assistance To easily change your Case Locator Standard Reports View Easy Menus Setup Wizard AppReporllD AppReportName Report Item la 88 Flightags Travel Credits Flightags Travel Credits Saving a New Report 29 a Sanna Lab Manager will not let you make r a changes to a default form or report In 7 Saree ee TEPAT PETE stead open the report or form you want 69 Invoice Register Non Payment SubR Invoice Register JE Non Payment Sub make your changes and then use the 68 Invoice Register Payment SubReport Invoice Register DE Payment Sub Rep Save As function File and then Save As e to save the report under a different name a in the Custom Reports folder We recom 32 mend using a naming system like the following e CustomIinvoiceMain e CustomInvoiceDetail e CustomIinvoiceTaxTotals There are no spaces in the filename and each custom report or form starts with the word Custom to indicate it is a custom item Also notice we identify which portion of the report it is adding Main or Detail or TaxTotals to the end of the name Now that you have
50. Mark Dr John Killdare North 11 15 2012 0806 0005 Jackson Scott Dr John Killdare North 11 15 2012 05 14 2010 1005 0001 Jones Sherry Dr George Franks North 213 Report Menu Accounts This provides a label with the name of the account and the address Doctors This provides a label with the name of the doctor and their address Products This provides a label with the Product ID the department it is assigned to and the name of the Product Materials This provides a label with the Material ID the department it is assigned to and the name of the Material Employees This provides a label with the name of the employee and their ad dress Vendors This provides a label with the name of the vendor and their address Salespersons This provides a label with the name of the salesperson and their address Invoices This provides a label with the name of the doctor the patient name and the case number Marketing Contacts This provides a label with the marketing contact names and ieg IMOS A A A A gt Report Menu Labels Accounts System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting General Billing Production Accounts Marketing Doctors Scheduling Products Materials Employees Vendors Salespersons Invoices Marketing Contacts Dr Account Locations their addresses Dr Account Locations System New Edit List Reports Help Accounts Labels Main Accounting
51. Materials Price List Commissions Taxes with Sales FlighTags FlighTags Travel Credits Preview or Print the FlighTag Report 1 Click on Reports Billing and then FlighTags 2 Select a Cut Off Date 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen System New Edit List Reports Help OENE FlighTags Report FlighTaas Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 1012207 ase ea IMOS Cut Off Date 09 25 2012 Flightags Travel Stamps Report Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here ID Name Sales Flightags 5 Dr John Killdare 48 08 1 45 08 1 195 Report Menu Billing FlighTags Travel Credits DX eloyam calm Jill lale mmm continued FlighTags Travel Credits Report Laiem New Edit list Reports ele 3 Accounting The FlighTags Report shows a the award amounts earned during a specific time period 3 EN Billing Invoices e Cut Off Date Select a date as the cut off to determine the amount of FlighTags to be Production Invoice Register awarded Labels Cash Receipts Marketing Current Sales Scheduling Statements A amp A A e A a e La Year To Date Reports Product Sales Material Sales Account Analysis Product Price List Materials Price List Commissions Taxes with Sales FlighTags FlighTags Travel Credits System New Edit List Reports Help GEDE Flightags Credits Report Preview or Print the FlighTag Report FliadhTaas T
52. Preview or Print the Cases To Be Finished Early Report 1 Click on Reports Scheduling and then Cases To Be Fin ished Early 2 Choose either Ship By Date or Doctors Date 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Cases To Be Finished Early Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray Auto Select 10 8307 ase J ea myu Choose Ship By Date Cases To Be Finished Early Tuesday November 27 2012 Your Company Mame Goes Here Scheduled Case Acct Status Pan Patient s Name Rec ed Or Date Ship By Finished 1211 0004 2 12 smith John ee 11202 11 2712 229 A T oLolaccmeleral toleliiale Mila continued Steps Status Report The Steps Status Report lists the status of steps on a case e Pan field Type in a pan number to find the status on steps on a specific case e Jump to Case fields Type in the first 4 digits of the case number in the first box Example 1211 for 2012 December and then in the next box type in the next 4 digits Example 0001 for the first case of the month e Case drop down list Use the drop down list to select a case e Only show uncompleted Steps check box Place a check in the box to only show uncompleted steps e Case Found System New Edit List Reports Help select a case Dept Denture Denture Denture Denture Denture Denture Denture Denture Preview or Print the Steps Status Report 1 Click on Reports Scheduling
53. Remake O Lab Manager comes with some patient codes pre defined however you can add your own by going Spouse _ to System Codes and then Patient Here you will see a list of the existing patient codes To select one or more codes place a check mark inside the Selected check box e Description This field contains the names of the existing patient codes e Date Retired This field shows the date that this patient code was deleted e Selected Use this field to select the desired codes by placing a check in the desired box es Adding a Patient Code to a Case 1 On the case that needs to have a patient code selected click on Patient Codes tab from the Case Entry screen 2 Place a check in the box under the Selected column to notate which patient codes apply to this case Multiple Items can be selected 3 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost Case Codes Tab at the Case Entry Screen Case Codes are optional user definable codes that you can use to categorize cases Example The case code could be used to categorize the case as a remake or a certain type of remake Lab Man UF TL LoLa col iLE i Coi e a ieee r TE Case Codes ager comes with some case codes pre defined however you can add your own by going to System Codes and then Case Description DateRetired Selected i gt Priority To select one or more case codes on a case click on the Case Codes tab at the top of the ca
54. Report Salespersons Report Dr Prefs Report Pickup List Report Account Expir Report Marketing Cal Report Materials List Reports Year To Date Report Flightags Trav Report Taxes with Sal ReportInvoice Regist Report Invoices Report Statements Report Current Sales ReportInvoice Regist Report Cash Receipts Report Product Sales Report Material Sales Report Products Price Report FlighTags Report Account Analy Report Comissions Report Materials Pric Report Product Produ Report Material Prod Report Daily Delivery Report Time Cards Report Remake Mate BC Emplovee Badag 2 WETE Short Cut Bar Menu Items 3 The screen shot shows some of the many Toolbar G 5 Edit Shortcut Bar Items items available Case Locator i View Easy M ShortCut Menu Rems e Customizer Caption column These a ya _ 4 i j u izar are the names of the features or re i o gt Exit mea ar Ei ports that are available to show up on the Shortcut Bar e Selected check box When a check is in the selected box it will show up on the Shortcut Bar Report York Tickets Report Doctors Produ Report Material Usa BC Product T Report Account Pro Report Lab Status Report Material Req BC Material List BC Employee List BC Test Select Shortcut Menu Items for Shortcut Bar 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Shortcut Menu Items 2 At the Edit Shortcut Bar Items screen place a check in the boxes under Selected of the items that you
55. Server Tools H Lab Manager Server Toc Server Help ionlar te TaS A kere mm continued Clear Logged In Users Setup New Lab Manager This function is only used if the server is shutdown improperly or loses power while Lab Manager Upgrade Server users are logged into it In rare cases after the server has been restarted the server will think that _ Create New Company Database there are users still logged into the Lab Manager database This function simply tells the server that Eal EPE EERE there are NO Lab Manager users currently logged into the program LM 7 Server Tool Import v5 Data lt lt Backup a Company DB Restore a Company DB LI Lab Manager Server Too Server Help Clear All Logged In Users Server Tool Config Clear All Users K Delete a Company DB 1 Right click on the Server Tool icon 2 Left click on Run As or Run As Adminis trator If Run As is used you should see a Change License Aging Scheduler check box with the text of Protect my Clicking the Run button below will clear Wi aini computer and data from unauthorized the listof logged in users thatthe server program activity maintains copy Delain i You should close all Lab Manager clients 7 3 Uncheck this box and click OK When the before taking this action s PURESO S program opens click on the Server Menu then on Setup New Lab Manager 4 Click on the Server Menu then on Cl
56. System Menu Control Panel System New Edit List Reports Help Shortcut Bar Control Panel Company Preferences and Settings To reactivate the Shortcut Bar in the event that it has closed Case Entry Easy Report Manager Production Employees Calendar Price Lists Accounting Codes Quickbooks Transfer 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Shortcut Bar 2 When the menu item is clicked it will not open the Shortcut Bar but it should be made available to mouse over on the far left side of Lab Manager Call Tracking Admin Tools Exit Shortcut Bar ShortCut Menu Items Show All Dock Bars Manage Reports QuickBooks Interface Toolbar Case Locator View Easy Menus Setup Wizard i System New Edit List Reports Help ShortCut Menu Items Control Panel Company Preferences and Settings Case Entry Easy Report Manager Shortcut Menu Items can be selected to show up on the Shortcut Bar Create quick links to all menu items in Lab Manager reports and data entry screens you use most often Production Employees Calendar Price Lists Accounting Codes Quickbooks Transfer Call Tracking If you are using Lab Manager on multiple computers this will need to be Admin Tools Shortcut Bar defined on each computer Exit ShortCut Menu Items Show All Dock Bars Manage Reports QuickBooks Interface System New Edit List Reports Help
57. The grid 4 lists the name of the account or marketing contacts calDate PRECISE 06 20 2012 Richard li 13 55 00 13 56 00 left Mandi call date employee who logged the call who they ichar isa an Saal i DIAMO 06 08 2012 Mandi 10 57 00 10 58 00 Ift vm Mandi spoke with the start and end time of the call call CERAMI 06 08 2012 Mandi 10 29 00 10 31 00 Ift vm Mandi notes employee the call was assigned to and if that assigned to call was finished The employee has the ability to see all the calls that are assigned to 4 M arketing Ca them and mark them finished from one screen Note On the Assigned Calls tab it will list A Whalley 06 08 2012 Mandi 14 00 00 14 02 00 and M A is for how many account calls have Dr M P 06 08 2012 Mandi 11 03 00 11 04 00 been assigned to that specific employee M is for Marketing and it will list how many marketing calls have been assigned to that specific employee The example above shows 10 calls for accounts and 3 calls for marketing Mark Calls as Finished in Call Tracking 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Call Tracking 2 Click on the Assigned Calls Tab in Call Tracking 3 Click the box in the Finished column of the calls that have been completed with a follow up 4 Once all calls that need to be marked Finished have been noted click on the Save Changes button at the bottom of the screen 64 system Menu Control Panel continued
58. gt Call Tracking gt Shortcut Bar ShortCut Menu Items Show All Dock Bars Manage Reports QuickBooks Interface Toolbar Case Locator View Easy Menus Setup Wizard Label Invoice on the left and right sides Lower left has a peel off label and right side has room for a Label This style prints one invoice per page plus a condensed lab copy on the right Two tear off tabs can create two address slips or one address label and a quality control ticket It can be printed on blank paper or our LAB1 style which has a sticky backed label portrait 8 1 2 x 11 available at 800 677 1120 Our LAB1 form has one vertical perforation 2 3 from the left and a second hori zontal perforation that cre ates two tear off tabs at the bottom of the form System Menu Control Panel Easy Report Manager continued Invoice Examples These artist renditions show you the invoice paper styles we support We carry the DBL DBL BL LSR LSR QC TAB LAB forms For more information call the sales department at 800 677 1120 Invoice Your Company Name Your Address Your City State Zip Page 1 Invoice Number 9706 0029 Invoice Date 06 13 1997 Patient name John Smith Ship By Date 06 20 1997 Shade C2 Your Client s Name Your Address Your City State Zip LSR Style Horizontal Perf 8 1 2 x 11 1 Part Blue Form used with Laser and Inkjet Printers Sub Total Discount Total Tax Total Wo
59. report such as In Progress Invoiced and or Statemented The default is to have both Invoiced and Statemented cases on the re port 5 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen aml Exclude Cases with Delivered Date Continued on next page 205 Report Menu Production Cases at a Glance lt olola Tal Mm ea cece Toii o 1E continued Cases at a Glance Report continued Cases at a Glance Filtered By All Cases Regardless of Date This reports shows ab Ae A ee e Case Number AL eB ee A R41 1 Dr John Smith 30 day carrier for v5 de S 1 00 ACCU nit Name R42 2 Dr George Franks 30 day carrier for v5 de 4 00 Patient R43 3 Dr Susan Smith 30 day carrier for v5 de 4 00 e Dr s Date R44 4 Dr Fred Markus 30 day carrier for v5 de 4 00 e Finish Date S45 Dr Tester McTestings Starting Balance fa 1 00 Ship by Date 0002 0002 Dental Laboratory Smith Margaret 3 00 e Number of Units For Each Case 0012 0001 Dr John Smith Regan Ronald 0103 0001 Dr John Smith Kelly John 2 00 1 00 0103 0002 Dr John Smith Bean Mr 1 00 1 00 2 00 0104 0001 Dr John Smith Thather Margaret 0104 0002 Dr John Smith Mueller Tom 0104 0003 Dr John Smith Nixon Richard 1 00 0105 0001 Dr John Smith Anderson Richard 1 00 0105 0002 NATURAL CERAMIC Stuart Martha 1 00 5 00 3 00 0105 0003 Dr John Smith Riggs John 0105 0004 Dr John Smith Guerrero Albert 0105 0005 Dr John Killdare Jackson Reggie 1 00 0105
60. 0 00 0 00 0 00 600 00 Killdare John 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 530 04 0 00 0 00 530 04 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 8 034 45 0 00 1 703 28 0 00 0 00 9 737 73 Continued on next page 186 Report Menu Billing Year to Date continued Report Menu Billing Yearly Product Sales Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Dec Yearly Total 0 00 643 71 0 00 91 00 0 00 33 00 0 00 390 84 0 00 6 034 45 0 00 41 71 9 234 71 Nov 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Mar Apr Ma Jun Jul Au Se Oct 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 643 71 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 91 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 33 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 390 54 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 6 034 45 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 41 71 Product Jan 3 4 GOLD CROWN 0 00 ALBACAST CROWN 0 00 ASSEMBLE amp SOLDEF 0 00 FULL CAST GOLD CR 0 00 PlaceHolder Product 0 00 UPPER BITE RIM 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 8 034 45 0 00 1 200 26 0 00 0 00 Yearly Material Sales Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Material Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Yearly Total ARGEN 77 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 97 40 0 00 0 00 97 40 GOLD GATE ARGEN 7 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 6 04 0 00
61. 0 00 6 04 ERA ATTACHMENT O 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 490 00 0 00 0 00 490 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 593 44 0 00 0 00 593 44 Yearly Product Production Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Dec Yearly Total 0 0000 8 0000 0 0000 1 0000 0 0000 1 0000 0 0000 5 0000 0 0000 4 0000 0 0000 2 0000 Nov 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Mar Apr Ma Jun Jul Au 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 4 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Product Jan 3 4 GOLD CROAN 0 0000 ALBACAST CROWN 0 0000 ASSEMBLE amp SOLDER 0 0000 FULL CAST GOLD CR 0 0000 PlaceHolder Product 0 0000 UPPER BITE RIM 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 21 Yearly Material Production Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Material ARGEN 77 GOLD GATE ARGEN 72 ERA ATTACHMENT OV Jan 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Friday October 12 2012 Products 9 234 71 654 91 153 42 1 639 11 209 21 11 891 36 Year 2012 2010 2008 2001 2000 Feb 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Mar Apr 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 May Jun 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Jul 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Yearly Sales Summary Materials 593 44 202 67 52 14 59 34
62. 0 63 908 42 Tax 195 08 7 09 0 00 90 47 5 92 299 36 Aug 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Sep 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Oct 2 0000 4 2500 12 5000 18 75 Your Company Name Goes Here Discount 90 42 13 13 0 00 157 42 10 98 271 95 187 Total 9 933 61 951 74 205 56 1 631 50 204 76 12 827 19 Nov 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Dec Yearly Total 0 0000 2 0000 0 0000 4 2500 0 0000 12 5000 0 18 75 Report Menu Billing Product Sales aooaa mm mdi ale mm Continued Product Sales Report System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting The Product Sales Report shows a dollar value for products sold during a specific time pe a psig riod p Billing Invoices Production Invoice Register Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One Labels Cash Receipts e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the Pe date in MM DD YYYY format abina Statements e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the Year To Date Reports date in MM DD YYYY format e Custom Place a dot in the circle to choose your own start and end dates Material Sales e MTD Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the Month To Date Account Analysis MTD starting and ending dates Product Price List e YTD Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the Year To Date YTD Mat
63. 00 0 00 0 00 OK 2 DISC CUMMINS DNTL 0 00 0 00 0 00 OK CER TX 3 RETIRED NATURAL 0 00 0 00 0 00 OK CERAMICS 4 DISC GOL RAMICS OF 0 00 0 00 0 00 OK HOUSTON CLOSED DNTL DATA 0 00 0 00 0 00 OK SYS SMILE DESIGNS BY 0 00 0 00 0 00 OK REGO DISC SOUTHWESTER 0 00 0 00 0 00 N D L NM CLOSED GENERAL 0 00 0 00 0 00 BUSINESS SERV BAY AREA D LAB OR 0 00 0 00 0 00 INTERNATIONAL DNTL 0 00 0 00 0 00 ART PORCELAIN ARTS DNTL 0 00 0 00 0 00 CA CLOSED RECEIVING N 0 00 0 00 0 00 AVAL HOSP CASH ACCOUNT 56 00 0 00 56 00 DISC SHEEN DENTAL 0 00 0 00 0 00 LAB LAKESIDE DNTL LAB UT 0 00 HO OO 100 New Menu Case Search Use this area to create advanced searches for cases Case Enter each case into the computer as it is received in the lab and it is automatically assigned a case num ber Notate patient names products materials case codes doctor s items notes photos tooth numbers shades pan numbers and much more Payment Payments are entered in when doctors pay their bills A reference number date and payment type will show up on the statement Bulk Payment Enter multiple payments for multiple accounts all on one screen Statement A summary of their account activity such cases and payments adjustments etc Account The account name address phone number contact information histories and ledgers are all in one penau place Other important dat
64. 0000 Grain 480 0000 Grain 480 0000 Grain 1 71 820 80 e Estimated Cost Per Item ProjectedTotat 820 80 rojected To e Total Projected Cost Vendor ASSOCIATED BAG Phone 1 800 926 6100 Contact FaxNumber Address a Terms Instructions Material In Stock Reorder Level Order Qty Cost Each JCB ARGEN 63 31 0000 Grain 480 0000 Grain 960 0000 Grain 0 54 518 40 OLY ARGEN 45 25 0000 Grain 40 0000 Grain 280 0000 Grain 0 51 142 80 Projected Totat 664 20 Vendor DTS Phone 1 800 828 3393 Contact FaxNumber Address 6355W 52 AVE ST6 Terms Instructions ARVADA CO 80002 Notes Material In Stock Reorder Level Order Qty Cost Each GOLD GATE ARGEN 72 20 0000 Grain 50 0000 Grain 960 0000 Grain 0 71 681 60 Projected Totat 681 60 208 lt olela mm a1 0mm ea cele Toii ol 1E continued Material Remakes Usage Report Mate rial Remake Usage Report Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format Report Menu Production Material Remake Usage Custom A dot in the circle to choose your own start and end dates MTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and ending dates YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Year To Date YT
65. 0006 Dr John Smith Burns Frank 1 00 on U U WY YW YW HW YW YW YW YH Hw 0105 0007 Dr Fred Markus Mathers Jerry 1 00 0105 0008 Dr George Franks Lee Richard 1 00 0105 0009 Dr George Franks Price Richard 1 00 0105 0010 Dr George Franks Fields Mrs J 1 00 0105 0011 Dr George Franks Nakasuji Frank 1 00 0105 0012 Dr George Franks Farquart Martha 1 00 0106 0001 Dr George Franks White Racheal 1 00 0106 0002 Dr John Killdare Crouse Robert 1 00 0806 0001 Dr Susan Smith For Lab Status Test 1 00 O mW N N N N N N Ff 0806 0002 Dr John Killdare Black Mark In 2 00 0806 0003 Not Provided ALLEN Springer Tiffany 8 1 00 0806 0004 Dr John Killdare Test Material Usage Rej S 0 00 0806 0005 Dr John Killdare Jackson Scott In 1 00 206 Report Menu Production Case Tracking lt olola TALTE ea cece Toii ol 1E continued Case Tracking Report System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting gt General The Case Tracking Report generates a list of cases based on the filter criteria selected e Product drop down list Select a product from the drop down list to track the products on the cases e Account drop down list Select an account to track the cases that are assigned to that account according to the way the report is filtered e Department drop down list Select a department to see the products assigned to that department and the cases in the lab Billing ieg yndy0yNS Labels Lab Status Ma
66. 0105 0001 Anderson Richard 05 24 2001 0105 0003 Riggs John 05 24 2001 0105 0004 Guerrero Albert 05 30 2001 0105 0005 Jackson Reggie 0105 0011 Nakasuji Frank 06 15 2001 0105 0012 Farquart Martha 05 15 2002 0901 0001 Miller Jessica 1002 0002 Smith Sara 02 25 2010 1003 0003 Ij 1005 0001 Jones Sherry 1005 0002 Smith Fred 1103 0001 No Patient Name 10 8 07 ase System New Edit List Reports Help OENE Case Completion Tech 1 Tom Mueller Figure 3 Case 0105 0004 Guerrero Albert Ship By Date 5 30 2001 ieg IMOS Techs Cases Choose a Step then click Select ProductOrder ProductDescription Stepp ProductStepOrder StepName Quantity ScheduledDate Select PORCELAIN CROWN Preparatory Prep 3 0000 05 15 2001 PORCELAIN CROWN FrameWax up 3 0000 05 16 2001 PORCELAIN CROWN FrameFinishFr 3 0000 05 17 2001 PORCELAIN CROWN Porcelain Buildu 3 0000 05 18 2001 PORCELAIN CROWN Porcelain conto 3 0000 05 21 2001 PORCELAIN CROWN Finalfinish Finish 3 0000 05 22 2001 PORCELAIN CROWN Inspect Check 3 0000 05 23 2001 PORCELAIN CROWN Deliver Deliver 3 0000 05 24 2001 103230 ase S _ _ o O O O O co amp on tO We Ww N on tO We Ww N 225 Reports Menu Scheduling Technician Production A T oLolaccmeleral roleliiale ETATE continued Technician Production Report System New Edit List Reports Help a Accounting gt The Technician Production Report provides a summary or a
67. 1 Click on System Case Entry and then Delivery Methods 2 The search area will appear and you choose from 2 options Type in the name of the Deliv ery Method and click Search or to see a whole list of Delivery Methods leave the search area blank and click Search 3 Click on the name of the Delivery Method item under the Description column 4 From this screen the description and days in transit can be edited The check mark box for Use Shipper Holidays can be checked or unchecked 5 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Description MEKTEPTE EJ Use Shipper Holidays Add Additional Delivery Methods 1 Click on System Case Entry and then Delivery Methods Click on the New button at the bottom of the screen and it will bring up the Edit Delivery Methods screen In the Description field type the name of the Delivery Method The Days In Transit can be edited with a number The check box for Use Shipper Holidays can be checked or unchecked Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Step 4 Company Information Your company name was defined when you received the key that activated the program Use this tab to define the company s contact information hours open type of aging etc Oo O1 B W DY At Edit Company Preferences screen enter your company information When a System Mew Edit List Reports Help finished YOU MUST click Save Changes
68. 2 The search area will appear and you choose from 2 options Type in the name of the employee and click Search or to see a whole list of employees leave the search area blank and just click Search 3 This will populate a grid Click on the Locator ID of the employee you wish to edit and this will open their Employee information 4 Edit the items needed 5 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost Create a New Employee 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Employees 2 Click on Add New at the bottom of the screen 3 Define the employee 4 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost 28 Setup Wizard Step 7 Employees cont Skip this page if you don t own the Scheduling Module Step 7 Employees continued ystem New Edit List Reports Help Piet dele alee Edit Employees TT Edit Employees Hatia Tech for Accounts Sarasa aan E aE Tech for Accounts Tab at Edit Employees Screen acai ss l l T This optional feature assigns the selected employee to any cases for a Account a given account automatically This feature is available in the i AA he CASH ACCOUNT Scheduling Module only wy State Province a PostalCode o e pes po Assign Accounts to a Technician Date Retired 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Employees Birth Date 2 On the Edit Employee screen click on the Tech for Accounts Tab Phone Numb
69. 2 442 85 0 00 2 442 85 0 00 Dr George Franks 728 S E 60 TH 400 00 1 173 24 400 00 1 173 24 Days Amount Past Due 0 1 173 24 g Total 1 173 24 Past Due 0 00 5 Dr John Killdare 2400 E Indian School 175 24 0 00 530 04 200 00 154 60 Days Amount Past Due 0 154 60 g Total 154 80 Past Due 0 00 Totals 0 00 1 703 28 1 702 46 161 Report Menu Accounting Collections lt ole a mm aE oTa iae E continued Collections s System New E Reports Help Accounting Aged Trial Balance Short General b Aged Trial Balance M a i n Mi Billing Collections Production gt General Journal Use this screen to print a Collections Report showing which accounts have a past due balance Labels gt Marketing gt Tax Reports e Min Past Due Amount field Used to filter accounts that have a balance higher than the amount typed into the field Example If you are looking for a collections report to show which accounts owe more than 1000 Type in 1000 in the Min Past Due Amount field Account History Scheduling gt Invoice Details List 1012207 ase ea IMOS Account Ledger e Exclude On Hold Accounts checkbox When this has a check in the box accounts that are System New Edit List Reports Help checked On Hold on the Edit Accounts screen will not show up on the report If the box is left blank all accounts will show up GENE Collections
70. 2nd phase in the import process Import the Case Data TE Click on the Phase 3 button to complete the 3rd phase in the import process Create the 30 60 90 Day Statement Phase 3 Status Messages DateOfMessage Attempting to Start DTC Service a part of the Operating System necessary for the import process 08 27 2012 Successfully Started DTC Service 08 27 2012 You can now exit the Server Tools program by clicking on the X in the upper right corner of the screen 12 Server Tools EAE UET ESI A aml ele mm continued Import v6 Data Coming Soon 13 Lab Manager Server Tool Backup Company DB Data Base WARNING DO NOT double click on your backup to review your data as this may corrupt your backup This Backup Procedure is used to make a copy of the Lab Manager v7 data Follow these steps to backup your data to an external drive continued Lab Manager Server Tool Server Help Clear Logged In Users Upgrade Server Create New Company Database Reset Admin Password Import v5 Data Restore a Company DB Server Tool Config Delete a Company DB When backing up we recommend placing the data on a removable device such as a USB flash drive This way after the backup is complete you can remove it place it into a safe or take it home and should something happen to your computer your data should be safe Backup Lab Manager v7 Data 1 2 Right click
71. 4 GOLD CROWN Denture ACRYLIC PARTIAL Misc AFTER FIRST TOOTH Ceramics ALBACAST CROWN Denture ASSEMBLE amp SOLDER Denture BENT WIRE CLASP Misc CAST CLASP Misc CAST POST Denture CONQUEST Ceramics COPING CROWN Ceramics CROWN UNDER PARTIAL Denture EMPRESS VENEER Ceramics FULL CAST GOLD CR Ceramics FULL LOWER DENTURE Ceramics FULL UPPER DENTURE Ceramics GOLD INLAY Ceramics HARD NIGHTGAURD Ceramics IMMED DENTURE Denture IN CERAM PORC CR Ceramics IPS EMPRESS CROWN Ceramics IPS EMPRESS INLAY Ceramics LOVVER BITE RIM Misc LOWER CUSTOM TRAY Misc LOWER FRAME Misc LOWER RELINE Ceramics P D PLACEMENT Denture PART LOWER DENTURE Ceramics PART UPPER DENTURE Ceramics aeoo a aT aT mmm continued Material Price List Report The Material Price List Report lists the materials along with the prices associated with those materials Date Retired Radio Buttons Choose One e Ignore Placing a dot in the circle will show both active and retired materials on the report e Active Only Default Setting Placing a dot in the circle will show only the active materi als on the report e Retired Only Placing a dot in the circle will show only the retired materials on the re port Sort By Radio Buttons Choose One e Locator ID Placing a dot in the circle will sort the report by the material ID e Description Default Setting Placing a dot in the circle will sort the materials on the report in alphabetical order System New Edit Lis
72. Button This will delete the information in the designated field Close This button closes the screen Changes made on the screen must be saved before closing the screen or changes will be lost Close on Save or Cancel A check mark here will automatically close the screen each time the Save Changes button is selected Remove the check mark from this box and the screen will not close automatically until you close the screen and open it again later The default setting for this function can be changed in the Company Preferences and Settings area Delnvoice If an invoiced case needs to be modified click on the De Invoice Make the changes to the case and then re invoice it Design This button creates a custom version of a report The process is discussed in the Custom Reports section of the manual Export To PDF Reports can be exported as PDFs to be saved on the computer or emailed to doctors Click Export To PDF and save the file with a name and a location that can be found later Export To Excel Export data to Microsoft Excel when creating custom reports and graphs of Lab Manager information To export the data in a table or grid simply click on the Export To Excel button at the bottom of the screen Find Search Located on the Case Entry screen it directs the user to an advanced search screen to locate cases Go When using Edit at the Menu Bar The Go button activates the search process List Button This button can be used to see a list o
73. Changes on the Edit Vendors screen or all your work will be lost a ae a Vendor Codes Vendor Code ID at Edit Vendors Screen Sections Vendor Codes Vendorcode Vendors can be given codes to identify them for some special reason This information could be helpful for creating reports sorted or filtered by this code e Vendor Code ID dropdown This is a list of all current vendor codes available in the sys tem Note If a new code needs to be added to the material but it is not available in the dropdown then it will need to be added at System Codes and then Vendors Once this has been added it will be available in the drop down list at Edit Vendors Also see Edit Vendor Codes section Adding a Code to a Vendor 1 At the Edit Vendors screen click the Add New button under the Vendor Codes 2 This will create a new line item in the grid Click on the drop down list under the Vendor Code ID column and select the code that will be associated with the vendor 3 Repeat step 2 until all codes have been entered 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Vendors screen or all your work will be lost Deleting a Code from a Vendor 1 At the Edit Vendors screen click on the Materials Codes section Find the code in the grid that needs to be deleted Click on the box to the left of the Code name This will select the line On your keyboard press delete Click Save Changes on the Edit Vendors screen or all your work
74. Choices Edit Marketing Contact Codes E Show Retired Marketing Contact Code Choices MarketingContactCodeID Description DateRetired Likely Unlikely system Menu Codes SWOT lem mereye tom continued Patient Control Panel gt Case Entry Patient codes are used to categorize cases by patient type such as charity or non charity accounts The armed Production services categorize patients as enlisted personnel spouse of enlisted personnel or children of enlisted personnel Calendar Lab Manager comes with some pre defined patient codes To add your own go to System Codes and then Pa r Accounting tient Admin Tools Vendor The List Edit Patient Code Choices screens allows you to define information about your patient codes Patient Code This is the code that you will use to define the type of patient this case has Description This is the name of the Patient Code Date Created This is the date that the patient code was created in the list Date Retired Leave this field empty If this Patient Code is ever deleted Lab Manager will place a date in this field that will indicate the patient code has been deleted retired This will remove the patient code from certain Exit Employee Product Material Marketing Patient User Status System New Edit List Reports Help Add Additional Patient Codes 1 Click on System Codes and then Patient 2 At the Edit Patient Codes Choices screen click on Add
75. Click on this button to access items like Accounts Doctors Products etc Exit Quit Help Button Click on this button to be directed to more information about the software Exit Quit Button Click on this button to close out of the program Shortcut Bar The Shortcut Bar creates direct links to most used reports and data entry screens The bar slides out from the left when you hover your mouse over it elec Onnan The STICK PIN in the upper right corner of BOTH the Shortcut Bar Shortcut Bar and the Case Locator Bar is used to lock things to a certain place in the program System Mew Edit List Fepon IS Shortcut Bar J Clicking on the STICK PIN locks the Shortcut or Case Locator bar into place e Clicking on the STICK PIN again will unlock the Shortcut or Case Locator a a Case Entry amp Update bar and allow it to slide away when not in use Ifthe Shortcut Bar ever gets closed or disappears for any reason you can go to System at the top Control Panel and then the Show All Dock Bars Report Cash Ru Case Search OR bring the bar back by closing Lab Manager and then restarting it Report Curren Qa e When the Shortcut Bar is locked open using the Stick Pin the bar can be dragged to another location of the program Report Invoices EO List Marketing List Accounts The DOUBLE ARROWS symbol controls viewing Shortcut Items list E List Doctors 1032307 ase Y weg yoyo I
76. Copy Database 3 Uncheck this box and click OK When the 2 Company DB IDOCDENT_LMDB does not need upgrading because itis at version 7 0 5 08 27 2012 program opens click on the Server Menu 3 SST ee ee ee ea Be a a eT 08 27 2012 Attach Company DB i 4 Company DB NAKASUJI_LMDB does not need upgrading because it is at version 7 0 5 08 27 2012 then on Setup New Lab Manager 5 Company DB PROFDENT_LMDB does not need upgrading because itis at version 7 0 5 08 27 2012 4 Click on the Server Menu 6 a DB es does not need upgrading because it is at version 7 0 5 ee 7 ou may now close this form 27 20 5 At the Upgrade Server screen click Run on the bottom of the screen Lab Manager will search out and update all Lab Manager Databases it can find 6 The Status Messages windows will display relevant messages about the process The grid will tell you when the procedure is done 7 Click Close to exit out 10 Server Tools Elo Ee AETS meey aV 1 am Kole mm continued Create New Company Database GA Lab Manager Server Too Server Help Setup New Lab Manage Clear Logged In Users Upgrade Server a Set up Your Company Database and Define Your Company Name x TERE reate New Company Database Reset Admin Password e Right click on the Server Tool icon jE e Left click on Run As or Run As Administrator If Run As is used you should see a check box FORETA sacl i oa Tool Backup
77. Date MTD starting and ending dates e YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates e Today A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date e Fiscal YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year e Unstatemented A dot in the circle will fill in the start and end date for cases that have not yet been statemented Example Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want the date range of current unstatemented cases to start with the first unstatemented case dated 8 5 12 The system will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today OENE Material Production Report 1032207 ase ves IMOS Material Production Analysis Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Filter By y Ocase Created Enna oO Ship By Date oO Doctor Date X Invoiced Finish Date Eq Statemented Olnvoice Date Starting Date 99 04 2012 custom OUnstatem mnD Ending Date 99 21 2012 Fiscal YD Account FP ial e Account drop down list Select an account from the drop down list to only show information for one account Preview or Print the Material Production Analysis Report 1 Click on Reports Production and then Material Production 2 Select the type of date range you want to filter by The Invoice Date is the default Statemented cas
78. Doctor button define Title First and Last Name and Degree Only the Bold fields are required 3 Verify Account name or use drop down to change account name 4 At the Shipping Location drop down list select the address that the e cases are shipped to These addresses are setup from the Edit Reteredy TY a Account screens and then Edit Locations tab i Commission Rate Discount Rate 5 At the Tooth Number System drop down list select system All cat Salesperson J JE aeoo other fields are optional Messen an pees 6 Click Save New on the Edit Doctors screen or all your work will be lost This will return you to the Edit Account screen Cie eines Accounts Edit Use this screen to define or edit the doctors you send bills to Data Financial Notes History Defaults Invoices Dr Pref Defaults Technicians AFBT RegNumber Modifying an Existing Doctor at Edit Account Screen 1 At the Edit Account screen click the Doctors tab In the Doctors grid click on doctor s Locator ID and Edit Doctors screen will appear 2 At Edit Doctors modify the items aaa that need to be changed Mme 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit i Edit DoctoTs Use this screen to define or edit the doctors assigned to your doctors Doctors screen or all your work will 4 be lost Locator ID mark Preferences Qe aa eC i Title First Name Last Name Degree Preferences Accoun
79. E show sai Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Search Field 3 Q Function Function Primary Value Edit Tax Categories 4 Description g DateRetired TaxRateID DateRetired Tax Categories are groups of Tax Rates for a given araa gt Export To Excel Export To PDF 85 System Menu Accounting SEAT TeRi Ts E continued i Tax Categories continued TUM List Tax Categories 103230 ase gt Tax Categories System New Edit List Reports Help Description Y DateCreated VY DateRetired VY Imported FLAGST 01 03 2011 Imported Non Tax 01 03 2011 Oand or Oand or BB ShowRetired E show sa Imported YOUNG 01 03 2011 Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Search Field 3 meester Non Tax 01 03 2011 ee 08 31 2012 JER List Tax Categories ieg jmMyoys 1eg IMOYS Function Function Function Primary Value Export To PDF Add New Export To Excel Export To PDF Add New Export To Excel gt System New Edit List Reports Help OERE AE Edit Tax Cats Deleting an Existing Tax Category 10 2307 SL Click on System Accounting and then Tax Categories The Search area will appear and you choose from 2 op tions Type in the name of the Tax Category and click Search OR To see a whole list to see a whole list of Tax Categories leave the search area blank and click Search Edit Tax Categories 4 NO Tax Category Rates TaxRateID DateRetired Description ieg yndy0US
80. EUC E continued Marketing Contacts Reports System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting gt General Main Mi Labels b d Bar Coding gt d b The Marketing Contacts Report lists Marketing Contacts with their ID Name Address and Phone Number Billin Sort By Radio Buttons Choose One e Location ID This sorts the report by the Marketing ID e Name This sorts the report by the Marketing Contact Name e Address1 This sorts the report by the Address 1 Location 1 as defined at Edit Marketing Contacts screen e City This sorts the report by alphabetical order of the city e State This sorts the report by alphabetical order of the state e Postal Code This sorts the report by Zip Code or Postal Code All Zip Codes Numbers only will be listed first Postal Codes Alpha Numeric will be listed after Zip Codes e Phonet This sorts the list by phone number Production Marketing Contacts 1012201 ase sea IMOS Scheduling gt Marketing Face Sheet Marketing Follow Up Call List Marketing Calendar System New Edit List Reports Help ODEDE Marketing Contacts List Report Marketing Contacts List Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 1012207 ase ea IMOS Preview or Print the Marketing Contacts Report Sort locaton 1 Click on Reports Marketing and then Marketing Contacts ee 2 Choose how to sort the report ciy
81. Edit List Reports Help Setting up a Statement Job Withee List Statements Once the information on the reports is correct it is time to create a statement job 1 At the Menu Bar click List Statement and the Add New button 2 Define the statement job by modifying the dates In most cases you can use Lab Manager s default settings 3 Mark The Statement Marks The End of the Month checkbox Note Unlike previous LM versions Lab Manager v7 requires NO End of Month Processing 4 Click on the Save New button StatementDate y ShatementStanDate Ww StatementEndDate yr iarksE0OMI r p 05 31 2012 01 01 1970 06 20 2012 Eq 1 ase Jes joys y 30 2012 01 01 1970 06 15 2012 Printing Statement Job 1 At the Menu Bar click Reports Billing and then Statements 2 Select the statement job you just created using the dropdown list and then click Print or Preview 3 Click Preview to see the statements before they print Statements can also be printed from the Preview mode System New Edit List Reports Help DEERING Edit Statements Start Date lastStatement s End Date Start Date 1 1 1970 Edit Statements ep et End Date 6 20 2012 Use this screen to define a statement job Start by selecting a Statement Date and then verify or Wl IncludeAccounts On Hold change the options to the right To see which accounts meet the criteria you have selected rk P click on the Fill Grid
82. Edit This Locat Ea x 1718 E Rose Phoenix AZ 85016 1 At the Menu Bar click Edit then Account 2 At the Find Account box type in the accounts Lo cator ID or use the Select dropdown list and click GO Image 1 3 At the Edit Account screen modify the items that need to be changed Image2 In this manual see Section New Account for more information on using this screen 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Account screen or all your work will be lost 145 Edit Menu Doctor amp Product Edit Menu Doctor Edit Doctors at Edit Menu System New Edit List Reports Help Account Doctor Product This area is used to pull up a specific doctor This does not give you the same search options that List provides This is for existing doctors only If you know the Locator ID or want to select the name from a drop down then from the Menu Bar click Edit and then Doctor ieg yNdy0YUS Material Vendor Marketing Contact For more information on editing a doctor go to Section New Doctors Image 1 Image 2 12307 ase System New Edit List Reports Help ES Find Doctor gt OEE Edit Doctors Locator ID 13 Ed it Doctors Use this screen to define or edit the doctors assigned to your doctors ieg yNDyoYS Locator ID E Mark Preferences OE a EEE Title First Name Last Name Degree Preferences CASH ACCOUN Account Dr Prefs Department Preference DateRetired gt Please
83. G BO G G Porcelain Buildup Buildup zoa 60 60 e e BO s Buildup Porcelain contour Contour 8 0000 q gJ q Contour Preparatory Prep Prep 5 0000 production step test 10 0000 232 Help Menu System New Edit List Reports Help About View PDF Manual e About e View PDF Manual Main Menu 101207 asez ea IMOS System New Edit List Reports Help About About View PDF Manual This box contains information about the program version and modules Main Menu you are licensed to use 1018207 sep ea IMOS About Lab Manager 5 Major Ver Major Version x Limit 7 Minor Version ra 255 Limit Sub Version 9 l ne Modules Enabled 1718E Rose Lane Phoenix AZ 85016 odules Enabled Barcoding Pickups Production QuickBooksInterface Sche duling Shipping Sales 800 677 1120 Support 602 264 5913 Website _ www labsysqrp com Concurrent User Email for Sales sales labsysqrp com Limit Email for support labsysqrp com Support SQL Server LSGServer LM7 Connect to my computer Let Us Help You 1012201 ase sea 1myoys fik Company DB LSG5_LMDB User Admin Copyright 2011 Laboratory Systems Group Inc All Rights Reserved System New Edit List Reports Help View PDF Manual View PDF Manual This opens a copy of the manual in PDF format 1012207 ase es IMOS 233
84. General Dr Susan Smith Or Fred Markus Dr George Franks co M a j n M Billing 444 M 16th St 5493 M Central r26 5 E 60 TH Production Phoenix 4z 85000 Phoenix 42 85000 Phoenix amp 2 85000 9 Labels OSSDAN Marketing Doctors gt Scheduling Products Dr John Kildare Dr John Smith Tester hic Testing Materials 2400 E Indian School 1234 M 10th St 122131 E 914th Ave a Phoenix Az 85000 Phoenix amp 2 85016 Pilzbury 42 90915 Vendors Salespersons Invoices Use this screen to print mailing labels with the Account Name and Address This is designed to Marketing Contacts print on an Avery 5160 style label sheet which provides 30 different labels per sheet ene el hee Sort Radio Buttons Choose One e Locator ID A dot in the circle will sort the labels in numerical order e Account Name A dot in the circle will sort the labels in alphabetical order System New Edit List Reports Help ous elm Acct Lbl Report Preview or Print the Account Labels 1 Click on Reports Labels and then Accounts 2 Choose how to sort the labels 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Account Labels Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 1012207 ase ea myu Sort lLocatorID AccountNn 214 continued Report Menu Labels Doctor Labels Report Dr John Killdare 2400 E Indian School Phoenix 4z 85000 Dr George Franks 728 S E 60 TH Phoenix 4z 85000 Dr Fred Markus 8493
85. Help QC Sheet for Invoice and QC Sheet for Work Ticket Boxes Your custom designed quality control sheet can be automati cally attached to each Invoice Billing Module or Work Ticket Production or Scheduling Module only Oea Eae Depts Edit Edit Departments iC Q QC Invoice Workticket 1012207 ase sea IMOS Multiple QC sheets can be defined and as signed to different departments to automati cally select the QC sheet that fits the work shown on the Invoice or Work Ticket a Question ane 1 Huestien tie 1 Question three 1 1 l J Question Four Question Five Question sir t Adding New Departments 1 Click on System Production and then Departments Click on the Add New button at the bottom of the screen and it will bring up the Edit Departments screen You do not have to type a department ID as an ID will be assigned automatically when the changes have been saved In the Description field type the name of the department Leave the Date Retired field blank Type in questions in the QC Invoice if you want quality control questions to print on the invoice Type in questions in the QC Work Ticket if you quality control questions to print on the work ticket Available in the Production Module Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost ee bd Lo Pl M m e h bo CONDO OB WP Adding a QC Invoice 1 Click on System Production and then Dep
86. Help Use this section to select a pre designed work ticket style Choose a paper form from the drop down list The basic styles are listed below See the samples on the next page DBL DBLBL This style prints two different work tickets printed side by side on one sheet It can be printed on blank paper or use our DBL or BL forms landscape 8 1 2 x 11 available at 800 677 1120 Our DBL and BL forms have a vertical perfora tion down the center 1eg yNIOYS 10 2307 ase GENE Report Manager Workticket DBL DBLBL This prints two LSR This prints one LSR QC Needs differant racer cida hw cida eace an tha chast correct deccrintian LSR This style prints one work ticket per page It can printed on blank paper or use our LSR form portrait 8 1 2 x 11 available at 800 677 1120 Our LSR form has a horizontal perforation 1 3 of the way from the top of the form LSR QC This style prints one work ticket per page plus a summary printed on the right hand side It can printed on blank paper or use our QC form portrait 8 1 2 x 11 avail able at 800 677 1120 Our QC form has one vertical perforation 2 3 of the way from the left 51 System Menu Control Panel ETC alm olii Ko Mm at 1E continued Work Ticket Examples Dr s Date Dr s Date ae Style Horizontal Perf 8 1 2 x 11 1 Part Blank Form EEIE C EE T E 4 23 1 2 412311 2 used with Laser and Inkjet
87. In as the status Now you can create a Case Status Report This field takes the place of the Case Status in Version 5 and 5 5 In Lab Manager v7 this status is not required however it does allow you to assign any status you want to a case Define statuses by going to System Codes and then User Status Case Entry Production enu Calendar Accounting The Edit User Statuses screen allows you to define information about your user statuses e User Status ID This is the ID that the system automatically assigns to the User Status e Description This is the name of the User Status e Date Retired This is the date that the User Status has been retired deleted e Show Retired This checkbox is used to show the retired User Status in the list If the retired statuses are not showing checkmark the box and it will add in the retired statuses Case Admin Tools Vendor Exit Employee Product Material Marketing Patient User Status ase Additional User Statuses Click on System Codes and then User Status At the Edit User Status screen click on Add New button at the bottom of the screen 3 In the new line item in the grid under the Description column type the name of the User CERN User Statuses Status 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until all new user statuses have been entered Edit User Statuses 5 You do not have to type a user status ID as an ID will be ass
88. Info Optional This field can be used to describe any safety issues that might be related to this material This information is for your own use and can be printed on certain reports 136 New Menu Materials New Menu Materials continued Section Edit Materials e Definable Optional You can put any extra information you want into this field e Special Codes Optional You can put any extra information you want into this field e Location Optional This field is used to describe where this material is stored Example Bin 34 or South Wall drawer 17 e Vendor This field is used to select the vendor you normally purchase this material from To add vendors to the list use the menu bar at the top of the screen and click on List and then on Vendors e Department Use this dropdown list to select which department this material goes in To add a department to this list you can use the or the L buttons to the right of the field e Lot Number Optional A Lot Number is a number used to identify the exact lot or batch that a material came from and it is provided by the ven dor In some situations it is required that you be able to track which lot a material came from in case there was a problem found later in that batch By tracking Lot Numbers you can identify which case a certain batch of material was used and thus which patient the material was used for There are actually two places in Lab Manager to define Lot Numbers The
89. Items Limit This specifies the maximum number of items displayed when the defaults are set for both Auto Com plete and Default functions e Main Form Background Image The Background image for the Lab Manager Desktop can be selected here Default Aut field and it Add or Change Lab Manager Desktop Background Image Right clicking on the Main Form Background Image Right click inside the Image area of the Main Form Background and you will see a small menu appear Left click on the Choose File option and Lab Manager will display a Select Image window Use the window to locate and select the image on your computer A small thumbnail image will appear in the image window To view a larger copy of the image right click on the image and then left click on View To change the image right click again and start the procedure over To delete the image right click and select Delete Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost 49 SET CT el ale mm Ore al ine N at li mm continued Easy Report Manager The Easy Report Manager is located at System Control Panel and then Easy Report Menu It is used to change the form style of invoices work tickets and statements Each tab has a dropdown list to tell you if Lab Manager is currently configured to use one of the stan dard reports for Invoices Statements and Work Tickets You may also change the Report style to a different type Example
90. Lab Manager Clear Logged In Users Upgrade Server Create New Company Database Reset Admin Password Import v5 Data PA Backup a Company DB 1 Start by typing in your company name in the Company Name field if it is not already there This needs to be Restore a Company DB EXACTLY the same as the name you will be using in Lab Manager to identify your company on your reports Server Tool Config invoices and statements Example Quality Dental Lab Inc DO NOT use special symbols other than the Delete a Company DB comma and the period Letter and or numbers are OK Change License 2 Click on the Create Key 1 button irah idiei 3 Call our office for Key 2 We can be reached during office hours in Phoenix Arizona at 1 800 677 1120 If you have high speed Internet access on this computer then you can speed up the process by clicking on the Let Us Help You link to the right of the screen This will open up your Internet browser and take you to a support page on our website At this point call our office and we will have you connect to us Once there the person you are talking to will ask you to click on their name That will connect your computer to their computer so that they can help you activate the program TMi op Monagqar cover and get started Server Help Setup New Company 4 We will ask for your company name exactly as you typed it in step 1 and Key 1 and give you back a number to type into Key 2 5
91. Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want the date range of current unstatemented cases to start with first unstatemented case dated 8 5 12 The system will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today Technician Production Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray Auto Select 1018207 ase a myu i echnicians Report Type Radio Buttons Choose One Tech R l Starting Date Unstat e Summary A dot in the circle if you want a summary of eee 202012 _ ea aa hil information Ending Date 09 30 2012 yD e Detail A dot in the circle if you want a detailed report Today Fiscal Ym Report Type OSummary D Preview or Print the Technician Production Report 1 Click on Reports Schedul ing and then Technician Production 2 Choose an Account Loca tion Ignore is the default Technician Production 3 ls a Date Retired Your Company Name Goes Here option Ignore is the default Remake setting Tech CaseNumber Production Step Code y Value Qty Value 4 Choose how to sort the s a a NNN report Tom Mueller 5 Click Print or Preview at Preparatory Prep Prep 15 00 0 00 0 00 the bottom of the screen Frame Wax up VWaxup Waxup 15 00 0 00 0 00 Tech Total 30 00 0 0 00 Grand Total 30 00 0 00 Summary Report Technician Production Your Company Name Goes Here Remake Detailed Report Tech CaseNumber Production Step Code y Value Qty Value Tom Mueller 010
92. Marketing contacts can be given codes to identify them for creating reports sorted or filtered by this code SSS e Marketing Contact Code ID dropdown This is a list of all current marketing contact codes available in the system Found online Note If a new code needs to be added to the material but it is not available in the drop down then it will need to be added at System Codes and then Marketing Once this has been added it will be available in the drop down list at Edit Marketing Contacts Also see Edit Marketing Contact Codes section Adding a Code to a Marketing Contact 1 At the Edit Marketing Contact screen click the Codes tab then the Marketing Contact Codes button LE 2 This will create a new line item in the grid Click on the dropdown list under the Marketing Contact Code ID column and select the code that will be associated with the marketing contact 3 Repeat Step 2 until all codes have been entered 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Marketing Contact screen or all your work will be lost Deleting a Code from a Marketing Contact 1 At the Edit Marketing Contact screen click the Codes tab Find the code in the grid that needs to be deleted 2 Click on the box to the left of the Code name This will select the line On your keyboard press delete 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Marketing Contact screen or all your work will be lost CGL IN These notes stay with the marketing contact
93. Mueller Mandi 09 5 19 97 9705 0005 Mueller Mandi Franzmier Jerry 09 5 20 97 9705 0015 Franzmier Jerry 5 21 97 9705 0020 Guerrero Albert 89 5 21 97 9705 0020 Guerrero Albert 5 22197 9705 0035 Mueller Sullie 443 34 5 22 97 9705 0035 Mueller Sullie 5 23 97 9705 0072 Sheldon Terry 64 5 23 97 9705 0072 Sheldon Terry 5 25 97 9705 0102 Pfaff Gordon 47 5 25 97 9705 0102 Pfaff Gordon 5 28 97 9705 0122 Nixon Richard 69 5 28 97 9705 0122 Nixon Richard DBL Style 1 Part Blank Form 8 1 2 x 11 Horizontal Perf used with Laser and Inkjet Printers Payments 832 65 i Please Pay this amount 2 722 16 53 Your Company Name Your Address Your City State Zip Your Client s Name Your Address Your City State Zip 5 20 97 9705 00 5 21 97 9705 0020 5 2297 9705 0035 5 23 97 9705 0072 5 25 97 9705 0102 5 28 97 9705 0122 Over 30 days 0 00 system Menu Control Panel Statement Page 1 Biing Date 0631 1997 Amount Enclosed Please return top portion with 140 09 Guerrero Albert 273 89 Mueller Sullie 443 34 Sheldon Terry 232 61 Pfaff Gordon 234 47 Nixon Richard 528 69 LSR Style Horizontal Perf 1 Part Blue Form 8 1 2 x 11 used with Laser and Inkjet Printers Over 60 days Over 90 days 0 00 0 00 Previous balance 218 60 Service charge 0 00 Current charges 3 336 21 Total charges 3 554 81 Payments 832 65 Please Pay this amount 2 722 16 System Menu
94. N Central Phoenix 4z 85000 Dr Tester McTestings 122131 E 914th Ave Pilsbury AZ 90918 Dr John Smith 1234 N 10th St Phoenix Az 85016 Dr Susan Smith 444 N 16th St Phoenix Az 85000 Use this screen to print labels with the Doctor Name and Address This is designed to print on an Avery 5160 style label sheet which provides 30 different labels per sheet Sort By Radio Buttons Choose One e Locator ID Placing a dot in the circle will sort the labels in numerical order e Name Placing a dot in the circle will sort the labels in alphabetical order peeraa EEE ous Address Type Radio Buttons Choose One Invoice A dot in the circle will use the Doctor s address that is marked as Invoice Location at the Accounts screen Statement A dot in the circle will use Doctor s address that is marked as Statement Location at the Accounts screen Shipping A dot in the circle will use the Doctor s address that is marked as Shipping Location at the Accounts screen 1012207 ase ea myu Preview or Print the Doctor Labels 1 Click on Reports Labels and then Doctors 2 Choose how to sort the labels 3 Choose which address type to be used Invoice Address is the default 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Reports Menu Label Doctor amp Product System New Edit List Reports Help Accounti General Main Me Billing Marketin Production gt Sch
95. Name in the table of the account you wish to edit 2 At Edit Account screen click on the Dr Pref Defaults tab Modify the items that need to be changed 3 Click Save Changes or all the work will be lost Deleting Retiring a Doctor Preference From An Account 1 Click List Accounts then the Search button table will populate with all of your accounts Click the Account Name in the table of the account you wish to edit 2 At Edit Account screen click on the Dr Pref Defaults tab Place a date in the Date Retired field The preference is deleted 3 Click Save New or all the work will be lost Technician Tab at Edit Account Screen Ledger PVaaelels ele idles we lelade ce eer ieee Technicians IsChecked Description b o Mandi e Is Checked check box When there is a check in the box that technician is assigned to C the account when scheduling cases e Description This is the name of the Technician Use this screen to assign technicians to accounts This feature is only used in the Scheduling module Place Holder m Richard Assigning a Technician to an Account 1 Click List Accounts then the Search button table will populate with all of your accounts Click the Account Name in the table of the account you wish to edit 2 At Edit Account screen click on the Technicians tab Place a check in the box or boxes for the technicians that need to be assigned to this specific account 4 Click Save New
96. New Edit List Reports Help 5 search w M m 3 BAG List Payments Oand or Oand or BB show sau search A Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Search Field 3 S g Accoun t Name iC p gt ED Beriti f Finita Toii EE AccountName VY PaymentDate VY Description WY Amount W ReferenceNumber W Not Primary Value Primary Value Primary Value e gt CASH ACCOUNT 11 29 2010 Check 1267162 55 Consolid C J E 3 CASH ACCOUNT 01 26 2011 Check 100 00 1093 EZE EZE o Add a New Payment Using the List Payments 1 At the Menu Bar click List Payment and the Add New button at the bottom of the screen 2 For full instructions see the New Payments section of this manual Modify a Existing Payment Using the List Payments 1 Click List Payments then the Search button The grid will list all of your payments 2 Click on the Account Name for the payment you wish to edit 3 Make any changes to the Payment you need 4 Click Save New or all your work will be lost 151 List Menu Products amp Materials List Menu Products Products at List Menu System New Edit List Reports Help Cases Accounts The many List screens are used to view a list of items or locate information The list might contain all of the items or it might be limited to just a few of the available items picnics Payments Products Example At the List Products screen in the search area using no search criteria will give you a list con
97. New Edit lict Reports Help Accounting Aged Trial Balance Short The Account Ledger lists an individual account s balance what is owed when last payment ae ise taboo was made and account s contact information e Collections Production General Journal After selecting an account the information that shows on the screen is read only so the user Labels Tax Reports cannot change the information from here If there is an amount that is incorrect it will only be Marketing Account History fixed by going directly to payments or cases Scheduling Invoice Details List Account Ledger e Account dropdown list Use the dropdown list to select the name of the account e ID Account dropdown list Use the dropdown list to select the account by ID System New Edit List Reports Help OENE Account Ledger Report number q e Simulate Aging checkbox Account Ledger This box will calculate ser gt vices charges without running Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Tray 0 aging Account CMEI Dr John Killdare gt Locator D CUC 5 Dr John Killdare 1032307 ase This Portion of the Account Ledger is Read Only e Account ID Lists the ID of the account This Portion of i 4 tID 5 Last Paid 10 12 2012 5 e Account Name Lists the the Screen is Accoun Peete Name of the Account Read Only Account Name Dr John Killdare Last Statement e Address1 Lists first line of Address1 2400 E Indian School Current Charges the add
98. New button at the bottom of the screen In Patient Code create a code In the Description field type the name of the Patient Code Leave the Retired Date blank Click Save Changes at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost GEIE List PatientCodeChoices ieg IMOS PatientCode Y Description Ww DateCreated VW DateRetired WY gt Enlisted Enlisted Person 1072172003 Remake Remake 01 19 2005 Spouse Spouse 01 19 2005 Oo O01 B Modify Existing Patient Codes 1 Click on System Codes and then Patient 2 Click on the name of the Patient Code item under the Patient Code column 3 From Edit Patient Code Choices screen the patient code description or a retired date can be edited eee 4 Click Save Changes at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost SSS Ect Patient Code Choices Edit Patient Code Choices Delete Existing Patient Codes Z Patient Code ss Helpful Blue Text Will Be Here Soon 1 Click on System Codes and then Patient Deco 2 Click on the name of the Patient Code item under the Patient Code column epost 3 Place a date in the Date Retired field 4 Click Save Changes at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost vows ME User Status i System New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel b User Status is an optional field that can be used to assign a special status Example A case goes out as a Try In so assign Try
99. New button at the bottom of the screen 3 In the new line item in the grid under the Description column type the name of the Product Ae Edit Product Codes 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until all new product codes have been entered 5 You do not have to type a product code ID as an ID will be assigned automatically when the changes have been saved Product Code Choices 6 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost a as a OEE Product Code Choices E Show Retired Modify Existing Product Codes 1 Click on System Codes and then Product 2 At the Edit Product Codes screen click on and modify the name in the Description column 3 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Denture EE oe Delete Existing Product Codes 1 Click on System Codes and then Product 2 At the Edit Product Codes screen place a date in the Date Retired column Do this for all codes that need retiring 3 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost 91 SSE dale oT TE continued Material Materials can be given codes to identify them for some special reason This information could be helpful for creat ing reports sorted or filtered by this code To enter new material codes or to edit information on existing material codes click System Codes and then Material The Edit Material Code screen allows you to define information about your material codes e Material Code I
100. Once Key 2 has been successfully typed in click on the Validate Key 2 3 ee button This will verify that the keys Key 1 were entered properly 4 Type the key given to you by LSG into Key 2 1 Type your company name here exactly as it is to appear in the program Company Name Click on Create Key 1 and then call LSG at 1 800 677 1120 and request Key 2 Create Key 1 Connect to my computer Let Us Help You Major Version 7 Minor Version 0 Key 2 6 Click on the Create Company Data Click on Validate Key 2 2 i base button at the bottom of the PE anne Tahnaa Se nee Meee eee eee screen and you will seea pop up y Root Dir for THIS Company s External Files Change Path ustom ame window Fig 1 Use this window to Major Version Limit 6 Minor 255 Expiration Date E Demo Beta Browse For Folder locate where the Master Database will Modules Select the Directory For the DB Files p be placed It will normally be in the Production Pickups Barcoding T Scheduling Shipping Quickbooks Fig 1 C LMDBs folder To use the default e 7 R tatus Messages folder simply click OK This process MessagelD Message DateOfMessage T ee and Settings may take several minutes vos Downloads 7 When complete the Status Mes E ia t LM sages table at the bottom will say ime Finished You may now close this gia ai LD BackgroundImages Cancel Create Company Database p r GD s
101. Only show uncompleted Steps Case Found Done Quantity 3 0000 3 0000 3 0000 3 0000 3 0000 3 0000 3 0000 3 0000 Reports Scheduling Menu continued Product Steps Report This report lists the product and each scheduling step assigned to that product Reports Menu Scheduling Product Steps System New Edit List Repwrts Help 1012207 se sea IMOS Accounting General Billing Production Labels Marketing Scheduling Case Completion Technician Production Steps Past Due Cases Due Cases To BeFinished Early Step Status Product Steps Production Steps System New Edit List Reports Help OENE Product Steps Report Product Steps Preview or Print the Product Steps Report 1 Click on Reports Scheduling and then Product Steps 2 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen ieg IMOS Printer A a m i A gt Products and Production Steps 1 FULL CAST GOLD CR Step 1 2 6 8 10 CAST POST 12 REDUCTION COPING Step 2 13 PORCELAIN CROWN Step 16 WAX TEMP CROWNS Step 1 3 8 Your Company Name Goes Here Preparatory Prep Frame Wax up VYaxup Final finish Finish Deliver Deliver Frame VVWax up YWaxup Final finish Finish Deliver Deliver Frame Wax up VWYaxup Preparatory Prep Frame Finish FrmFin Porcelain Buildup Buildup Porcelain contour Contour Inspect Check Deliver Deliver Pre
102. Optional This is the account email There is also a doctor s email under Edit Doctors e Ledger button This display screen shows how much this account owes payments and aging of cases 1032307 ase Account Ledger Report Account Ledger Screen Account Ledger Printer HP Officejet Pro 8600 Network Tray 0 The Ledger screen is Read Only e Account drop down list If the Account Ledger is accessed ee from the Edit Account screen it will automatically populate the Account Name and ID with the information from the ac count that was showing Account ID 13 Last Paid 06 27 2012 e Locator ID drop down list If the Account Ledger is ac meee on ACCOUNT aat piatim cessed from the Edit Account screen it will automatically eee SE Rose Current Charges populate the Account Name and ID with the information from ae the account that was showing City State Zip Phoenix Aging 0 to 30 Days e Account ID This is the same as the Locator ID at Edit Ac Phoga Ex suis e counts YTD Purchase Aging 61 to 90 Days a Tax Rate 0 00 Aging 91 Days e Account Name This is the name of the account ao Service Charge Percentage 1 50 Service Charges e Address 1 First ine oi the statement location a Tae DA e Address 2 Second line of the statement location e City State Zip This is the City State Zip of the statement Bi location e Phone Ext This is the phone and the extension e YTD
103. PLST 0 POST Denture Set 30 1X8 NH PLST 10 POS Denture Set 28 1x58 NH PLST 20 POS Billing Set 27 1X8 NH PLST 33 POS Billing Set av 1X8 SLX VAC FIR PT Denture Set 24 1X8 VAC FIR FUN PT Denture Set 25 1X8 VAC FIR RAT PT Billing Set 1 ARGEN 77 Billing Grain 39 BB IPN HARDND ANT Denture Each 41 BB PLASTIC ANTER Denture Each 40 BB VAC FIRED ANTER Denture Each 53 BF IPN 20 POSTER Denture Each 51 BF IPN 33 POSTER Denture Each 54 BF IPN ANTLN POST Denture Each 42 BF IPN HARD ANTER Denture Each 173 Reports Menu General Employees List Xe elem mca mel Jalsle l continued Employees List Report i System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting gt This reports prints a general list of Employees with their ID number and Address Gencal irinna Ma in V Billing Doctors Production Date Retired Radio Buttons Choose One e Ignore Placing a dot in the circle will show both active and retired products on the Products Labels Materials List 1038201 ase es IMOS report Marketing Employees e Active Only Default Setting A dot in the circle will show only the active products on aaa PET the report sencon e Retired Only A dot in the circle will show only the retired products on the report EE Calls Assigned To Account Exp Date Reminders Sort Radio Buttons Choose One e Employee ID Placing a dot in the circle will sort the report by the ID of the employee e Employee Default setting Placing a d
104. Please note that the R and O buttons when se lected will include those Accounts that have been Retired or placed On Hold in your dropdown list e Doctor Sales This report shows the doctors sales in dollars for the current year last 12 months or a given year Please note that the R button when selected will include those Doctors that have been Retired in your dropdown list e Product Sales This report shows the sales in dollars for products only for the current year last 12 months or a given year e Material Sales This report shows the sales in dollars for materials only for the current year last 12 months or a given year e Product Production This report shows the sale amount of units for products only for the current year last 12 months or a given Year To Date Reports Product Sales Material Sales Account Analysis Product Price List Materials Price List Commissions Taxes with Sales FlighTags FlighTags Travel Credits year e Material Production This report shows the sales amount of units for materials only for the current year last 12 months or a given year e Yearly Sales Summary This report shows total sales broken down by year e Product Sales This report shows the dollar value of the products sold during a specific time period e Material Sales This report shows the dollar value of the materials sold during a specific time period e Account Analysis This report will show how much money has been bi
105. Printers Monday Monday you the work ticket paper styles we support We carry the DBL DBL BL LSR LSR QC forms For more infor mation call the sales depart ment at 800 677 1120 Case Number 9704 0029 Dr s Date 04 28 1997 Received 04 15 1997 Ship by date 04 28 1997 Patient Mueller Schedule Tooth s Case Number 9704 0029 Dr s Date 04 28 1997 Received 04 15 1997 Ship by date 04 28 1997 Patient Mueller Schedule Tooth s Account 1 Dr John Smith 1234 N Anywhere Phoenix AZ 85016 602 555 1234 Account 1 Dr John Smith 1234 N Anywhere Phoenix AZ 85016 602 555 1234 Qty Product Description Qty Product Description 1 Porcelain Gold 1 Porcelain Gold 1 7 7 1 Dr Preferences Notes Use doctors gold Use thin margins Dr Preferences Use doctors gold Use thin margins Dr s Date re 4 23 12 4 23 12 Monday Monday ements Case Number 9704 0029 Case Number 9704 0029 Case Number 9704 0029 Dr John Smith Drs Date 04 28 1997 DrsDate 04 28 1997 Account 1 Drs Date 04 28 1997 1234 N Anywhere Received 04 15 1997 Received 04 15 1997 Dr John Smith 1234 N Anywhere Phoenix AZ 85016 602 555 1234 Received 04 15 1997 Ship by date 04 28 1997 Patient Mueller Phoenix AZ 85016 602 555 1234 Ship by date 04 28 1997 Patient Mueller Ship by date 04 28 1997 Patient Mueller Porcelain Gold Quality Contro
106. QName Sort By Radio Buttons Choose One e Locator ID A dot in the circle will sort the report by the ID of the account or doctor e Name Default Setting A dot in the circle will sort the accounts or doctors on the report in alphabetical order Preview or Print the Current Sales Report 1 Click on Reports Bar Billing and then Cur rent Sales Choose a date range report Current Sales type and specify account if necessary Filtered By Between 10 12 2012 AND 10 12 2012 2 Place a check in the Include Statemented Sorted By Fri 1 N checkbox if the cases have already been on pay AIPORT MEN t a a statement Choose how to sort the report Aca D AccountName ____ TT mmo 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the Case Inv Date Patient Status Products Materials Total Disc Sales Tax Invoice screen 2 Dr George Franks 1112 0001 1042 2012 Smith John 77 00 0 00 0 00 3 56 95 86 1005 0001 1042 2012 Jones Sherry 34 00 0 00 0 00 9 66 93 66 0902 0001 1042 2012 Johnson Jerry 77 00 0 00 0 00 3 86 35 36 0809 0001 1042 2012 Jones Frank 33 00 0 00 0 00 3 60 36 50 0106 0001 1042 2012 White Racheal 76 71 0 00 7 67 7 94 76 98 0105 0012 1042 2012 Farquart Martha 76 71 48 70 12 54 12 97 125 84 0105 0011 1042 2012 Nakasuji Frank 76 71 490 00 56 67 58 65 568 69 0105 0010 1042 2012 Fields Mrs J 76 71 48 70 12 54 12 97 125 84 0105 0009 1042 2012 Price Richard 76 71 0 00 0 00 38 83 35 54 0105 0008 1
107. Radio Buttons Choose One F seth padan e Ignore Default setting A dot in the circle shows both invoice and statement loca eee Products tions on the report a Labels Materials List e Invoice Locations Placing a dot in the circle will show only the invoice locations 5 Employees e Statement Locations Placing a dot in the circle will show only the statement loca ode Departments tions Vendors Doctor Preferences Date Retired Radio Buttons Choose One Calls Assigned To e Ignore Default setting A dot in the circle will show both active and retired accounts Account Exp Date Reminders on the report e Active Only Placing a dot in the circle will show only the active accounts on the report e Retired Only Placing a dot in the circle will show i System New Edit List Reports Help only the retired accounts on the report elem Accounts List Report MPE eee Sort Radio Buttons Choose One Accounts List e Locator ID Placing a dot in the circle will sort the report by the ID of the account e Account Name Default setting Placing a dot in the circle will sort the accounts on the report in alphabeti cal order Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Account Locations Se O Sta Filter invoice Locations 1012207 ase ea IMOS Date Retired Ignore O Active Only LocatorIlD Account N Preview or Print the Accounts List Report 1 Click on Reports General and then Accounts 2 Choose an Account Location Ignor
108. Report Menu Billing Report Menu Billing z i System New Edit List Reports Help e Invoices Invoices are usually printed daily and delivered with the case or n ae n i Accounting gt mailed to the doctor itemizing the charges on a case g mm p i r 9 5 zi enera b e Invoice Register This report lists cases with their Case Number Patient 3 Mai ting gt a ae Name and totals for Products Materials Taxes and total amount for a given ain mars time period Production gt Invoice Register i c Labels b Cash Receipts e Cash Receipts This report shows the list of payments received from accounts ara 5 ar in between a selected time period S Sani oii Scheduling gt Statements e Current Sales This report lists and totals the invoices by Account or Doctor during a specific time period e Statements Statements are printed at the end of the month and mailed to each account to summarize all of their activity such as Invoices Payments Credits etc for the current month e Year To Date Reports The Year to Date Sales reports show sales in dollars while the Production reports show sales in units produced Each report shows the sales or production for up to a full year broken down by month with totals e Account Sales This report shows the account sales for all or a specific account with all doctors assiqned in dollars for the current year last 12 months or a given year
109. Reports x Report Functions x Customizing Reports Saving a Custom Report x Adding a Custom Report x Editing Sub Forms or Sub Reports e QuickBooks Interface First Time Setup x Configuring the Interface e Toolbar e Case Locator e View Easy Menus e Setup Wizard Table of Contents continued on next page PAGE 75 75 75 75 76 77 77 77 77 78 78 80 80 80 81 82 82 83 84 87 89 90 90 91 91 92 92 93 93 94 94 95 97 98 98 100 100 Table of Contents System Menu Cont Case Entry e Doctor Items e Delivery Methods e Material Unit Types Production e Departments Setting up Departments x Quality Control for Invoice x Quality Control for Work Ticket e Steps Calendar e Company Holidays e Shipper Holidays e Calendar Accounting e Tax Collectors e Tax Rates e Tax Categories e Invoice Terms Codes e Case e Vendor e Employee e Product e Material e Marketing e Patient e User Status Admin Tools Administrator e Excise Tax Log e Access Groups e Workstations e Master Configuration e Users e Run Aging e View Accounts GL Status Table of Contents continued on next page PAGE 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 109 110 110 111 111 111 112 tiz 113 115 116 117 117 118 119 119 119 120 120 120 120 121 122 123 123 123 124 125 125 127 128 128 126 129 129 130 131 132 132 133 133 134 135 136 136 137 138 139 139 140 140 141 1
110. Status Installing New SOL Server 2008 R2 Express COOS O I O O OO eee Cancel 3 Tool Lab Manager 7 Installing Lab Manager if Lab Manager InstallShield Wizard Setup Type 1 z Choose the setup type that best suits your needs Please select a setup type O Complete All program features will be installed Requires the most disk space hoose which program features you want installed and where they ill be installed Recommended for advanced users if Lab Manager InstallShield Wizard 2 e Custom Setup Select the program features you want installed Click on an icon in the list below to change how a Feature is installed Feature Description Server Components P hJALaDNa tae This feature requires 107MB on your hard drive Install to cme ee JC ee _ Cae Ce Cee ie Lab Manager InstallShield Wizard Custom Setup Select the program features you want installed Click on an icon in the list below to change how a feature is installed Feature Description Server Components E amp This feature will be installed on local hard drive E8 This feature and all subfeatures will be installed on local hard drive This feature will be installed when required This Feature will not be available Install to come F seek ees ie Lab Manager InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin i
111. System Menu Control Panel SECT dale Ore al ige N at la mm continued Edit Price List Screen continued Products can be added to all price lists at one time using the Edit Products Lists Products and select the product Product Prices B stiste gdis p ee a A A E Product Prices e ProductID Column This column lists the products that are assigned to this price list e Price Column This column lists the prices for the products that are assigned to this price list SHIPPING COD Rc e Add ProductliD Button This button is used to add additional products to a price list xl Add Products to an Existing Price List 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Price Lists Click on the name of the price list under the Description column in the grid Click Add ProductID button in the on the Product Prices tab This will create a line item in the g Use the drop down list in the new line item to select the product name Click in the price field on that same line item and type in the dollar value Repeat steps 3 through 5 until all products have been added to a price list Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost NOOB WD tem New Edit List Reports Help Cec di hie Edit Price Lists Edit Price a Modify an Existing Product Price List 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Price Lists 2 Click on the name of the price list in the Description colum
112. System Menu Calendar SEC EA OFT EU continued Modify Existing Shipper Holidays System New Edit List Reports Help Main Shipper Holidays 1 Click on System Calendar and then Shipper Holidays F 3 F Edit Shipper Holidays 2 Click on the name of the shipper holiday under the Description column 3 Modify the name 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost ieg myoys Pee E Show Retired Shipper Holidays ShipperHolidayID Description DateRetired Add Additional Shipper Holidays 1 Click on System Calendar and then Shipper Holidays 2 Click on Add New button at the bottom of the screen This will add a new line item to the grid 3 In the new line item in the grid under the Description column type the name of the shipper holiday 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all shipper holidays have been entered 5 You do not have to type a Shipper Holiday ID an ID will be assigned automatically when the changes have been saved 6 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost pil Christmas Independence Da Labor Day Memorial Day New Years Saturday Sunday Thanksgiving Delete Existing Shipper Holidays 1 Click on System Calendar and then Shipper Holidays 2 Place a date in the Date Retired column next to the name of the shipper holiday to be retired Do this for all holidays that need retiring 3 Cl
113. Then click Start Call to beg i o Employee f new record Enter the notes and click the End Time button To ente tors in current accounts or marketing accounts 7 TERA EEE call click Reset and search for another Account 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Call Tracking Search Criteria 13 i Name gere 2 Make sure that there is an employee listed in the Employee O u Marketing conta e Address aaar drop down list if there is not use the drop down list and A address os select an employee Calls will not be allowed to be entered 11 Dental Laboratory OOOO csz without an employee s name selected os ee Prone i Bulletin Board EST 3 On the Call Tracking tab under the Search Criteria box 2 Dr GeorgeFranks g O oe select from the options Accounts or Marketing Contacts contac 4 To the right of Search Criteria select from Name Phone Negr Contract Address or ID re ooo 5 Click in the Search Criteria box and type in the name or aoni 01 1970 item that you are searching for This will automatically popu late the box underneath to show items that match the crite en gt 04 17 2012 Rosalie M na 12 13 2011 Rosalie M DWNLD vI D i to look hi 6 Click on one of the names of the accounts or marketing contacts in the Name grid This will fill in the Contact infor mation in to the right along with notes Verify that it is the correct account armed ting contact i mma 7 Click on the S
114. This date is the day that the quote was saved toe Discount Total P O Num Optional This is for a Purchase Order number if one is used Chair Time Tax Total Gender Radio button Optional Choose from M Male or F Female for the gender of the patient Rx H Grand Total Age Optional Type in a number for the patient s age Chair Time dropdown list Optional Use the Drop Down List to select a time The list gives times in 15 minute increments RX Optional Type in the Prescription number in the RX Field Invoice Date Read Only Field This will be blank until a case has been invoiced Once it has been saved as an invoice the date will show even if it has not been printed yet Invoice Amount Read Only Field This will be blank until a case has been invoiced Once it has been saved as an invoice the amount will show even if it has not been printed yet Invoice Bal Read Only Field This will be blank until a case has been invoiced Once it has been saved as an invoice the amount will show even if it has not been printed yet Products Total Read Only Field Once a product has been entered on the case it will show the total dollar amount that has been entered on this case for products This will show whether the case has been invoiced or not Materials Total Read Only Field Once a material has been entered on the case it will show the total dollar amount that has been entered on this case for materials This will show whether th
115. When checked a salesperson receives a commission on the material when it is assigned to a case Adding a New Material Using New Menu At the Menu Bar click New then Material At the Edit Materials screen type in the Material Name under description Define the Unit Type by using the dropdown list Example Each DWT Pennyweight etc In the Cost field type in the material cost in the units you SELL the material in In the In Stock field type the material quantity that physically is in the lab In the Markup field type in a markup percentage Lab Manager will multiple the percentage times the Cost and calculate the price Use the dropdown list for Department and assign this material to a department Place a check in the Discountable checkbox if this material is allowed to be discounted Place a check in the Taxable checkbox if this is a taxable material 10 Review all other fields and checkboxes to see if they apply to your lab 11 Click Save New on the Edit Materials screen or all your work will be lost OONDARWN Adding a New Material Using List Material At the Menu Bar click on List and then Material Click Add New at the bottom of the screen At the Edit Materials screen define the Material Name under description Define the Unit Type by using the dropdown list Example Each DWT Pennyweight etc In the Cost field type in the material cost in the units you SELL the material in In the In S
116. a Company DB with the text of Protect my computer and data from unauthorized program activity no e Uncheck this box and click OK When the program opens click on the Server Menu then on Server Tool Config Setup New Lab Manager Delete a Company DB Change License 1 Start by typing in your company name in the Company Name field if it is not already there This needs to be Ag shaki EXACTLY the same as the name you will be using in Lab Manager to identify your company on your reports invoices and statements Example Quality Dental Lab Inc DO NOT use special symbols other than the comma and the period Letter and or numbers are OK 2 Click on the Create Key 1 button 3 Call our office for Key 2 We can be reached during office hours in Phoenix Arizona at 1 800 677 1120 If you have high speed Internet access on this computer then you can speed up the process by clicking on the Let Us Help You link to the right of the screen This will open up your Internet browser and take you to a support page on our website At this point call our office and we will have you connect to us Once there the person you are talking to will ask you to click on their name That will connect your computer to their computer so that they can help you activate the program and get started 4 We will ask for your company name exactly as you typed it in step 1 and Key 1 and give you back a number to type into Key 2 5 Once Key 2 has been successf
117. a a a a eh a a i a a ee ea oe 1 31 11 Ift 800 7 I I gt gt osamzoi2 17 2012 RosaieM M ae To AM 8 17 AM ft 800 aml I l 12 13 2011 Rosalie M DWNLD 1 36 PM 1 39 PM DWNLD PRM Iftvm that i l mightwant to look at m l PRO instead I i 08 19 2011 SS ee 1 vm 8 44 AM 08 45 30 lft 800 told abloutsale m l I I 04 19 2011 ae section vm 11 10 AM 11 10 AM sale starting 275 billing o l l I left 800 I Call Grid l 01 17 2011 l I no msg 2 19 PM 2 19 PM didnt bother leaving vm a eS g He never answers his m l I phone l l 01 11 2011 Rosalie M vm 08 26 08 8108789 08 26 58 told about PRO salethru o l l I l l l I l I Select Search Type By Radio Buttons Choose One Section Employee Selector System New Edit List Reports Help GEE Call Tracking OA SalesPersons Technicians Employee f mandi 1 ieg IMOS Call Tracking e All Place a dot in the circle to make available all employees names in the employee dropdown list o Call Tracking SE ie e Salespeople Place a dot in the circle to make available all sales per A hg sons names in the employee dropdown list 3 Search Criteria 3 name rhone Name CASH ACCOUNT e Technicians Place a dot in the circle to make available all technicians accounts Marketing Contacts Address OD E e names in the employee dropdown list e Employee field Select a new name from the drop down list if default name is not correct You mu
118. after the dash Dr Prefs Sort Order alphabetical As Entered Lab Tooth Numbering System drop down list Choose one of the current options FDI Palmer Universal The selected numbering system will then be Remake Discount the default for all new Doctors If you change the percentage here you Items Received Sort Order Choose the order from the drop down list Un can then update all Account level sorted A to Z or Z to A This feature affects how the drop down in the Case percentages by Gk a Entry screen shows Items Received Dr Prefs Sort Order Options are e Alphabetical Preferences will print in alphabetical order on the Work Ticket e As Entered Preferences will print on the Work Ticket in the order that they were entered onto the Account or Doctor Remake Discount To create or modify the Remake Discount globally insert or edit the percentage here This will then be the Remake Dis count for all new Accounts but it can be changed on the Account at any time Click the Update button to change the remake discount for all ac counts Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all your work will be lost System New Edit List Reports Help Company Prefs Edit Company Preferences A J A o A a o Default Invoice Terms Use the drop down list to define the Invoice Tax Categories These define the tax category defaults for new Ac nee counts These can be changed at Accounts individually at an
119. at la mm continued Edit Company Preferences and Settings Screen continued System New Edit List Reports Help User Interface Tab at Edit Company Preference Company Prefs 103230 ase Use the User Interface tab to change Lab Manager s appearance Edit Com pany Preferences e Use Easy Menus e Checked Place a check in the box to enable the menu system similar in look and feel to our previous versions of Lab Man ager This will then appear when opening the program All informa General Image Paths Reports Global Dr Prefs Case Related Account Defaults User Interface fl A F7 Q a oo E tion can still be accessed through the menu bar across the top Eq Use Easy Menus E Remember Login Eq Ask New Statement Questions Unchecked Leaving the check box unchecked will not provide but Bj HideDoctorInfo E Show GroupBy Area on Grids EJ UseApplication Style j tons on the Main Menu All information would be accessed through Xx Set Close on Save or Cancel to True on all applicable forms the menus at the top of the program Hide Doctor e Hide Doctor Info Set Close Default Auto Complete Mode SuggestAppend a beyen Checked Place a check in the box to remove the Doctor name and to click Sav contact information from work tickets Default Auto Suggest Filter Mode Contains ERREA Unchecked If there is NO check in the box the Doctors name and Most Recently Used MRU Items Limit S contact information will
120. be completed by clicking Add Next 101207 ase ea IMOS If you are finished adding entries or reviewing a step and no changes need to be made continue to the next step All of the infor mation you enter using the setup wizard can be modified or changed at any time after you have entered it here Step 1 Billing Terms This tells Lab Manager when to charge service charges or apply discounts for billing purposes Several terms have been predefined We suaaest vou review these and if one works for vou or can be modified continue to the next step Ada New Review A comeietes Step 2 Tax Setup F you charge Taxes to any of your Accounts you will first need to define your tax collectors rates and categories Tax Collectors Add New Review m Completed Tax Rates Add New Review E completed Tax Categories Add New Review o Completed Step 3 Delivery Methods optional This is used to define the different methods you use to deliver your cases We have predefined several Add New ae o Completed standard methods for you already Step 4 Company Information Provide your contact information default preferences and more mi Completed Step 5 Form Selection This will allow you to choose the invoice work ticket and statement styles you will print out m Completed Step 6 Departments Departments describe the major categories of the products you produce Add New Review oO Completed Step 7 Employees Employees are
121. be customized in Lab Manager As an example This section demonstrates these concepts by showing you how to modify the LSR invoice form however these same concepts apply to all reports and forms Anything you print can be modified Accounting General Billing A A A a Production Partial List of Customizable Reports Work Tickets Accounting Labels Production Marketing Marketing Invoices Statements Scheduling Scheduling ieg IMOS System New Edit List Reports Help GEE Invoices Report Customizing Invoices Statements and Reports Go to Reports Billing and then Invoices Click on the Design button Customize the form Go to File and then Save at the upper left of the screen to save the report in the Custom Reports folder 5 Add the new custom report to Lab Manager s list of custom reports at the Man age Report screen 6 Substitute your new custom report for the existing report 7 Click Save Changes or all your work will be lost Invoice DBL Printer BRN_DODA4A on http 192 168 1 131 redirected 5 Tray 0 Invoices are usually printed daily and delivered with the case or mailed to the doctor itemizing the charges on a case This table shows a list of the invoices that need to be printed To print these invoices simply click on the print button at the bottom of the screen Invoices seg MYOS a T 1038307 ase CaseID Patient Invo
122. chosen in Step 1 Ld Lab Manager Server Toc 8 Click Run at the bottom of the screen and the grid will tell you when the procedure is done 9 Click Close to exit out Server Help LMServerBase Click Select File and select the MDF file of the Company DB you wish to attach If this textbox isn tread only then the database already asts on the server If you still want toattach this db you need to change the name We try to guess the log file based on the MDF file chosen in step 1 Click the Run button to try attaching the selected Company DB to the Server Status Messages Message DateOfMessage 18 Setup Wizard Lab Manager v7 Setup Wizard This form will allow you to input all information in a logical order starting from step one e Some of the steps are optional and are noted as such Even if you are not using one of the steps listed here we recommended you review them e f you need to add information start by clicking Add New for that step After you have finished the initial entry any further en tries would be completed by clicking Add New e lf you are finished adding entries or reviewing a step and no changes need to be made check the completed check box and continue to the next step e All of the information you enter using the Setup Wizard can be modified or changed at any time after you have entered it here e When you have completed a Step put a checkmark in the Completed box Step 1 Bi
123. credited to the Account Doctor This button only allows an invoice to be refunded exactly as it was billed This refund will be applied to the balance owed by that Account Refresh If a user on a different workstation adds a case or updates an existing case clicking the Refresh button will refresh it all to include that new updated data Reset Found in the search form This will clear the search form back to defaults so a different search can be done Retired Button Retired items are hidden in some lists and reports To see retired items click on the Retired button for them to be available in the drop down list Return Use this button if a previously statemented case needs to be credited partially or in full to the doctor This refund can be a partial of full refund This refund will be applied to the balance owed by that Account Run Aging Aging is done when Statement Jobs are created If aging needs to be done outside of a normal statement job click Run Aging This is not normally recommended since it will issue service charges Save This button will save the information you have entered or changed on a screen Save Changes This button will save the information you have entered or changed on a screen Save and New In Case Entry this saves the case but does not invoice it You are then presented with a new Case Entry screen where a new case can be entered Save New This button will save the information you have entered or changed
124. detailed report of the work General performed during a given date or time period This report will report on one or all of the gt Ma inM Billing technicians PE e Technicians drop down list Select a technician from the drop down list to filter the e report Marketing gt A Scheduling gt Case Completion Technician Production Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Custom A dot in the circle to choose your own start and end dates e MTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and ending dates e YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates e Today A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date e Fiscal YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Steps Past Due Cases Due Cases To BeFinished Early Step Status Product Steps Production Steps starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year i System New Edit List Reports Help e Unstatemented A dot in the circle will fill in the start and S BELO tech Prod Report end date for cases that have not yet been statemented Example
125. e Custom A dot in the circle will choose your own start and end dates e MTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and Taxes with Sales ending dates e YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and end ing dates e Today A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date e Fiscal YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year e Unstatemented A dot in the circle will fill in the start and end date for cases that have not yet been statemented Example Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want the date range of current unstate mented cases to start with first unstatemented case dated i System New Edit List Reports Help 8 5 12 The system will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today Materials Price List FlighTags FlighTags Travel Credits Ela Commissions Report ieg IMOS Sales Commission Sort By Radio Buttons Choose One Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 e Salesperson ID A dot in the circle will sort the report by the ID of the salesperson e Account Name Default Setting A dot in the circle will sort 1032307 ase Salesperson C the accounts on the report in alphabetical order Starting Date custom OUnstateme e Commission A dot in the circle will sort the report by th
126. e Step 13 Doctor s Items OPTIONAL e Step 14 Calendar SCHEDULING MODULE ONLY Navigation Tools e Easy Menu e Shortcut Bar e Case Locator Bar e Multitasking e Control Buttons e Advanced Case Search e List Search Screens PAGE System Menu Control Panel e Company Preferences and Settings Contact Information x Image Paths x Report Defaults and Logo Global Dr Preferences x Case Related Defaults x Account Defaults x User Interface Defaults e Easy Report Manager Invoice Style and Examples x Work Ticket Style and Examples Statement Style and Examples e Employees x Employee Information x Picture x Assigning Technicians to Accounts x Assigning Technicians to Doctors x Assigning Steps to Technicians e Price Lists Setting up Price Lists x Adding Products and Prices to a Price List x Changing Prices on a Price List x Copying a Price List to create a new Price List e QuickBooks Transfer Data To e Call Tracking Selecting an Employee Searching for Accounts or Marketing Contacts x Viewing contact information x Bulletin Board Add and Delete a Call Grid Searching Notes from the Call Grid x Assigning Calls to Employees x Mark Assigned to Calls Finished e Shortcut Bar e ShortCut Menu Items e Show All Dock Bars e Manage Reports e Custom Report Design x Invoice Design Screen x Text amp Image Editor x Page Parameters x Report Editor Toolbar e Manage
127. first is this field and would apply to all of this particular material The second place that Lot Numbers can be entered are on the case itself in the material area When using this second method for tracking Lot Numbers you could the modify the Lot Number on the case when the material is added to it e Grouping Optional This field can be used to group materials together for the purpose of making it easier to edit like materials These materials can be grouped by type or vendor or any code you want to make up and use Simply enter a code a number or word or combination into this field using the same code for each material in the same group If this is done then when editing materials it is easy to sort or filter the material list by this Grouping code putting all like materials together in the list e Discountable checkbox When checked this material is allowed to be discounted e Hazardous checkbox This field can be used to identify materials that are hazardous e Invisible checkbox When checked this material is hidden on the invoice and the account will not be charged for it This is useful when you want to track material usage without displaying it on the invoice e Taxable checkbox When checked the material will be taxed if the account has a tax rate assigned to it e Allow Remake Discount check box When checked the remake discount is applied to this material when it is placed on a case as a remake e Allow Commission check box
128. from the displayed menus INTUITIVE Lab Manager understands dental laboratories and the processes performed in them and will attempt to provide the solution by furnishing the correct default answers PHONE SUPPORT As good as the program and the manual are rest assured that a friendly helpful voice can be found on the other end of the phone Trained personnel are available to answer questions solve problems or offer suggestions Your v7 purchase prices includes a single user license for use on a single computer License do not include a support contract Also available for purchase e Multiple user Multi user licenses are available for use on 2 to 5 computer or 6 to 10 computers or 11 computers e 2nd company at same location e 2nd company same owner different location Lab Manager v7 Billing Module Case Entry Invoices Statements and Financial Reports Includes invoices statements and a variety of reports on your accounts receivable Know what your doctors owe and what they have paid View ANY case past and present in seconds Case Entry Password Protection Current Sales E Mail Addresses Unlimited Cases per Month Account Ledger UPS Shipping Zones Unlimited Price Lists Invoices amp Statements Fee Schedules Supports Multiple Doctors and Unlimited Number of Products Pre Defined Invoice Monthly Tax Summary Group Practices Unlimited Number of Materials Pre Defined Statement Quarterly amp Yearly Tax Summary Finished Prod
129. given credits or adjustments Statement Account When setting up PAYMENTS it is important that you define the fields that are in BOLD The BOLD fields are required All other fields are optional Doctor 1032307 ase Product Material Vendor System New Edit List Reports Help Marketing Contact ie ete Edit Payments Edit Payments Account R WW CASH ACCOUNT CASH ACCOUNT 1718 E Rose Phoenix AZ 85016 Locator D CACI 13 CASH ACCOUNT Srami 56 0000 Use Current Bal Number Payment ae mare 08 08 2012 Payment Type Last Notes oo nenen Current Balance 56 00 1007 asen s ynIyIOYs Invoiced Cases with Balance Selected CaseNumber InvoicelD InvoiceDate Balance p C 1206 0103 41975 6 27 2012 100 00 ham 1212 0001 41996 7 8 2012 56 00 e Account dropdown Use this drop down list to select the account that this payment will be applied to e Locator ID dropdown Instead of using the Account drop down list you can select the account locator ID to notate which account the payment will be applied to e Account Display Area Once an account is selected their basic information will show up in the box on the right This information is read only e Last Statement field This is a read only field This shows the amount this account had the last time they were statemented e Current Balance field This is a read only field This shows the amount this accoun
130. has been retired deleted Show Retired This check box is used to show the retired Vendor Codes in the list If the retired codes are not showing checkmark the box and it will add in the retired codes system Menu Codes System New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel gt Case Entry b Production gt enu Calendar Accounting v ha Y Yv Admin Tools Vendor Exit Employee Product Material Marketing Patient Case Code Choices Edit Case Codes E Show Retired 1032307 ase fe changes have been saved Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Case Code Choices CaseCodelID Description DateRetired Click on System Codes and then Case At the Edit Cases Codes screen click on and modify the name in the Description column Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Click on System Codes and then Case At the Edit Cases Codes screen place a date in the Date Retired column Do this for all codes that need retiring Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost EJ Close on Save System New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel gt Case Entry Production enu Calendar Accounting Admin Tools Vendor Exit Employee Product Material Marketing Patient User Status Add Additional Vendor Codes Click on System Codes and then Vendor i agten Men ec
131. however you can edit the list and or add your own items to the list by Calendar Material Unit Types going to the top of the screen and clicking on System Case Entry and then Doctor Items Accounting Codes The Edit Doctors Items screen allows you to define information about your doctors items Bar Coding Doctor Item ID This is the ID that the system automatically assigns to the Doctors Item Shipping Description This is the name of the Doctor Item SADT Date Retired This is the date that the Doctor Item has been retired deleted Show Retired This check box is used to show the retired Doctor Item in the list If the retired items are not showing check the box and it will add the retired units Exit Modify Existing Doctors Items SAU Lit cepos elp GEINE Doctor tems 1 Click on System Case Entry and then Doctors Items i 2 Click on the name of the Doctor Item under the Description column and modify the name Edit Doctor Items 3 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost ieg IMOS E Show Retired Doctor Items Add Additional Doctors Items 1 Click on System Case Entry and then Doctors Items 2 Click on the Add New button at the bottom of the screen This is will add a new line item to the grid Under the Description column type the name of the Doctor Item ears 3 Repeat step 2 until all new Doctors Items have been entered sein 4 You do not have to type a Doctor Item ID An ID will be assi
132. l 5 Name Test Doctor Name Test Doctor Phone 1 480 545 9276 ext l A im Days Open as Line 1 123 Oak St Line 1 PO Box 12 Phone2 j et l EEE EEEE E EF M T W Th F S Su ais a f l g R cy ma Marketing Contact Emai aseton t mai E monsters Agus n Marketing Contact E l eeseciio 4 State C ee ee Web labsysgrp com E on Hold Main Tab 7 ain la l 1 1 9B Do Not call i l ETN E a ee ae ee E l ll l l l l l Start Call Send To Accounts CallDate SalesPerson TalkedWith StartTime CallNotes AssignedTo Finished _ 09 17 2012 Rosalie M Susan 7 30 PM 7 31PM Quoted Prices Mandi I 1 See section Call Grid L xX Close on Save or Cancel 7 es ee eee B i Marketing Contact Information Section Marketing Contact e LocatorID This number can contain both letters and numbers and is used to locate or identify a contact If left blank Lab Manager will automati cally assign it a sequential number starting with 1 e Start Date The computer fills in the date this contact was created but it can be modified to reflect the date that you contacted them first e Retired Date If you delete this contact Lab Manager will fill in a date to indicate that this is no longer an active marketing contact e Use On Label Select this if you want to use this address on labels You can select from either Location 1 or Location 2 Location 1 and Location 2 Location 1 is the default location for a marketi
133. made with no payable Credit R 54 00 0 00 invoices 190794 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Credit 1 89 0 00 190796 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Checks R 124 11 0 00 190798 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Checks R 1 89 0 00 190800 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Credit 0 61 0 00 190802 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Checks R 53 19 0 00 190804 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Checks R 0 61 0 00 190806 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Credit 1 95 0 00 190808 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Checks R 130 02 0 00 190810 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Checks R 1 98 0 00 190812 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Credit 2 64 0 00 190814 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Checks R 186 16 0 00 190816 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Checks R 2 54 0 00 190817 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Payment made with no payable Owed To Customer 0 00 99 00 invoices 190818 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Payment made with no payable Credit R 99 00 0 00 invoices 190819 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Payment made with no payable Owed To Customer 0 00 99 00 invoices Credit Card Credit Check Check Credit Check Check Credit Check Check Credit Check Check Credit Card Credit Card 0 0 OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OO O OOO Credit Card 1 of 161 163 Report Menu Accounting Tax Reports lt elo a mm TE oTa iae Ml continued Tax Reports System New Edit List Reports Help 2 Accounting Aged Trial Balance Short Use this screen to print a report showing the tax amount invoiced for each account for the A i Aged Rial Balance period defined by the Starting and Ending dates Fa
134. on each Invoice or Work Ticket Multiple QC Quality Control sheets can be defined and assigned to your different departments Lab Manager will automatically select the QC sheet for the department the first product is assigned to and print it on the Invoice or Work Ticket Oo W DY Adding a QC Invoice Includes Quality Control Ticket Click on System Production and then Departments Click on the name of the department item under the Description column From the Edit Departments screen click on the QC Invoice box Enter the questions that need to appear on the Invoice Press CTRL and ENTER keys at the same time to begin a new line Press ENTER to advance to next field Text must be inserted for every department if you want a QC document for every department It is possible to copy and paste the same text from department to department if you wish Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Adding a QC Work Ticket Includes Quality Control Ticket 1 Click on the name of the department item under the Description column From the Edit Departments screen click on the QC Work Ticket box Enter the questions that need to appear on the Work Ticket Press CTRL and ENTER keys at the same time to begin a new line Press ENTER to advance to next field Text must be inserted for every department if you want a QC document for every department It is possible to copy and paste the same text Clic
135. on the Group Access screen or all your work will be lost ccs Eras Continued on next page 96 System Menu Admin Tools ETC MCT EAO alaa Eio mm Keo owe continued Workstations at Admin Tools System New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel Case Ent This is a list of workstations that can access this database This allows you to define which databases the pete workstations can access This information is set up automatically at the time of installation and should NOT aren require modification WARN l N G WE DO NOT RECOMMEND CHANGING THE FOLLOWING SELECTIONS UNLESS YOU ARE ADVISED TO BY THE LABORATORY SYSTEMS GROUP SUPPORT DEPARTMENT Accounting Codes Admin Tools Excise Tax Log Access Groups Workstations Master Config Users Special Tools System New Edit List Reports Help Run Aging View Accounts GL Status GEE List Workstations Workstations ieg MYOS WorkstationNa W Location VY CurnentDatabaseID WY Workstat WY HidePatientinformation w MHideDoctonmnformation W b A1192eb30 8 1192eb30 10 8307 ase Add New Export To Excel Export To PDF gt System New Edit List Reports Help ire oie LEa Edit Wkstn ieg MYOS Edit Workstations Databases Workstation Name 41192eb30 8462 4e42 9744 Deke Workstation GUID 1192eb30 8462 4e42 9744 c0 WS Hide Patient Information 1038307 ase BB Hide DoctorInformation Add New Delete 97 System Menu Admin Tool
136. or all work will be lost This will take you back to the Main Menu screen Wee Company Prefs weg nyoy Edit Company Preferences Reports Global Dr Prefs Case Related Account Defaults User Interface 10 7107 axe Aging Meth To change the Company Name Call LSG to get anew key ging Metho Stater Company Nam 155 Prod New Address 1 1718 E Rose Lane Address 2 City State Minutes for Breaks Inclu Zip Phoenix AZ 85016 Miny Phone 00 677 1120 Fax 602 279 3633 oe eee rege o URL ww labsysgrp com Fiscal Year Stark 23 Step 5 Forms Selection i System New st Reports Help Invoice lt DBL DBLBL This prints two LSR This prints one identical inwaices cide hy cid invaice an the chest LSR QC This prints TAB Invoice on the and right sides and detachable quality has a detachable control in the lower Quality Control in the tight and shipping Invoice Date 06 13 1997 Patient name John Smith Your Client s Name Your Address Your City State Zip Ship By Date 06 20 1997 Shade C2 Your Address Sub Total Discount 0 00 Total Tax Total Your Company Name Your Address Your City State Zip Invoice Page 1 Invoice Number 9706 0029 Invoice Date 06 13 1997 Patient name John Smith Ship By Date 06 20 1997 Your Client s Name Shade C2 Your Address Your City State Zip LSR Style Horizontal Pe
137. person and a dropdown list will appear so you can select a different name Talked With Type in the person that you spoke to on the phone corresponded via email or who you mailed a note to Start Time The time will automatically be filled in from the time you clicked the start call button End Time Click in the end time box to have the system automatically end the call and it will place a time in the box Call Notes Type in the notes for this call or correspondence Assigned To Assign this call or note to a specific person This will show up in the Assigned To reports This makes it easier to follow up on specific things later by creating a To Do option e Finished checkbox If the Assigned To option is being used the person the call was assigned to can place an X in the Finished box and it will be removed from their Assigned To area 143 New Menu Marketing Contacts NCEA CTaU E CA are ROl continued Section Call Grid NO O1 BRB WD CONDOR ON Adding a New Marketing Contact using New Menu 1 Enter the address into Address 1 City State and Zip United States is the default Country All other fields are optional Type in the phone into the Phone 1 field Type in the contact into the Contact field At the Sales Person dropdown list select a person from the list This is required before calls can be logged in Type in a follow up date in the Follow Up Date field This is optional but highly recommended All o
138. preference that is assigned to this account doctor Case Level Discount Tab at the Case Entry Screen This area allows someone to issue a discount as a dollar value or a percentage off of the total amount of the case Dr JEW CASH ACCOUNTat CASH ACCOUNT13 ntry Dr ID CU 13 CASH ACCOUNT at CASH ACCOUNT e Dollar Amount Place a dot in the circle to be able to type in a dollar value that will be used as a discount e Percentage Field 0 0000 Type Ina percentage that you want discounted off ritems Notes Jeeth Images Patient Codes Case Codes Case Level Discount 337 aas of the case in this field e Apply Button will do the following Dollar Amount Starting Amount s oo e Go through all the existing Products and Materials on this Case and ot A Remaining 0 00 remove any existing Discounts e Apply percentage PLUS any appropriate Remake Discount percentage i gg Clear Existing to each Product and Material A e Any new Products or Materials will get their percentage discount applied when they are added to the case e When you choose a Doctor for a Case if the doctor has an Account Level Discount then it will automatically be applied to the Case and you will see it in the textbox above 111 New Menu Case EAC LU mM Orskyem continued Case Level Discount Tab at the Case Entry Screen continued e Discount Amount Field Type in a dollar value Example If the case is worth 100 and you want to give them
139. product price list by department This Department will not affect materials Increase Decrease by oo Number of decimal places to round t e Department This drop down list allows you to select a department the products are assigned to To select all departments use the dropdown list and select the first blank option Otherwise to make these changes to only a certain department use the dropdown and choose that department S e Increase Decrease by This field allows you to type in a percentage positive or negative to make adjustments to the price list e Number of decimal places to round to This will tell the system how to round the dollar amount if you choose to For example When 2 is typed into the field it will round the price of the product to the nearest penny e Change Prices Button This button is used after the department percentage of change and how many decimals to round the price to has been specified Change Prices on a Product Price List by a Percentage Click on System Control Panel and then Price Lists Click on the name of the Price list under the Description column in the grid On the Edit Price List screen click on the Change Prices tab across the top Use the Department drop down list and choose a department Type a percentage in the Increase Decrease by field This can be a positive or negative number If you would like the price rounded to the nearest penny type in a number 2 in the Number of
140. report to work you must select an account Billing Collections S A 5 ios a S Production General Journal Labels Tax Reports Marketing Account History 103230 ase e Account drop down list Use the drop down list to select the name of the account e ID Account drop down list Use the drop down list to select the account by ID number e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format Scheduling Invoice Details List Account Ledger Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One System New Edit List Reports Help e Custom A dot in the circle will allow you to choose your EBI invoice Details List Report own start and end dates f e MTD A dot in the circle will fill in the Month To Date f Invoice Details List MTD starting and ending dates automatically Printer Brother HL 5250DN redirected 4 Tray 0 e YTD A dot in the circle will fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates automatically e Today A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date e Fiscal A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the H starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year Account D EKI Starting Date custom Fiscal MTD Preview or Print the Inv
141. state registration number and date is also available and will automatically be printed on all corre Q Statement spondence to the doctor To add a new account start at the Menu Bar click New and then Account Account a Doctor Note When setting up accounts and doctors YOU MUST set up the account and its location information before Product setting up the doctor information This is because each doctor needs to be assigned to an account and to an Material account location To view or edit an account that has already been created refer to the List Account or the Edit Ac Teda count section of the manual Marketing Contact Clinic doctors or groups of doctors can be defined and treated as one entity yet at the same time allow separate sales summaries on the statement for each doctor After defining each account and their locations it is necessary to assign doctor information to each account The Account record contains financial information and account location information The Doctor record contains personal information about each doctor Examples of Different Types of Accounts Type 2 If an account is an practice containing two or more doctors then you need to create a doctor record for Type 1 If an account is simply an individual you MUST each of the doctors in the office and assign each doctor create an account record and then assign the doctor to to the account you set up for that office the account Doctor Name at Account Name
142. t be able to find the new custom report to substitute it for the default report next System New Edit List Reports Help ieg IMOS 10 2307 3529 GEE Manage Reports This screen is used to assign individual parts of your reports to their p assistance To easily change your form type use the Simple Reports fi Saada E Custo tems Site lees ale ae This tab contro ustom Report Items are available Custe GetFileName LoadDesigner ReporiD ReportName ReportFileName Start by clicking AddCustomReport above Click on the GetFileName button on the left of the grid and browse to then type in a custom report name in the Report Name column Remove the check from the Close or Save box an more information on this procedure please consult the manual Close on Save or save changes Licance xe Note To use preset standard invoice work ticket or statement styles see the section covering Easy Report Manager 70 SMELT sl ale mm Ore al ine Mar li mm continued Manage Reports Continued Substitute a Custom Invoice for a Default Invoice 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Manage Reports 2 Go to the Report Functions tab and locate Invoices in the list under the App Report Name column 3 Click on the drop down list button in the Report Name Column third column and locate the custom report you want to use In this case we are using the CustomInvoiceMain invoice form that we saved in the Custom Repo
143. table of the marketing contact you wish to delete Place a date in the Date Retired field of the marketing contact that you would like to delete Click Save Changes on the Edit Marketing Contact screen or all your work will be lost Click List Marketing Contact then the Search button which will populate the table with all of your marketing contacts and then click the Marketing Contact Name in the table of the marketing contact you wish to transfer At Edit Marketing Contact click on the Send to Accounts button Then the button will grey out Click Save Changes on the Edit Marketing Contact screen or all your work will be lost Click List Marketing Contact then the Search button table will populate with all of your marketing contacts and then click the Marketing Contact Name in the table of the marketing contact you wish to add a call to Click on the Start Call button above the Call Grid This will add a new line in the call grid If the line does not appear verify that you have a sales person assigned to this marketing contact 144 Edit Menu Account Edit Menu System New Edit List Reports Help Account This area is used to pull up a specific account by name or by ID Account Doctor This area is used to pull up a specific doctor by name or by ID Doctor Product This area is used to pull up a specific product by name or by ID Product Material This area is used to pull up a specific material by name or by ID vod aca Ven
144. the department ea oe description Date Retired Radio Buttons Choose One Vendors e Ignore Placing a dot in the circle will show both active and retired departments on the es a ee report e Active Only Default Setting Placing a dot in the circle will show only the active de partments on the report e Retired Only Placing a dot in the circle will show only the retired departments on the report Labels Materials List Marketing Employees 1032207 ase Scheduling Departments Calls Assigned To Account Exp Date Reminders Sort Radio Buttons Choose One e Department ID Default setting Placing a dot in the circle will sort the report by the ID of the department e Department Description Placing a dot in the circle will sort the departments on the report in alphabetical order System New Edit List Reports Help OENES PEDAG Depts Report Departments Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 10 8307 ase ea IMOS Date Retired ignore oO Preview or Print the Departments List Report O Active Only Sort Department ID 1 Click on Reports General and then Departments a Gener 2 Choose a Date Retired option Active Only is the default setting 3 Choose how to sort the report Department ID is the default setting 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Oom o Preven a Note If the Ignore option is selected both active and retired departments will show up on the report
145. the name of the Account or Marketing CallDate Salesper Marketin nns sonID or employee Talked With Start and End CERAMI 06 08 2012 Mandi 10 29 AM 10 31 AM Ift vm 7 3 DIAMO 06 08 2012 Mandi vm 10 57 AM 10 56 AM lft vm Time CallNotes Assigned To and Finished Example If you want to know which accounts you have left voicemail for and have used the abbreviation vm you can type in vm and the grid below will list the calls Search in Search Notes Click on System Control Panel and then Call Tracking Click on the Search Notes tab in Call Tracking Select from the options of Accounts or Marketing Contacts Click in the Search Call Notes For field and type in a keyword The grid will automatically populate To clear the search criteria and search for something else click the Reset button at the bottom of the screen oR wNDNhN Assigned Calls Tab in Call Tracking GEE Call Tracking Using the Assigned Calls tab see Calls that are O All salesPersons Technicians Select an Employee from the Employee dropdown Searc assigned to the employee that is selected at the top Call Tracking en Account and click on their name below Then click Start C of the screen new record Enter the notes and click the End Time button another call click Reset and search for another Account EEEa E Assigned Calls A 10 RA 3 There are two different sections One is for Ac count Calls and one for Marketing Calls
146. the new call and enter in the name of the person you spoke to The Call Date Employee and Start Time will be filled in for you 5 Click in the Call Notes field on the new call and type in what the conversation was about 6 If necessary click in the Assigned To field and use the drop down list to select an employee this call needs to be followed up with Optional DO NOT click the Finished check mark box if you want this call to be assigned this is only checked after the person assigned has dealt with the call 7 Click the End Time field and this will fill in a time for the call OO 122 New Menu Account EAC LO as exerel0lai continued Ledger Account Locations Calls Doctors Dr Pref Defaults Technicians Add Doctor toctoud frie rustvame e __Joesrce gt 13 CASH ACCOUNT CASH Doctors Tab at Edit Account Screen The Doctor tab is used to add doctors to an account All cases are assigned to doctors not accounts so all accounts have to have at least one doctor Clicking the Add Doctor Button will bring up the Edit Doctor screen Refer to Edit Doctor section to enter doctors en Define your Account Doctor Preferences these preferences can print on the work ticket or can be viewed in Case Entry Ledger Dr Pref Defaults Tab at Edit Account Screen Pfaults SEEE e Global Dr Pref ID This column is used when there are global doctor preferences that have set up at System Control Panel Com
147. the people that work in the lab such as technicians salespeople drivers etc Add New Review m Completed Step 8 Accounts Locations Doctors Accounts are the practices that have a single or multiple locations that individual or multiple doctors work at Locations are the addresses you send bills and work to Doctors are assigned to Accounts and their individual Locations Add New Review m Popa thee an Step 9 Vendors optional Vendors are the companies you purchase materials from Add New Review im Completed Step 10 Production Steps Production Steps are defined to produce a given product This step is only necessary if you use the Scheduling module Add New Review m Completed Step 11 Products Products are the labor items you make such as crowns bridges dentures orthodontic appliances etc If you use Scheduling Add New Bein m Completed you would assign Production Steps here Step 12 Materials Materials are the items you purchase from a vendor such as gold teeth and attachments Add New Review m Completed Step 13 Doctors Tte ms optional This is a list of items you would typically receive from a Doctor that you would want noted on individual cases Perr Diiia Oo Completed Items such as a bite block articulator and more could be placed here Step 14 Calendar Add holidays and other days your lab is closed to your calendar Note that this is only necessary for users with the Production or Scheduling module and that US holidays and we
148. use the Select dropdown list and click GO 2 At Edit Vendors modify the items that need to be changed 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Vendors screen or all your work will be lost Deleting a Vendor Using List Vendor 1 Click List Vendor then the Search button table will populate with all of your vendors and then click the Vendor Name in the table of the vendor you wish to delete 2 Place a date in the Date Retired field of the vendor that you would like to delete 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Vendors screen or all your work will be lost Deleting a Vendor Using Edit Menu 1 At the Menu Bar click on Edit then Vendor At the Find Vendor box type in the vendor s Locator ID or use the Select dropdown list and click GO 2 Place a date in the Date Retired field of the vendor that you would like to delete 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Vendors screen or all your work will be lost Restoring a Deleted Retired Vendor 1 Any vendor that is deleted retired is still in the system but does not show up on reports To make a vendor active again click on List and then Vendor In the Search area place a check in the Show Retired checkbox The search can be further defined with the name of the vendor Click Search and the grid will be populated with all current and retired vendors Click on the name of the vendor that needs to become active From the Edit Vendors screen remove the date from the Retired Date field Click Save
149. useful fields related to materials are the Reorder Level and Reorder Quantity which are described below System New Edit List Reports Help Mai Case Search Case ieg Nos Statement Account 1032307 ase Doctor When setting up MATERIALS it is important that you define the fields that are in BOLD The BOLD fields are required All other fields are optional Product Material s Vendor eee ee ee ee RRR aaa a Marketing Contact System New Edit List Reports Help Ee telco Edit Materials S I M M Edit Materials Description OoOo Safety Info Unit Type Detinable Cost Special Codes In Stock il 1 Location el Pm amp B Material Codes MaterialCodel 10JE307 2529 ll See sections TAB Markup 1 See section Yendor Material Codes I Department Images Reorder Level 0 Lot Number Reorder Quantity ol Grouping Composition Oooo m Discountable m Invisible E Hazardous E Taxable Use this screen to define your billable materials E Allow Remake Discount such as gold teeth and attachments E Allow Commission memes eee l I I l i l i l l l i l l i l i l l i l i l i I I i l l l l l l l l I i l l l Related Material I Price i Edit Materials i l l l l l l i l l l l l l i l l l l l l l l l l l i l i l l l l l l Section Edit Materials e Lo
150. want to give the doctor a discount for paying his invoice early Example If you added a Invoice Term Period of 15 days left the Past Due field unchecked and set the Discount Percentage equal to 1 5 then the doctor would receive a 1 5 discount on the invoice if he pays for it in 15 days or less e Service Charge Percentage This defines the service charge percentage for this Invoice Term Period e Service Charge Amount A fixed charge can also be applied to an account by placing a value in this field For example place a fixed charge of 25 00 in this field if you want Lab Manager to add this charge to the account when the invoice reaches this Invoice Term Period e Date Retired Place a date in this field to delete or retire an Invoice Term Period e Highlight On Data Entry This function is not active at this time e Overridable If un checked then the terms can NOT be changed on the case e Due Date Day of Month If defined it will affect the due date of the invoice Example Type in 15 if the payment is due on the 15th of the month e Due Date Weeks If defined it will affect the due date of the invoice Example Type in 4 if the customer has 4 weeks to pay the bill e Due Date Calendar Days If defined it will affect the due date of the invoice Example Type in 30 if the customer has 30days from the time it is invoiced to pay 87 system Menu Accounting SIETE ols aia continued Invoice Terms continued Addin
151. wish to delete and use the dropdown calendar to assign a date If this is ever deleted Lab Manager will place a date in this field that will indicate the record has been deleted retired This will remove the item from your Doctor and Doctor Preferences To reactivate this globally highlight the date and press delete on your keyboard to remove the date OO 2 3 4 5 2 3 Adding a Preference to a Doctor 1 Click List Doctors then the Search button table will populate with all of your doctors At List Doctor tab click the account s Locator ID in the table At the Edit Doctors screen click the Preferences tab and then the Add Doctor Preference button at the bottom of the grid To the right of the Account Dr Prefs column click the Department drop down list and select the department you would like this preference assigned to In the Preference field type the text you would like to see on your work tickets and within cases Click Save Changes or all the work will be lost Modifying a Preference on a Doctor 1 Click List Doctors then the Search button table will populate with all of your doctors At List Doctor tab click the account s Locator ID in the table Click on the Preferences tab at the Edit Doctor screen Modify the preference that needs to be changed Click Save Changes or all the work will be lost Deleting a Preference From of a Doctor 1 Click List Doctors then the Search button table
152. with payment State m e nt Exa m p les These artist renditions are here to show you the paper styles we support We carry the DBL DBL i BL LSR LSR QC TAB LAB E oe ee ere EEA forms For more information pia ama lhe lah 273 call the sales department at 9705 0072 Sheldon Terry 800 677 1120 9705 0102 Pfaff Gordon 5 28 97 9705 0122 Nixon Richard 528 69 LSR Style Horizontal Perf 1 Part Blue Form 8 1 2 x 11 used with Laser Inkjet and Bubblet Over 30 days Over 60 days Over 90 days 0 00 0 00 0 00 Previous balance 218 60 Service charge 0 00 Current charges 3 336 21 Total charges 3 554 81 Payments 832 65 Please Pay this amount 2 722 16 Your Company Name Your Company Name Your Address Statement Your Address Statement Your City State Zip Your City State Zip Page 1 Page 1 Billing Date 06 31 1997 Billing Date 06 31 1997 Your Client s Name Your Client s Name Your Address Your Address Your City State Zip Your City State Zip DBL Stv CasetlType Patient Reference Date CaseffType Patient Reference yle 9602 0007 Mueller 5 09 97 9602 0007 Mueller 1 Part Blank Form Adjustment 888 Thank You 5109 97 Adjustment 888 Thank You 8 1 2 x11 Credit 123 Thank You 5 11 97 Credit 123 Thank You Hori tal Perf Discount 112 Thank You 11 97 Discount 112 Thank You rizon Credit Casd Mueller Mandi Thank You 5 15 97 Credit Casd Mueller Mandi Thank You HONZOn aL ES Payment 1111 Than
153. work will be lost me To Finish 0 in minutes Color o 0 0 0 Q Modify Existing Steps Label Mak E Include In Do Not Auto Calc Steps Per o enor Ed av 1 Click on System Production and then Steps a j p 2 At List Steps click on the name of the step under the Description col vents Fo umn How many of these steps 3 From the Edit Step screen modify the items needed can your lab produce on 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Sect st iners caja At this menu define which production steps will show up in reports System New Edit List Reports Help GEE Edit Steps Included In Reports Select Steps to be Included on Reports 1 Click on System Production and then Step Reporting 2 Under the Include In Report column place a check in the box next to the step EJ A 7 A c sa amp c Edit Steps Included in Reports you want included on reports 3 Check all steps needed 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost ATA m Remove Selected Steps from Reports 1 Click on System Production and then Step Reporting 2 Under the Include In Report column uncheck box next to the step you do not want included on Reports 3 Uncheck all steps to be removed 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost 33 Step 11 Products Setup Wizard Step 11 Products Products
154. 00 0 0000 Sales Tax Modify Existing Tax Rates 1 Click on System Accounting and then Tax Rates 2 The search area will appear and you choose from 2 options Type in the name of the Tax Rate and click Search or to see a whole list of tax rates leave the search area blank and just click Search 3 Click on the name of the Tax Rate item under the Description column 4 From this screen the description Tax Collector Name can be modified 5 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost System New Edit List Reports Help OEE Edit Tax Rates 1eg MYOS ni Add Additional Tax Rates x 1 Click on System Accounting and then Tax Rates 10 8307 ase Type a number in the Rate field nama Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost 2 Click on Add New button at the bottom of the screen and it will bring up the Edit Tax Rates screen 3 In the Description field type the name of the tax rate fone i Use the drop down list for Tax Collector and choose the name of the tax collector PE eR 6 Date Retired Delete Existing Tax Rates 1 Click on System Accounting and then Tax Rates 2 The search area will appear and you choose from 2 options Type in the name of the Tax Rate and click Search or to see a whole list of tax rates leave the search area blank and just click Search 3 Place a date in the Date Retired field 4 Click Save at the bottom of the s
155. 0000 0 0200 0 00 applies For example if the Description is he 30 x 10 0 015 Standard Past Due then to the riaht vou Taa al Modifying Existing Invoice Terms See 3A Click on System Accounting and then Invoice Terms 2 At the Search area will appear and you choose from two options Type in the name of the Invoice Term and click Search OR To see a whole list of Invoice Terms leave the search area blank and click Search 3 Click on the Description that you wish to modify and the Invoice Term Period grid will come up Make any necessary modifications to the description such as when things are due See 3A 4 Click Save Changes at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Deleting Existing Invoice Terms See 3B 1 Click on System Accounting and then Invoice Terms 2 The Search area will appear and you choose from two options Type in the name of the Invoice Term and click Search OR To see a whole list to see a whole list of Invoice Terms leave the search area blank and click Search 3 Click on the name of the Invoice Term under the Description column From the Edit Invoice Terms screen place a date in the Date Retired field See 3B 4 Click Save Changes at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost 88 System Menu Codes System Menu Codes User Definable Codes can provide an option for grouping like items Example This field can be used to group nnn See mate
156. 042 2012 Lee Richard 20 71 0 00 0 00 2 39 23 10 675 26 587 40 89 42 134 93 1 308 17 5 Dr John Killdare 1007 0001 1042 2012 Smith Sandy 98 00 i 0 00 x 109 27 0901 0001 1042 2012 Miller Jessica 84 00 i 0 00 i 93 66 0806 0005 1042 2012 Jackson Scott 84 00 y 0 00 i 93 66 0806 0002 1042 2012 Black Mark 166 00 J 1 00 186 20 0106 0002 1042 2012 Crouse Robert 91 00 i 0 00 106 20 525 00 A 1 00 s 590 99 1 200 26 593 44 90 42 195 88 1 899 16 184 Report Menu Billing Statements aooaa EA LTS mm Continued Statements System New Edit List Reports Help Main Accounting gt General gt Statements are printed at the end of the month and mailed to each account to summarize all of their activity for the current month Each statement will show the doctors beginning balance Main Invoices current charges payments past due amounts service charges and current balance due Production Invoice Register Labels gt Cash Receipts NOTE To select another standard invoice form go to System Control Panel and Easy Report Marketing gt Current Sales Manager To create a new statement job go to List and then Statements Scheduling gt _ 1038207 ase ea IMOS Year To Date Reports Print Statements by Month using the By Month tab Product Sales Material Sales e Statements Drop Down List This list will include all the state
157. 12 11 11 2012 X x Dr GeorgeFranks 0105 0010 Fields Mrs J 58 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 Ea Ea Dr GeorgeFranks 0105 0009 Price Richard 59 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 x Ea Dr GeorgeFranks 0105 0008 Lee Richard 60 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 x X Preview ES Ee Marketing Contact Labels Report System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting General Billing ieg IMOS ABC Dental Studio Ceramics Studio Denture Studio 567 N Main Street 8274 S Main Street 8585 N Main Street i ieii Phoenix AZ 85016 Phoenix 4Z 85016 Phoenix amp 4Z 85016 M Labels Accounts Marketing Doctors Scheduling Products Use this screen to print labels with the Marketing Contact Name and Address This is de Materials signed to print on an Avery 5160 style label sheet which provides 30 different labels per sheet Employees Vendors Sort Radio Buttons Choose One Salespersons Locator ID A dot in the circle will sort the labels in numerical order menia Name A dot in the circle will sort the labels in alphabetical order Marketing Contacts Address1 A dot in the circle will sort the labels by address ileal dickies City A dot in the circle will sort the labels by city State A dot in the circle will sort the labels by state Postal Code A dot in the circle will sort the labels by postal or zip BOGE Mktg Contact Labels Report code 3 e Phone A dot in the circle will sort the labels by phone number from the Marketing Cont
158. 18 219 220 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 233 233 Production Reports e Work Tickets e Lab Status e Doctors Production YTD e Product Production e Material Production e Account Production e Material Usage e Cases at a Glance e Case Tracking e Material Reorders e Material Remakes Usage e Outsourced Cases e Quotes e Daily Delivery List e Delivery Report Labels Reports e Accounts e Doctors e Products e Materials e Employees e Vendors e Salespersons e Invoices e Marketing Contacts e Dr Account Locations Marketing Reports e Marketing Contacts e Marketing Face Sheet e Marketing Follow Up Call List e Marketing Calendar Scheduling Reports e Case Completion e Technician Production e Steps Past Due e Cases Due e Cases To Be Finished Early e Step Status e Product Steps e Production Steps Help About View PDF Manual TM y rE Manage Wzesion Lab Manager v7 System Requirements Billing Module Case Entry Invoices Statements and Financial Reports Includes invoices statements and a variety of reports on your accounts receivable Know what your doctors owe and what they have paid Easy access to the details on any case Microsoft Windows 8 Windows 7 Vista and XP you have ever entered past and present 1 GHz or faster 32bit or 64bit processor Production Module Requires Lab Manager v7 Billing module 1 GB RAM or more memory Includes case mana
159. 2 Click the Material name in the table of the material you wish to edit 3 At Edit Material modify the items that need to be changed 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Materials screen or all your work will be lost 152 List Menu Vendors amp Marketing Contacts List Menu Case Completion Cases Completion at List Menu Coming Soon Cases Accounts Doctors Payments Products Materials Case Completion 1032307 ase Vendors Marketing Contacts Statements Invoices List Menu Vendors Vendors at List Menu The many List screens are used to view a list of items or locate information The list might contain all of the items or it might be limited to just a few of the available items Example At the List Vendors screen in the search area using no search criteria will give you a list containing ALL vendors in the system On the other hand in the search screen if you search for a specific vendor it will pull up all the vendors that have that word in it See the Navigation Tools section that covers searching and sorting in the List Menu 3 System New Edit List Reports Help gt System New Edit List Reports Help 4 oad A s 3 m Oand or Oand or IB show Retired IB show sau A Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Search Field 3 a a mE gji aji a S Function Function Function p Contaire LocatonlD ATA Name na Address1 aA Pamay Value Primary Value Prim
160. 2 9 15 13 AM 10 12 2012 9 14 26 AM 10 12 2012 9 12 46 AM 1032307 ase Print or Preview a Saved Aged Trial Balance 2 1 Click on Reports Accounting and then Aged Trial Bal 2 2 On the Existing Jobs tab use the drop down list to select a saved Aged Trial Balance 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen This report includes e Account ID e Account Name e Last Paid Date Aged Trial Balance e Last Statement Balance Your Company Name si e Amount of Over Payment Acct ID AccountName LastPaid LastStrt Over Paid Current Payments Oto30 31to60 61to90 91 SC Due y Acct ID _AccountName Last Paid__LastStmt_ OverPaid Current Payments 0to30 31to60 61to90 M S Due Current Invoiced Charges 11 Dental Laboratory 374 42 0 00 0 00 0 00 374 42 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 374 42 P t 2 Dr George Franks 1 173 24 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 173 24 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 173 24 e rayments 5 Dr John Killdare 154 80 0 00 0 00 0 00 154 80 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 154 80 e 0 to 30 Days Field z pnu nai an pa nA nn nA nan nn NR e 31 to 60 Days Field QB QB QB QB e 61 to 90 Days Field e 91 Day Field e Service Charges S C e Amount Due e Totals for all Flelds 159 Report Menu Accounting Aged Trial Balance Report Menu Accounting Aged Trial Balance Screen and Reports System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting Aged Trial Balance Short General Aged Trial Balance The Aged Tria
161. 41 142 142 143 143 143 143 143 143 New Menu Case Search Screen Case Case Entry Screen e Main Tab e Products Grid e Materials Grid e Options on Saving a Case e How to Enter a New Case e Doctors Items Tab e Notes Tab e Teeth Tab e Images Tab e Patient Code Tab e Dr Preferences Tab e Case Level Discount Tab e Account History Tab e Outsourcing Tab Payments Refunds Screen Bulk Payment Entry Screen Statement Screen Account Information e Account Information Screen e Ledger e Data Tab e Financial Tab e Notes Tab e History Tab e Default Tab e Invoice Tab e Payments Tab e Account Locations e Calls Tab e Doctors Tab e Doctor Preferences Tab e Technicians Tab e Add Modify Delete Restore Accounts Doctor Information e Doctors Information Screen e Add Modify Delete Restore Doctors e Preferences Tab e Image Tab e Technicians Tab Product Information e Product Information Screen e Add Modify Delete Restore Products e Price Tab for Price Lists e Related Products Tab e Related Materials Tab e Code Tab e Notes Tab e Steps Tab e Image Tab Material Information e Material Information Screen e Add Modify Delete Restore Materials e Material Codes Tab e Related Material Tab e Image Tab Vendor Information e Vendor Information Screen e Add Modify Delete Restore Vendors e Vendor Code Marketing Contact Information e Marketing Contact Information Screen e Follow up Time and Date e Main Tab e Co
162. 5 0004 Preparatory Prep Prep 15 00 O 00 0 00 0105 0004 Frame VWWax up VWaxup WWaxup 15 00 0 00 0 00 Tech Total 30 00 0 0 00 Grand Total 6 50 00 0 00 226 Reports Menu Scheduling Steps Past Due A T ool aLe T o 0IL ETATE continued Steps Past Due Report System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting General The Steps Past Due Report lists all cases with steps that are past due It reports by Case the status Pan Patient Product Step and Units The report totals this information by Case and Department and an overall Grand Total Billing Production Labels Marketing e Department drop down list Select a department from the list to filter the report Scheduling Case Completion 1012207 ase ea IMOS Technician Production Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Custom A dot in the circle to choose your own start and end dates e MTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and ending dates e YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates e Today A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending date
163. Adding a New Doctor from the Edit Account screen Save the Doctor s information and that will bring you back to the Edit Account screen Click Save New on the Edit Account screen or all your work will be lost ONONA WD Modifying an Existing Account Using List Accounts 1 Click List Accounts then the Search button table will populate with all of your accounts In the table click on the Account Name to be ed ited 2 At the Edit Account screen modify the items that need to be changed 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Account screen or all your work will be lost Modifying an Existing Account Using the Edit Menu 1 At the Menu Bar click on Edit then Account At the Find Account box type in the account s Locator ID or use the Select drop down list and click GO 2 At the Edit Account screen modify the items that need to be changed 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Account screen or all your work will be lost Deleting an Account Using List Accounts 1 Click List Accounts then the Search button table will populate with all of your accounts In the table click on the Account Name to be de leted 2 At the Edit Account screen place a date in the Date Retired field Deleting Retiring an Account also makes the doctors that are assigned to this account unavailable in Case Entry 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Account screen or all your work will be lost Deleting an Account Using the Edit Menu 1 At t
164. Admin Password Import 5 Data Before you can use Lab Manager you need to fal LM 7 Server Tool Backup a Company DB Restore a Company DB Server Tool Config Set up a Master Database using the Lab Manager Server Tool epee a elete 4 Company 1 Right click on the Server Tool icon Change License 2 Left click on Run As or Run As Administra EDLE SS tor If Run As is used you should see a Server Help check box with the text of Protect my com Setup A New Server puter and data from unauthorized program ac tivity P This operation should only be performed on the computer that is to act as your server 3 Uncheck this box and click OK When the E CALMES erverT ooh LMDBs program opens click on the Server Menu Root Directory for External Company Files C LMB ServerT oolKLMDBs ExternalFiles then on Setup New Lab Manager 4 You should see a screen similar to this one If If the paths above are correct click the Run button below Status Messages you used all of the default settings during the Hee esas DateD Message installation process then click on the Run Testing Connection To SOL Server 04 10 2006 button at the bottom of the screen This proc ess may take several minutes i vou wili Raow ae process hascompleied E C successfully when you see the message in the table say Finished You may now close this screen l _showMe 6 Click Close to exit
165. AssignedTo Finished _ A 62 system Menu Control Panel SET Ce el ale mm Ore al ine Mar li mm continued Call Tracking Continued Call Grid in Call Tracking Section Call Grid See example of full screen on previous page Use this grid to document calls or correspondence with doctors or marketing contacts e Start Call button After selecting Exp Date fF an account or marketing contact click the Start Call bution to start a C Fai a new line in the Call Grid and it b 04 17 2012 Rosalie M 8 16 AM 8 17 AM ift 800 o will automatically fill in the Call 12 13 2011 Rosalie M DWNLD 1 36 PM 1 39 PM DWNLD PRM Ift vm that ightwant to look at Date Start Time and Employee PRO instead name You can not start entering 08 19 2011 Rosalie M vm 8 44 AM 08 45 30 lft 800 told ablout sale NAM OLIN Daralia hA sern 313 1 ARA 33 1 AKA QTE hillina a call into the grid without first assigning an employee e Call Grid Enter calls for accounts or marketing contacts The call grid will list the Call Date Employee name Talked With contact person Start Time of call End Time of call Call Notes Assigned To and Finished check box To delete a call in the call grid click on the Triangle to the left of the Call Date and click delete on the keyboard e Call Date Automatically fills when the Start Call is clicked Modify the date by clicking on the date then click on the calendar prompt and change the date e Employee Na
166. Billing Collections Production General Journal Tax Radio Buttons Choose One O Labels mee A Taxes Invoiced by Collector Taxes By Collector Select to print a report showing Marketing liccnusd Histor taxes by Tax Collector for a given time period S T EE B Taxes Invoiced to Taxes Collected Use this screen to print a report showing the tax Arai tosses amount invoiced for each account for the period defined by the Starting and Ending dates C Taxes Invoiced by Rate Taxes Collected 2 SR 5S ata ann Ui et ea ea al ete Hcl Tax Reports much was done in taxable sales and what the Tax Reports actual tax liability is from those sales e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Tray 0 using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by bee SELELI IDE lype ortae repart you would Taxes Invoiced by Collector Taxes Invoiced to using the calendar function or type in the date Taxes Invoiced by Rate in MM DD YYYY format Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One e Custom Place a dot in the circle to choose your own start and end dates see Next select the date range you would like Starting Date 44 91 2012 e MTD Place a dot in the circle to have it fill in Eeoa ue the Month To Date MTD starting and ending dates automatically e YTD Place a dot in the circle to have it fill in the Year To Date YTD startin
167. Cases Accounts The many List screens are used to view a list of items or locate information The list might contain all of the items iae or it might be limited to just a few of the available items Payments oe Products Example At the List Materials screen in the search area using no search criteria will give you a list containing Materials ALL materials in the system On the other hand in the search screen if you search for a specific material like gold 2 Case Completion then it will pull up all the materials that have the word gold in them Vendors See the Navigation Tools section that covers searching and sorting in the List Menu System New Edit List Reports Help GEE List Materials search Oand or Oand or E showRetired E show sau Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Search Field 3 i Function Description VY LocatoID Y UnitType VY Cost VY InStock W Markup Function Function Contains gt ADJUSTMENT 68 Each 1 00 351 661 0 0000 Primary Value Primary Value Primary Value sd ADJUSTMENT 69 Each 1 00 83 780 0 0000 P20 sen ea IMOS Add a New Material Using the List Material 1 At the Menu Bar click List Materials and the Add New button at the bottom of the screen 2 For full instructions see the New Materials section of this manual Modify a Material Using List the Materials 1 Click List Materials then the Search button The grid will list all of your materials
168. Cofectore e Add New Button Click this button to add an additional Tax Rate to ee i e A Doctor who s business is within the limits of the Tax Category the city of Phoenix would be subject to City of Phoenix tax for taxable items Additionally because the city of Phoenix is City Paradise Vall enclosed by the County of Maricopa the Doctor would also have to pay Maricopa County Sate The city of Phoenix is in the state of Arizona so the a Modifying an Existing Tax Category Elum List Tax Categories search 1 Click on System Accounting and then Tax Categories Tax Categories 2 The Search area will appear and you can choose from 2 options Type I p I rtedFLAGST 01 03 2011 in the name of the Tax Category and click Search OR To see a whole oe 3 Imported Non Tax 01 03 2011 list to see a whole list of Tax Categories leave the search area blank Imported YOUNG 01 03 2011 and click Search piniaiitachNon Tax 01 03 2011 3 Click on the name of the Tax Category under the Description column 4 From the Edit Tax Categories select the Description to be modified or the Tax Rates can be added 5 Click Save Changes at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Oo manwe Export To Excel Export To PDF System New Edit List Reports Help 10323071 2S2 poem System New Edit List Reports Help DEDE List Tax Categories SEE Edit Tax Cats 1032207 ase Oand or Oand or E show Retired
169. Company Preferences and Settings At the Edit Company Preferences screen click the Global Dr Pref tab Click the Add Global Dr Preference button across the bottom of the grid A dropdown list will appear below the DepartmentID heading Select the Department you would like this preference assigned to In the Preference field type the text you would like to see on your work tickets and within cases Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all your work will be lost NO O1 B WD 47 system Menu Control Panel SET dale Ore al ine Mar li mm continued Edit Company Preferences and Settings Screen continued System New Edit List Reports Help Case Related Tab at Edit Company Preferences Use the Case Related tab to adjust case number length sort orders types of tooth charts and remake discounts Account Defaults Tab at Company Preferences Use the Account Default tab to define global settings for accounts OEE Company Prefs 103230 ase Edit Company an i di Account Defaults UserInterface ieg IMOS Case Number Length The first two numbers of the Case Number are the year Case Number Lengt 20 and the second two numbers are the month This part of the case number Lap 1001n Numbering can NOT be modified Example 1206 0001 Case Number Length applies un to the numbers AFTER the dash that CAN BE MODIFIED By default this is Rems Received Sort Order designed to print or show 4 digits
170. D This is the ID that the system automatically assigns to the Material Code e Description This is the name of the Material Code e Date Retired This is the date that the Material Code has been retired deleted e Show Retired This checkbox is used to show the retired Material Codes in the list If the retired codes are not showing checkmark the box and it will add in the retired codes System Menu Codes Sysiem New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel Case Entry Production enu Calendar Accounting Case Admin Tools Vendor Exit Employee Product Material Marketing Patient Additional Material Codes 4 5 6 Click on System Code and then Material 3 At the Edit Material Codes screen click on Add New button at the bottom of the screen In the new line item in the grid under the Description column type the name of the Material Code Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until all new material codes have been entered You do not have to type a Material Code ID as an ID will be assigned automatically when the changes have been saved Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Modify Existing Material Codes 1 2 3 Click on System Code and then Material At the Edit Material Codes screen click on and modify the name under the Description column Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Delete Existing M
171. D starting and end ing dates Today A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date Fiscal YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year Unstatemented A dot in the circle will fill in the start and end date for cases that have not yet been statemented Example Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want the ieg IMOS 1032307 ase System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting gt General b Billing b Production gt Labels b Marketing gt Scheduling gt Work Tickets Lab Status Doctors Production YTD Product Production Material Production Account Production Material Usage Cases ata Glance Case Tracking Material Reorders Materials Remake Usage Outsourced Cases Quotes Daily Delivery List Delivery Report date range of current unstatemented cases to start with first unstatemented case dated 8 5 12 The system will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today In Process checkbox A check in the box to show cases that have not been invoiced or statemented Invoiced checkbox A check in the box to show cases that have been invoiced Statemented checkbox A check in the box to show cases that have been statemented System New Edit List Reports Help Preview or Print the Material Remake Usage 1 Click on Reports Scheduling and then Mate
172. EA PR 4 At the small menu left click Choose File PHE T T 5 This will cause windows to display a common Select an Image browse window B amp E ngstylesl 6 Use the Select an Image window to locate your image Click on the image and then click on the Open button 7 Athumbnail view of your image will appear in the Image screen Lab Manager does NOT store any images It only displays those images you have pointed to It links to the image If you are adding images to cases make sure you save them at Caselmages and backup associated files with the LM Server tool 8 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost My Recent Documents 4 Desktop My Documents PE My Computer View the Image in High Resolution 1 After an image has been added to a doctor it can be viewed in high resolution To view the high resolution image right click on it and then left click on View Full 2 To close the image box use the Red X at the top of the pop up screen laces Deleting an Image from Edit Materials 1 On the material that needs to have a photo deleted click on the Image tab from the Edit Materials screen Right click the Image that is al ready saved on the material 2 You will see a small menu containing the words Add and Delete Left click on Delete 3 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost 139 My Network Fil
173. ENER varoa EEUN S Into billed as 06 27 2012 Payoff 1108 0064R Adjustment Payoff 1108 006 e Payment This column shows the amount that the payment was issued as e Notes This column shows notes that were issued on the payment anaana rs ed Print Quote Quick Return Return Find Searc Outsourcing Tab at the Case Entry Screen Case Entry Dr 108 EME 13 cast account at casn account bg The Outsourcing tab in both Products and Material areas is used to notate which vendor the case was sent to and the date due back Main DoctorItems Notes Jeeth Images Patient Codes Case Codes 1 0 e i BO r eel al a OULSOLICING e Default Outsource Vendor drop down list This is a drop down of predefined vendors which cases can be sent to for outsourcing purposes Default Outsource Vendor R Adding an Outsourced Vendor to a Case Helpful Blue Text Will Be Here Soon 1 On the case that needs to have a notation of which Out sourced Vendor a case was sent to click on Outsourcing tab from the Case Entry screen 2 Use the drop down list for Default Outsource Vendor and select the name of the company the item was sent to 3 Click in Save and Close or all your work will be lost 112 New Menu Payment New Menu I Payment System New Edit List Reports Help Payments at New Menu Case Search Case Payment ieg IMOS Bulk Payment Payments are added as Accounts Doctors send in checks pay by credit card or are
174. FF Note We recommend saving images to Case Images in the C LMDBs companyname Caselmages folder Lab Manager does NOT store any images It only displays those images you have pointed to It links to the image If you are adding images to cases make sure you save them at Case Images and backup associated files with the LM Server tool Choose File Adding An Image at Edit Products Name tab click the product s Locator ID in the table Click the Image Tab at the Edit Product screen Right click inside the Image window in Lab Manager as shown to the right Amenu containing the words Choose File View Full and Delete will appear Left click on Choose File 5 Acommon Select an Image window will appear 6 Use the Select an Image window to locate your image Find and click on your im age then click the Open button 7 A thumbnail view of your image will appear in the Lab Manager Image screen Lab Manager does NOT store any images It only displays those images you have pointed to It links to the image If you are adding images to cases make sure you save them at Caselmages and backup associated files with the LM Server tool 8 Click Save Changes at the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost BW DY View the Image in High Resolution 1 After an image has been added to a doctor it can be viewed in high resolution To view the high resolution image right click on it and then left click on View
175. Find the related material in the grid that needs to be modified and change it 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Materials screen or all your work will be lost Deleting a Related Material from a Material 1 At the Edit Materials screen locate the Related Materials tab Find the related material in the grid that needs to be deleted 2 Click the box to the left of the Related Materials name This will select the line On your keyboard press delete 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Materials screen or all your work will be lost Material Codes Related Materials mage Image Tab at Edit Material Screen Sections TABS This Image tab allows the user to save an image of the material Compatible Image File Formats BMP GIF JPG PNG and TIFF Note We recommend saving images to Case Images in the C LMDBs companyname Caselmages folder Choose File Lab Manager does NOT store any images It only displays those images you have pointed to It links to the image If you are adding images to cases make sure you save them at Case Images and backup associated i f files with the LM Server tool Adding An Image at Edit Materials 1 Click List Materials then the Search button table will populate with all of your materials Click the material name in the table of the material you wish to edit 2 Click the Image tab at the Edit Materials screen 3 Right click inside the Image window in Lab Manager as shown to the right E
176. Full 2 To close the image box use the Red X at the top of the pop up screen Deleting an Image from Edit Products 2 Right click the Image that is already saved on the product 3 At the menu containing the words Add and Delete left click on Delete 1 Click List Products then the Search button table will list all your doctors At Product Select an Image Look in O Styles v Je CurrentWorkingStyle isl s 4 My Recent Documents Desktop et Ee My Documents My Computer z My Network Places File name Files of type 1 Find the product that needs to have a photo deleted Click the Image tab from the Edit Products screen 4 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost 135 New Menu Materials CAC LOMA EeLtsla elem continued Materials are the items you purchase from a vendor such as gold teeth and attachments As materials are things that you would normally inventory Lab Manager has several fields in the material area that are unique to an inventory control system Example Lab Manager allows you to enter your purchase price for the material and then define a mark Sareea up By doing this Lab Manager s inventory reports can show you how much profit you made on the materials used Fur sia Brani ther more as you add materials to a case the quantity used is deducted from the In Stock value for the material Other
177. GEE Edit Steps Edit Steps ieg IMOS Modify Existing Steps 1 Click on System Production and then Steps 2 At List Steps click on the name of the step under the Description Description Step number 1 Stepi 10 2307 ase column 3 From the Edit Steps screen modify the items needed coef O 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Value 0 00 Time To Finish 0 in minutes l Color 0 0 0 0 Adding New Steps Label Max E 1 Click on System Production and then Steps sons X Do Not Auto Calc ea g 2 At List Steps click Add New at the bottom of the screen z 3 From the Edit Steps screen type in the Description Value Time S to Finish and review the checkboxes How many atihan tae 4 Define how many units can be done per day on the right side of the can your lab produce on screen each of these days 5 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Deleting Existing Steps 1 Click on System Production and then Steps 2 At List Steps click on the name of the step under the Description column 3 Place a date in the Date Retired field or click the Delete button at the bottom of the screen 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost 79 System Menu Calendar lt 4 System Menu Calendar System New Edit List Reports Help a r i Control Panel gt Start at System and then click on Cale
178. Invoice the case Save and New Saves the case but does not invoice it You are then presented with a new Case Entry screen where a new case can be entered Save and Invoice Saves the case and opens the Edit Invoices screen From here you can edit the invoice terms and the invoice date that prints on the invoice Invoice w Defaults Saves and Invoices the case with the default invoice terms and today s date This is the typical choice for most custom ers when invoicing Cancel This will exit out of the case and will not save it Print Quote This creates a printable quote instead of invoicing the case Quick Return This option is only available after the case has been statemented Return This option is only available after the case has been statemented Schedule This button is used to schedule the steps of the case This feature is only available with the Scheduling Module Continued on next page 108 New Menu Case EAC LO Mm t continued Doctor Items Tab at the Case Entry Screen OFI Doctor Items BANT Cae rye a a ole Te Case Level Di Doctor Items are any items that you receive from a doctor that you want to Doctor Rems keep track of Lab Manager comes with several doctor items already defined Doctor Rem Notes Date Created however you can create your own list of items To create your own list of items gt Ulmpressio ss go to the top of the screen and click on System Case Entry and then Doctor Rite Bl
179. L 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 101207 ase ea yndy0ys Preview or Print the Vendor Labels 1 Click on Reports Labels and then Vendors Sort By lLocatoriD 2 Choose how to sort the labels Oname 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen System New Edit List Reports Help Salesperson Labels Accounting gt General gt Billy Bob Mueller Jack Johnson Mandi Mueller Main Mi Billing gt 1718 E Rose Lane 1234 E Rose Lane 1718 E Rose Lane Production gt Phoenix AZ 65016 Phoenix AZ 85000 Phoenix AZ 85016 Accounts rowo asen ea IMOS Marketing gt Doctors Scheduling gt Products Martha Ray Mueller Rosalie Mueller Sally Smith Materials 1716 E Rose Lane 1716 E Rose Lane 1716 Rose Lane Employees Phoenix AZ 85016 Phoenix AZ 85016 Phoenix AZ 65016 Vendors Salespersons Invoices Use this screen to print mailing labels with the Salesperson Name and Address This is designed celine rabies to print on an Avery 5160 style label sheet which provides 30 different labels per sheet Dr Account Locations Sort By Radio Buttons Choose One e Locator ID A dot in the circle will sort the labels in numerical order e Name A dot in the circle will sort the labels in alphabetical order System New Edit List Reports Help ORME Sales Pers RF Sales Person Labels Preview or Print the Salesperson Labels Printer Brother HL 5370D0W series Co
180. L 5370DW series Tray 0 2 Choose a Date if it is not showing the correct date already 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen 11 27 2012 This report lists Case Summary e Number of Cases Units Received Today Lab Status Report as of 10 12 2012 e Due Today e To Be Shipped Today Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here e Invoiced Case Summary Units Countable Units only e Open Cases Units Amount e Closed Received Today 0 0 0 00 e OnHold Due Today 0 0 0 00 Ship Today 0 0 00 MTD Month to Date Summary invoiced Today 17 1 168 58 e Beginning Accounts Receivable Balance Invoiced 17 1 168 00 e MTD Sales Open 1 1 230 00 e MTD Adjustments oa a s ro e MTD Credits e MTD Credit Card Payments Receivables e MTD Discounts Days Amount Due Past Due Number of Accounts e MTD Payments 1 607 52 0 13 e MTD Refunded Tax 1 374 42 3 e MTD Service charges 30 1 487 69 lt e Ending or Present Balance Sales Payments and Credits Payments Breakdown Beginning Balance 906 68 Check 3 042 85 Receivable Summary Unstatemented Sales 0 00 QB 3042 85 e Totals Outstanding in Current 30 60 and Unstatemented Payrnents 3 042 85 QB 90 Day Fields Unstatemented Adjustments 1 899 16 QB e Number of Doctors in Each Category Service Charges 0 00 OB Present Balance 2 030 37 Projected Sales Total Working Days This Month Days Worked So Far 199 Report lt elem mm 010 Wm ea Kelo Toii o 1E co
181. LD CR 5 0000 367 63 3 57 UPFER BITE Filt 2 0000 B41 1 20 06 Totals 17 0000 1 168 58 188 Report Menu Billing Material Sales aooaa Mm md ale mm Continued Material Sales Report System New Edit List Repos Help 3 Accounting gt The Material Sales Report shows a dollar value for materials sold during a specific time period 2 Mai eee ain Invoices Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One Ex Production gt Invoice Register e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the epee ee date in MM DDIYYYY format A e je e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the date amp aaki Statements in MM DD YYYY format Year To Date Reports e Custom Place a dot in the circle to choose your own start and end dates MoR aeS e MTD Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the Month To Date MTD merre starting and ending dates Account Analysis e YTD Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the Year To Date YTD Product Price List starting and ending dates Materials Price List e Today Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the starting and ending Commissions dates with the current date Taxes with Sales e Fiscal YTD Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the starting and FlighTags ending dates of the Fiscal Year FlighTag
182. List Reports Help OEE List Invoice Terms Search Invoice Terms ieg MIYOS Description Y HighlightOnDataEntry WY Overridable Wv DueDateDayOfMonth VW DueDateWeeks VY Due Date Calendar Days 7 DateCreated VY DateRetired W gt Cash xX xX 0 1 08 18 2003 Standard Net Ter E4 0 30 08 18 2003 Special Net Terms g Eq 0 0 60 10 07 2003 Net 90 10 8307 ase System New Edit List Reports Help Eee eles Edit Invoice Terms Edit Invoice Terms Description Schhrieiye een Invoice Term Periods BB Display Terms in Case Entry NumberOfDays PastDue DiscountPercentage ServiceChargePercentage ServiceChargeAmount DateRetired 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 0 0000 0 0000 0 00 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 103230 ase X Overridable gt 30 DueDateDayOtMonth J DueDateWeeks OS Due Date Calendar Days 120 ieg IMOS Ed El M ES E e X Close on Save or Cancel Sees M eU ema ea Some of the options that can be defined for each Invoice Term Period include e Number of Day This field defines the length of the billing term usually in increments of 30 days e Past Due When checked it tells Lab Manager that when an unpaid balance gets this old it is time to apply a service charge e Discount Percentage This field can be used to cause Lab Manager to apply a discount to an account when the invoice is paid in less than a given time period This is great when you
183. NH PLST 10 POS 28 1x8 NH PLST 20 POS 27 1x8 NH PLST 33 POS fi Department Billing Billing Billing Billing Billing Billing Billing Billing Billing Billing Billing Billing Denture Denture Denture Denture Denture Denture Denture Denture Billing Billing 192 Your Company Name Goes Here Sell 50 14 53 10 41 25 39 23 23 03 21 51 26 00 26 50 21 65 21 65 25 20 23 31 19 25 19 25 19 25 19 25 7 20 19 25 7 00 7 00 7 00 6 46 Report Menu Billing Sales Commission aooaa mm mdi ale mm Continued Commissions Report System New Edit List Reports Help 3 Accounting The Sales Commission Report which shows the sales commission amounts earned by each f piahia salesperson By default this report will show you information for everyone in the current D Billing Invoices month Production Invoice Register e f Labels Cash Receipts e Salesperson dropdown Select an individual Salesperson To include Salespersons that Marketing Current Sales have been retired click on the R button in the dropdown list Scheduling Statements oO A o o A a o Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One en isis e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the Material Sales date in MM DD YYYY format PPE EE e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the oe EE date in MM DD YYYY format
184. New Edit List Reports Help Main Accounting gt This report prints a general list of Account ID Name and Expiration Date It is sorted 2 General Accounts alphabetically Choose the Label Option to create labels with the Address used in the Main Billing Doctors Statement Location Production gt Products a Labels Materials List Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One meet ite e Starting Date Field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in Scheduling Departments the date in MM DD YYYY format Vendors e Ending Date Field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in Doctor Preferences the date in MM DD YYYY format Calls Assigned To e Custom Place a dot in the circle to choose your own start and end dates Account Exp Date Reminders e MTD Place a dot in the circle to have it fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and ending dates automatically e YTD Place a dot in the circle to have it fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates automatically e Today Place a dot in the circle to have it automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date e Fiscal YTD Place a dot in the circle to have it automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year e Unstatemented Not applicable on this screen e Include On Hold checkbox Optional Place a check in the box to include accounts that have been put on hold Printer e Inc
185. OJEIO ase e DOUBLE ARROWS pointing up Shortcut Items list appears e DOUBLE ARROWS pointing down Shortcut Items list disappears e Clicking on the arrows toggles the Shortcut Items list between visible and hidden Using the Shortcut Bar 1 Hover your mouse over the Shortcut Bar button and the shortcut slide out will appear 2 Click on the report or item that you wish to view If the item is not listed see the instructions on Editing the Shortcut Bar See below 3 Move your mouse away from the Shortcut Bar and it will slide back to the left Editing the Shortcut Bar Hover your mouse over the Shortcut Bar button and the slide out will appear Right click in the white area on the Shortcut Items and then click on Manage Shortcut Items At the Edit Shortcut Bar Items screen check the box es under the Selected column of item s you want to appear on the Shortcut Bar slide out Once all desired items have been selected click Save at the bottom of the screen Click Close to exit the Edit Shortcut Bar Items screen ORAON a System Mew Edit List Report Case Locator Bar Case Locator The Case Locator bar is used to quickly locate a specific case by Case Number Pan Number or Patient name for any cases not yet statemented ieg jnIyW0Ys Stick Pin at Case Locator screen Using the Case Locator 1 Hover your mouse over the Case Locator button and the case locator slide out will appear 2 There are 3 way
186. Password The Server Tool program was installed along with the Lab Manager program stand alone and server installations only To summarize you must always run the Server Tool as an administrator Import v5 Data Backup a Company DB Restore a Company DB Server Tool Config The Server Tool program performs several key functions which include e The creation of company databases The keying or unlocking of features in a database Data upgrades The backing up of a company database The restoring of a company database The deleting of a company database Miscellaneous administrative tasks Delete a Company DB Change License Aging Scheduler Misc Admin Tools Copy Database Attach Company DB It is important that all Lab Manager users exit the program before using any of these functions Setup New Lab Manager on a Server or Single Computer Lab Manager Server Tool Setup New Lab Manager Server Help Setup New Lab Manager Clear Logged In Users When you initially open the Server Tools it will ask for your company name Enter this just as you would want it to appear on your invoice and statements This setup function is used only once after installing Lab Manager on a single computer or on the server to create a master Lab Manager database Once performed the menu option will become unavailable Upgrade Server Create New Company Database Reset
187. Previously Printed Invoices If after printing an invoiced case Product Sales you find a mistake on the invoice display the case in the Case Entry screen Click on the Delnvoice button at the bottom of the screen and make the corrections At the bottom of the Case Entry screen re invoice the case by clicking Invoice or Invoice with Defaults Material Sales Account Analysis Product Price List Materials Price List Note To select another standard invoice form go to System Control Panel and Easy Report Manager Commissions Taxes with Sales FlighTags FlighTags Travel Credits Preview or Print Invoices System New Edit List Reports Help S WOEDE Invoices Report 1 Click on Reports Billing and then Invoices 3 2 All cases that have an invoiced status will show up in the area if they have Invoices Soeoeree 2 n ot b e en pri nt e d Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 2 Invoices are usually printed daily and delivered with the case or mailed to the doctor 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen o itemizing the charges on a case This table shows a list of the invoices that need to be 4 Did the Invoices Print Correctly Once the invoices have printed click printed To print these invoices simply click on the print button at the bottom of the screen Yes to clear the list or No if the invoices did not print correctly Clicking No Invoices ihat Need Printing a a A CaseID AccountN
188. Purchase This value is the Year To Date amount that has been statemented so far e Tax Rate This field shows the percentage rate of all tax preven a amounts assigned to this account e Service Charge Percentage This field shows the service charge percentage assigned to this account e Credit Limit This dollar value is the amount of credit that the account is limited to e Print button This button is used to print out the account ledger without previewing it e Preview button This button is used to preview the account ledger before printing it e Design button This button is used to modify the report that is printed e Close button This button closes the Account Ledger screen e Simulate Aging check box Place a check in the box to simulate service charges that would be issued if statements were done that day e Last Paid This is the last date that a payment was posted to the account e Last Statement This was the amount due on the last statement that was sent to this account e Current Charges This is the amount that has been invoiced and not yet statemented e Aging 0 to 30 Days This is the amount owed that has not been paid during the 0 to 30 days period of time e Aging 31 to 60 Days This is the amount owed that has not been paid during the 31 to 60 days period of time e Aging 61 to 90 Days This is the amount owed that has not been paid during the 61 to 90 days period of time e Aging 91 Days This is the amount owed
189. Reg Date Optional This is the Registration date for the Account Reg Number Optional This is the Registration number for the Account Date Retired Optional When you delete an account the account is actually retired A retired account will no longer appear in many of Lab Man ager s reports or lists The Date Retired field will not appear until after you initially saved the account On Hold Optional Placing a check in this box tells Lab Manager that you are temporarily not doing business with this account Placing an ac count on hold can remove him from certain reports and lists Suppress Quality Control Optional Placing a check in this box tells Lab Manager to NOT include QC information on invoices for this account Mark Optional A checkmark in this box tells Lab Manager that you want to sort by the items that have been marked Remake Disc Optional A percentage amount in the field applies discount to products and materials in cases that are marked as remakes Start Date This field can be used to define the date the doctor started doing business with you Exp Date Optional The date is used for reporting purposes This date also shows up in Call Tracking The expiration date is used at Report General and then Account Exp Date Reminders Stop Optional This is used in defining a delivery route il time they had a statement Last Statement field This displays the dollar value that this account was billed for t
190. Report Collections Printer BRN_DODA4A on http 192 168 1 131 redirected 5 Tray 0 Preview or Print the Collection Report 1018907 ase a yndyous Min Past Due Amount 1 00 1 Click on Reports Accounting and then Collections WB Exclude OnHold Accounts 2 Type in a dollar value of the minimum amount past due that needs to show on the report 3 Select if the report needs to exclude include Accounts that are On Hold 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the This report includes e Account ID Collections e Account Name e Telephone Line e Last Statement Balance Monday November 26 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here e Over Payment Amount ID Account Phone LastSimt OverPaid Curent Payments Due e Current Invoiced Charges 11 Dental La GO2 7H459 13 00 BO Fo Bi Fret e Payment Total aay e Amount Due aL a aE 1 374 42 e Days Overdue Tota 37442 PastDue 374 42 4 Or Fred Maras a Aaa abet Acts F000 F0 F0 i F0 i Fars Be Days Amount Past Due 30 F425 42 Total 426 52 Past Due 420 02 z Or George Franks 602 555 14 F i0 BO 00 F i0 K Re a 1 042 73 Days Amount Past Due o 1 042 79 go Tota 1042 79 PastDue 0 00 d Or John Smith 6029 555 1 234 0 00 F 00 000 F000 1 05887 Days Amount Past Due 30 1 058 87 Tota 91 058 87 PastDue 91 058 57 T NATURAL CERAMICS COR 255 7 17 Fo Fo i F i F i F30 Days Amount Past Due o pos 60 g Total 53 60 Past Due 0 00 Grand Tot
191. SH ACCOUNT 1 ase ea IMOS Add a New Doctor Using the List Doctors 1 At the Menu Bar click List Doctors and the Add New button at the bottom of the screen 2 For full instructions see the New Doctor section of this manual Modify an Existing Doctor Using List Doctors 1 Click List Doctor then the Search button The grid will list all of your doctors 2 Click the Doctor Name in the table of the doctor you wish to edit 3 At Edit Doctor modify the items that need to be changed 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Doctor screen or all your work will be lost List Menu Payments Payments at List Menu System New Edit List Reports Help Cases Accounts The many List screens are used to view a list of items or locate information The list might contain all of the items Main Doctors or it might be limited to just a few of the available items Payments Products ieg IMOS Example At the List Payments screen in the search area using no search criteria will give you a list contain Materials ing ALL payments in the system On the other hand in the search screen if you search for specific reference number then it will pull up all the payment with that reference number 1032307 ase Case Completion Vendors See the Navigation Tools section that covers searching and sorting in the List Menu System New Edit List Reports Help 2 A System
192. Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost O E SalesPerson FA Technician E Driver Eee aae a S a Aa Edit Employees Steps Tab at Edit Employees Screen SOEP OERE icture ech for Accounts ec or Doctors eps Edit Employees set eee die This feature allows an employee that is to LocatorlD feo gt Step number 1Ste 1 Step number 3 Step3 be assigned a technician to production Naas Step number 2 Step 2 steps when scheduling a case Produc rome tion Steps can be set up at System Pro duction and then Steps W State Province Move Up Add All Assign Steps to An Employee Ss Click on System Control Panel and then Employees On the Edit Employee screen click on the Steps tab Click on the desired step in the Description box on the right Click on the Add button which will move the step to the Description box on the left Continue clicking on steps from the Description box on the right and adding steps to the left until all steps that this specific employee technician are allowed to do If this technician is supposed to be assigned to all steps click the Add All button 6 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost aR WNM Remove Steps that are Assigned to An Employee 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Employees 2 On the Edit Employee screen click on the Steps tab 3 Click on the desire
193. This column lists the prices for the products that are assigned to this price list e Add ProductliD Button This button is used to add additional products to a price list System New Edit List Repo Help Product Prices Tab at Edit Price List Screen ae o AT CEEE List Price Lists 1eg IMOS Description gt Price List 1 Add a New Product Price List VY ODateCreated Vv DateRetired W Products can be added to all price lists at one time using the Edit Products Lists Products and select 01 03 2011 the product 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Price Lists 2 Click on Add New button at the bottom of the screen Type the name of the Price list in the Description box Use the drop down list in the new line item to select the Product Name Click in the price field on that same line item and type in the dollar value Repeat steps 3 through 6 until all products have been added to a price list Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost CONDO BRW Click Add ProductID button in the on the Product Prices tab This will create a line item in the grid 10 2307 ase 57 Price List 2 Price List 3 Price List 4 Price List 5 Price List 6 Price List 7 Price List 6 Price List 9 Price List 10 lt 01 03 2011 01 03 2011 01 03 2011 01 03 2011 01 03 2011 01 03 2011 01 03 2011 01 03 2011 01 03 2011 Add New 02 04 2012
194. Tools Run Aging ieg IMOS View Accounts GL Status Note Using this option unnecessarily will cause service charges to be added to the balances of your accounts 10 2307 ase Aging should be defined to run within the Server Tool Run Aging Sys em New Edit List Reports Help View Accounts GL Status d ControlPanel Case Entry Production enu Calendar Accounting WARN N G WE DO NOT RECOMMEND CHANGING THE Codes FOLLOWING SELECTIONS UNLESS YOU ARE ADVISED TO BY THE LABORATORY SYSTEMS GROUP SUPPORT DEPARTMENT Admin Tools Excise Tax Log Access Groups Workstations Master Confi This is only used by the technical support department to see if accounts have issues inside of the database This is found at System Accounting and then View Ac counts GL Status Users Special Tools System New Edit List Reports Help Run Aging GEE Accounts GL Status Report Accounts GL Status View Accounts GL Status This report can be Previewed or Printed The reports shows the Account ID Locator ID Account Name value the Doctor Owes value the Lab Owes Total Balance and the Status of the Account An Ok Status means that the data base is in balance with that account Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 redirected 3 Tray 0 Accounts GL Status Friday July 20 2012 LSG Prod New Acct ID Locator ID Account Dr Owes Lab Owes Balance Status 1 BRIDGE CITY DNTL LAB 0
195. User Manual EI Manager w2 Software for Dental Laboratories System New Edit List Reports Help Case Search Case N Payment Bulk Payment 1eg MYOS 3 system New Edit List Reports Heip Statement e Easy Case Log in e Complete Billing System e Schedule Cases e Technician Production e Track Product Production e Customize Invoice amp Statement Forms e Generate Work Tickets e Market to Potential Doctors e Use on Multiple Computers e QuickBooks Interface And Much More GE Case Lee Brian Main S Case 1212 0002 Dr EME cash ACCOUNT dt CASH ACCOUNT 13 1718 E Rose Case Entry O Bannon amp This case has been invoiced Certain items cannot be modified 1 2 1 2 0 00 1 Account 1032307 SL Doctor Product Material Vendor Marketing Contact FY DoctorItems Notes Teeth Images PatientCodes Case Codes Case Level Discount Account History Outsourcing Patient Lee Brian WB Flightags W Mark M Work Ticket Needs Printing EQ Invoice Needs Printing Invoice Date 07 08 2012 User Status A m Shade HB Quote Needs Printing Invoice Amount 56 00 Received 12 14 2012 Stat Date 12 14 2012 Quoted On Invoice Bal __ 56 00 Doctor Date Finish Date P 0 Num Products Total 56 00 Ship By Date Pickup Date Gender M F Materials Total 0 00 a Ship By Time
196. X6 BB IPN HRD ANT ERA ATTACHMENT OV 1X6 BB PLAST ANTER 1X6 BF IPN HAR ANT CEKA KIT 1X6 BF PLAST ANTER SA MALE RESILIENT ULTRA CERAMIC GOLD CREDIT DOWEL PINS 1X6 SLR VAC FIR AN 1x0 BS IPN POSTER 1x0 BF IPN 33 POST 140 BF IPN 30 POST 1x0 BF IPN 20 POST Starting 13 0000 20 0000 31 0000 25 0000 99 0000 99 0000 87 0000 466 0000 455 0000 9 0000 9 0000 6 0000 0 0000 9 0000 9 0000 9 0000 9 0000 9 0000 8 0000 12 5000 350 00 441 00 1 2 3 4 5 6 rd 5 204 Report Menu Production Cases at a Glance lt ole a Tal Mm ea cece Toii ol 1E continued System New Edit List Reports Help Cases at a Glance Report Accounting General The Cases at a Glance Report is another way of looking at the cases in the system Date Range Tab Radio Buttons Choose One e Show All Regardless of Date Default setting Selecting this will not give you the ability to use a date range The Date Range area will be grayed out e Ship By Date Place dot in the circle to sort by Ship By Date and use the date range to give a start and end date e Dr Date Place a dot in the circle to sort by Doctors date and use the date range to give a start and end date e Finish Date Place a dot in the circle to sort by the finish date and use the date range to give a start and end date Main Billing Production Work Tickets Labels Marketing Lab Status Doctors Production YTD Scheduling
197. a 50 discount type in 50 e Remaining Field If the discount was higher than the value of the case it will show how much of the discount was not able to be applied Exam ple If the case was worth 100 and you wanted to give them a discount of 150 the Remaining field would show 50 because a discount can not be more than the value of the case e Clear Existing Discounts checkbox Place a check in the box to clear existing discounts e lf you have checked Clear Existing Discounts the system will go through all the existing Products and Materials on this Case and remove any existing Discount Note Don t check Clear Existing Discounts if you want to KEEP any discounts already applied to Products or Materials including Remake Discount Spend will do the following e After going through Products apply the dollar amount to each Material on the Case e If there are any funds left in Remaining new Products and Materials will automatically be discounted by as much of the dollar amount that is possible for the give Product or Material Adding a Discount to a Case as a Dollar Value 1 Ona case that needs to have a discount click on Case Level Discount tab from the Case Entry screen Place a dot in the circle for Dollar Amount Type in a dollar value in Starting Amount Discount Amount If the dollar discount exceeds the value of the case it will update the Remaining Field with the value that was not applied to the case Cli
198. a such as credit limit payment terms service charge rates payment status discounts Material and special preferences can also be defined Space for the state registration number and date is also available Vendor and will automatically be printed on all correspondence to the doctor Marketing Contact Doctor All doctors that work at an account must be defined individually Clinic doctors groups of doctors or indi vidual doctors can be defined and treated as one entity yet at the same time allow separate sales summaries on the statement for each doctor Product Each product has a product description an unlimited number of price lists production steps and departments Products can be related or tied to other products and or materials Material Materials are defined by description units quantity in stock percent mark up reorder point and quantity vendor and composi tion The inventory control system tracks all of your materials such as gold teeth and attachments Materials can be related or tied to other products and or materials Vendor Store information on vendors such as name address phone number contact credit terms and special instructions Marketing Contact Maintain information on potential accounts by storing their name address contact correspondence sales materials sent last contact date and follow up date Use this information to create mailing labels and with Microsoft Office create marketing letters
199. aceholder 0 0 Dr Subtotal 0 0 Total 0 0 Account 2 Dr George Franks Doctor 2 Dr George Franks 20 Placeholder 0 Dent Denture 18 Misc 0 0 17 Ceramics 0 0 Dr Subtotal 0 Total 0 Account 5 Dr John Killdare Doctor 5 Dr John Killdare Dent Denture 0 0 17 Ceramics 0 0 18 Misc 0 0 Dr Subtotal 0 0 Total 0 0 200 Your Company Name Goes Here Nov Dec Yearly Total Report Menu Production Product Production lt olola mm a1 0mm ea cele Toii o 1E continued System New Edit List Reports Help Product Production Report Accounting General The Product Production Analysis Report shows the number of products or remakes that have been produced over a specific time period Billing A Fy gt A E w s Production Work Tickets Filter By Radio Buttons Choose One e Case Created Place a dot in the circle to filter the report by the date that the case was created e Ship By Date Place a dot in the circle to filter the report by the ship by date listed on the case e Doctor Date Place a dot in the circle to filter the report by the doctor s date listed on the case e Finish Date Place a dot in the circle to filter the report by the finish date listed on the case e Invoice Date Default Setting A dot in the circle to filter the report by the date that the case was invoiced e Received Date A dot in the circle to filter the report by the received date that was entered on
200. act Labels Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Phone 1 field at marketing contacts ous 101207 asez ea yn Preview or Print the Marketing Contact Labels Sort locatorldD Name 1 Click on Reports Labels and then Marketing Contacts Adaress1 2 Choose how to sort the labels gt al 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen PostalCode Helpful Blue Text Will Be Here Sool 218 Report Menu Labels Dr Accounts Locations lt ele aml 21a 0m ie a Continued Dr Account Locations System New Edit List Reports Help Main Accounting General Ma i n M Billing Production This will create a list of all doctor s names and address that can be exported to Excel ieg ynd 10US Sort By Radio Buttons Choose One e Locator ID Placing a dot in the circle will sort the labels in numerical order e Name Placing a dot in the circle will sort the labels in alphabetical order Labels Accounts Marketing Doctors Scheduling Products 10 8307 ase Materials Address Type Radio Buttons Choose One e Invoice A dot in the circle will use the Doctor s address that is marked as Invoice Loca tion at the Accounts screen e Statement A dot in the circle will use Doctor s address that is marked as Statement Location at the Accounts screen e Shipping A dot in the circle will use the Doctor s address that is marked as Shipping Location at
201. aera an Case Entry e Departments This area is used to define the departments in the laboratory Products will then be as signed to these departments ae alendar Steps Steps Scheduling Module only This area is used to set up the steps that it takes to complete products The name of the step how long it takes to complete and how many units that can be done per day are defined here Steps Reporting Scheduling Module only This area is used to tell the system which steps will show up in reports Accounting Codes Admin Tools Exit D ff Departments gt Syscem New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel Departments describe the major categories of the products you produce If you have a crown and bridge ee laboratory then you might have only one department called Crown and Bridge On the other hand if you deak no are a full service laboratory then you might have several departments such as Crown and Bridge Denture _ Removable etc Lab Manager comes with a few departments already defined however you can edit these and or add your own departments to this list To enter a new department or to edit information on existing departments click System Productions and then Departments Accounting Codes Admin Tools Exit The Edit Departments screen allows you to define information about your department e Locator ID This is the ID that the system automatically assigns to the department e Descrip
202. age 08 27 2012 STATUS OK There are No Orphaned SQL Agent Steps Checking CompanyDB IDOCDENT_LMDB for Cases with Blank Case Numbers 08 27 2012 08 27 2012 STATUS OK CompanyDB IDOCDENT_LMDB has no Cases with Blank Case Numbers 08 27 2012 17 Server Tools Elem lat le aeet a 1am kere mm continued Server Help Setup New Lab Manager Copy Database Clear Logged In Users This feature is used when you want to copy one database and make a new database from it This is common if a company changes it name and would like to keep all the same doctors but have a new database keeping the initial database unchanged Upgrade Server Create New Company Database Reset Admin Password Import v5 Data Backup a Company DB Copying A Database 1 Right click on the Server Tool icon 2 Left click on Run As or Run As Administrator If Run As is used you should see a check box with the text of Protect my computer and data from unauthorized program activity 3 Uncheck this box and click OK When the program opens click on the Server Menu then on Setup New Lab Restore a Company DB Server Tool Config Delete a Company DB Change License Manager Aging Scheduler 4 Click on the Server Menu then on Misc Admin Tools Copy Database Copy Database q 5 Use the dropdown list at From Com Attach Company DB pany DB to select the name of the database you would like to copy 6
203. ager Version 5 5 Professional data it may be necessary to perform the data A upgrade function in Version 5 5 first Check 5 5 at Help About LM for the data version It should be 5 5 20 or above This process finds and corrects many common data problems and will minimize your chances of having prob lems during the Import process Clear Logged In Users Upgrade Server Create New Company Database Reset Admin Password Import v5 Data Backup a Company DB 1 Data Upgrade Function in Version 5 5 If necessary e Start Lab Manager Version 5 5 Professional and proceed to the Utility Menu e Click on Upgrade Data and follow the prompts e Exit out of Lab Manager Version 5 5 Professional p E i Restore a Company DB Server Tool Config Delete a Company DB Change License 2 Import 5 5 Data Upgrade Process il Rha e Right click on the Server Tool icon e Left click on Run As or Run As Administrator If Run As is used you should see a check box with the text of Protect my computer and data from unauthorized program activity e Uncheck this box and click OK e Click on Server then on Import v5 5 Data Note Version 5 on this screen actually refers to Version 5 5 Server Help If the path to the data you want to import is correctly shown in Step 1 then proceed to Step 2 If your data is on this computer it should be correct Import v5 Data at Data FROM Choose File 1 To change the path to your Ve
204. ai Case Code ID This is the ID that the system automatically assigns to the Case Code Description This is the name of the Case Code Date Retired This is the date that the Case Code has been retired deleted Show Retired This checkbox is used to show the retired Case Codes in the list If the retired codes are not showing checkmark the box and it will add in the retired codes Add Additional Case Codes Uiar Simti Click on System Codes and then Case At the Edit Cases Codes screen click on Add New button at the bottom of the screen cane cnet In the new line item in the grid under the Description column type the name of the Case Code Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until all new case codes have been entered You do not have to type a case code ID as an ID will be assigned automatically when the oRWND 6 Modify Existing Case Codes Priority l 2 3 Delete Existing Case Codes I 2 3 Vendor Vendors can be given codes to identify them for some special reason This information could be helpful for creat ing reports sorted or filtered by this code To create these special user definable vendor codes go to System Codes and then Vendor The Edit Vendor Codes screen allows you to define information about your vendor codes Vendor Code ID This is the ID that the system automatically assigns to the Vendor Code Description This is the name of the Vendor Code Date Retired This is the date that the Vendor Code
205. ak To To oo To Thay 7 99650 162 Report Menu Accounting General Journal lt ole amm TE oTa iae Ml continued Accounting Aged Trial Balance Short General Aged Trial Balance M a i n Mi Billing Collections Production General Journal Use this screen to print a General Journal Report showing the primary record of transactions which includes a date account to receive a debit entry account to receive a credit entry and a description of the transaction sa 7 Paa A lt ze a Labels Tax Reports Marketing Account History e Starting Date Field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Ending Date Field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the Account Ledger date in MM DD YYYY format Scheduling Invoice Details List 10 8 07 ase Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One e Custom Place a dot in the circle to choose your own System New Edit List Reports Help start and end dates e MTD Place a dot in the circle to have it fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and ending dates automatically e YTD Place a dot in the circle to have it fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates automatically e Today Place a dot in the circle to have it automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date e Fiscal Place a dot in the circle to have it automatically fill i
206. alance less then and also adjust the dollar value to the correct amount 5 If you want to include accounts on the statements that have a credit balance check mark the Include Amounts with a Credit Balance greater than and adjust the dollar value to the correct amount 6 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen NO Printer Brother HL 5370DW series C 1 Tray 0 F ae Your Company Name Goes Here Statement Your Company Address Goes Here as Your City State and ZIP Goes Here Billing Date 10 6 2012 Salam By Account Account ID 1 Dr John Smith 1234 N 10th St Phoenix Az 85016 Print Statements by Account using the By Account tab Please Return Top Portion With Payment Account drop down list This is list of all accounts and this can be Dr John Smith selected to print only a statement for that specific account aS nnn oan cmp 9 26 2012 0105 0001 Anderson Richard 0 00 73 66 i Jg 9 26 2012 0105 0003 Riggs John 0 00 412 36 1 Click on Reports Billing and then Statements 9 26 2012 0105 0004 Guerrero Albert 0 00 312 42 2 Using the By Account tab select an account from the drop down 9 26 2012 0105 0006 Burns Frank 0 00 135 22 list 9 26 2012 1003 0001 test 1 0 00 125 21 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen This will print ome pene ANTAGE Payments all the statements ever created for this account a ana anaa 2 3 2000 Check 12345 123 45 0 00 Applie
207. ame CaseNumber Patient InvoiceID InvoiceDate DueDate will allow you to print them again gt 40 Dr George Frank 1112 0001 Smith John 46 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 38 Dr JohnKilldare 1007 0001 Smith Sandy 47 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 4 Lab Manager x 36 Dr GeorgeFranks 1005 0001 Jones Sherry 48 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 f 30 Dr GeorgeFranks 0902 0001 Johnson Jerry 49 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 Did the Invoices Print Correctly 29 Dr JohnKilldare 0901 0001 Miller Jessica 50 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 28 Dr GeorgeFranks 0809 0001 Jones Frank 51 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 C Yes No 26 Dr JohnKilldare 0806 0005 Jackson Scott 52 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 23 Dr JohnKilldare 0806 0002 Black Mark 53 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 a 21 Dr JohnKilldare 0106 0002 Crouse Robet 54 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 20 Dr GeorgeFranks 0106 0001 White Racheal 55 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 19 Dr GeorgeFranks 0105 0012 Farquart Martha 56 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 Correct and Reprint Printed Invoice 18 Dr GeorgeFranks 0105 0011 Nakasuji Frank 57 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 17 Dr GeorgeFranks 0105 0010 Fields Mrs J 58 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 1 If after printing an invoiced case you find a mistake on the invoice display a wba cic hdd it Ria a ee ee 15 Dr GeorgeFranks 0105 0008 Lee Richard 60 10 12 2012 11 11 2012 the case in the Case Entry screen 2 Click on the Delnvoice button at the bottom of the screen and make the corrections 3 3 At the bottom of the Case Entry screen re invoice the case by clicking Invoic
208. ame of the shipper holiday 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all shipper holidays have been entered 5 You do not have to type a shipper holiday ID an ID will be assigned automatically when the changes have been saved 6 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Memorial Day New Years Saturday Sunday Thanksgiving This is the calendar for the laboratory System New Edit List Reports Help The Edit Calendar screen tells Lab Manager which observed holidays the laboratory is closed Edit Calendar ee Sat Sun 2 e ee oer z 8 9101112 13 14 29 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 30 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 31 29 30 31 Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday a 7 a 5 zo amp O amp A a amp August 2012 SMTWTF S aa baii 5 6 7 8 91011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Adding a Holiday to the Calendar Click on System Calendar and then Calendar Find the day on the calendar that needs to have a holiday add to Right Click on that box in the calendar view Click on Add an Existing Holiday or Add an Existing Shipper Holiday Choose the holiday from the drop down list provided The system will then place the name of that holiday on the calendar Click Save Changes at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost 3L R 33 i 35 September 2012 i a aaa i a Fe igi ee A b baga de E la
209. and are also moved to the Accounts area when they become a customer Main Notes Tab at Edit Marketing Contact Screen Section Main Tab Notes can be stored with each marketing contact These notes can be about anything relating to the contact e Note This is the area that you write notes about the marketing contact Adding Notes to a Marketing Contact 1 From the Edit Marketing Contact screen click the Notes tab Type in the note on the area provided 2 Click Save Changes on the Edit Marketing Contact screen or all your work will be lost Modifying Notes on a Marketing Contact 1 At the Edit Marketing Contact screen click the Notes tab In the notes area place your curser in the box and modify anything in the box 2 Click Save Changes on the Edit Marketing Contact screen or all your work will be lost Call Grid at Edit Marketing Contact Screen SS E CO Fished 08 08 2012 Rosalie M Susan 4 29 PM Mandi Section Call Grid e Start Call button Use this button to create a new call in the call grid a o e Send to Accounts button Use this button to send the marketing contact information to an Account It will create an account with addresses and phone numbers e Call Date This is the date that the call was started on Salesperson The name of the person that is listed as the Salesperson for this marketing contact will show up automatically If you want to have a different name show click the name of the
210. and then Steps Status 2 Type a Pan Number if it is known 3 Type in a Case Number or use the case drop down list to 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Dr John Smith Product PORCELAIN CROWN PORCELAIN CROA PORCELAIN CROWN PORCELAIN CROWN PORCELAIN CROWN PORCELAIN CROWN PORCELAIN CROWN PORCELAIN CROWN 1018207 ase ea IMOS OENE Step Status Report Step Status Step Status Step Preparatory Prep Frame Wax up Vaxup Frame Finish FrmFin Porcelain Buildup Buildup Porcelain contour Contour Final finish Finish Inspect Check Deliver Deliver 0105 0004 Due Date 05 31 2001 05 31 2001 05 31 2001 05 31 2001 05 31 2001 05 31 2001 05 31 2001 05 31 2001 230 Finished 11 27 2012 10 29 35 AM 11 27 2012 10 29 38 AM Reports Menu Scheduling Step Status System New Edit List Reports Help 1012207 ase a IMOS Main M Printer Jump To Case Ic Guerrero Albert Tech Name Tom Mueller Tom Mueller Tom Mueller Tom Mueller Tom Mueller Tom Mueller Tom Mueller Tom Mueller Accounting General Billing Production Labels Marketing Scheduling Case Completion Technician Production Steps Past Due Cases Due Cases To BeFinished Early Step Status Product Steps Production Steps Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray Auto Select im
211. ar Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Sat Sun A 1eg MYOS 1032307 ase EE 6 00pm 290 8 00am 3206 6 00pm 495 11 00am 3410 6 00pm 5194 6 00pm 5313 2 Calls Total hel 6 00pm 5137 8 00am 589 8 00am 672 6 00pm 693 6 00pm 306 6 00pm 5334 6 00pm 5360 6 00pm 448 6 00pm 320 6 00pm 461 6 00pm 1991 6 00pm 454 6 00pm 5009 6 00pm 5067 6 00pm 464 6 00pm 742 e 3 ata 1 Calls Total 223 Reports Menu Scheduling Reports Scheduling Menu Case Completion As a technician completes a step they use this screen to mark 2 S8Su Ss sisson that they have completed a certain step on a certain case From this information a Accounting Technician Production report can be generated Technician Production The Technician Production provides a summary or a detailed report of the work performed during a given date or time period This report decease will report on one or all of the technicians p s Steps Past Due The Steps Past Due Report lists all cases with Steps that are past Due It reports by Case the status Pan Patient Product Step and Units The report totals this information by Case and Department and an overall Grand Jott he ta Total Steps Past Due Cases Due This report lists all cases by Status Providing the Account Pan ZAENI Patient Due Date and Units Status totals and Grand totals are also included ee Cases To Be Finished Early This report lists the cases that will be finished ea
212. are the items you make such as the crowns bridges dentures orthodontic appliances etc They are the labor items In the next section we will discuss materials which are the items you purchase from a vendor such as gold teeth and attachments When setting up PRODUCTS it is important that you define the fields that are in BOLD The BOLD fields are required The other fields are optional Adding a New Product 1 At the Menu Bar click New then Product 2 At the Edit Products screen de fine the product information 3 At the Department drop down list assign this product to a depart ment 4 At the Prices tab on the insert screen click the Add New but ton At the Price List drop down select an existing price list 5 To define a brand new price list go to System Control Panel then Price Lists 6 In the Price column next to Price List tab assign the price for this product 7 Repeat steps 4 6 until all price lists and prices have been added to this product 8 Click Save New on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost eg yNdy0US 10 2307 ase System New Edit List Reports Help Edit Products Locator ID O Prices Related Products Related Materials Codes Notes Steps Image Special Codes roi Price ListPrice Definable E invisible EJ Include Product FJ Discountable FJ Allow Remake Discount x Is Production Product F4 Taxable aka Count E Allow Commission Use this screen to define
213. arketing gt The Product Price List Report shows all of the products sorted by price list 1eg IMOS e Price List To Print drop down list All is the default setting Other price lists can be selected e By Product Radio button Default setting Placing a dot in the circle will sort the prod ucts on the price list alphabetically by product name e By Department Radio button Placing a dot in the circle will sort the products on the price list by department Invoice Register Cash Receipts Current Sales Scheduling gt Statements 10 8307 ase Year To Date Reports Product Sales Material Sales Account Analysis Product Price List Materials Price List Commissions Taxes with Sales FlighTags FlighTags Travel Credits System New Edit List Reports Help Preview or Print the Product Price List Report ela Products Price List 1 Click on Reports Billing and then Product Price x List Products Price List Choose a price list from the drop down list Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 3 Choose how to sort the items by Product or by De partment price List ToPrin ar OBy Product 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen By Department ra Product Price List Sorted By Product Your Company Name Goes Here Friday October 12 2012 Price List 1 Product Department 3
214. artments Click on the name of the department item under the Description column From the Edit Departments screen click on the QC Invoice box Enter the questions that will appear on the Invoice Press CTRL and ENTER keys at the same time to begin a new line Press ENTER to advance to next field Text must be inserted for every department It is possible to copy and paste the same text from department to department Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost NO O1 B WD Modify Existing Departments 1 Click on System Production and then Departments 2 Click on the name of the department item under the Description column 3 From the Edit Departments screen the Description Date Retired QC Invoice and the QC Workticket can be modified 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost 27 Step 7 Employees Setup Wizard Step 7 Employees The employees area is used to define and classify your salespeople technicians drivers or all of the these positions To enter new employees or to edit information on existing employees click System Control Panel then Employees s Help esas Edit Employees Ed it Em ployees Picture ERETT a Ta al E E LocatorlD 13 Name Richard The picture tab provides one picture per employee to be saved in the employee information Attach an Image to an Employee 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Employees Click on t
215. ary Value O gt 12 UNITED PARCEL 3150 N 31ST AV Ew EZE Add a New Vendor Using the List Vendors 1 At the Menu Bar click List Vendors and the Add New button at the bottom of the screen 2 For full instructions see the New Vendors section of this manual Modify an Existing Vendors Using the List Vendors 1 Click List Vendor then the Search button The grid will list all of your vendors 2 Click the Vendor name in the table of the vendor you wish to edit 3 At Edit Vendor modify the items that need to be changed 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Vendors screen or all your work will be lost 153 PHOENIX AZ 85 System New Edit List Reports Help Cases Accounts Doctors ieg IMOS Payments Products Materials 10 8307 ase Case Completion Vendors Marketing Contacts Addiess2 Y VY StateProvin City OWO S SE List Menu Marketing Contacts Marketing Contacts at List Menu The many List screens are used to view a list of items or locate information The list might contain all of the items or it might be limited to just a few of the available items Example At the List Marketing Contacts screen in the search area using no search criteria will give you a list containing ALL marketing contacts in the system On the other hand in the search screen if you search for a specific marketing contact name it will pull up all the marketing contact names that co
216. as you have questions or problems in using the software 4 You must use Lab Manager appropriately in your daily business operations for a continuous 90 day period Our experience shows that once a laboratory uses Lab Manager the lab will not want to give it up If after this 90 day period you have complied with or met each of these conditions and are not completely satisfied with your Lab Manager purchase you may request a refund of your original purchase amount less a 10 restocking fee Your request must be received by Laboratory Systems Group Inc within 30 days of the end of the 90 day trial period 120 days from the purchase date The refund will be processed upon receipt of all Lab Manager software manuals and materials at the offices of Laboratory Systems Group Inc 1718 E Rose Lane Phoenix AZ 85016 All costs related to returning these materials are the responsibility of the customer not Laboratory Systems Group Inc In no event will LSG be liable for damages including loss of profits lost savings or any other incidental or consequential damages arising from your use or inability to use the software By purchasing Lab Manager or any of LSG s products you agree to the above terms Effective Date 1 1 1999 Uee a lao 1E o l Get the most out of Lab Manager every day We are committed to your future Since 1984 we have been helping computerize dental laborato ries This is all we do Industry analysts tell us we are t
217. ase Material Unit Types i System New Edit List Reports Help Lab Manager comes with several material unit types predefined These unit types include Pennyweight SoMa Each Gram Grain Ounce Set and more You can add your own unit types to the list in the Edit Unit eel Karor pens Types screen Production Delivery Methods Pai Calendar Material Unit Types e Unit Type ID This is the ID that the system automatically assigns to the Material Unit Type EE e Code This is displayed on the invoice with the quantity and describes the unit of measure EN Example 5 Pennyweight reads 5 DWT Barcoding e Description This is the name of the Material Unit Type Shipping e Date Retired This is the date that the Material Unit Type may have been retired deleted Admin Tools e Show Retired This checkbox is used to show the retired Material Unit Types in the list If the retired unit Exit types are not showing check the box and it will display the retired units Modify Existing Material Unit Types 1 Click on System Case Entry and then Material Unit Types 2 Click on the Code column and enter the code that will show up on the invoice 3 Click on the name of the material type under the Description column and modify the name 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost System New Edit List Reports Help GEE Unit Types Edit Unit Types 1g INIS E Show Retired Unit Types 10 2307 3529 Ad
218. at component using the Report Item dropdown list to the right of it To use the Manage Reports section the user needs to modify and save a report invoice type or statement type See Report PESSE Design screen section to make modifications Once modifica EED Manage reports tions have been made see sections Identifying Report Sav a This screen is used to assign individual parts of your reports ing a New Report Adding a Custom Report Managing o Ma nage Reports assistance To easily change your form type use the Simple Reports and Editing Sub Forms or Sub Reports Report Functions eRe came ee otis oOo This tab controls which Report Items are assigned to reporting functions in Lab Manage Note To use preset standard invoice work ticket or statement amp Eeport Functons styles see the section covering Easy Report Manager AppRERoLNID AppReportName Report Rem gt 3 Account Analysis Account Analysis 107 Account Expiration Remider Account Expiration Reminder 108 Account Expiration ReminderLabels Account Expiration Reminder Labels 84 Account History Account History Account Ledger Account Ledger Account Production Account Production Account Sales Account Sales Accounts GL Status Accounts GL Status Accounts Labels Accounts Label Avery 5160 amp ccoiunts list amp ccoiunts list Close o 66 Custom Report Design Custom Report Design l System New Edit List Reports Help Invoices statements and reports can
219. at the bottom of the screen The report includes Account Name and ID Date of Transaction Invoice or Reference Number Patient Name or Payment Type Applied to a Case Notes Charge Amount Payment Amount Account ID 13 Account Name CASH ACCOUNT Helpful Blue Text Will Be Here Soon Edit the Starting Date if necessary Edit the Ending Date if necessary Date Tuesday August 07 2012 Date Inv Reff Patient Type 07408 2012 1212 0001 06 27 2012 1206 0103R 06 27 2012 1206 0103 06 27 2012 Payoff 1108 01 Adjustment 06 27 2012 Payoff 1108 0 Adjustment QUOTE FOR KEESLER USAF 06 27 2012 1108 0064 Lee Brian JOHNSON STEYE Return JOHNSON STEVE 166 System New Edit List Reports Help GEE Account History Report Account History Printer Canon MF4200 Series UFRII LT redirected 3 Tray 0 n Starting Date 3 01 2012 Ending Date 99 31 2012 ro Today custom Fiscal Account History LSG Prod New Payment Applied to Case Notes Charge 56 00 100 00 100 00 Payoff 1108 0064R Payoff 1108 0064 Report Menu Accounting Invoice Details List lt ole a mm sale mmaCexerelelaliiale Ml continued Invoice Details List Screen and Report sytem New Fett it oe Accounting Aged Trial Balance Short General Aged Trial Balance This report shows cases by account It will list the case number patient name items on the case along with totals Note For this
220. ate 04 28 1997 Account 1 Received 04 15 1997 Dr John Smith 1234 N Anywhere Phoenix AZ 85016 602 555 1234 Ship by date 04 28 1997 Patient Mueller Received 04 15 1997 Ship by date 04 28 1997 Patient Mueller Received 04 15 1997 Ship by date 04 28 1997 Patient Mueller Porcelain Gold LSR Style Horizontal Perf 1 Part Blue Form 8 1 2 x 11 used with Laser Inkjet and Bubblet LSR QC Style New Vertical Perf 8 1 2 x 11 1 Part Blue Form used with Laser Inkjet and Bubble jet Upper Arch Upper Arch SUID cy Q Lower Arch 25 Quality Control Form 1234 Overall Fit Individual Fit Proximal Contacts Occlusion Contours Embrasures Pontic Design Polish Shade Glaze Rx followed On Time Patient Satisfied Step 5 Forms Selection Setup Wizard Step 5 Statement Forms System New Edit List Reports Help GEE Report Manager Use this section to select a pre designed state ment style Choose a paper form from the drop down list The basic styles are listed to the right 1g MIYOS Report Ma Ciel alle AE State Ments 10 2307 ase Statement LSR DBL DBLBL This prints two LSR This prints one LSR QC Needs Your Company Name Statement identical statements side by i lila correct description Your Address side Your City State Zip 7 Bling Dete 0931199 Your Client s Name Your Address Your City State Zip Amount Enclosed Please return top portion
221. ate a iii 4 Use the drop down list for Tax Collector and choose the name of the tax collector 5 Type a number in the Rate field Date Retired 6 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost 21 Step 2 Tax Setup continued Setup Wizard Step 2 Tax Setup cont System New Edit List Reports Help Tax Categories are tax rates for a given area or tax rates for multiple tax EN tt tax categories M collector authority in a given area Oand or Oand or HB show Retired E show sai Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Search Field 3 e f you charge tax you need to define one or more tax categories These Description ej ofl E can be geographic or categories that require different tax rates such as 1eg IMOS Business Residential or Non Profit e f your city charges the same tax rate for all categories you need to de Primary Value Primary Value Primary Value fine only one tax category a A e fthere is a different rate for profit and non profit organizations you need to define those different categories in Lab Manager t port To Excel Export To PDF Collectors Categories City of Phoenix Taxable Non Taxable Tax Category Rates Charity Maricopa County Taxable State of Arizona pp Taxable Non Taxable Part C Assigning Tax Categories Save New q Add New D Cancel LL System New Edit List Reports Help GEME List Tax Categories search
222. atements are sent to this address e Delivery Method Optional Use this field to select a delivery method Several such as Fedex Overnight DHL 2 Day UPS Ground UPS 2 day UPS Next Day Delivery have been predefined for you Use the or the L buttons to the right to add you own delivery methods e Shipping Zone Optional Used to define the UPS shipping zone This information appears in the Case Entry screen e Route Optional This field can be used to define which delivery route this account location is in Example If your driver has four routes North East South and West and this account location is in the Northern route then type North in this field Lab Manager uses this information to or ganize deliveries by route and stop number For more information on this topic refer to Route Stop below e Route Stop Optional This field is used along with Route to define which route and which stop on a route this account is on The Route Stop is usually a number corresponding to the location in the route first stop second stop third stop etc that this account is on in this Route Example If this account is the third stop in the Northern route then the Route would be North and the Stop would be 3 e Delivery Hours Optional Used to define which hours the account accepts deliveries e Date Retired When you delete an account location Lab Manager actually retires it by placing a date in this field Retired items will not appear in most li
223. atements before they print Statements can also be printed from the Preview mode Start Date 1 1 1970 custom Date End Date 6 20 2012 Wi IncludeAccounts On Hold E This Statement Marks The End Of The Month If you are creating a mid month statments remove the check from the above checkbox If you are creating an end of month statement make sure there is a check in the checkbox above Fill Grid with Accounts meeting above Criteria ultraGrid1 Close 1 At the Menu Bar click Reports Billing and then Statements 2 Select the statement job using the dropdown list click on the Job you would like reprinted and then click Print or Preview 3 Click Preview to see the statements before they print Statements can also be printed from the Preview mode 116 y ShatementStanDate Ww StatementEndDate yr iarksE0OMI r 06 20 2012 x 06 15 2012 Close on Save or EJ Cancel New Menu Account New Menu Account Entering a New Account i System New Edit List Reports Help Case Search Case Accounts can be a doctor or a company like South Dental Clinic that pay the invoices and statements you send The account name address phone number contact information histories and ledgers are all in one place Also data such as credit limit payment terms service charge rates payment status discounts and special preferences can be defined Bulk Payment ieg IMOS Payment Space for the
224. aterial Codes 1 2 3 Click on System Code and then Material At the Edit Material Codes screen place a date in the Date Retired column Do this for all codes that need retiring Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Marketing Marketing contacts can be given codes to identify them for some special reason This information could be helpful for creating reports sorted or filtered by this code Example This can be used to sort how the doctor heard about the laboratory for marketing purposes To enter new marketing codes or to edit information on existing marketing codes click System Codes and then Marketing The Edit Marketing Contact Codes screen allows you to define information about your marketing contact codes e Marketing Contact Code ID This is the ID that the system automatically assigns to the Marketing Contact Code e Description This is the name of the Marketing Contact Code e Date Retired This is the date that the Marketing Contact Code has been retired deleted e Show Retired This checkbox is used to show the retired Marketing Contact Codes in the list If the retired codes are not showing checkmark the box and it will add in the retired codes Add Additional Marketing Contact Codes li 2 3 4 D 6 Click on System Codes and then Marketing At the Edit Marketing Contact Codes screen click on Add New button at the bottom of the screen In the new line ite
225. ax Categories screen click the Add New button and area A Tax Category can have Tax Rates for multiple Tax Adding a New Tax Category CONTINUED ieg MOUS add additional Tax Rates if needed Collectors 7 Select the Tax Rate ID from the drop down list ie A Doctor who s business is within the limits of 8 Click Save Changes at the bottom of the screen or all your work e ee Phoenix tax for taxable items will be lost Additionally because the city of Phoenix is enclosed by the County of Maricopa the Doctor would also have to pay Maricopa County tax for taxable items The city of Phoenix is in the state of Arizona so the Doctor would also have to pay the State of Arizona tax for taxable items The Edit Tax Categories screen allows you to define information about your tax categories System New Edit List Reports Help CEMER ae eee Edit Tax Cats e Description This is the name of the Tax Category e Date Created List Tax Categories Only This is the date that the tax category was created 1032307 ase Edit Tax Categories P ia DEEE Tax Category Rates e Date Retired This is the date that the Tax Category was retired g conga Ua deleted e DateRetired s oa i Tax Categori f Tax Rates for a gi y e Tax Rate ID This is the ID of the Tax Rate that will be assigned to enero pat ae guar ere sctiption the Tax Category A Tax Category can have Tax Rates for multiple Tax ick thi i
226. b closes by using the drop down list Times are given in 15 minute increments e Minutes for Breaks Including Lunch Type in the number of minutes that define how many minutes are used for all breaks including lunch This is used to further refine the Scheduling process e Minutes Per Day This displays the number of minutes per day work can be scheduled Per day minutes minus Break minutes equals Maximum minutes employees can be scheduled to work each day e Fiscal Year Start Month Day Define your fiscal year start date for the laboratory Click on the drop down and a calendar will appear click on the correct date or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all your work will be lost 45 System Menu Control Panel SME Casa ea Oxo al igo N a lA fm continued Edit Company Preferences and Settings Screen continued Image Paths Tab at Edit Company Preferences Screen peen Ne ECE Li Depots miele GEE Company Prefs Use this tab to change the location images are accessed 1eg myuoys Pai Edit Company Preferences WARN N G WE DO NOT RECOMMEND CHANGING THE FOL LOWING PATHS UNLESS YOU ARE TALKING TO THE LABORATORY SYSTEMS SUPPORT DEPARTMENT o a A m o A amp Z Note Image Paths were set up automatically when the com ici ali pany data was created and should need NO modification This Doctor Images Pat information is here so that images that are st
227. ble in case entry This does not save any changes that have been made on the case on the screen when the add new button was pushed e Save and Close button Saves the case and closes the Case Entry screen but does not invoice the case e Save and New button Saves the case closes it but does not invoice the case You are then presented with a new Case Entry screen where a new case can be entered e Save and Invoice button Saves the case and opens the Edit Invoices screen From here you can edit the invoice terms and the invoice date that prints on the invoice e Cancel button This will exit out of the case and will not save it e Print Quote button This creates a printable quote instead of invoicing the case e Quick Return This option can be used on statemented cases only To refund the entire case click Quick Return and it will create a case with the sane case number and an R 1201 0001R e Return button This option can be used on statemented cases only To refund only part of a case click Return and it will create a case with the same case number and an R 1202 6001R e Find Search button Pressing this button will bring up the advanced case search screen e Schedule button This button is used to schedule the steps of the case This feature is only available with the Scheduling Module e Invoice w Defaults button Saves and Invoices the case with the default invoice terms and today s date This is the typical choice for most custom
228. ble will populate with all of your materials Click the Materials Name in the table of the materials you wish to edit 2 At Edit Materials modify the items that need to be changed 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Material screen or all your work will be lost 35 Step 13 Doctor s Items Optional Setup Wizard Step 13 Doctor s Items Doctor Items are items such as U Molds Impressions Bite Blocks etc SSS a received from the doctor Keep track of these items by creating a list of com mon doctor items Lab Manager comes with a list of items already defined however you can edit the list and or add your own items Doctor Items Edit Doctor Items Note If you are looking at the list of Doctors Items and do not see all of the I Show Retired items click the Show Retired check box at the top of the screen This will show all Doctor Items that have been retired along with current Doctor Items Doctor Items Doctorlte miD Description DateRetired 101207 asez sea IMOS Modify Existing Doctors Items L Impressions 1 Click on System Case Entry and then Doctors Items n 2 Click on the name of the doctor item under the Description column 3 Modify the name 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Articulator U Denture L Denture U Bite Block L Bite Block Add Additional Doctors Items 1 Click on System Case Entry and then Doctors Items 2 Click on the Add New butt
229. button When finished click 7rd rl ec A ai on the Save Changes button Now you can print from the above checkbox If you are creating an end of statements by going to Reports gt Billing gt month statement make sure there is a check in the checkbox Statements where you will select this statement above job from a list and click on the Print button 1eg IMOS 10 8 07 ase Fill Grid with Accounts meeting above Criteria Statement Date 95 31 2012 Accounts With Activity Meeting The Criteria Defined Above ultraGrid1 ne Reprinting Statements from Any Statement Job 1 At the Menu Bar click Reports Billing and then Statements 2 Select the statement job using the dropdown list click on the Job you would like reprinted and then click Print or Preview 3 Click Preview to see the statements before they print Statements can also be printed from the Preview mode 155 List Menu Invoices Invoices at List Menu This is used to see which cases have been in voiced and the invoice terms that have been as signed to that case This screen is not used to Print Invoices To print invoices see Report Billing and then In voices Modify the invoice terms on a case that has been invoice 1 Click List Invoices then the Search screen use the search criteria to pull up a specific invoice 2 Click on the case number in the first column to view the invoiced case 3 Edit the invoice terms and invoice date tha
230. cation 1012207 asez ea yn See section Tab at Edit Doctors Start Date 08 08 2012 km mj j e e e e e i e e e e o o e e e o a e o o e e o e e e e o e e o a Helpful Blue Text Will Be Here Soon Section Edit Doctors e Locator ID This assigned number is used to locate or identify a doctor It can contain both letters and numbers If left blank Lab Manager will automatically assign it a sequential number starting with 1 e Mark checkbox Optional Placing a check in this box tells Lab Manager that you want to sort by this doctor e Title Optional Used to define the doctors title such as Dr e First Name Type in the first name of the doctor here e Last Name Type in the last name of the doctor here e Degree Optional Used to define the doctors degree such as DDS e Account Use this drop down list to select the account that this doctor works for e Email Address Optional Can be used to define the doctor s email address e Birth Date Optional Use to define the doctor s birthday for the purpose of sending birthday cards e Shipping Location Use this field to select the account location that cases are to be shipped to e Reg Number Optional Enter your state register number if your state requires such numbers e Reg Date Optional Enter your state register date if your state requires such dates e Tooth Number System Use this drop down list to select which tooth numbering sys
231. catoriD This is the Material ID number You can use this number to locate or identify a material This number can contain both letters and numbers If left blank Lab Manager will automatically assign it a sequential number starting with 1 e Description Type the description of the material here Example Argen Gold e Unit Type Use this dropdown list box to select the unit type in which you SELL the material in Lab Manager comes with the most common unit types already defined however you can add your own unit types by going to the menu bar at the top of the screen and clicking on System Case Entry and then Material Unit types e Cost Use this field to define your cost for this material in the units you SELL the material in Even if you purchase the material in ounces and then sell the material in pennyweights the cost must be your cost in pennyweights e In Stock This field tells Lab Manager how much of the material you have in stock in the unit type that you sell it in Example If you sell the material in pennyweights then this In Stock value needs to be entered in pennyweights Once you have placed a value in this field Lab Manager will reduce the value each time you add the material to a case This reduction is normally performed at the end of the month when you print your statements Each time you receive more of this material it is important to add to the in stock amount e Markup This field is used to mark up or set the price tha
232. ce List screen to the price list that is specified in the drop down list This will not change the price list you are currently on 5 Click on the Copy Price List button 6 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost Note To edit the price list that was just copied Refer to Modify an Existing Price List 59 system Menu Control Panel SIARTR Ore alige Ml at li mm continued Qu ickBoo ks Transfer Control Panel Company Preferences and Settings Case Entry Easy Report Manager Production Employees To transfer accounting data totals to QuickBooks be sure to have QuickBooks running and opened to the correct company database Lab Manager will only transfer data that has never been transferred before Once the data has been transferred from Lab Manager to QuickBooks it is marked as trans ferred and will not be transferred again Calendar Price Lists Quickbooks Transfer Accounting Codes Call Tracking Shortcut Bar Admin Tools See Systems Control Panel and then QuickBooks Interface if the features have not been set up Exit Shatt Menu Rens Show All Dock Bars Manage Reports QuickBooks Interface Toolbar Case Locator View Easy Menus System New Edit List Reports Help Setup Wizard Load Financial Data i o Test the QB Interface by Simulating 4 QB Connection GEINE OB Transfer
233. ce terms are entered Example one line for 30 a different line for 60 and then another line for 90 11 Click Save Changes at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Oo W DY Oand or Oand or Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Search Field 3 E showReti Function Function Function Primary Value Primary Value Primary Value gt Edit Invoice Terms gt cua Description stanara neem SA 8 System New Edit List Reports Help sella site Edit Invoice Terms 103230 ase Invoice Ter 7 F e o Display Terms in Case Entry 4 NumberOfDays PastDue DiscountPercentage ServiceChargePercentage ServiceChargeA mount DateRetired La 3 B uae FA Overridable 5 30 X 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 60 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 Due Date Day OfMonth EJ 90 x 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 Due Dateweeks d 0S 4 0 5 0 0000 0 0000 0 00 Due Date Calendar Days 120 Fa 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 Date Retired 150 Eg 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 180 X 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 This screen is used to define Invoice Terms 210 x 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 which tells Lab Manager if and when to 240 X 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 charge service charges or apply discounts Examples include service charge rates for past Ed Honan 0 00 due amounts and discounts for early 300 X 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 payments Start by defining the Description 330 x 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 then use the window to the right to define one or more periods to which this entry 360 Eq 0
234. ch 3 Click on the name of the Invoice Term under the Description column From the Edit Invoice Terms screen place a date in the Date Re tired field Step 3B 4 Click Save Changes at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Step 4 20 Step 2 Tax Set setup Wizard Step 2 Tax Setup ep ax vetup Tax Collectors are people organizations or government entities that Part A Assign Tax Collectors collect tax Setting up your taxes is a 3 part process Part B Assign Tax Rates Part C Assign Tax Categories Part A Assigning Tax Collectors Tax Collectors include the Department of Revenue the City along with some sur rounding cities and Counties If the doctor is subject to city tax only define one Tax Collectors Categories Collector called City Example Phoenix AZ Non Taxable Out of State Example Doctor A s business is within the city of Phoenix city limits He is subject to the City of Phoenix tax for taxable items Assigned to the tax collector City Phoenix Taxable City of Phoenix Taxable Non Taxable The city of Phoenix is inside the county of Maricopa He is subject to the Maricopa Charity County tax for taxable items Assigned to the tax collector Maricopa County Taxable Lastly the city of Phoenix is in the state of Arizona He is subject to the State of Arizona Maricopa County Taxable tax for taxable items Assigned to the tax collector Arizona State Taxable bl The City of Phoenix ta
235. changed 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Doctors screen or all your work will be lost Deleting a Doctor from the Edit Account Screen 1 At the Edit Account screen click the Doctors tab In the Doctors grid click on doctor s Locator ID and Edit Doctors screen will appear 2 At Edit Doctors screen place a date in the Date Retired field This doctor is now deleted 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Doctor screen or all your work will be lost This will return you to the Edit Account screen Deleting a Doctor Using List Doctors 1 Click List Doctors then the Search button table will populate with all of your doctors At List Doctor tab click the Doctor s Locator ID in the table 2 At the Edit Doctors screen place a date in the Date Retired field This doctor is now deleted 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Doctor screen or all your work will be lost Deleting a Doctor Using the Edit Menu 1 At the Menu Bar click Edit then Doctor At the Find Doctor box type in the doctor s Locator ID or use the Select drop down list and click GO 2 At the Edit Doctors screen place a date in the Date Retired field This doctor is now deleted 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Doctor screen or all your work will be lost Restoring a Deleted Retired Doctor Any Doctor that has been deleted retired is still in the system but does not show up on reports 1 To reactivate a Doctor click on List Doctors At the Search screen place a check in the Sho
236. ching by Name Phone Contact Address or ID Click on the name of the account or marketing contact that the call needs to be logged onto e Who Is On This box lists which employee is logging in a call at that moment and who they are logging a call in for When they end the call the listing will disappear 2 Dr George Franks 5 Email Contact Fax CELE Exp Date Section Contact Information e Contact Information Read Only This area is not editable a 7 Account here It will list the Name of the account or marketing con a Notes tact that was selected on the left from the search criteria Address ane The contact information is read only and is pulled directly Address2 from the account or marketing contact screens These headings will only show up after selecting the name out of csa the Name List box ieee ee Bunetin Boara MEE e Name pp Sain Richard gone Address canst e Address 2 Regi Bulletin Board field e CSZ City State Zip rx os e Phone Exp Date i e Email 01 01 1970 e Contact F finished e Reg only available for accounts 13 20 29 PHOENIX DENTAL CANADA couldn t add dr e Fax e Exp Date Expiration Date is only available for accounts e Account Notes Read Only This will list the notes that are listed on accounts If there is information typed at Edit Accounts in the Notes tab then it will show up in this accounts notes box e Bulletin Board box This b
237. cialStatus W UserStatus W InvoiceDate VY Doctor A 1206 0103R e The Blanks and NonBlanks function will limit the list to just blank or non blank records These can be used for locating cases with a missing Pan Dr Date or some other missing piece of data Exporting Data System New Edit List Reports Help itl see e alle ee T dl ebb List Cases gt 1206 0103R JOHNSON STEY CASH ACCOUNT Invoiced 06 27 2012 1206 0103 JOHNSON STEVE CASHACCOUNT Invoiced 06 27 2012 1012207 asep ea INOS Helpful Blue Text Will Be Here Soon Cases CaseNumber MTA Patient Y lt AccountName VY OfficialStatus W UserStatus W InvoiceDate VW Doctor VY LabTo CASH ACCOUNT Univer CASH ACCOUNT Univer ultraGridData na 1206 0103 JOHNSON STEVE CASH ACCOUNT Invoiced 06 27 2012 CASH ACCOUNT Invoiced 06 27 2012 Custom Blanks NonBlanks CASH ACCOUNT The information in most tables can be exported to Microsoft Excel or to a PDF This can be very useful for creating custom reports and graphs with Lab Manager information To export the data in the table click on the Export To Excel or Export to PDF button at the bottom of the screen Selecting an Item in the List In most lists the field farthest to the left is what is clicked on to select that item a cH To Excel Cases Click on the Case Number in the grid to select and view the case Accounts Click on the Account Name in the grid to select and vie
238. ck Save Changes once you have assigned these NO w zy e amp nm g m a 2 T m o a a Q System Menu Control Panel z System New Edit List Reports View Help Misc Manage Reports Manage Reports Report Functions Custom Report Items Standard Reports This tab controls what Report Items are a ReportName Canned Products Price List AppReportlD AppReportn ame Coal d 2 CustomlnvoiceM ain C iL S E el E eal Save Changes System New Edit List Reports Yiew Help Misc Jeg yNIayoOYS 10 e307 asey Manage Reports Manage Reports Report Functions Custom Report Items Standard Reports This tab lists the Standard Reports that ship with Lab Manager Standard Reports LoadDesigner ReportlD Report ame ReportFileN ame 397 Invoice DBL OC Detail rptinvoice_DBL_QC_Detail 3 rean oire DLM O COO e eaa oiro DL Taa COO e eo oiae DBL Taos COO o ree O oire abei De O COO o ren O oire abei Man COO o reaa oiae e Tao COO m reee O oiae Label DaO G Tinwacetabe Man _ 1nvoice_Label Man oe Soe I ee a nvoice LSR Main 71 system Menu Control Panel SIARRA Ore al ine N at li mm continued QuickBooks Interface Syscem New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel Company Preferences and Settings Case Entry Easy Report Manager The Lab Manager QuickBooks Interface allows Lab Manager financial data totals to be trans ferred to QuickBooks
239. ck on the Add button which will move the step to the Description box on the left 4 Continue clicking on steps from the Description box on the right and adding steps to the left until all steps that this specific employee technician are allowed to do are on the left If this technician is supposed to be assigned to all steps click the Add All button 5 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost Remove Steps that are Assigned to An Employee 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Employees 2 On the Edit Employee screen click on the Steps tab Click on the desired step in the Description box on the left 3 Click on the Remove button which will move the step to the Description box on the right 4 Continue clicking on steps from the Description box on the left and removing steps to the right until all steps for this specific employee technician have been moved If this technician is no longer supposed to be assigned to any steps click the Remove All button Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost OO 56 ETC cl ale mm Ore al ige ml at li mm continued Edit Price List Screen A Price List defines the prices you charge for the products you sell Lab Manager supports an System New Edit List Reports Help System Menu Control Panel Control Panel gt Case Entry b Company Preferences and Settings Eas
240. ck the Spend button to apply the discount to the case Click in Save and Close or all your work will be lost Oo O1 B W DY Adding a Discount to a Case as a Percentage 1 On the case that needs to have a discount click on Case Level Discount tab from the Case Entry screen 2 Type in a percentage value in the Percentage field 0 0000 above the Apply button 3 Click the Apply button to apply the percentage to the case 4 Click in Save and Close or all your work will be lost Account History Tab at the Case Entry Screen Case Entry Dr 1D EYED 13 castaccounr at casn account _ This screen is Read Only Main DoctorItems Notes Jeeth Images Patient Codes Case Codes Case Level Discount Account History Outsd The Account History is a list of payments and cases that have been applied to a specific account The notes from the Edit Ac counts screen also show up on this screen Account Notes cash account e Account Notes These notes are created on the Notes tab at Edit Accounts These cannot be edited form here e Transaction Date This is the date of the invoice or pay ment e Case Number or Payment Information This column con tains either the invoice number or the payment reference oi ae a CTR CC e Patient or Type This column contains the patient name or 07 08 2012 1212 0001 Lee Brian 56 00 type of payment 06 27 2012 1206 0103R JOHNSON STEV 100 00 e Charge This column shows the amount that the case was P
241. count ID AccountLocator Account ID AcgountLocator teas a ha ae E E E E AE E I i Inv Date Inv Date h ShowParametd True i Il l Acct Name Ship By Acct Name Ship By i watermark _ none I I l l Acct Address Shade Acct Address Shade l WatermarkAlig Center I I l l Acct City State Zip Ship Via Acct City StatelZip Ship Via l WatermarkPrin I 1 I WeatermarkSize Clip f l El Behavi 1 l DrName Patient DrName I Patierli e 0 1 l 7 i i axPages p1 E Detal i Printwidth 10 021 I 1 l I l ScriptLanguag CH I i FSNRRSSASSSEANARTSASA I l UseEvidence False l 1 a I l E Data l _ O N l See section The Parts of l I 1 Cutwe defaut inherit l i i 1a Main Form or Report I i DataMember PrimaryDataTa i 1 l I See section Text amp i l l i l DataSource System Data D i I l Image Box Editor Invoice Total InvoiceTotal Invoice Total InvoiceTot l lat crptinvoices l H I LGe ee pFooter1 I l TrayHeight 80 l I E PageFooter I TrayLargelcon True if l l I l TextBox of TextBox1 TextBox12 of TextBox1 Fl Mise i I I Edit Data Source i I I l l l I Appearance i l I l I i Data d Designer gt Script l i I 1 l l l Current Selection ARNet Docyment l l 1 I I I The Parts of Report Designer This area shows a list of the fields that are available to be placed onto the Report To add a field to one of the sub reports in the detail area you must edit that sub report separately as a uniq
242. creen a 8 Click on the Close button to exit Installation and Setup Import Lab Manager Version 5 5 Professional Data Before importing your Lab Manager Version 5 5 Professional data it may be necessary to perform the data upgrade function in Version 5 5 first Check 5 5 at Help About LM for the data version It should be 5 5 20 or above This process finds and corrects many common data problems and will minimize your chances of having problems during the Import process 1 Data Upgrade Function in Version 5 5 If necessary e Start Lab Manager Version 5 5 Professional and proceed to the Utility Menu e Click on Upgrade Data and follow the prompts e Exit out of Lab Manager Version 5 5 Professional 2 pen 5 5 Data Upgrade Process Right click on the Server Tool icon e Left click on Run As or Run As Administrator If Run As is used you should see a check box with the text of Protect my computer and data from unauthorized program activity e Uncheck this box and click OK e Click on Server then on Import v5 5 Data 1 If the path to the data you want to import is correctly shown in Step 1 then proceed to Step 2 If your data is on this computer it should be correct 1 To change the path to your Version 5 5 Professional data click on the Choose File button and use the browse window to locate your data 2 Click on the drop down list button and pick the com pany database from the li
243. creen or all of your work will be lost 83 SSA TELL E continued Tax Categories Tax Categories are tax rates for a given area but you can have tax rates for multiple tax collectors authorities in that given area A If you charge tax you need to define one or more tax categories These can be geographic or categories that require different tax rates such as Business Residential or Non Profit B If your city charges the same tax rate for all categories you need to define only one tax category C If there is a different rate for profit and non profit organizations you need to define those different categories in Lab Manager Example System Menu Accounting Syscem New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel gt Case Entry Production enu Calendar Accounting Tax Collectors Codes Tax Rates Admin Tools Tax Categories Exit Invoice Terms Doctor A s business is within the City of Phoenix city limits He is subject to the City of Phoenix tax for taxable items The city of Phoenix is inside the County of Maricopa He is subject to the Maricopa County tax for taxable items Lastly the city of Phoenix is in the State of Arizona He is subject to the State of Arizona tax for taxable items Each of these City County State tax rates would be assigned to the proper Tax Collector The City of Phoenix tax rate would be assigned to the tax collector authority
244. ct Description Default setting Placing a dot in System New Edit List Reports Help Cece esse Products List Report Products List the circle will sort the products on the report in alphabeti Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 cal order e Department dropdown list Optional Use this drop down list to only show a specific Product Date Retired lIgnore oO O Active Only Sort By Product ID O Product Description Preview or Print the Products List Report l 2 3 4 5 Click on Reports General and then Products Choose a Date Retired option Active Only is the oom Preven a default setting Choose how to sort the report Product Description is the default setting Optional Choose a department from the Department drop down list to only show products from a specific department Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Note If the Ignore option is selected both active and retired products will show up on the report This report includes e Product ID Product List e Product Description Sorted By Product Description e Product Department Filtered By DateRetired is Blank e Date Retired Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here ID Description Department Date Retired 2 3 4 GOLD CROWN Denture 39 ACRYLIC PARTIAL Misc 32 AFTER FIRST TOOTH Ceramics 4 ALBACAST CROWN Denture 40 ARTICULATION Misc 5 ASSEMBLE amp SOLDER Denture 42 BENT WIRE CLASP Misc
245. ction Report Editor Toolbar Use this menu item to save your changes and to print a sample of the report Also located under File is an item called Report Properties which is used to change margins and other page related properties File Menu Use this l Lists Use these menu item to save Preview Tab Use this to Copy Paste Undo Use this tooo Greate our changes view the results of the Delete Use these tool to undo a l j modifications tools to cut copy change you just D et de SEEE and delete objects made to an object FIR Lat Manager Report Editor IEJ Preview BEER EE ME a fe as a k il dh a aY vias ee eee oe pS Cerpen eee Rr uia als Seet s inte s a tte a e inoeman h Tenen TE a EEEE BRP eee wages Font Name Font Styles Use Color Use these Alignment Use Object Spacing Use Bring Object to the Use this tools these tools to change tools to change the these tools to left these tools to align objects Front Back Use these to change the the selected text to background color align center or left right top bottom and tools to move an item font of the Bold talic Under text color and line right align se to change spacing between behind or in front of selected text lined and to change color lected text objects another object the font color Preview Screen Pages Per Screen Used to switch between one page per screen and multiple pages per screen Invoices oe Zoom Used to zoom an are in o
246. ction step under the description column on the left that step can be moved up in the order of steps by clicking the Move Up button e Move Down Button When the cursor is on a production step under the description column on the left that step can be moved down in the order of steps by clicking the Move Down button e Add Button First click the step to select in the Description column on the right and then click the Add button This will add the step from the Description column on the right to the Description column on the left This will add the step to the list giving it a sort order number e Add All Button Click on the Add All button to add all the steps from the Description column on the right to the Description column on the left automatically This will add all the steps to the list on the left giving all the production steps a sort order number e Remove Button First click the step in the Description column on the left and then click the Remove button This will remove the step from the Description column on the left to the Description column on the right e Remove All Button Click on the Remove All button to remove all the steps from the Description column on the left to the Description column on the right automatically Assign Steps to An Employee 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Employees 2 On the Edit Employee screen click on the Steps tab Click on the desired step in the Description box on the right 3 Cli
247. ctors Products Materials Employees Vendors Salespersons Invoices Marketing Contacts Dr Account Locations Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Sort By LocatorlD Description 215 ace oleae maT EA mle om continued Material Labels 5 7 8 Billing Billing gt Billing gt 1X6 BB IPN HRD ANT 1X6 BB PLAST ANTER gt 1X6 BF IPN HAR ANT 10 45 19 gt Billing gt Billing gt Bil ling gt 1X6 BF PLAST ANTER gt 1X6 SLR VAC FIR AN gt 1X6 BF IPN 20 POST Use this screen to print labels with the Material ID the Department it is assigned to and the Material Name This is designed to print on an Avery 5160 style label sheet which provides 30 different labels per sheet Sort By Radio Buttons Choose One e Locator ID A dot in the circle will sort the labels in numerical order A e Description A dot in the circle will sort the labels in alphabetical order Z ioe Preview or Print the Materials Labels fo 1 Click on Reports Labels and then Materials 5 2 Choose how to sort the labels 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Employee Labels Tom Mueller Randy Mueller 1718 E Rose Lane 1718 E Rose Lane Phoenix 42 65016 Phoenix AZ 65016 Jack Johnson Mandi Mueller 1234 E Rose Lane 1718 E Rose Lane Phoenix AZ 85000 Phoenix AZ 85016 Use this screen to print labels with the Employee Name and Address This is designed to print S
248. d Date the e Date Retired fe price list was created p ProductiD Price e Date Retired Leave this gt eee a field empty If this price MANEN iia list is ever deleted Lab ADJUSTMENT 1 00 Manager will place a date Helpful Blue Text Will Be Here Soon wr 1 00 in this field that will indi DISCOUNTED TAXED 1 00 cate the record has been PHONE SUPPORT 1 00 deleted retired This will er re es remove the item from cer tain reports and lists To iinet abi aan make this price list active ENTEN E TESES 1 00 again remove the date SHIPPING COD 11 00 from the Date Retired field RUSH CHARGE 10 00 by clicking the C Clear NSF RETURNED CHECK 25 00 mail to the left of the COMPUTER SERVICES 1 00 ae COMPUTER REPAIR 1 00 e Product Prices Tab This tab is used to add products to a price list and to modify the dollar value of that product for this specific price list e Change Prices Tab This tab is used to modify the prices on a specific price list by department e Copy a Price List Tab This tab is used for copying the price list that the user is currently looking at to another price list e Add New Button Click this to create a new price list Record 1 of 13 Save Changes a Cancel This tab is used to add products to a price list and to modify the dollar value of that product for this specific price list e ProductlID Column This column lists the products that are assigned to this price list e Price Column
249. d Additional Material Unit Types 1 Click on System Case Entry and then Material Unit Types 2 Click on the Add New button at the bottom of the screen This is will add a new line item to the grid In the new line item under the Description column type the name of the unit UnitTypeID Description DateRetired Pennyweight Each OO Item Example Pennyweight Each Gram Grain Ounce i 4 Click on the Code column and enter the code that will show up on the invoice a 5 Repeat Steps 2 through 4 until all new material units have been entered ser 6 A unit type is assigned automatically when the changes are saved T Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Delete Existing Material Unit Types 1 Click on System Case Entry and then Material Unit Types 2 Place a date in the Date Retired column next to the name of the unit type to be retired Do this for all unit types that need retiring 3 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Note If you are looking at the list of Material Unit Types and do not see all of the unit types click the Show Retired checkbox at the top of the screen This will show all Material Unit Types that have been retired along with current Material Unit Types 76 system Menu Production System Menu Production System New Edit List Reports Help Start at System and then click on Production At Production you can edit or view
250. d on the Mark Option in Edit Marketing Contacts e All Marketing Contacts checkbox A check in the box creates a report based on all marketing contacts in the system Preview or Print the Marketing Face Sheet Report Click on Reports Marketing and then Marketing Face Sheet Choose a date range for the call information Select a marketing contact Optional Choose to only have marketing contacts that have been marked printed using the Marked Only check box Optional Choose to print all Marketing contacts by using the All Marketing Contacts check box Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen oR WD Marketing Face Sheet Locator ID 5 Office Name ABC Dental Studio Start Date 10 12 2012 Follow Up Date 10 12 2012 Follow Up Time 12 45 00 Phone 1 602 264 5913 Phone 2 Fax Location 1 Used On Label Location 2 _ Used On Label Sales Person Billy Bob Mueller Line 1 567 N Main Street Line 1 Commission 9 0000 Line 2 Line 2 Owner City Phoenix City Contact Sally Smith State AZ State Website Postal Code Postal Code Email sales labsysgrp com Country Country OM jt JW Th OF CJS 05u On Hold Do Not Call Transferred To Accounts Codes Notes Call Sales Person Start Time End Time Call Notes Assigned Finished 10 12 2012 Randy Mueller 10 15 00 10 15 00 They will be sending their first case to us tomorrow Billy Bob Mueller 10 12 2012 Randy Mueller 10 14 00 10 14 00 They
251. d step in the Description box on the left 4 Click on the Remove button which will move the step to the Description box on the right 5 Continue clicking on steps from the Description box on the left and removing steps to the right until all steps that this specific employee technician are no longer allowed to do have been moved 6 If this technician is no longer supposed to be assigned to any steps click the Remove All button 7 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost 29 Step 8 Accounts Doctors Location Setup Wizard Step 8 Accounts Doctors Location Accounts are the offices or practices that you send your INVOICES to An account can be the name of the office South Dental Clinic or the name of a doctor Dr John Smith Setting up an Account is a 3 Part Process As Simple as ABC This page will cover Part A and Part B setting up the account and defining Location The next page will cover Part C assigning doctor s to that account Examples OR You have an account with only one doctor The name of the account You have an account called South Dental Clinic Now you must as is Dr John Smith You still must also create a doctor record and sign the names s of the doctor s that work at South Dental Clinic assign It io the account of Dr John Smith Part A Define Account 2 South Dental Clinic i Part B Define Location s Address s Part A Define Account 1 Dr John Smit
252. d toward Case s 0105 0004 2 3 2000 Discount 50 00 0 00 Applied toward Case s 0105 0004 2 3 2000 Credit credt 25 00 0 00 Applied toward Case s 0105 0004 6 4 2000 Check 333 3 800 00 0 00 Applied toward Case s 0105 0001 0105 0003 0105 0004 0105 0006 1003 0001 R41 6 11 2000 Check 2222 10 00 0 00 Applied toward Case s R41 6 11 2000 Check 2222 10 00 0 00 Applied toward Case s R41 Subtotal 4 015 45 0 00 Total 4 018 45 1 058 87 185 Report Menu Billing Year to Date aooaa mm md ale mm Continued Year To Date Reports System New Edit List Reports Help a Accounting General The Year to Date Sales report show sales dollar values while the Production reports show Billing aT sales values in units produced Each report shows the sales or production for up to a full Z m year broken down by month with totals diaii TENA a Labels Cash Receipts Select Report Type Radio Buttons Choose One Marketing Current Sales e Account Sales A report showing the account sales for all or a specific account with penama Sase all doctors assigned in dollars for the current year last 12 months or a given year Year To Date Reports Note the R and O buttons when selected will include those Accounts that have been Product Sales retired or placed on hold in your dropdown list Material Sales e Doctor Sales A report showing the doctors sales in dollars for the current year last 12 a ann months or a given
253. decimal places to round to field Click Change Prices button to update the products with their new prices that were assigned to the specified department Repeat steps 4 through 7 if additional products that are assigned to different departments need to be modified Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost OONDARWN Product Prices Change Prices Copy a Price List Tab at Edit Price List Screen This tab is used for copying the product price list that the user is currently looking at to another product price list This function can greatly speed up the process of setting up Destination Price List price lists Example Create one complete product price list and then simply copy that price list to all of your other price lists Then modify the prices in the other price lists e Destination Price List Use the dropdown list to select the existing price list you would like to copy the current price list into e Copy a Price List button Click this to copy the price list Copy a Product Price List from an Existing Price List to a New Price List 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Price Lists 2 Click on the name of the price list under the Description column in the grid 3 On the Edit Price List screen click on the Copy a Price List tab 4 Choose a price list from the drop down list at Destination Price List This will copy the price list you are currently on at the Edit Pri
254. defining your doctors YOU MUST FIRST define the Account and its locations that the doctor is to be Bulk Payment assigned to Otherwise the doctor is not linked to an account record containing financial information and account loca Statement tion information To view or edit an account that has already been created refer to the List Account or the Edit Ac Account count section of the manual When setting up DOCTORS it is important that you define the fields that are in BOLD The BOLD fields are required All other fields are optional Product Examples of Different Types of Accounts Type 2 If an account is an office containing two or more doctors then you need to create a doctor record for each of the doctors in the Type 1 If an account is simply an individual you MUST create a office and assign each doctor to the account you set up for that office doctor record and assign the doctor to the account Doctor Name at Account Name Doctor Name at Account Name or Practice Name Dr Bill Jones DDS at South Dental Clinic Dr John Smith DDS at Dr John Smith DDS Dr Fred Miller DDS at South Dental Clinic Dr Jane Moore DDS at South Dental Clinic System New Edit List Reports Help elle Edit Doctors Edit Doctors LocatorID Mark ereterences PO Title First Hame Last Name Degree Preferences Account Dr Prefs Department Preference DateRetired Account E E mail Address Birth Date See section Shipping Edit Doctors Lo
255. delivered automatically and are organized by Main a route The delivery report includes Account Address Phone Numbers Route and Cases en grouped according to delivery address This form is then given to the delivery person who ee presents it for signature upon delivery i SERSA Marketing Doctors Production YTD g Scheduling Product Production e Match Date field Type in the date for the report Material Production Account Production Type of Date Radio Buttons Choose One e Ship By Date This is the date that the case needs to leave the laboratory e Dr s Date This is the date that the doctor needs the case back by e Finish Date This is the date that case was completed Material Usage System New Edit List Reports Help Cases ata Glance OENE Daily Delivery Case Tracking Material Reorders Daily Delivery Materials Remake Usage Printer ultraLabell Outsourced Cases Quotes Wednesday September 26 1012207 ase ea IMOS 2012 Daily Delivery List e Include Pick Ups check box Place a Delivery Report check in the box to include pick ups Match Date 09 26 2012 that have been entered into the sys tem O Ship By Date Oopr s Date E include Pick Ups Preview or Print Daily Delivery Report 1 Click on Reports Production and then Daily Delivery List 2 Select a Date for the report 3 Choose the type of Date the report will filter b
256. dentify them for a special reason This information could be helpful for creating reports sorted or filtered by this code Marketing Codes Marketing contacts can be given codes to identify them for a special reason This information could be helpful for creat ing reports sorted or filtered by this code Example Generate a report that shows how doctors heard about the laboratory for marketing purposes Patient Codes Patient codes are user definable codes that you can use to categorize cases by patient type Example Charity patients could be coded as charity so that the lab owner can track of the amount of work performed for charity and non charity accounts The armed services categorize patients as enlisted personnel spouse of enlisted personnel or children of enlisted personnel User Status Codes Optional This field can be used to assign a special status to the case Example If the case goes in and out of the lab you can create a try in status and assign the case to it Now you can create a report to show the exact status of the case Product Material Marketing 89 SET el ale Crete TE continued Case Case codes are user definable codes that can categorize cases as a remake or a certain type of remake Lab Manager comes with some case codes pre defined however you can add your own by going to System Codes and then Case The Edit Case Codes screen allows you to define information about your case codes S
257. des Tab e Notes Tab e Call Grid e Add Modify Delete Restore Marketing PAGE 145 145 146 146 147 147 148 149 150 150 151 151 152 152 153 153 154 155 156 157 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 Table of Contents Edit Menu Edit Account Edit Doctors Edit Products Edit Materials Edit Vendors Edit Marketing Contact List Menu Cases Accounts Doctors Payments Products Materials Case Completion Vendors Marketing Contacts Statements Invoices Reports Accounting Reports e Aged Trial Balance Short e Existing Report Job e Aged Trial Balance e Saved Report Job e Collections e General Journal e Tax Reports e Account History e Invoice Details List e Account Ledger General Reports e Accounts Lists e Doctors Lists e Products Lists e Materials List e Employees Lists e Departments e Vendors Lists e Doctor Preferences e Calls Assigned To e Account Expiration Date Reminders Billing Reports e Invoices e Invoice Register e Cash Receipts e Current Sales e Statements e Year To Date Reports e Product Sales e Material Sales e Account Analysis e Product Price List e Materials Price List e Commissions e Taxes With Sales e FlighTags e FlighTags Travel Credits 212 213 214 214 215 215 216 216 217 217 218 2
258. difying a report e Label The Label displays descriptive text for a control and helps the user describe data displayed in a report e TextBox This is a basic reporting control that allows direct display and editing of unformatted text e CheckBox This places a checkbox on the report e RichTextBox This control allows the user to enter text in the form of formatted text ActiveReports 6 e Shape This is a user interface element that allows shapes to be added to a report Label e Picture This control displays image files on the report and resizes and crops images being used TextBox e Line The line visually draws boundaries or highlights specific areas of a report eaa e PageBreak The PageBreak control is used to stop printing a report inside the selected section and resume it on a new page RichT estE ox e The rest of the tools are not available for use Shape Picture ne Note To use preset standard invoice work ticket or statement styles see the section covering Easy Report Manager CN HOK E Fage Break J 68 Custom Report Design OS UES Volant ole am B s 1 e alm continued Section Page Parameters a Report Settings Ea Report Settings xX l Preview Paper Size Printer Default Preview Bme l Top margin p 45 l Jere margin 0 45 SS oe noz t 5 Dage Sat ight SS aoe d Left margin 0 45 o mm ese 8 505 BE a 0255 ee
259. dor A Addressi 1 At the Edit Vendor screen click the Add New button under the Vendor m Address 2 DO Codes i cysez JOO IOo 2 This will create a new line item in the grid Click on the drop down list under Count United states the Vendor Code ID column and select the code that will be associated with Phonel 9 Phone the vendor FAX Number M outsource 3 Repeat Step 2 until all codes have been entered n SS d 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Vendor screen or all your work will be lost mstuctions uf ooo O Use this screen to define the vendors you purchase Email Addess OOOO materials from Adding a New Vendor Using New Menu 1 At the Menu Bar click on New then Vendor 2 At the Edit Vendors screen define the Vendor Name under description 3 Enter the address into Address 1 City State and Zip The Country will default to the United States All other fields are optional 4 Click Save New on the Edit Vendors screen or all your work will be lost Adding a New Vendor Using List Vendors At the Menu Bar click on List then Vendor Click Add New at the bottom of the screen At the Edit Vendors screen define the Vendor Name under description Enter the address into Address 1 City State and Zip The Country will default to the United States All other fields are optional Click Save New on the Edit Vendors screen or all your work will be lost oRWNM 32 Setup Wizard Step 10 Productio
260. dor This area is used to pull up a specific vendor by name or by ID Marketing Contact This area is used to pull a up a specific marketing contact by name or by ID Vendor Marketing Contact Edit Menu Account Edit Account at Edit Menu System New Edit List Reports Help Account Doctor Ma i Product Material This area is used to pull up a specific account This does not give you the same search options that List provides This is for existing accounts only If you know the Account ID or want to select the name from a drop down then from the Menu Bar click Edit and then Account ieg JmMyOyS Vendor Marketing Contact 12207 ase For more information on editing an account go to Section New Accounts Image 1 Image 2 System New Edit List Reports Help Find Account OENE Accounts Edit ieg Nd 10NS Ed it Accou nt Use this screen to define or edit the doctors you send bills to Locator ID Data Financial Notes History Defaults Invoices Payments Account Name O A Name Deine C O E ua C Monroa Mark Credit Limit Referred By Special Codes I Suppress Quality Control Price List a Commission Rate Discount Rate Remake Disc Phone EGE Ext Salesperson m Reg Date Start Date Email Doo Invoice Terms m Reg Number kx Exp Date Code Date Retired Stop Ledger 1032907 ase Modifying an Account Using the Edit Menu TS LT TN CR CO TN CT CS enone
261. dropdowns that give you e Ship By Date The date the case was shipped back to the doctor multiple ways to search e Ship By Time Use the dropdown list and choose the time the case was shipped oe E e Finish Date Type in the date the case was finished in the lab e Ignore This will not search a date and this is the e Delivered Date Type in the date that the case was delivered to the doctor ert Value This will look f th th e Pick Up Date Type in the date that the lab picked up the case from the doctor pees aa Sa LMS WOOR IOF CASES MIEN MA e Retired Date Type in the date that the case was retired deleted e Has No Value This will look for cases that does e Search Use this button after all the criteria for the search has been entered not have a date e Reset Use this button to clear all the search criteria to search again e Equals Use this status when matching a specific date e Between Use this status when looking between 2 different dates This will pop up 2 more date fields Enter the Start Date in the first box and the End Date in the last box Using the Advanced Case Search 1 At the Case Search Screen HM fill in at least 1 criteria See full list of criteria with defini tions on this page 2 Click Search and the grid will fill with items 3 Hover above Search in top left corner and the Case Search screen with search criteria reappears 4 Click Reset to clear the screen to find another case 5 Once t
262. e Current Sales o Fiscal YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Tray 0 the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year gee E E System New Edit List Reports Help OGEDE Current Sales Report ieg MYOS 1032307 SL e Unstatemented A dot in the circle will fill in the start mup and end date for cases that have not yet been state a ai mented Example Last statement job was 7 31 12 i but you want the date range of current unstate mented cases to start with the first unstatemented Doctor Codes Report Type Account D case dated 8 5 12 The system will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today e Doctor Codes If you have set up codes for your doctors you can choose from them here Report Type Radio Buttons Choose One e Account Default Setting Will list the cases by ac Account EW count Doctor The report will list the cases by doctor A TERE e Account dropdown list If at Report type Account was selected leave this field blank and the report will list all accounts but if at Report type Accounts was selected and you assign an account name here the renin report will list for only that one account Note This field will do the same for doctors if Doctors is se lected at Report Type e Include Statemented checkbox A check in this box will include cases that have also been statemented during the specified time period Sort lLocatorlD
263. e scheduling module eDriver Optional Place a check mark in the box if this employee is a driver e Picture Tab Optional The picture tab provides the ability to assign one picture per employee to be saved in the employee information Company Preferences and Settings e Tech for Accounts Tab Optional and available in the Scheduling module only This feature allows an employee to be assigned to an account when scheduling a case Make sure before you assign employees technicians to accounts that there is a check mark in the box for technician e Tech for Doctors Tab Optional and available in the Scheduling module only This feature allows an employee to be assigned to a doctor when scheduling a case Make sure before you assign employees technicians to doctors that there is a check mark in the box for technician e Steps Tab Optional and available in the Scheduling module only This feature allows an employee to be assigned Production Steps This information is used when scheduling a case Make sure before you assign steps to employees that there is a check mark in the box for techni cian Picture Tab at Edit Employees Screen The picture tab provides one picture per employee to be saved in the employee information Attach an Image to an Employee 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Employees Click on the Picture Tab Right click inside the dark square in the Image area and a small menu a
264. e Edit View Insert Format Table from the Case Entry screen 2 Click on the Multi Notes tab at Notes tab TEE Eee ae es cate eats at 3 Click on the Add New 3 button at the bottom of the screen to add a record to the above table 4 Next click on the button in the RTF field Rich Text File This will dis play the text editor Type in your notes just as in a word processor 5 When finished click on the File menu option and choose Save this saves the notes to the case 6 Close the RTF window by clicking on the Red X in the upper right cor ner of the window This returns you to the Lab Manager Multi Notes Area on the Notes tab in Case Entry 7 In the grid click the check box of either Invoice or Work Ticket to have the notes show up 8 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost there 109 continued New Menu Case Teeth Tab at the Case Entry Screen This screen is Read Only tooth numbers cannot be added to cases from this screen This screen cannot be used to select teeth only to view them To select use the Products grid or the Materials grid and click on the Teeth button found there associated with each product or material This screen is an example of the chart found on the Teeth tab Imported Tooth s This area is reserved for tooth numbers from older versions of Lab Manager Imported Tooth Notes This area is reserved for tooth notes from older versions of Lab Manager
265. e Ending Date 097212012 value of the commission Fiscal YD Sort By Salesperson ID Commission Preview or Print the Sales Commission Report O Account Name 1 Click on Reports Billing and then Commissions Choose a salesperson Choose a date range Close Choose how to sort the report Oom reve om Ea Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen oR WON Sales Commission Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Account ID Name Products Materials Discount Total Commission Jack Johnson 2 Dr George Franks 675 26 587 40 89 42 1 173 24 0 98 5 Dr John Killdare 525 00 6 04 1 00 530 04 0 45 1 200 26 593 44 90 42 1 703 28 1 43 1 200 26 593 44 90 42 1 703 28 1 43 193 acolo la TEA md ale mm Continued Taxes with Sales Report The Taxes with Sales Report shows the tax amounts from sales between a specified time period Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Custom A dot in the circle will choose your own start and end dates e MTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and ending dates e YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fillin the Year To Date YTD starting a
266. e Image window as shown to the right You will see a small menu containing the words Add and Delete Left A E click on Add Lab Manager will then add an empty image window to the screen as shown to the right Left click on the choose file menu item This will cause windows to display a common Select an Image browse window Use the Select an Image window to locate your image Once you have found your image click on it and then click on the Open button A thumbnail view of your image will appear in the Lab Manager Image screen Lab Manager does NOT store any images It only displays those images you have pointed to It links to the image If you are adding images to cases make sure you save them at Caselmages and backup associ ated files with the LM Server tool The Include On Invoice and Include on Work ticket check boxes are not yet implemented When implemented you will be able to place a check in the appropriate check box to cause the image to appear on the invoice and or work ticket This link to the image will be saved when the case is saved Places Case Entry My Recent Documents e My Network Dr CASH ACCOUNT at CASH ACCOUNT 13 Dr ID 13 CASH ACCOUNT at CASH ACCOUNT Notes Jeeth i0 FMtt Patient Codes Case Codes Case Level Discou Main DoctorItems Notes Teeth 0 RhtS Pati m Include On Invoice E include On Work Ticket nage m E CurrentWworkingStyle isl
267. e Install button to begin the installation of Lab Manager and all of its related components Some of these first time one time processes will take several minutes 3 At this point you should see the message InstallShield Wizard Completed 3 Click on the Finish button to exit the Installation Wizard 4 You should now have two icons on your desktop Lab Manager v7 and LM v7 Server Tools 5 Double click on the LM Server Tool icon and then proceed to setting up a database and importing your data into it if you are currently using Lab Manager Version 5 5 Professional If this is a single computer or sever installation it is complete See the Custom installation on the next page Installation and Setup i Lab Manager InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits your needs Please select a setup type Choose which program Features you want installed and where they will be installed Recommended For advanced users P Ceen e T ie Lab Manager InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation Click Install to begin the installation IF you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard Installing Lab Manager 7 The program Features you selected are being installed Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard installs Lab Manager 7 This may take several minutes
268. e Route If predefined routes have been created you can filter the cases by those routes 10 8 07 ase Scheduling Product Production Material Production Account Production Material Usage Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One Cases ata Glance e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the Case Tracking date in MM DDI YYYY format Material Reorders e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the Materials Remake Usage date in MM DDI YYYY format Outsourced Cases e Custom Place a dot in the circle to choose your own start and end dates Quotes e MTD Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the Month To Date Daily Delivery List MTD starting and ending dates Delivery Report e YTD Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates e Today Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date System New Edit List Reports Help e Fiscal YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the S MRL Deliveries starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year A lj z e Unstatemented Place a dot in the circle the system will fill Deliveries in the start and end date for cases that have not yet been Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray Auto Select statemented Exa
269. e bottom of the screen Click on the Close button to exit E Demo F Beta Users 255 E Demo F Beta Users 255 F Quickbooks Server Tools Server Help Setup New Lab Manager Clear Logged In Users Upgrade Server Create New Company Database Reset Admin Password Import v5 Data Backup a Company DB Restore a Company DB Server Tool Config Delete a Company DB Change License Aging Scheduler Misc Admin Tools Copy Database Attach Company DB continued Lab Manager Server Tool Aging Scheduler This schedules a time each day that aging is set to run and calculate service charges ac cordingly Use Aging Scheduler Server Help 1 Right click on the Server Tool icon Aging 2 Left click on Run As or Run As Administrator If Run As is used you should see a check box with the text of Protect my computer and data from unauthorized program activity 3 Uncheck this box and click OK When the pro gram opens click on the Server Menu then on Setup New Lab Manager Click on the Server Menu then on Aging Scheduler Enter a time you would like aging to begin Click Save or all your work will be lost MessagelD Message DateOfMessage O Status Mess Server Tools Lab Manager Server Toc Server Help New Setup Lab Manager Clear Logged In Users Upgrade Server Create New Company Database Re
270. e case has been invoiced or not Discount Total Read Only Field If the Doctor for the case has an automatic discount or a discount has been placed on a product or material it will show the total amount of money that has been deducted from the case This will show whether the case has been invoiced or not Tax Total Read Only Field This will be blank until a case has been invoiced Once it has been saved as an invoice the tax amount will show even if it has not been printed yet Grand Total Read Only Field Once products and materials have been entered onto the case the Grand Total will have a total This will show whether the case has been invoiced or not but may not have all the information until it has been invoiced Example Tax will only show in the grand total after the case has been invoiced 104 New Menu Case EAC LO mM Otsky m continued Products Grid on the Main Tab at the Case Entry Screen Section Products on Case Products Product Quantity Unit Price UnitPriceDiscount SubTotal ProductTeeth MISC SERVICE Products are the items you make such as the crowns bridges dentures orthodontic appliances etc They are your labor items This grid has a scroll bar that allows you to see all of the columns You can also click in one of the fields and use the tab key on the keyboard to go to each field e New Product button This button creates a new line item in the grid or press the keys Alt P on the keyboard e ID This fie
271. e from a drop down then from the Menu Bar click Edit and then Material Doctor Product ieg IMOS Material z a ada A z Vendor For more information on editing a doctor go to Section New Materials Marketing Contact 12207 SL Image 1 Image 2 A System New Edit List Reports Help ES Find Material GENE Edit Materials Edit Materials Material Codes Material Description z LocatorlD Updated ss Unit Type Each m Definable In Stock Location Reorder Level Lot Number Lt m G Modifying a Material Using Edit Menu LER iti omposition 1 At the Menu Bar click Edit then Materials P 2 At the Find Material box type in the materials Loca Date Retred E G siansa a i i azardous Taxable tor ID or use the Select drop down list and click GO Das AE e ee Image 1 such as gold teeth and attachments I Allow Commission 3 At Edit Material modify the items that need to be changed Image2 4 In this manual see Section New Material for more information on using this screen 5 Click Save Changes on the Edit Material screen or all your work will be lost Edit Menu Vendor Edit Vendors at Edit Menu ae e Account This area is used to pull up a specific vendor This does not give you the same search options that List provides Doctor This is for existing vendors only If you know the Locator ID or want to select the name from a drop down then
272. e is the default setting 3 Choose a Date Retired option Ignore is the default setting te reer om 4 Choose how to sort the report 5 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Note If the Ignore option is selected accounts may show up on the report multiple times if they have different invoice and state ment addresses This report includes a Account List e Account Name Sorted By AccountName e Account Address Filtered By DateRetired is Blank e Account City State Zip Friday October 12 2012 YO Company Name Goes Here e Account Phone 5 aaa saan Cae ee AE a SER Dr George Franks 728 S E 60 TH Phoenix Az 85000 602 555 1234 Dr John Killdare 2400 E Indian School Phoenix Az 85000 6025559984 Dr John Smith 1234 N 10th St Phoenix Az 85016 602 555 1234 Dr Susan Smith 444 N 16th St Phoenix 4z 85000 6025554324 Tester Mc Testing 122131 E 914th Ave Pilsbury AZ 90916 170 Reports Menu General Doctors List aXe elem cm cla mel Jalsle l mmm continued Doctors List Report i System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting gt This report prints a general list of Doctors that are assigned to Accounts It lists the Ac General SEs count Name Doctor ID and Name and the Date Retired if applicable S Billing Note If the retired option is selected it will put a retired date to the right of the doctor s jigg oe name a Labels Materials List Marketing Employees Date Ret
273. e list To define a brand new price list go to System Control Panel then Price Lists In the Price column next to Price List tab assign the price for this product Repeat steps 4 6 until all price lists and prices have been added to this product Click Save New on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost o NONIAN Modifying a Product Using List Products 1 Click List Products Search button table will populate with all of your doctors At the List Products tab click the products Description col umn in the table 2 At Edit Product modify the items that need to be changed 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost Modifying a Product Using Edit Menu 1 At the Menu Bar click Edit then Product At the Find Product box type in the product s Locator ID or use the Select drop down list and click GO 2 At Edit Product modify the items that need to be changed 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Product Screen or all your work will be lost Deleting a Product Using List Products 1 Click List Products then the Search button table will populate with all of your doctors At List Product tab click the Product s Locator ID in the table 2 At Edit Product screen place a date in the Date Retired field This product is now deleted 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost Deleting a Product Using Edit Menu 1 At the Menu Bar click Ed
274. e list of cases Accounts Search for a specific account or see a whole list of accounts Doctors Search for a specific doctor or see a whole list of doctors Payments Search for a specific payment or see a whole list of payments Products Search for a specific product or see a whole list of products Materials Search for a specific material or see a whole list of materials Case Completion Coming Soon Vendors Search for a specific vendor or see a whole list of vendors Marketing Contacts Search for a specific marketing contact or see a whole list of marketing con tacts Statements Create statement jobs and see the dates of previous statement jobs Invoices Use this to see cases that have been invoiced and the invoice terms that have been 149 1032307 ase List Menu Case Completion System New Edit List Reports Help Cases Accounts Doctors Payments Products Materials Case Completion Vendors Marketing Contacts Statements Invoices List Menu Cases amp Accounts List Menu Cases Cases at List Menu i System New Edit List Reports Help The many List screens are used to view a list of items or locate information The list might contain all of the items or it might be limited to just a few of the available items Example At the List Cases screen in the search area if you use no search criteria the list displayed will contain ALL cases in the system On the other hand if in the search
275. e name w Open Files of type Cancel x New Menu Vendor AAA EA ae LEE Continued Vendors are those people that you purchase materials from This information is integrated with Lab Manager s inventory control system so that Lab Manager can notify you when materials need to be reordered and from whom you normally purchase the materials from System New Edit List Reports Help Case Search gt Case ieg yNdy0YUS Payment Bulk Payment When setting up VENDORS it is important that you define the fields that are in BOLD The BOLD fields are required All other fields are optional Statement Account Doctor 1032307 ase Product Material System New Edit List Reports Help Vendor eet Edit Vendors Edit Vendors Locator ID ee I Name See section Addess1 Edit Vendors I ciystateZiof I I I l l l I Marketing Contact I I l l l l l l l l l l I I I Countr l j 5 United States l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Vendor Codes ieg moys I I I VendorCodel Dell m 10 2307 35e See section 1 Vendor Codes Phonel g Phone O Instructions Po Email Address ee l Use this screen to define the vendors you purchase aterials from Section Edit Vendors e Locator ID You can use this number to locat
276. e or Invoice with Defaults Preview Es aia Your Company Name Goes Here Invoice Your Company Address Goes Here Your City State and ZIP Goes Here Case 1112 0001 Account ID 2 Inv Date 10 12 2012 Dr George Franks Ship By 12 14 2011 726 5 E 60 TH Shade A2 Phoenix Az 85000 Ship Via Dr George Franks Patient Smith John Qty Products Materials Tooth Amount 1 00 3 4 GOLD CROVWN 77 00 Subtotal 77 00 Tax Amount State Arizona ps County Maricopa 3 85 City Phoenix 1 16 Total Tax 3 66 Invoice Total 35 86 181 Report Menu Billing Invoice Register aooaa mm md ale mm Continued Invoice Register Report System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting gt Main The Invoice Register Report should be printed at least at least once a month but can be printed daily if desired Print this report at the end of the month to capture all of the invoices for the month on a printed report It lists and totals the invoices by case number for a given ieg IMOS S 9 gt Production gt time period A Labels gt Marketing gt Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One A Scheduling gt e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Custom Place a dot in the circle to c
277. e or identify a vendor This number can contain both letters and numbers If left blank Lab Manager will automatically assign it a sequential number starting with the number 1 Name Type the name of the vendor in this field as you want it to appear Address 1 Type the address of the vendor here Address 2 Optional If you need an additional address line use this field City State and Zip fields Use these fields to enter the City State and Zip Postal Codes fields for the vendor Country Use the drop down list to select the country The United States is the default country Phone 1 The vendor s main phone number goes here Phone 2 Optional An alternate vendor phone number can go here FAX Number Optional The vendor s fax number goes here Outsource check box Optional If this vendor is used to outsource cases place a checkmark in the box This will place this vendor in the out source dropdown list in case entry Contact Optional Type the name of the contact person you have for this vendor Instructions Optional instructions can be typed here These instructions can be about anything but often they are used to refer to shipping or billing instructions Terms Optional Billing terms can be placed here to remind you what they are for this vendor URL Optional Enter the web or internet address for this vendor Email Address Optional The vendor s email address can go here Date Retired This field should remain empty If this vendor
278. e the Statements screen Example If an account has a credit balance of 1000 and the Include Accounts with a Credit Balance Greater Than is activated at 100 then all statements that have a credit balance greater than 100 will print Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all your work will be lost System New Edit List Reports Help Global Dr Preferences Tab at Edit Company Preferences WAR company Prefs Define your Account Doctor Preferences then simply assign them to your Ac Edit Com pany Preferences counts and Doctors globally _ Global f Prefs CaseRelated Account Defaults UserInterface Department ID drop down This drop down lists the departments that the rccne o bas preference is associated with e Preference This field is used to type in the preferences that will show on the SeeAccount before shipping work ticket Date Retired Leave this field empty if this is_ a valid Preference To delete this Preference click in the Date Retired field for the Preference you wish to delete and use the dropdown calendar to assign a date If this is ever deleted Lab Manager will place a date in this field that will indicate the record has been deleted retired This will remove the item from your Account and Doctor Preferences To reactivate this globally highlight the date and press delete on your keyboard to remove the date Adding a Global Doctor Preference 1 Click on System Control Panel and then
279. e work ticket until it is moved over to the Selected Steps section e Description This is the name of the step that has been set up at System Production and Steps e Sort Order The sort order lists how the steps will be printed on the work ticket This will also affect how steps are scheduled If the steps are out of order they will be scheduled in the wrong order e Move Up button Use this button to move the steps in the Selected Steps column up in the list to change the order that they will print on the work ticket e Move Down button Use this button to move the steps in the Selected Steps column down in the list to change the order that they will print on the work ticket e Add button Use this button to add a step from the Available Steps column to the Selected Steps column e Add All button Use this button to add all the steps from the Available Steps column to the Selected Steps column e Remove button Use this button to remove a step from the Selected Steps column to the Available Steps column e Remove All button Use this button to remove all steps from the Selected Steps column to the Available Steps column Adding Steps to a Product See image above 1 At the Edit Products screen click Steps 2 A Atthe Available Steps column click the steps that needs to be on a work ticket B If astep in the Available Steps column need to be assigned to this product click the Add button C If all the steps in the Available Steps c
280. eZip Detail Section This area is for the nman a e CompanyPhone g w a Ee w detail items on the invoice which in E Picture i a i PPR RREEREREREREEREREREEEERELEE cludes products and materials This d Line area may have two or more sub reports showing up as blank rectan gles These sub reports are edited separately El GroupHeader a Case Fy ID A Peete iae ccount ccountLocator x Inv Date H Acct Name r Ship By z Account ID AccountLo a Acct Address a Shade a Acct Name Acct Address Acct City State Zip a 5 Acct City State Zi Ship Via This rectangle represents a completely i P ae separate report designed to show the products and materials on the invoice HBHERBRBHBREHERHEHBRHEHBRHEHERHEHREEEE ED E z Patient DrName This field contains notes entered on i E the case that are to appear on the MmBHHHHHHEHEHEHEHEeEee I invoice x n Invoice Total InvoiceTotal a Group Page Footer Sections eae a Se ee ce ee Used for page number and the ie _ as 4 E GroupFootert PageFooter a textbox of TextBoxt ve 4 Data Designer lt gt script These fields show Sub Reports the page number This sub report such as Page 1 of 2 shows the tax infor mation if applicable Section Text amp Image Box Editor This toolbox group offers a number of report controls that you can use when mo
281. ear Logged in Users Status Messages M ID M DateOfM 3 Click Run at the bottom of the screen and gt m Attempting To Troyem from the system waa the grid will tell you when the procedure 2 SUCCESS You may now close this form 08272012 was successful 6 Click Cancel to exit out 1 Lab Manager Server rver Too Server Help Upgrade Server Clear Logged In Users Upgrade Server Create New Company Datab This function is used to update your data each time you install an update to the program You must upgrade your data each time the program is updated to maintain compatibility between the program and the data it accesses a ra ae Reset Admin Password Tou Import v5 Data Backup a Company DB Hy Lab Manager Server Toc Use U pgrade Server lt Restore a Company DB erver Help 1 Right click on the Server Tool icon Upgrade Server server Tool Config 2 Left click on Run As or Run As Adminis Click the Run button below to upgrade all the databases on this server to the latest version of Lab Manager Delete a Company DB trator If Run As is used you should see a Change License check box with the text of Protect my Aging Scheduler computer and data from unauthorized Status Messages ae ti it 5 MessagelD Message DateOfMessage SERENS prog ram activi y E p1 LM_Master on this Server does not need upgrading because it is at version 7 0 5 08 27 2012
282. ed a a a L LL 0610 000 Mueller NonT axa 42 List Screens View or locate information in a list format Navigation Tools Example Clicking List and then Cases will take you to a list if no search criteria is used and Search is selected then the list displayed will contain ALL of the cases in the system On the other hand if you search for all of the cases for a given account the list displayed will only contain the cases for that account that are not statemented Sorting To sort a list just click on the column heading Example To sort the list by doctor click on the Doctor heading The list to the right is now sorted by Doctor instead of by Case Num ber To sort by Patient click on the Patient heading Filtering Filtering allows you to hide items from the list that do not match a given criteria Example You might filter out all of the cases except the ones for a given doctor To filter the list by doctor click on the small funnel to the right of Doctor This will open a drop down list that includes All Custom Blanks Non Blanks and a list of doctor names To filter the list to show only doctors called Cash Accounts click on CASH ACCOUNT in the drop down list e The All function will cause the list to show all items and removes any filtering e The Custom function allows you to create custom filters that can be based on one or more filter items CaseNumber d Patient AccountName w Offi
283. eduling gt ng gt b b Accounts g gt Doctors Products Materials Employees Vendors Salespersons Invoices Marketing Contacts Dr Account Locations Doctor Labels Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Sort lLocatoriD O Address Type Invoice st Shipping Product Labels 3 gt MISC ADJUSTMENT A gt MISC ADJUSTMENT 117 gt MISC CALL TAG i 121 gt MISC CALL TAG SHIPPING 14 gt MISC COMPUTER REPAIR 413 gt MISC Use this screen to print labels with the Product ID the Department it is assigned to and the Product Name This is designed to print on an Avery 5160 style label sheet which provides 30 different labels per sheet Sort By Radio Buttons Choose One Locator ID A dot in the circle will sort the labels in numerical order Description A dot in the circle will sort the labels in alphabetical order ieg Nous Preview or Print the Product Labels 1 Click on Reports Labels and then Products 2 Choose how to sort the labels 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen 1022207 ase COMPUTER SERVICES System New Edit List Reports Help Accountin General ieg IMOS Billing Labels Marketing A a A a e A amp m S System New Edit List Reports Help GENE Product Lbl Report Product Labels Printer Production Scheduling g Accounts Do
284. ee Demeteusege quantity quantity sold for the month the cost of the sold material sales Outsourced Cases profit current inventory level and the inventory value Quotes Cases at a Glance This report is another way of looking at the cases in the ice etal system showing the Case Number Account Name Patient Dr s Date Delivery Report Finish Date Ship by Date and the Number of Units for each case Case Tracking This report generates a list of cases based on the filter crite ria you select Material Reorders This report lists the vendors name and contact information along with a list of materials that need to be ordered Material Remakes Usage Not available yet Outsourced Cases This report can be used to track were cases have been outsourced when they need to be returned and when they were returned Quotes This area will allow you to print out quotes Daily Delivery List This delivery report is designed to be given to the delivery person It automatically lists cases to be delivered and organizes them by delivery route Delivery Report This delivery report is designed to list all of the cases that must be delivered on a given date between two dates for a given account department or a route The report can be sorted by ship by date doctor date or finished date General gt Billing gt ieg yNdy0YUsS Marketing gt Doctors Production YTD 1032307 ase Scheduling gt Product Production 197
285. een iio Tech for Accounts Seenaa oie ab This optional feature assigns the selected employee to any cases for a given account automatically This feature is available in the Scheduling Module only e Add Account Button This button is used to assign this individual accounts to this Accounts technician AccounuD e Add To All Button This button is used to assign this technician to all the accounts e CASH ACCOUNT and it will fill the grid automatically e Remove From All Button This button is used to clear the entire list of accounts that this employee technician is assigned to Assign Accounts to a Technician Click on System Control Panel and then Employees On the Edit Employee screen click on the Tech for Accounts Tab Click the Add Account button and this will create a drop down in the grid From the drop down choose the Account that technician needs to be assigned to Click again on Add Account to add more accounts one at a time If this technician needs to be assigned to all accounts click the Add to All button which will add all accounts to the grid Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost oR OND O Deleting Accounts from a Technician 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Employees On the Edit Employee screen click on the Tech for Accounts Tab Select the Account in the grid by clicking the square to the left of the name of the account
286. eens are used to view a list of items or locate information The list might contain all of the 2 Sania items or it might be limited to just a few of the available items g Doctors Example At the List Accounts screen in the search area using no search criteria will give you a list con jaiai taining ALL accounts in the system On the other hand in the search screen if you search for all accounts A bna with a specific address then the list will display only accounts with that address 5 SERES gt Case Completion e See the Navigation Tools section that covers searching and sorting in the List Menu Vendors e See the New Accounts to add accounts Marketing Contacts Statements Invoices 3 System New Edit List Reports Help System New Edit List Reports Help S Bea List Accounts Oand or Oand or I showRetired E showsqQt Marked z search A Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Search Field 3 3 g Function Function Function Gu a c c c Ea Primmy Value i Primary Value a Primary Value i Accountha me Ti Locator T Code wo SpecialCodes W Definable a a gt CASH ACCOUNT 13 122011 Wi i Add a New Account Using List Accounts 1 At the Menu Bar click List Accounts then the Add New button at the bottom of the screen 2 For full instructions see the New Account section of this manual Modify an Existing Account Using the List Accounts 1 Click on List Account
287. ekends are already marked as Closed Users located in other nations with these modules should Add New Review m Completed review these holidays If you would like to keep this Setup Wizard from opening again click Oo Save hara 74 System Menu Case Entry System Menu Case Entry Ce System New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel Start at System and then click on Case Entry At Case Entry you can edit or view Case Entry Doctors Items Production Delivery Methods e Doctors Items These are commonly received items from doctors By creating a list Lab Manager allows you to keep track of the items received by selecting them from a list on the Case Entry screen e Delivery Methods The Delivery Methods screen is a list of ways you may deliver cases to your accounts These methods commonly include UPS Ground UPS Overnight UPS 2 day Fedex Overnight etc e Material Unit Types These can be defined as Pennyweight Each Gram Grain Ounce Set and more Calendar Material Unit Types Accounting Codes Bar Coding Shipping Admin Tools Exit Doctor Items Doctors Items are items you commonly receive from your doctors By creating a list Lab Manager allows you Case Entry Doctors Items to keep track of the items received by selecting them from a list on the Case Entry screen Lab Manager Production Delivery Methods comes with a list of items already defined
288. elect the line On your keyboard press delete 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Products screen or all your work will be lost 133 New Menu Products CA Cla od Kolo ik Continued Steps Tab at Edit Products Screen Sections TABS Prices Related Products Related Materials Codes Notes Steps Image Selected Steps Available Steps This feature is available in the Scheduling module only gt Stepnumber3S 1 Step number 1 Step1 The Steps tab is used to assign production steps the processes Step number 2 Step2 2A technicians perform in the lab on a day to day basis to a product 4 ea B Once steps have been set up in the Production Steps area assign 2C them to a product by clicking on the desired step in the right box and Move Up_ Add As clicking on the Add New button The left box will contain the list of Move Dow steps assigned to this product Steps in a crown and bridge lab might include Preparatory Frame Waxup Sprue Invest and Cast Frame Finish Porcelain Buildup Porcelain Contour Final Finish and more These steps can be set up at System Production and then Steps e Selected Steps The selected steps are the steps that will show up on the work ticket when the product on the Edit Product screen is assigned to a case e Available Steps These steps are all the steps that have been set up and are available to be listed as a step for this product If the step is in the available column it will not show up on th
289. ence Payment Type Amount 3 Dr Susan Smith 104212012 9685 Check Dr George Franks 10M 2012 Dr John Killdare 10212012 2 442 85 2 442 85 400 00 400 00 200 00 200 00 Checks Credit Card Adjustments Credits Discounts Refunded Tax Grand Total 3 042 65 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 QB QB QB QB QB QB 183 3 042 85 Report Menu Billing Current Sales aooaa mm md ale mm Continued Current Sales Report System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting The Current Sales Report is similar to an Invoice Register This report lists and totals the 8 General invoices by account or doctor during a specific time period s Billing Invoices Production j j Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One w e aa Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the aoe i date in MM DD YYYY format a Current Sales e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the aiina Statements date in MM DD YYYY format Year To Date Reports e Custom A dot in the circle chooses your own start and end dates Product Sales e MTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and Material Sales ending dates e YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates e Today A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current dat
290. endar and then Holidays TPE ETE 2 Click on Add New button at the bottom of the screen This is will add a new line item to the grid New Years Day 3 In the new line item in the grid under the Description column type the name of the holiday Thanksgiving 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all holidays have been entered Weekends 5 You do not have to type a holiday ID an ID will be assigned automatically when the changes have been saved Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost O The Edit Shipper Holiday screen tells Lab Manager which holidays shipping companies are closed Lab Manager comes with some predefined shipper holidays already in the list System New Edit List Reports Help GEE Shipper Holidays Edit Shipper Holidays E Show Retired Modify Existing Shipper Holidays ieg INIO 1 Click on System Calendar and then Shipper Holidays 2 Click on the name of the shipper holiday under the Description column 3 Modify the name 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Shipper Holidays ShipperHolidayID Description DateRetired Christ mas Add Additional Shipper Holidays Independence Da Labor Day 1038307 ase 1 Click on System Calendar and then Shipper Holidays 2 Click on Add New button at the bottom of the screen This is will add a new line item to the grid 3 In the new line item in the grid under the Description column type the n
291. ennyweight will be subtracted from the inventory of that gold By default the QtyTakenFrominv will be the same as the Quantity entered in the Quantity field e Shade Use this field to define the shade for the selected material This shade will print on the invoice e Unit Price This field shows the unit single quantity price of the material This price can be changed on the fly without affecting other cases Example If the normal price of the selected material is 123 50 but you wish to give the account a special price on just this case you can change the price by simply typing over it Materials Unit Price Discount SubTotal LotNumber ImportedTeeth Date Created OutSourceVendorlD OutSourceDateDueBack SafetyInfo Remake Rush Case DISCOUNT PACKAGE 08 23 2012 e Unit Price Discount This field can be used to discount a material Only positive numbers can be entered into this field Entering a positive num ber into this field will reduce the total accordingly Example If the selected material normally sells for 123 50 but you want to sell it for 100 00 on this case only you can simply type 23 50 into this field The 23 50 will be subtracted from the 123 50 to show a Sub Total amount of 100 00 e Sub Total This field shows the total of the selected material as it will appear on the invoice This total will include discounts and modified Unit Prices e Lot Number Use this field to document the lot number the material came from The lot nu
292. enu Account TAWA ola EA oli LE continued Section Account Locations Doctors Account Locations Tab at Edit Account Screen An account can have one or more account locations Usually these account locations include an address to mail invoices statements and possibly a different address to ship cases If you mail invoices and statements to the same address that you return cases to then you only need to define one address To add a new account location simply click the Add Location button and the Edit Account Location screen will pop up Credit Limit 0 00 Referred By O Special Codes 122011 HB suppress Quality Control Price List J Prices OBE commission Rate Discount Fate Remake Disc Phone Ext Salesperson re ii Reg Date Start Date 02 20 1984 Email Invoice Terms C9 30 0 015 scc m Reg Number Exp Date 12 25 2012 Ledger Account Locations SEa Cag Slelade a acm 8 6 10 meee lat lab Add Location we x x Edit This Locat 1718 E Rose Phoenix AZ 85016 HE Account Location Edit Se e Location Name This is the name of the location i i e Address 1 This is the 1st line for the ad ccount Location Edit dress Location Name Send Invoices to this Address J e Address 2 This is the 2nd line for the ad dress if it is along address e City State Zip These fields are used to notate the City State Province Zip Postal Code e Country Use the dropdown list to
293. eports Help Main CallTracking List Employees Case Locator M a i n M e nu View Easy Menus LSG Prod New Setup Wizard Case Entry amp Update Case Entry amp Update Button This is found at the Main Menu and will allow you to enter a new case 1032207 asep ieg MYOS Case Search Case Search Button Click on this button to use the Advanced Search capabilities to find a case Report Menu Report Menu Button Click on this button to access reports Maintenance Menu Maintenance Menu Button Click on this button to access items like Accounts Doctors Products etc it Quit ae Help Button Click on this button to be directed to From the Main Menu you can get to the several frequently used menus within Lab Manager Case Entry amp Update Create a New Case see a List of Cases or Search for Cases more information about the software Report Menu View all Report listings and use those from your module Exit Quit Button Click on this button to close out of Maintenance Menu Maintain your Accounts Doctors Products Materials and more the program Help View documentation on Lab Manager and Let Us Help You remotely i Exit Quit This will close the program and you will lose all unsaved changes 73 System Menu Control Panel continued Setup Wizard This form will allow you to input all information in a logical order starting from step one System Menu Control Panel Con
294. er 3 Click the Add Account button and this will create a drop down in the grid Notes 4 From the drop down choose the Account that technician needs to be assigned to 5 Click again on Add Account to add more accounts one at a time If this technician needs to be as signed to all accounts click the Add to All button which will add all accounts to the grid 6 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost E SalesPerson EQ Technician WS Driver wtem New EIT List Reports Help Ore cid deals itom Edit Employees Tech for Doctors Tab at Edit Employees Screen i ele eee Tech For Doctors Mein Edit Employees e This optional feature allows the selected employee to be assigned to are Doctors a doctor when scheduling a case This feature is available in the DoctoriD Scheduling Module only pagon he CASH at CASH ACCOUNT 2905 State Province fs oie Assign Doctors to a Technician w Date Retired 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Employees Bith Date 2 On the Edit Employee screen click on the Tech for Doctors Tab PhoneNumber OO O 3 Click the Add Doctor button and this will create a drop down in the grid Ha 4 Choose the Doctor this technician needs to be assigned to 5 Click again on Add Doctor to add more doctors one at a time If this technician needs to be assigned to all doctors click the Add to All button which will add all doctors to the grid Click
295. erInterface IEG JNIOYS Aging Metho i To change the Company Name Call LSG to get a new key aa O Statement Based Invoice Based Company Nam 5G Prod New Address 1 1718 E Rose Lane Open Time 8 00 AM Address 2 Close Time 5 00 PM City State phoenix AZ 85016 Minutes for Breaks Including Lunch ol Zip Minutes Per Day Phone 800 677 1120 Fax 602 279 3633 Email sales labsysgrp com Reg fo Fiscal Year Start Month Day 01 01 2012 URL wer labsysqrp cam x Clase an Save or Cancel Save Changes Define YOUR company address and other important contact information e Address 1 Address 2 used when address is long and more space is needed City State Zip Postal Code Phone Fax Email Reg Registration Number URL Website Address Aging Method Refers to the way Service Charges are calculated If you are not using Service Charges make no changes e Statement Based will calculate service charges based upon the Statement Date e Invoice Based will calculate service charges based upon the individual Invoice Dates Define Your Hours of Operation Applies to Scheduling module ONLY Total hours between opening and closing time minus duration of breaks equals the length of a day This is used to calculate case scheduling e Open Time Type in the time your lab opens by using the drop down list Times are given in 15 minute increments e Close Time Type in the time your la
296. erage value and percentage of work billed Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One Sort By Radio Buttons Choose One Preview or Print the Account Analysis Report Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format Custom A dot in the circle will choose your own start and end dates MTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and ending dates YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and end ing dates Today A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date Fiscal YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year Unstatemented A dot in the circle will fill in the start and end date for cases that have General Main l Billing Invoices Invoice Register Labels Cash Receipts Marketing b b d Production gt b b Current Sales b Scheduling Statements pom sey ps IOUS Year To Date Reports Product Sales Material Sales Account Analysis Product Price List Materials Price List Commissions Taxes with Sales FlighTags FlighTags Travel Credits not yet been statemented Example Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want
297. erial Vendor Marketing Contact Search ieg yNd 10NS excluding a patient because a name was misspelled number e Lot Enter in a partial or a whole lot number EE Case Code e Case Enter in either a partial or a whole case num User Status as H ber with a dash E account E e RX Enter in either a partial or whole RX number ESA Start Date Ignore e Tooth Enter in the tooth number Doctor Date e Product Shade Enter in a shade for a product This eee will only search the shades that have been assigned Patient O toa product are O Invoice Date e Material Shade Enter in a shade for a material This med Ship By Date will only search the shades that have been assigned Ship By Time to a material Pan O O o e Case Shade Enter in a shade Tooth E i e Case Code Enter in a case code Product Shade ainai RE ij onore e Articulator Enter in a partial or whole articulator MaterialShade i Pick Up Date id sd id mH o e m Right Column Criteria Articulator Retired Date Has No Value e PO Enter in a partial or a whole PO number Lot e Received Date The date the case was received e Start Date The date the case was started in the lab e Doctor Date The date the doctor needs the case e Chair Time Use the dropdown list and choose the chair time for the patient e Invoice Date The date the case was invoiced Date fields contain
298. erials Price List starting and ending dates Commissions e Today Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the starting and end Taxes with Sales ing dates with the current date FlighTags e Fiscal YTD Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the starting and FlighTags Travel Credits ending dates of the Fiscal Year e Unstatemented Place a dot in the circle the system will fill in the start and end date for cases that have not yet been statemented Example Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want the date range of current unstatemented cases to start with the first unstatemented case dated 8 5 12 The system will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today System New Edit List Reports Help Elam Product Sales Report Preview or Print the Product Sales Report Product Sales 1 Click on Reports Billing and then Product Sales 2 Choose a date range 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Starting Date 99 04 2012 custom QUnstateme mnD Ending Date 09 21 2012 yvnD Today Fiscal YD Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Product Sales Filtered By Between 10 12 2012 AND 10 12 2012 Friday October 12 2012 Your Campan Name Goes Here Product Qty Sold Amount Sold Average 3 4 GOLD CROWN 6 0000 635 04 79 36 ALBACAST CROWN 1 0000 91 00 91 00 ASSEMBLE amp SOLDER 1 0000 33 00 33 00 FULL CAST GO
299. erred to when entering in a case These notes do not print out on invoices statements or work tickets Adding Notes to An Account Data Financial Motes History Defaults Invoices Payments Commission Aate Discount Aate Remake Disc Salesperson Reg Date Start Date Definable Optional This field can be used to store any ovaie Terme Peg Number Exp Date user definable information you want coe pases Stop Referred by Optional Define the name of the person or account this doctor was referred by Commission Rate Optional Define the commission rate paid to a salesperson on all sales made to this account Salesperson Optional Use this drop down list to select the salesperson assigned to this account Use the or L keys beside the field to add new salespeople Invoice Terms Used to assign an invoice term to an account Each account MUST be assigned a valid invoice term The invoice term de fines how to compute service charges and automatic discounts Use the or L keys beside the field to add a new invoice term Typical invoice terms are already defined Code Optional Type user definable information or codes URL Optional If the account has a website place that address here Example www labsysgrp com Special Codes Optional Type user definable information or codes Discount Rate Optional Define an automatic discount rate that will be applied to all products and or materials that allow discounts
300. ers when invoicing 107 NCEA Cla LOMOtsbyeu continued How to Enter a New Case at Case Entry At the Menu Bar at the top of the screen click New and then Case When ENTERING CASES it is important that you define the fields that are in BOLD The BOLD fields are required The other fields are optional NO 10 To add additional materials When you have finished entering this case you must select one of these options Qw gt J Start by selecting the Doctor s Name or their ID number by using the drop down lists at the top of the screen Enter a Patient Name Example Last name First name Received date is NOT optional but it can be modified if neces S BE eait cases sary poet SCID Define any dates such as Doc of tor Date or Ship by Date that Case Entry 4 oy _ To add products to the case Patient O WB Fiightags W Mark EQ Work Ticket Needs Printing J Invoice Needs Printing Invoice Date click on the New Products but User Statu Shade HB Quote Needs Printing Invoice Amount ton on the left of the Products Received Stat Date 08 24 2012 Quoted On 10 21 2003 incest grid or use a hot key of Alt P Doctor Date Finish Date P 0 Num Products Total When filling in the blank product Ship By Date Pickup Date Gender m F io record you can use the ID or 4 ShipByTime _ Date Picked Up age Discount Total Product Description drop down Pan Number e Date Delivered Chair Time Tax Total lis
301. ery Method Shipping e Days in Transit Type a number in the field to note how many days it typically takes a package to arrive at Admin Tools the account s location after it has been shipped Exit e User Shipper Holidays Checkbox Place a check mark in the box to tell the system to use the common list of shipper holidays e Date Created This is the date that the Delivery Method was created in the list e Date Retired Leave this field empty If this Delivery Method is ever deleted Lab Manager will place a date in this field that will indicate the deliv ery method has been deleted retired This will remove the delivery method from certain reports and lists Click the Clear Button C in the date retired field to remove the date and this will make the Delivery Method active once again 19 system Menu Case Entry System Menu Case Entry continued Oand or Oand or I show Retired E show sq Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Search Field 3 Modify Existing Delivery Methods Function Function Function 1 Click on System Case Entry and then Delivery Methods op 2 The search area will appear Choose from two options Type in the Primary vatue Primary Value Primary Value name of the Delivery Method and click Search To see a whole i list of Delivery Methods leave the search area blank and click Search 3 Click on the name of the Delivery Method item in the De scription column 4 At the Edit Delivery Met
302. ery Status Benoa Reporting Technician Production Works with Single Station amp Multi Dollar Value of Work Produced Station Employee Time Clock Lab Manager v7 QuickBooks Interface QuickBooks Interface Easily Transfer Data Totals to QuickBooks This interface transfers your Lab Manager v7 data totals into Quick Books to get Accounts Receivable Accounts Payable General Ledger and Payroll reports Copy Protection Please remember your v7 purchase agreement states that one copy of Lab Manager can only be used on a single computer at one time unless a multi user license has been purchased Illegal copying and use of Lab Manager is a violation of copyright statutes and is punish able by law By using Lab Manager you agree to the terms of the Sales and Warranty agreement In staying current with constantly changing technology new versions are scheduled to be released periodically Older versions of Lab Manager may be retired 2 years after the final sale of that version FREE updates any revisions for your current version are available from the website during that time period After the version is retired you may continue using it but there may be no support available If at such time your computer fails the key is lost and the retired version is no longer available on the website the current version may need to be pur chased at the current price When a new version is released you have the option to purchase the new version at
303. es 30 60 and 90 day past due balances etc Collections Use this screen to print a Collections Report showing which accounts have a past due balance General Journal Use this screen to print a General Journal Report showing all of the Journal entries made for the time period selected Tax Reports A Taxes Collected Use this screen to print a report showing the tax amount invoiced for each account for the period defined by the Starting and Ending dates B Taxes By Collector This screen is used to print a report showing taxes by Tax Collector for a given time period C Taxes Collected 2 This report lists the name of the tax rate how much was done in taxable sales and what the actual tax liability is from those sales Account History The Account History Report lists payments and cases that have been issued to an account The report is sorted by date showing the most recent entries first Invoice Details List This report shows cases by account It will list the case number patient name items on the case along with the to tals Account Ledger The account ledger is used for looking at a specific account balance quickly It gives information about the account s contact information along with how much is owed and when they have paid Scheduling Invoice Details List 157 Report Menu Accounting Aged Trial Balance Short lt ole umm sale mmavexerellaliiale E continued A
304. es on the report Choose a Date Range Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen 3 Select the type of cases to show on the report such as In Progress Invoiced and or Statemented The default is both Invoiced and 4 5 Optional Selected an account from the dropdown list if you only want to look at one account 6 Material Production Analysis This report lists e Materials by Department Friday October 12 2012 Quantity of Units Department Material e Total Dollar Value of those Units Billing e Average Cost per Unit ARGEN 77 e Total Cost ERA ATTACHMENT OV Your Company Name Goes Here Qty Total Avg Total Cost 2 00 67 66 43 83 3 42 12 50 441 00 36 75 350 00 14 50 528 66 80 58 353 42 GOLD GATE ARGEN 72 4 25 6 04 1 51 3 02 4 25 6 04 1 51 3 02 Grand Total 18 75 534 70 82 09 356 44 202 Report Menu Production Account Production lt ole umm 1010 Wm ee keke Tiol continued System New Edit List Reports Help Account Production Report Accounting General The Account Production Report shows how many products have been produced for each account Billing Production Work Tickets Labels Marketing gt Lab Status Doctors Production YTD The report lists Account s Name with Specific Products Used in Their Cases Quantity of Products for Each Account Totaled by Month Scheduling Product Pr
305. established which form you are using you can start making changes to the default form using the Design function and save those changes under a new name as described earlier After creating the new Custom Report add it to Lab Manager and then substitute it for the existing form or report Note AppReportName Invoices and Report Item Invoice DBL Main in the screen to the right are the form types that are being used for the in voices Adding a Custom Report Item After creating a custom report or sub report using the report designer add the item to the list of custom report items in Lab Manager The ReportFileName is the name the report was saved with The Report Name is a human readable description you must give to the report This name can have spaces It is this de scription that is used in Lab Manager elsewhere Go to System Control Panel and then Manage Reports then click on the Custom Report Items tab 1 Click the add Custom Report button at the bottom of the screen to add a line to the above table 2 Click the GetFileName button in the new line under the column GetFileName to select the form you have pre viously saved This will display the file name under Re port File Name 3 Under the Report Name column add a name for this report Example Custom Inv DBL Main 4 Remove the check mark from the Close on Save or Cancel box 5 Click the Saves Changes button If you don t save the changes first then you won
306. ew Edit List Reports Help Accounting General Billing Production Work Tickets Labels Lab Status Marketing Doctors Production YTD Scheduling Product Production oeo ase es IMOS Material Production Account Production Material Usage e Invoice Date Default Setting Place a dot in the circle to filter the report by the date that the case was invoiced e Received Date A dot in the circle to filter the report by the received date that was entered on the case e In Process checkbox A check in the box if you want to filter the report with cases that do not have an invoiced or statemented status The In Process status can not be used in combination with Invoice Date since it will have no invoiced date e Invoice checkbox Default setting Placing a check in this box will show all invoiced cases that match the other criteria e Statemented checkbox Default setting Placing a check in this box will show all statemented cases that match the other criteria Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the alae O calendar function or type in the date in MM DDIYYYY format e Custom Place a dot in the circle to choose your own start and end dates e MTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Month To
307. f payment Charge This column shows the amount that the case was billed for Payment This column shows the amount that the payment was issued for Notes This column shows notes that were issued on the payment Use this screen to define or edit the rs you send bills to Data Ejnancial Notes History Defaults Invoices Payments Phone 2 Data Financial Notes History Defaults In Use this screen to define or edit the docto Payments Drag a column header here to group by that column 1212 0001 1206 0103R 1206 0103 1108 0064 1112 0086 07 08 2012 06 27 2012 06 27 2012 06 27 2012 12 20 2011 Lee Brian 56 0000 JOHNSON STEV 100 0000 JOHNSON STEVE 100 0000 QUOTE FOR KEE 0 0000 SHIPPING 42 0700 joo Data Financial Notes History Drag a column header here t Pay mentDate Amount 06 27 2012 06 27 2012 11 29 2010 01 26 2011 01 26 2011 04 29 2011 12 19 2011 0 00 0 00 1 267 162 100 00 567 76 24 00 42 07 f Use this screen to define or edit the doctors you sen Sar iemeulelasme Payments roup Dy that umn Adjustment Payoff 1108 0064 Payoff 1108 0064 Adjustment Payoff 1108 006 Payoff 1108 006 Check Consolidated P Check 1093 Check CASH Credit Card Visa Credit Card Visa was listed with the payment Example Check Number Notes This column shows notes that were issued on the payment 120 New M
308. f the existing items and to add new items Load Financial Data Using the QuickBooks Interface payment totals can be transferred from Lab Manager to QuickBooks Load Follow Ups Use this button to load the marketing follow up dates into the marketing calendar On Hold Button Put accounts on hold and they will not show in the drop down lists on a case Click the On Hold button in the drop down list to be able to choose a doctor from an account that is on hold Next This button can be used to move forward through the records Example If you are on doctor number 3 of 4 the Next button will move you to the next doctor in the list New Product To add products to the case click on the New Products button on the left of the Products grid on a case AIt P New Material To add Materials to the case click on the New Material button on the left of the Materials grid on a case Alt M Preview Use this button to view or preview the report While previewing a report zoom in on an image move from page to page print it using the Print button in the upper left screen or even send the report to a different printer Previous This button moves backwards through the records or to the previous person or item in a list Print Use this button to send your report to the default printer in Windows Print Quote This creates a printable quote instead of invoicing the case Quick Return Use this button if a previously statemented case needs to be
309. fMessage Major Version Limit 6 Minor 255 Expiration Date Demo T Beta Users 255 11 Server Tools Elo Ee ATS meey aV 1 am Kole mm continued Reset Admin istrator Password Server Help Clear Logged In Users This function is used to restore the Lab Manager Administrator password back to its factory default set Be Upgrade Server ting This can be handy if the password was changed and then forgotten LM 7 Server Tool Create New Company Database Reset Admin Password 4 Import v5 Data Reset the Administrator Password e Right click on the Server Tool icon e Left click on Run As or Run As Administrator If Run As is used you should see a check box with the text of Protect my computer and data from unauthorized program activity e Uncheck this box and click OK When the program opens click on the Server Menu then on Setup New Lab Manager 1 Click on Server then on Reset Admin Password 2 Click the Restore Admin Password button 3 Once it is done click the little black X at the top of the screen to exit out Backup a Company DB Server Help Restore a Company DB Restore Admin Pwd Server Tool Config Delete a Company DB Change License Aging Scheduler Misc Admin Tools Copy Database Attach Company DB Import Lab Manager Version 5 5 Professional Data Lab Manager Server Tool Server Help Setup New Lab M r Before importing your Lab Man
310. ffer billing terms that allow an account to have a 30 60 or 90 day past City of Phoenix Taxable due balance then you must set up the Invoice Terms that will compute the appropriate ser vice charges and or past due charges on those past due amounts Non Taxable Charity Maricopa County Taxable State of Arizona ni Taxable Non Taxable System Menu Accounting Tax Collectors Syscem New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel Case Entry Tax Collectors are people organizations or government entities that collect tax Example In Phoenix Tax Collectors include the Department of Revenue the City of Phoenix along with some surrounding cities and several Counties If the doctor is subject to city tax only define one Tax Collector called City To enter new tax collectors or to edit information on existing tax collectors click System Accounting and then Tax Col Accounting Tax Collectors lectors Production enu Calendar Codes Tax Rates Admin Tools Tax Categories The Edit Tax Collectors screen allows you to define information about your tax collectors e Tax Collector ID This is the ID that is automatically assigned to the tax collector e Description This is the name of the Tax Collector e Date Retired This is the date that the Tax Collector has been retired deleted e Show Retired This check box is used to show the retired tax collector in the list If
311. field is a short description of the production step Value This is the value of the step for the purpose of determining technician production Time to Finish in minutes This is used to define the amount of time required to finish this step If the step requires 1 day to complete then enter 480 in minutes to complete Color Optional Color selection drop down list Label Checkbox Click to include with other steps when printing the scheduling labels Mark Checkbox There is a checkbox associated with most data in Lab Manager This checkbox can be used to select or mark one or more production steps and then print a label or a report showing only the production steps that have been marked Include in Report Checkbox Place a check in the box if you want this step included on reports Do Not Auto Calc Steps Per Day Checkbox Place a check in the box so the system does not auto calculate the steps per day Date Created This is the date the step was created in the list Date Retired Leave this field empty If this step is ever deleted Lab Manager will place a date in this field that will indicate the step has been deleted retired This will remove the step from certain reports and lists Click the blue Clear Button C in the Date Retired field to remove the date and this will make the step an active step again 78 System Menu Production ETC elem ed Koe Coi iol 1E continued 5 System New Edit List Reports Help Steps continued
312. from the Menu Bar click Edit and then Vendor Product ieg Myos Material Vendor For more information on editing a vendors go to Section New Vendors Marketing Contact 2207 ase Image 1 Image 2 ES Find Vendor DER Select CJ KELLY PAPER System New Edit List Reports Help OENE Edit Vendors Edit Vendors Vendor Codes VendorCodelD Locator ID Name KELLY PAPER Address 1 124 W INDIAN SCHOOL Address 2 2032207 aseo Jes IMOS Ciy State Zipf PHoenw az iaga Modifying a Vendor Using Edit Menu Poni ij 1 At the Menu Bar click Edit then Vendor Contact David Jones 2 At the Find Vendor box type in the vendor s Loca Instuctions HRS M F 8 5 SATS 230 ai tor ID or use the Select drop down list and click Tems GO Image 1 UR Use this screen to define the vendors you purchase 3 At Edit Vendors modify the items that need to be deo uC changed Image 2 fe 4 In this manual see Section New Vendors for more information on using this screen 5 Click Save Changes on the Edit Vendor screen or all your work will be lost 147 Edit Menu Marketing Contact amp Pickup Edit Menu Marketing Contacts System New Edit List Reports Help Edit Marketing Contact at Edit Menu a Account This area is used to pull up a specific marketing contact This does not give you the same search options that List A Sarar provides This is for existing marke
313. g New Invoice Terms see screen below 1 Click on System Accounting and then Invoice Terms At the Search screen click on Add New button at the bottom of the screen and it will bring up the Edit Invoice Terms screen In the Description field type in the name of the Invoice Terms Place a check in the checkbox for Display Terms in Case Entry if you want to display the terms in case entry Place a check in the checkbox for Overridable to be able to change the invoice terms at case entry Select one option e Use the Due Date Day of Month field if payment must be received by the 15th Type 15 into the box e OR use the Due Date Weeks field If customer has 4 weeks to pay the bill Type 4 into the box e OR use the Due Date Calendar Days field if payment is due 30 days from the time it was invoiced Type 30 into the box 7 Click the Add New button on the right side of the screen to create a line in the grid 8 In the Number of Days Column define length of billing terms 30 60 90 9 Select one option e Inthe Discount Percentage Column define the discount percentage Example 02 for 2 Discount ba System New Edit ist Repotts Help e OR inthe Service Charge Percentage Column define the discount percentage Example 02 for a 2 service charge to past due cases e OR in the Service Charge Amount Column define a dollar value Example 10 for a 10 fee if the payment was not received in time 10 Repeat steps 7 through 9 until all invoi
314. g and ending dates automatically e Today Place a dot in the circle to have it automatically fill in the starting and ending e Fiscal YTD Place a dot in the circle to have it automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year e Unstatemented custom Q Unstateme Onn Ending Date 11 30 2012 rnp Today Fiscal yo Preview or Print the Tax Reports 1 Click on Reports Accounting and then Tax Reports Select the type of report you would like Choose a Date Range Edit the Starting Date if necessary Edit the Ending Date if necessary Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen oR WwW NY A Taxes Invoiced by Collector Taxes Invoiced By Collector Taxes By Collector Filtered By Between 10 1 2012 AND 10 31 2012 This report shows taxes by Tax Collector fora given time period Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here e Tax Collector Collector e Tax Collectors Tax Category AIDOR e Amount Tax Collected County Maricopa 85 16 e Grand Total State Arizona 05 16 170 32 City Of Phoenix City Phoenix 25 56 25 56 Grand Total 195 88 Continued on next page 164 Report Menu Accounting Tax Reports lt ole umm aE oole Tai ars Ml continued B Taxes Invoiced to Dr John Killdare Phoenix AZ County Maricopa 0 05000 26 50 Tax Amount Dr John Killdare Phoenix AZ State Arizona 0 05000 26 50 Totals Tax Column Taxes Co
315. g on the tabs running across the top of the screen ieg jNIpOYs 10j2307 35e5 NOTE You can t close a List screen before you Close the Edit screen tied to it Example In the screen image below you can t close the List Payments tab before you close the Edit Payments tab This is because the Edit Pay ments screen is getting its data from the List Payments screen One is dependent upon the other Therefore if you have problems closing a screen check to see that you don t have a dependant screen open System New Edit List Reports Help List Screen EOE eit te eee List Payments SSS llc UU ountName VY PaymentDate VY Description Y a unt VY ReferenceNumber VY Now Y DateCreated VY Cash A Edit Screen System New Edit List Reports Help Pay ments ieg yndyoYS 1038307 ase gt CMC it se eee aie Edit Payments 13eg Imos Edit Payments Account UE cash ACCOUNT z Locator D CU 13 CASH ACCOUNT ietis 1h0 0000 Use Current Bal Keterence Numher Payment nate 02 20 2012 Pay ment Type CASH ACCOUNT 1718 E Rose Phoenix AZ 85016 O 10 030 9577 i Last State ment 0 00 Current Balance 44 00 Invoiced Cases with Balance Selected CaseNumber InvoicelID InvoiceDate Balance gt mal 1212 0001 41996 77872012 56 00 Control Buttons Menu Bar The Menu Bar at the top of the screen can be accessed by pres
316. ged Trial Balance Short Report b_Syster New Edit List Reports Lisp Accounting gt Aged Trial Balance Short The Aged Trial Balance report provides up to the minute account s receivable information Denem CF Aged Trial Balance Know what your doctors owe and what they have paid This report lists current month to Billing Collections date charges 30 60 90 days past due charges and the total account balance for each Production gt General Journal doctor F Labels b Tax Reports x i 3 Marketing gt A t Hist The Aged Trial Balance can be viewed or printed anytime during the month as well to nema ni ae verify that all account balances are correct anytime 5 OP NERT Account Ledger WARN N G BEFORE PRINTING STATEMENTS at the end of the month choose Simulate Aging so that the report will match the statements which may include service charges This report should be printed at the end of the month to capture Current charges Past due charges Payments Service charges and account balances on paper It is a useful tool in determining errors before printing the end of month statements System New Edit List Reports Help New ATB 2 Job Tab S EZERA ATB 2 Report e Exclude Accounts With No Activity Aqed Trial Balance 2 check box When this has a check in the Printer BRN_DODA4A on http 192 168 1 131 redirected 4 Tray 0 box accounts that do not have a balance or activity with cases or payments will not
317. gement a vast array of production and financial reports This module At least 50 MB Free Hard Drive Space adds another layer of management information through work tickets reports on lab CD ROM Dri status basic inventory department production remakes and sales information Typically awe used by owners who keep a close watch on sales and production USB Pen Drive Recommended For Backups Scheduling Module Requires Lab Manager v7 Billing and Production modules Compatible with most laser or inkjet printers that Includes scheduling based on the case requirements and availability of resources in your are compatible with Microsoft Windows lab A detailed work ticket allows a technician to sign off on their work This is particularly useful if your lab pays technicians based on production and this also assists in the prepa ration of employee evaluations Clearly identify remake patterns and costs Let techni Minimum Resolution 1024x900 cians update the status of cases right from the lab floor using touch monitors or bar cod ing hardware Reduce the front office workload and increase timeliness of information High Speed Internet Access Optional Easy to Learn MENUS Lab Manager incorporates easy to use menus showing features and reports in logical groups To perform a desired function simply click on the menu item at the top of the screen and then choose the desired sub menu item Moving through Lab Manager is as simple as making choices
318. gned automatically when the changes have been saved es 5 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost E PETEA 10 8307 ase Doctorite miD Description DateRetired Articulator l U Bite Block Delete Existing Doctors Items L Bite Black 1 Click on System Case Entry and then Doctors Items 2 Place a date in the Date Retired column next to the name of the doctors item that needs to be retired Do this for all items that need retiring 3 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Add New Note If you are looking at the list of Doctors Items and do not see all of the items click the Show Retired check box at the top of the screen This will show all Doctor Items that have been retired along with current Doctor Items System New Edit List Reports Help Delivery Methods Control Panel gt Case Entry Doctors Items The Delivery Methods screen is a list of ways you deliver cases back to your accounts These methods com monly include UPS Ground UPS Overnight UPS 2 Day Fedex Overnight etc To enter new delivery meth ods or to edit information on existing delivery methods click System Case Entry and then Delivery Methods Production Delivery Methods Calendar Material Unit Types Accounting Codes The List and Edit Delivery Methods screen allows you to define information about your delivery methods Bar Coding e Description This is the name of the Deliv
319. gned to O only UnFinished people or one person Preview or Print the Calls Assigned To Report 1 Click on Reports General and then Calls Assigned To 2 Choose a Date Range 3 If you only want the report for a specific person use the Assigned To drop down list and select the name 4 Select the type of calls that you want on the report 5 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen This report includes Calls Assigned To e Marketing Account ID Filtered By Assigned To Billy Bob Mueller i All Calls Marketing Account Name Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here e Salesperson ID Name Salesperson Talked With Phone Assigned To Date Notes Finished e Talked With ABC Dental Studio Mandi Mueller Tom 602 264 5913 Billy Bob Mueller 10 08 2012 He would like you to call him on Wednesday e Marketing Account Phone ABC Dental Studio Mandi Mueller Sam 602 264 5913 Billy Bob Mueller 10 12 2012 They would like a bulk discount s Assigned To ABC Dental Studio Mandi Mueller Tom 602 264 5913 Billy Bob Mueller 10 2 2012 Called Tom back and spoke about how to e Date accomidate his preferences e Notes ABC Dental Studio Mandi Mueller Tom 602 264 5913 Billy Bob Mueller 1072 2012 They will be sending their first case to us tomorrow e Finished 178 Reports Menu General Accounts Exp Date Reminders List aXe elem mca mel Jalsle l mmm continued Account Expiration Date Reminders Report i System
320. grid that needs to be deleted 2 Click on the box to the left of the Code name This will select the line On your keyboard press delete 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Products screen or all your work will be lost Prices Related Products Related Materials Codes Notes Steps Image Notes Tab at Edit Products Screen Sections TABS Notes can be stored with each product These notes can be about anything relating to the product ye This note is for the product e Note This is the area that you write the note for the product e Date Created This is filled in automatically with the date that the note was written e Add New button Use this button to create a new line item in the grid Adding Notes to a Product 1 At the Edit Products screen click the Notes tab then the Add New button 2 This will create a new line item in the grid Type in the note on the line provided 3 Repeat steps 2 until all notes have been entered 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Products screen or all your work will be lost Modifying Notes on a Product 1 At the Edit Products screen click the Notes tab 2 Find the note in the grid that needs to be modified and change it 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Products screen or all your work will be lost Deleting Notes from a Product 1 At the Edit Products screen click the Notes tab Find the note in the grid that needs to be deleted 2 Click on the box to the left of the Note name This will s
321. h Part C Assign Dr s to Acct 2 Part B Define Location s Address s Dr record 2 Dr John Smith DDS Part C Assign Dr s to Acct 1 i Dr record 1 Dr John Smith DDS Dr record 3 Dr Fred Miller DDS System New Edit List Reports Help S Behe em Accounts Edit Part A i Use this screen to define or edit the doctors you send bills to Adding a New Account Edit Account Locator ID Doo Data Financial Notes History Defaults Invoices Payments 1 At the Menu Bar click on New then Ac count 2 Wamel oo pers ut Monod wer f 5 Credit Limit 0 00 A E Suppress Quality Control 2 At the Edit Account screen define the Io ReferedBs Special Codes j Account Name Price List and Invoice Price List Commission Rate Discount Rate Remake Disc Terms All other fields are optional Prone i js jee Salesperson Reg Date Stat Doe Email Invoice Terms Reg Number O Exp Date Code Stop Part B Ledger Defining New Location s 1 Click Add Location on the Account Loca tions tab The Account Location Edit box will appear 2 At the Account Location Edit screen type in the address and contact informa tion 3 Go to Part C on the next page to assign the doctor s Account Locations Doctors Dr Pref Defaults Technicians Add tion Edit Locatior IsState mentLocation Addressi lAddress2_ StateProvince PostalCode Phoneh b T ccount Location Edit Account Location Edit
322. he Picture Tab 2 Right click inside the dark square in the Image area and a small menu appears 3 Left click on the Choose File option and Lab Manager will display a Select Image window Use this to locate and select the image on your computer After you have selected the image a small thumbnail image will appear in the image window To view a larger copy of the image right click on the image and then left click on View To change the image right click again and repeat Steps 2 5 To delete the image right click and select Delete Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost Address 1718 E Rose Lane City Phoenix State Province AZ Postal Code 85016 Tax ID Date Retired fs Birth Date Phone Number 602 264 5913 Notes 4 5 6 T 8 ON m SalesPerson x Technician ams Driver CTI Ewe Show Retire System New Edit List Reports Help On the List Employees tab at the Search Field Search Field 1 1 screen using the default selection of Name Te click the Search button na Cantai Ilc The List Employees tab will now show all em 7V Name YV Address City ployees Select the employee name and that will Piima yr ave Rosalie M I718ERoseLan Phoenix bring up the Edit Employee screen a Richard Log out 112730 Search Mandi Log out 10 59 30 Edit an Existing Employee 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Employees
323. he Menu Bar click on Edit then Account At the Find Account box type in the account s Locator ID or use the Select drop down list and click GO 2 At the Edit Account screen place a date in the Date Retired field Deleting Retiring an Account also makes the doctors that are assigned to this account unavailable in Case Entry 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Account screen or all your work will be lost Restoring a Deleted Retired Account A deleted retired account is still in the system but does not show up on reports or in Case Entry 1 To reactivate an account click on List Accounts At the Search screen place a check in the Show Retired check box The search can be further defined with the name of the account or click Search and the grid table will populate with all current and retired accounts 2 Click on the name of the account that needs to be reactivated 3 From the Edit Account screen remove the date from the Retired Date field 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Account screen or all your work will be lost 124 New Menu Doctors New Menu Doctors There are two types of Doctors Individual doctors who work for your accounts Their doctor record contains their System New Edit List Reports Help personal information and Clinic Doctors or Groups of Doctors that can be defined and treated as one entity yet at oe the same time allow separate sales summaries on the statement for each doctor E ce Before
324. he Scheduling module gt Mandi e Is Checked checkbox When there is a check in the box that technician is assigned to the doctor which is used when E Place Holder scheduling cases This feature is only available in the Scheduling module m o Rihard e Description This is the name of the Technician Assigning a Technician to Doctor 1 Click List Doctors then the Search button table will populate with all of your doctors At List Doctor tab click the account s Locator ID in the table 2 Click the Technicians tab in the insert at the Edit Doctor screen Place a check in the box or boxes for the technicians that need to be assigned to this specific doctor 4 Click Save Changes or all the work will be lost OO 128 New Menu Products New Menu Products Products at New Menu System New Edit List Reports Help Case Search D Case ieg IMOS Products are the items you make such as the crowns bridges dentures orthodontic appliances etc They are the labor items In the next section we will discuss materials which are the items you purchase from a vendor such as gold teeth and attachments Payment Bulk Payment Statement Account When setting up PRODUCTS it is important that you define the fields that are in BOLD The BOLD fields are required All other fields are optional Doctor 10 8307 ase Product Material Vendor Marketing Contact
325. he case is located click on the Case Number in Addn Export To Exe hl the grid to view the case 1101 0045 3MON SU EX4 01 19 2011 SOUTHEASTER SOUTHEASTE 01 19 2011 1101 0048 NSF 01 20 2011 POLDENTAL LAB POLDENTAL LAB 01 20 2011 1102 0031 3MON MU EX 5 02 08 2011 EXTREME DENT EXTREME DENT 02 08 2011 102 New Menu Case NCEA CaO Otsky m continued Case Entry at New Menu System New Edit List Reports Help Case Search Enter each case into Lab Manager as it is received in the lab and it is automatically assigned a case number There are places to notate patient names case codes doctor s items notes photos tooth numbers shades pan numbers products and materials Payment Bulk Payment Statement Account When ENTERING CASES it is important that you define the fields that are in BOLD The BOLD fields are required All other fields are optional Doctor 103230 ase Product Material Vendor Marketing Contact System New List Reports Help I I I l S DEME Edit Cases I l ne eee iin I oo i See section O00 i I D 3 I amp Case Entry Dr D8 ay Selecting a Doctor I l 9 L l I I Le eee eee ee ee a a a a ee a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ee ee ee ee ee ee al I a il Main Doctor Items Notes Jeeth Images Patient Codes CaseCodes Case leyel Discount Account History Uutsourc
326. he last time they had a statement YTD field The Year To Date field displays the dollar value that an account has been statemented since the beginning of the year Last Year field This field displays the dollar value that this account was billed the previous year Last Paid Field and Date field The field displays the dollar value of the last payment that was entered in the system and next to this shows the date that the payment was entered Overpaid field This field displays the dollar value of an overpayment that has not been applied to cases Use this screen to de r edit the doctors you send bills to Data Ejinancial Notes History Defaults Invoices Payments These notes also show up in other parts of the program 1 Locate the account you wish to add notes and click on the Notes Tab 2 To add notes just click in the box and type 3 After notes are added make sure to click Save Changes on the Account screen 119 NEA Ea EA lla E continued History Tab at Edit Account Screen This screen is Read Only Cases and Payments cannot be edited here This area can be used to show a list of cases that have been invoiced statemented and all payments that have been applied to this account The grid is sorted by date with the most recent at the top e Transaction Date This is the date of the in voice or payment e Case Number or Payment Information This O i Use this screen to def
327. he most widely used dental laboratory software in the world We believe that our success is directly related to your success We value your business and truly enjoy helping you with all your computer related questions Why Support is not Free Free support looks good on the surface but it is only a matter of time before it leads to financial suicide Over the years we have seen software companies come and go These companies that have gone out of business all made one fatal mistake free phone support Free support looks great up front but when the company disappears labs pay a heavy price for software with no future and no help Companies with long range vision must charge a fair price for services rendered Our plan has always been to be here to support you far into the future Experienced Technicians Staffing a support department with top notch technicians is ex pensive Supporting software is unlike any other product as it interacts with so many other products For example Lab Man ager depends on the Windows operating environment which depends upon a third party printer and video driver which de pends on hardware products from yet another manufacture If you network your computers you add another link that can break A problem in any of these links can cause something to fail Our support technicians are able to give support on a large variety of products Level of Knowledge Using a computer requires a certain level
328. hen Access Groups 2 At the Access Groups screen click the Add 2 New button to create a new group R a agi 3 Edit Access Groups screen in the Description field define the Access Group name Exam ple Owner Manager etc 4 Click the Remove All Restrictions button This ESS TAAIE group starts with no restrictions and has access EEES Access Groups Edit to everything f 5 Click Save Changes on the Group Access Edit Access Groups screen or all your work will be lost ae 3 escription O O Restrictions Remove All Restriction 4 ultraGridData 10 2307 ase 95 System Menu Admin Tools SET TaN anlal E lie mm Kee ows continued Create Limited Access Group with restrictions to some menu items 1 Click on System Admin Tools and then Access Groups 2 At the Access Groups screen click the Add New button to create a new group 3 At the Edit Access Groups screen in the Description field define the Group name Example Data Enty Delivery 4 At the Restrictions window click the Add New button and select the first menu restriction Each time you click on the Add New button in the Restrictions screen it will add a new drop down list button with an item to be restricted from the list 5 Repeat this process until you have restricted every item this group is NOT allowed to access 6 Click Save Changes on the Group Access screen or all your work will be lost ici i System New Edit List Reports He
329. hen click on the Location Name or the Edit This Location text in the grid next to the location that needs to be changed Change any location names addresses contact information type of tax rates invoices and or statements address To delete retire this Account Location at the Account Location Edit screen place a date in the Retired Date field All other fields are optional Click Save Changes or all the work will be lost NO oO oO BR OW Code Calls Tab at Edit Account Screen Led ai Use this grid to document calls or correspondence with account contacts This can also be Se eS E done by going to System Control Panel and then Call Tracking e Start Call button After selecting an account click the Start Call button to start a new line Employee _ in the Call Grid and it will automatically fill in the Call Date Start Time and Employee aa aces IEAM ie name 07 26 2012 Mandi Sam 10 13 AM 10 14 00 07 26 2012 Mandi Tim 10 14 AM 10 14 00 e Call Grid Enter calls for accounts The call grid will list the Call Date Employee name Talked With contact person Start Time of call End Time of call Call Notes Assigned To Finished check box To delete a call in the call grid click on the Triangle to the left of the Call Date and click delete on the keyboard e Call Date Automatically fills when the Start Call is clicked Modify the date by clicking on the date then click on the calendar prompt and change
330. her When a product ee ey is related to another product it will cause any or all related products to be added toa MSCSERWICE w case each time the main product is added Example If Product 1 is tied to Products 2 and 3 then anytime you add Prod uct 1 to a case Lab Manager will automatically add Product 2 and 3 to the case because they have been related using the Related Products tab Important For this function to work properly all related products need to be assigned to the same pricelists that the main product has If the related prod ucts are not available on the same pricelist find those products in List and then Products and make sure they are assigned to the pricelists e Related Product dropdown This is a list of current products Note Make sure the products are assigned to the same pricelists so the related product will have a price when added to a case e Quantity This is the quantity that will automatically be added to the case when the related products are added to the case ne a Related Product to a Product At the Edit Products screen click the Related Products tab then the New button This will create a new line item in the grid Click on the drop down list under the Related Product column and select the product that will be associated with the main product 3 In the Quantity column next to the newly added related product enter a number for the quantity 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all related prod
331. hey are assigned to Labels Materials List Materials List This report prints a general list of Materials with the ID Marketing Employees department that they are assigned to type of unit cost and the selling Scheduling Departments price Employees This report prints a general list of Employees with their ID number and address Departments This report prints a general list of Department Names and their ID Vendors This report prints list of Vendors with their ID Name Address and phone number Doctor Preferences This report prints a list of preferences that are assigned to doctors It lists the account name doctor ID and Name the department and preference Calls Assigned To This report shows the calls that are assigned to everyone or an individual between a specific time period and what has been marked finished Account Exp Date Reminders The report lists the Account ID and Name with the expiration date It is sorted alphabetically Choose the label option to create labels and the address it uses is the Statement Location ieg yNdy0US 10 8 07 ase Vendors Doctor Preferences Calls Assigned To Account Exp Date Reminders 169 Reports Menu General Accounts List aXe elem cm cae mel Jalsle l continued Accounts Report i System New Edit List Reports Help i p 4 Accounting This report prints a general list of Accounts and their Address and Phone Number 3 z General Accounts Account Locations Filter
332. hin the limits of the city of Phoenix would be subject to City of Phoenix tax for taxable items Additionally because the city of Phoenix is City Paradise Vall enclosed by the County of Maricopa the Doctor would also have to pay Maricopa County le dee ces The city of Phoenix is in the state of Arizona so the La ee jeg ynDyoyS 22 l Setup Wizard Step 3 Delivery Methods SGEE NEAGLE Optional N T iaionnaiion The Delivery Methods screen is a list of ways you deliver cases back to your accounts These methods commonly include UPS Ground UPS Overnight UPS 2 day Fedex Overnight etc To enter new delivery methods or to edit information on existing delivery methods click System Case Entry and then Delivery Methods The List and Edit Delivery Methods screen allows ia ELM L A AEA eo s you to define information about your delivery methods JE List Delivery Methods 1eg yNIyoOYsS Delivery Methods Description Y DaysinTransit Y UseShipperHolidays VW DateCreated VW DateRetired VW gt UPS Ground 3 X 12 22 2004 Oand or Oand or Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Search Field 3 UPS Ground 2 day 2 x 01 06 2005 UPS Next Day 1 x 01 06 2005 Function Function Function Primary Yalue Primary Yalue Primary Yalue System New Edit List Reports Help UPS Cire esteem Edit Delivery Methods Edit Delivery Methods Modify Existing Delivery Methods
333. his area is used to define the names of your price lists You can create or copy Manage Reports unlimited price lists QuickBooks Interface QuickBooks Transfer This feature is only available with the add on of the QuickBooks Toolbar Interface Use this area to transfer payment information from Lab Manager to QuickBooks Poic Call Tracking This area is for logging in calls regarding Accounts and Marketing Contacts eb aaa ate Shortcut Bar This reactivates the Shortcut Bar if it has been closed sn chee Shortcut Menu Items The Shortcut Menu Items can be selected from a list in this area These can be used to populate the Shortcut Bar Show All Dock Bars This reactivates any bars that have been docked on the left side of the screen in Lab Manager See additional info on docking in Navigation Tools Shortcut Bar and Control Buttons Manage Reports This area is used to modify reports and is for advanced users only We recommend using the Easy Report Manager for the initial report setup QuickBooks Interface This feature is only available with the add on of the QuickBooks Interface Use this area to configure where pay ment totals are sent from Lab Manager to QuickBooks Toolbar This reactivates the Toolbar if it has been closed Case Locator This reactivates the Case Locator Menu if it has been closed View Easy Menus Clicking on this area opens the Main Menu tab with button selections if it closed It has the familiar look and feel of previ
334. hod screen the description and days in transit can be edited The checkmark box for Use Shipper Holidays can be checked or unchecked 5 Click Save or all your work will be lost System New Edit List Reports Help GEME List Delivery Methods Delivery Methods Y DaysinTransit Y UseShipperHolidays WY DateCreated W DateRetired W 3 x 12 22 2004 Add Additional Delivery Methods psina sda 1 Click on System Case Entry and then Delivery Methods ites iets 2 Click on the New button at the bottom of the screen and it aiat lh nde will bring up the Edit Delivery Methods screen Inthe Description field type the name of the Delivery Method i System New Edit List Reports Help The days in transit can be edited with a number CEREA AEA Edit Delivery Methods The checkmark box for Use Shipper Holidays can be checked or unchecked Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Edit Delivery Methods Oo o1 B 1eg yNIyoOYsS Delete Existing Delivery Methods Description MAAA 1 Click on System Case Entry and then Delivery Methods E 2 The search area will appear and you choose from 2 options Type in the name of the Delivery Method and click Search or to see a whole list of Delivery Methods leave the search area blank Ed Use Shipper Holidays and just click Search Date Retired 3 Place a date in the Date Retired field 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost 10 2307
335. hoose your own start and end dates MTD Place a dot in the circle to have it fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and end ing dates automatically e YTD Place a dot in the circle to have it fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates automatically e Today Place a dot in the circle to have it automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date General gt Invoice Register Cash Receipts Current Sales Statements Year To Date Reports Product Sales Material Sales Account Analysis Product Price List Materials Price List Commissions Taxes with Sales FlighTags FlighTags Travel Credits e Fiscal YTD Place a dot in the circle to have it automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year e Unstatemented Place a dot in the circle to have it fill in the start and end date for cases that have not been statemented yet Exam ple Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want the date range of current unstatemented cases to start with the first unstatemented case dated 8 5 12 The system will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today e Account Code dropdown list If codes for your accounts have been set up select them here e Doctor Codes If codes for your doctors have been set up select them here e Account dropdown list Choose an account from the dropdown list to print a list of cases for a given account during the specified time per
336. ia ic ig b 38 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 39 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 40 30 Deleting a Holiday from the Calendar october 2012 oY PRANE SMTITWTFS 40 has ia aii al Click on System Calendar and then Calendar Find the day on the calendar that needs to have a holiday deleted Right Click on that box in the calendar view Left Click on Delete Click Save Changes at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost aj 7 8 9101112 15 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 42 az di ia cal aa November 2012 SMTWTF S at H ai aa 45 45 6 7 8 910 46 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Weekends I Weekends 47 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 43 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 a Jo 2345678 PE ber A E o T ARE S T T ee T E EA Close on Save or f asare changes ea EA Carcel 37 Navigation Tools The Easy Menu System New Edit List Reports The Easy Menu format is found on the Main Menu tab It has the familiar look and feel of previous versions of Lab Manager Main Menu fen tae If this is closed and you wish to reopen it go to System Control Panel and View Easy Menus case Entry 2 Update Case Entry amp Update Button This is found at the Main Menu and will allow you to enter a new case Case Search Case Search Button Click on this button to use the Advanced Search capabilities to find a case Report Menu Report Menu Button Click on this button to access reports Maintenance Menu Maintenance Menu Button
337. ial by clicking New and then Material and then save it Also see the section on adding a new material e Related Material dropdown These materials can be related to the current material aout a Related Material to a Product At the Edit Products screen click the Related Materials tab then the Add New button 2 This will create a new line item in the grid Click on the dropdown list under the Related Material column and select the material that will be associated with the main product 3 Repeat step 2 until all related materials have been entered 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost Modifying Related Material on a Product 1 At the Edit Products screen click the Related Material tab 2 Find the related material in the grid that needs to be modified and change it 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost Deleting a Related Material from a Product At the Edit Products screen click the Related Material tab Find the related material in the grid that needs to be deleted Click on the box to the left of the Related Material name This will select the line On your keyboard press delete Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost oR WN 132 New Menu Products CNA Clee od Keke e eqac Continued Codes Tab at Edit Products Screen Sections TABS Prices Related Products Related Mate
338. iceID SERVICE CHARG 41590 SERVICE CHARGE 41591 SERVICE CHARGE 41592 DueDate 03 31 2012 04 29 2012 04 29 2012 InvoiceDate 03 30 2012 03 30 2012 AccountName CaseNumber SUPERIOR D LA 1203 0143 ARLAB CADTEC 1203 0144 SUNSET DENTAL gt 41428 41429 41430 1203 0145 Note To use preset standard invoice work ticket or statement styles see the section covering Easy Report Manager Invoice Design Screen From now on Lab Manager will use your new custom report instead of the pre defined one The following pages will describe the above steps in much more detail l I l l l l Lab Manager Report Editor l l l 7 3 al l f i q Fe Edt Preview See section i i TE fb i A A 100 F Report Editor Toolbar i i i I I he ha B I U A gt eee Ss o l uu l I I l i 717 7 TAptiverrepers6 Picshb aie eines deed Le a le ee T Report l l PageHead l a PageHeader i i Al Label i Ey Pagetisader I E GroupHeader i I TextBox CompanyName Invoice CompanyName I Invoice i S a n I i l CheckBox 1 CompanyAddress CompanyAddress i S eae i 1 RichT extBox CompanyCityStateZip CompanyCityStateqip l E Fields l El cas CompanyPhone CompanyPhone Parametar 1 al Pict 1 I ettings i Ol PE wae Ooo me 5 P l it ifa PageBreak g 5 i See section i G H 1 E as a a Page Parameters I l 1 Ac
339. ick Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost System New Edit List Reports Help Calendar Control Panel Case Entry Production This is the calendar for the laboratory If you are using the Production or Scheduling modules this must be Calendar Company Holidays defined There is no need to delete passed holidays 1 O Shipper Holidays Codes Calendar Adding a Holiday to the Calendar Admin Toots 1 Click on System Calendar and then Calendar Exit 2 Find the day on the calendar that needs to have a holiday added to it Right Click on that box in the Calendar 3 Click on Add an Existing Holiday or Add an Existing System New Edit List Reports Help Shipper Holiday 4 Choose the holiday from the drop down list provided The Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Sat Sun system will then place the name of that holiday on the calendar 5 Click Save Changes at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost ska Merete Deleting a Holiday from the Calendar 1 Click on System Calendar and then Calendar 2 Find the day on the calendar that needs to have a holiday October 2012 47 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 42 25 26 27 28 2930 1 49723 45 6 7 8 deleted i al 7 8 910111213 3 Right Click on that box in 42 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 the calendar view Left T a Click on Delete 4 Click Save Changes at the a SMTWT FS bottom of the screen or all ee your work will be los
340. igned automatically when the changes have been saved E Show Retired 6 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost User Statuses UserStatusID Description DateRetired Modify Existing User Statuses gt it i 1 Click on System Codes and then User Status 2 Try In 2 At the Edit User Status screen click on and modify the name in the Description column 3 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Delete Existing User Statuses 1 Click on System Codes and then User Status 2 At the Edit User Status screen place a date in the Date Retired Do this for all statuses BETE Eq Close ons that need retiring 3 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost 93 System Menu Admin Tools System Menu Administrator Tools At the System Bar then click Admin Tools to edit or view any of these topics System New Edit List Reports Help Excise Tax Log Access Groups An access group can be a single individual or a group of individuals Setting up groups of individuals is faster and easier than setting up access for each person Example Set up an Owner or Manager group that has access to everything and a Front Desk group for the people in the front office that have access to everything except critical financial details and another group called Technicians that can only access a few items critical to production and or shipping Workstations This is a li
341. ine o Data Financial Notes TransactionDate CaseNumberOrPay mentinfo PatientOrType History S a a a ALS the doctors you send bills to New Menu Account aa 07 08 2012 1212 0001 Lee Brian 56 0000 06 27 2012 1206 0103R JOHNSON STEV 100 0000 06 27 2012 1206 0103 JOHNSON STEVE 100 0000 06 27 2012 Payoff 1108 0064R Adjustment 0 0000 Payoff 1108 0 06 27 2012 Payoff 1108 0064 Adjustment 0 0000 Payoff 1108 0009 o column contains either the invoice number or the payment reference number Defaults Tab at Edit Account Screen This area is used to note telephone defaults e Phone 2 This is for a secondary phone num ber e Ext This field is for an extension e Fax This is for the fax number Invoices Tab at Edit Account Screen This screen is Read Only Cases cannot be edited here e Case Number This column contains the invoice number e Inv Date This is the invoice date Patient This column contains the patient name Inv Amount This column shows the amount that the case was billed for Payments Tab at Edit Account Screen This screen is Read Only Payments cannot be edited here Payment Date This is the date of the payment Amount This column shows the amount that the payment was issued as e Payment Type This column displays the type of payment e Ref Num This is the Reference Number that jeg Patient or Type This column contains the patient name or type o
342. ine when the case was actually picked up In some cases this could have been a different date than the Pickup Date Date Delivered Optional This field can be used to define when the case was delivered to the doctor Delivery Method dropdown list Optional This field can be used to assign delivery methods to the case Examples Driver USPS FedEx UPS etc This makes it easy to know the exact method the case was delivered You can create your own methods by clicking on the or the L button to the right of the Delivery Method field Also see Delivery Methods at System Case Entry and then Delivery Method Shipping Zone Read Only Field This shows the shipping zone that is listed on the account under the Account Locations This can only be modified from the Edit Accounts Main Tab at the Case Entry Screen Section Patient Info Part B nt History Outsourcing hting E Invoice Needs Printing Invoice Date Invoice Needs Printing checkbox This is automatically checked and becomes unchecked after the invoice has printed If an invoice needs reprinting place the check back in the box Quote Needs Printing checkbox This is automatically checked when you save the case I Quote Needs Printing Invoice Amount Quoted On 10 21 2003 Invoice Bal as a quote and becomes unchecked after the quote has been printed If a quote needs to P O Num Produds Total be reprinted place the check back in the box Gender m F Materials Total Quoted On
343. ing B i l l Patient n a E Flightags B Mark EQ Work Ticket Needs Pr inting Bl Invoice Needs Printing Invoice Date l gt I 0 00 Received 08 24 2012 Start Date 1 Quoted On invoice Bal _ 0 00 I l Doctor Date Finish Date l P O Num oe Products Total EET IFE TE 0 00 B L l ES eS l 11 i Srp Gy Dats cesano T Se See section E l l l l ShipByTime 4e Ls Patient Info Part B T l Patient Info Part A ir 4 l Pan Number I 1 Chair Time Cs es ee i ee ee l Ei l I Articulator Tag Delivery Method r m i Rx H Grand Total r I L l r Product Quantity Unit Price UnitPriceDiscount SubTotal ProductTeeth Related I I I I I i See section Products on Case I I I I I Material Quantity MaterialTeeth Related Qty TakenFrominv Shade Unit Price Unit Pric l 1 See section Materials on Case l I I 3c See section Saving SS l Completing a Case f Section Selecting a Doctor e Case A case number is assigned to a case when it is saved Lab Manager case numbers always include the year 1st 2 digits of the case number and the month 2nd 2 digits of the case number followed by a dash and then a 4 digit sequential number that increases with each case added during the month The number of digits after the dash can be modified at Company Preferences e Dr Drop down list Choose the name of the Doctor from the d
344. iod e Include Statemented Check this box to include invoices that have already been statemented during the specified time period System New Edit List Reports Help OENE Invoice Register Report ieg jnd 0yNS Invoice Register Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Tray 0 Account Preview or Print the Invoice Register Report 1 Click on Reports Billing and then Invoice Register 2 Select a date range 3 Optional Select a Case Code Doctor Code or an Account to narrow the information on the report 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Starting Date 10 12 2012 Ending Date 10 12 2012 custom OUnstateme nD Today Fiscal YD Account Code Doctor Codes Description Selected gt m o Include Statemented a a E ES Invoice Register Filtered By Between 10 12 2012 AND 10 12 2012 Sorted By Friday October 12 2012 Discount 0 00 0 00 12 54 56 67 12 54 7 67 0 00 1 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 90 42 Materials Tax 0 00 2 39 0 00 8 83 48 70 12 97 490 00 58 65 48 70 12 97 0 00 7 94 6 04 11 16 0 00 19 20 0 00 9 66 0 00 3 80 0 00 9 66 0 00 8 86 0 00 9 66 0 00 11 27 0 00 8 86 593 44 195 88 Patient Lee Richard Price Richard Fields Mrs J Nakasuji Frank Products 20 71 76 71 76 71 76 71 76 71 76 71 91 00 168 00 84 00 33 00 84 00 77 00
345. ired Radio Buttons Choose One 5 acne Departments e Ignore Placing a dot in the circle will show both active and retired doctors on the re Vendors port Doctor Preferences e Active Only Default Setting Placing a dot in the circle will show only the active doc Calls Assigned To tors on the report Account Exp Date Reminders e Retired Only Placing a dot in the circle will show only the retired doctors on the re port Sort Radio Buttons Choose One e Doctor ID Placing a dot in the circle will sort the report by the ID of the doctor e Dr s Last Name Default setting Placing a dot in the cir cle will sort the doctor on the report in alphabetical order APE MC SSS Sis reer AAGE Dr List Report Doctors List Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 1012201 se sea IMOS Preview or Print the Doctors List Report Date Retired ignore Reti 1 Click on Reports General and then Doctors O Ative only 2 Choose a Date Retired option Active Only is the default setting Sort Dotor D Dr s L 3 Choose how to sort the report Dr s Last Name is the default setting 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Note If the Ignore option is selected both active and retired doctors will show up on the report This report includes e Account ID Doctor List e Account Name Sorted By Dr s Last Name e R Filtered By DateRetired is Blank e Doctor Name e Date Retired Friday October 12
346. is ever deleted Lab Manager will place a date in this field indicating that the vendor has been deleted retired Adding a New Vendor Using New Menu 1 At the Menu Bar click on New then Vendor 2 At the Edit Vendors screen define the Vendor Name under description 3 Enter the address into Address 1 City State and Zip The Country will default to the United States All other fields are optional 4 Click Save New on the Edit Vendors screen or all your work will be lost Adding a New Vendor Using List Vendors At the Menu Bar click on List then Vendor Click Add New at the bottom of the screen At the Edit Vendors screen define the Vendor Name under description Enter the address into Address 1 City State and Zip The Country will default to the United States All other fields are optional Click Save New on the Edit Vendors screen or all your work will be lost aRWN 140 New Menu Vendor CEMA Ct OMY ae OLEE continued Modifying a Vendor Using List Vendors 1 Click List Vendor then the Search button table will populate with all of your vendors Click the Vendor Name in the table of the vendor you wish to edit 2 At Edit Vendors modify the items that need to be changed 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Vendors screen or all your work will be lost Modifying a Vendor Using Edit Menu 1 At the Menu Bar click on Edit then Vendor At the Find Vendors box type in the vendor s Locator ID or
347. is will allow PEY AE A you to print them again iel on ee 602 555 1234 Note If a Work Ticket needs to be reprinted pull the case up in Case Entry and place a check in the box at Work Ticket Needs Printing eee To reprint a work ticket go to Reports Production and then Work Tickets Dr Preferences Notes Items Received from Doctor Lower Arch 198 Qty Product Description 1 2 3 4 GOLD CROWN Lab Manager Did the WorkTickets Print Correctly Mo Doctor Date 12 15 11 Thursday Shade A2 Pan 51 Case Number 1112 0001 Dr s Date 12 15 2011 Received 12 13 2011 Ship By Date 12 14 2011 Ship By Time 2PM Patient Smith John Schedule Tooth s 0 Upper Arch Report Menu Production Lab Status lt olola Tal Mm ea cece Toii ol 1E continued System New Edit List Reports Help Lab Status Report 4 Accounting gt Q a General gt The Lab Status Report summarizes production sales and receivables all on one easy to read Billing gt page Production gt Work Tickets Labels gt f Marketing gt Doctors Production YTD e Date Select a date in the date field It will show up with today s date by default TENPE PS Material Production Account Production Material Usage System New Edit List Reports Help GEE Lab Status RF Preview or Print the Lab Status Report Lab Status 1 Click on Reports Production and then Lab Status Printer Brother H
348. ish to edit 3 At Edit Marketing Contact modify the items that need to be changed 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Marketing Contact screen or all your work will be lost 154 List Menu Statements List Menu Statements Statements at List Menu System New Edit List Reports Help Cases Accounts Typically at the end of the month you will send your accounts a statement This is a summary of their account activity such cases and payments adjustments etc The cases listed do not show case detail as that is provided on the original invoice you provided with the case Doctors Payments Products Materials Case Completion Before Setting Up a Statement Job Vendors Marketing Contacts 1032307 ase Review reports to make sure all payments and invoices have been entered for the month Be sure to make sure that starting balances and balances owed are correct Statements Invoices 1 At the Menu Bar click Reports Billing then Invoice Register Print and review this report that lists all the cases that have been invoiced for this statement period 2 At the Menu Bar click Reports Billing then Cash Receipts Print and review this report that lists all the payments that have been entered during this statement period 3 At the Menu Bar click Report Accounting then Aged Trial Balance Print and review this report that lists all the accounts and how much they owe during this statement period System New
349. ist e Material This field can be used to select a material by name Either type in the name of the material or use the dropdown list button and pick the material you wish to add to the case The materials are sorted alphabetically in this list e Quantity Enter the quantity of the material here Be sure to enter the quantity in the units that you told Lab Manager that you sell them in Ex ample If you sell a gold by Pennyweight then the quantity you enter here must be in Pennyweight e Material Teeth This is a button click here to see a tooth chart Use the tooth chart to click on the teeth associated with this product The tooth numbering system will automatically appear in the same system the doctor uses To change the numbering system right click on the chart and then left click on the desired numbering system See Edit Doctors to permanently change a doctor s the tooth chart e Related This field is a button used to open a screen to modify which materials are to be related to the material on this case This function will have no affect unless other materials have been tied related to the selected product For more information on related materials refer to the Re lated Materials Tab at Edit Materials Screen section of this manual e Qty Taken From Inv Quantity Taken From Invoice This field represents the quantity of this material that will be subtracted from inventory Example If you used 1 5 pennyweight of gold on this case 1 5 p
350. it List Reports Help Eee m AG Edit Invoice Terms Edit Invo Description 3A 1032307 ase IN er NumberOfDays PastDue DiscountPercentage ServiceChargePercentage ServiceChargeAmount DateRetired ieg yndy0yNS Eq Overridable EJ aa 60 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 puDaeDa ormon C 3B 90 x 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 DueDateWeeks o 0 m 0 0000 0 0000 0 00 Due Date Calendar Days 120 xX 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 180 x 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 This screen is used to define Invoice Terms 210 x 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 which tells Lab Manager if and when to 240 x 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 charge service charges or apply discounts 270 x 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 Examples include service charge rates for past due amounts and discounts for early 300 X 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 payments Start by defining the Description 330 x 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 then use the window to the right to define one or more periods to which this entry 360 EJ 0 0000 0 0200 0 00 _ applies For example if the Description is 30 A w 0 015 Standard Past Due then to the riaht vou Record 2 of 10 d Save Changes Coann ose co EE Deleting Existing Invoice Terms 1 Click on System Accounting and then Invoice Terms 2 The Search area will appear and you choose from 2 options Type in the name of the Invoice Term and click Search OR To see a whole list to see a whole list of Invoice Terms leave the search area blank and click Sear
351. it List Reports Help GEDE Case Tracking Report Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One Case Tracking e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Custom Place a dot in the circle to choose your own start and end dates Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Product Account A Department 001 ase es IMOS Filter By Case Created Wi In Process e MTD Place a dot in the circle the system will auto Ship By Date matically fill in the Month To Date MTD starting Doctor Date Eq Invoiced and ending dates Finish Date Fd statemented e YTD Place a dot in the circle the system will auto invoice Date matically fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates Starting Date 09 04 2012 i O unstateme e Today Place a dot in the circle the system will auto _ wks a fill in the starting and a leis with the sair ok current date e Fiscal YTD Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year e Unstatemented Place a dot in the circle the system will fill in the start and end date for cases that have not yet been statemented Example Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want the date range of current unsta
352. it then Product At the Find Product box type in the product s Locator ID or use the Select dropdown list and click GO 2 At Edit Product screen place a date in the Date Retired field This product is now deleted 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost Restoring a Deleted Retired Product 1 Any product that has been deleted retired is still in the system but does not show up on reports 2 Toreactivate a product click on List then Product At the Search screen place a check in the Show Retired checkbox The search can be further defined with the name of the product or click Search and the grid will populate with all current and retired products 3 Click on the name of the product that needs to be reactivated From the Edit Product screen remove the date from the Retired Date field 5 Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost a 130 New Menu Products CACAO od melee eqac Continued Pjices Related Products Related Materials Codes Notes Steps Image Prices Tab at Edit Products Screen Sections TABS Dollar Amount Percent Lab Manager supports an unlimited number of price lists and comes with 12 price lists 0 00 9 that are ready to use There are no prices on these price lists Product Prices Most labs fall into one of three scenarios Scenario 1 Only 1 Price per Product eee i If you use only one price list in your lab that is to say tha
353. ive payment negative number is entered when an account HAS PAID for the case the account owes nothing A negative pay ment is entered to show that the lab has paid back all or a portion of a particular case The lab issues a refund check or a credit card refund or the refund stays on the account to be used in the future At the Menu Bar click New then Payment At the Edit Payments screen select the Account Account ID the payment is for using the drop down list Click Use Current Bal just below Locator ID field this will fill in the refund that it available This amount can be a positive or a negative num ber Place a check mark in the box next to the case this applies to Enter a Reference Number which is optional Check number Enter in a Payment date Choose a Payment type from the drop down list In the Invoiced Cases with Balance box check mark which case s are being refunded Click Save Changes or all your work will be lost 114 New Menu Bulk Payments New Menu Bulk Payments Bulk Payment at List Menu System New Edit List Reports Help Case Search Case The Bulk Payment area is designed to enter multiple payments for multiple accounts all on one screen You can select the account and verify the address and the balance due before entering the payment Use the grid to fill in all payments and click Save once to post to the multiple accounts Payment ieg ynd 10u S Bulk Payment State
354. just Smith you are more likely to find his name His name might have been entered as Smith John or John Smith or John W Smith or John W Smith Looking for a patient name containing Smith would have found all of these examples Equal To Use this function to find items that exactly match the primary value Not Equal Use this function to find items that do not match the primary value Less Than Use this function to find dates that come before less than a given date primary value Greater Than Use this function to find dates that come after greater than a given date primary value Between Use this function to find an item between two given items Most commonly used to locate a case with a date between two given dates Contains Use the function to locate a name or item that contains a string of characters defined in the primary value field Starts With Use this function to find an item that starts with a string of characters as defined in the primary value field Ends With Use this function to find an item that ends with a string of characters as defined in the primary value field Primary Value Use this field to enter a name or date such as Smith or a 06 12 12 If you had chosen the Between function Lab Manager will display both a Primary Value field and a Secondary Value field so that you can enter both a starting value and the ending value Once you have selected a field to search a search function and typed in what you are looki
355. k Ticket Headings Department Production Projected Sales Customizable Work Ticket Production by Account Sales by Clinic Doctor Material Inventory Salesperson Commission Reports Metre Re Ordering ShpByLet Customizable Reports g Value of Work in Lab Lab Manager v7 Scheduling Module Requires Lab Manager v7 Billing and Production Modules Includes scheduling based on the case requirements and availability of resources in your lab A detailed work ticket allows a technician to sign off on their work This is particularly useful if your lab pays technicians based on production and this also assists in the preparation of employee evaluations Clearly identify re make patterns and costs Let technicians update the status of cases right from the lab floor using touch monitors or bar coding hard ware Reduce the front office workload and increase timeliness of information Work Ticket Manual Scheduling Reports Number of Units Produced with Production Steps Edit or Un Schedule Cases Cases Due By Department Technicians Sign off Their Work Schedule from Future Date Cases Due By Account Scheduling Schedule Variable Work Load Cases Due By Production Step Timely amp Continuous Data Re Forward Scheduling Schedule by Production Step Cases Due Between Two Dates porting with Touch Monitors A A Schedule Multiple Products Case Update of Technician Productivity Pre Schedule Workday Calendar Time Card Data Collection amp Update Shipping amp Deliv
356. k You 16 97 Payment 1111 Thank You used with Laser 9705 0005 Mueller Mandi 421 09 5 19 97 9705 0005 Mueller Mandi i 9705 0015 Franzmier Jerry 140 09 5 20 97 9705 0015 Franzmier Jerry Inkjet and Bubblet 9705 0020 Guerrero Albert 273 89 5 21 97 9705 0020 Guerrero Albert 9705 0035 Mueller Sullie 443 34 5 22 97 9705 0035 Mueller Sullie 9705 0072 Sheldon Terry 232 61 5 23 97 9705 0072 Sheldon Terry 9705 0102 Pfaff Gordon 234 47 5 25 97 9705 0102 Pfaff Gordon 9705 0122 Nixon Richard 528 69 5 28 97 9705 0122 Nixon Richard 528 69 Over 30 days Over 60 days Previous balanoe 218 60 Over 30 days Over 60 days Over 90 days iou z 248 60 Service charge 000 0 00 0 00 0 00 haleti 333621 0 00 0 00 0 00 3 336 21 Totalcharges 355481 355481 Payments 832 65 Payments 832 65 Please Pay this amount 2 722 16 Please Pay this amount 2 722 16 26 Step 6 Departments Setup Wizard Step 6 Departments Departments describe the major categories of the products you produce If you have a crown and bridge laboratory then you might have only one department called Crown and Bridge On the other hand if you are a full service laboratory then you might have several departments such as Crown and Bridge Denture Removable etc Lab Manager comes with a few departments already defined however you can edit the list and or add your own departments to the list System New Edit List Reports
357. k on System Production and then Departments from department to department if you wish Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Steps Production Steps are those processes your technicians perform in the lab on a day to day basis These steps in a Crown and Bridge lab might include Preparatory Frame Wax up Sprue Invest Cast Frame Finish Porcelain Buildup Porcelain Contour Final Finish and Deliver These production steps are then assigned to your various products To enter new steps or to edit information on existing steps click System Production and then Steps The Edit Steps screen allows you to define information about your steps System Menu Production Question QuestLlonm Question mestior Quest lon Question 2 z 2 T a Z a System New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel Case Entry Production Departments Calendar Steps Accounting Codes Admin Tools Exit istem New Edit List Reports Help GEE List Steps Steps Description VY PostProductionDays WY DateCreated W DateRetired Vv Step alue Vv TimeToFinish Wy Code Y Label VY Mark VY StepColor VY Sun Y Mon Y Tue gt Stepnumber1 0 01 03 2011 0 00 0 a m 0 99 99 99 Step number 2 St 0 01 03 2011 0 00 0 O E 0 99 99 99 Step number 3 St 0 01 03 2011 0 00 0 am ama 0 99 99 99 Description This is the name of the step Code This is a user definable field The Code
358. ks Transfer e Call Tracking for Current and Potential Accounts e Search Notes for Key Words e Find Calls Assigned to Specific People e Bulletin Board to Post Inner Office Schedule Codes gt Call Tracking Shortcut Bar ShortCut Menu Items Show All Dock Bars Admin Tools Exit Manage Reports QuickBooks Interface Toolbar Call Tracking is located at System Control Panel and then Call Tracking Case Locator View Easy Menus Setup Wizard System New Edit List Reports Heln See section _ Employee Selector spersons Technicians Select an Employee from the Employee dropdown Search for an Call Tracki ng ele ee E S Actount and click on their name below Then click Start Call to begin a Employee new record Enter the notes and click the End Time button To enter another call click Reset and search for another Account Call Tracking QRSS e tea bn 0 5 es ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eS TSS SSS SSS SS I E I Search Criteria Name Phone I Name casH ACCOUNT pera Address QID l otes O amp ccounts Marketing Contacts o Address 1718 E Rose cash account l Address2 11 Dental Laboratory GEIE Call Tracking 10 8907 8 sep sea MUPUS 4Dr Fred Markus Tuly 23 2 Mandi gone 2 Dr George Franks B Oct 10 Richard gone Bulletin Board box l l l l l l l l l l l l See section Search Area a 01 01 19708 i a a
359. l 3 Click on the name of the Tax Category under the Descrip e a JE Se tion column 4 From the Edit Tax Categories screen place a date in the Date Retired field 5 Click Save Changes at the bottom of the screen or all your oa work will be lost f a m E 86 System Menu Accounting SIATE Cererel Lal diate gg continued Invoice Terms System New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel gt Case Entry Production Invoice Terms or Billing Terms are the terms you offer your accounts Examples include service charge rates for past due amounts if you allow an account to have a 30 60 and or 90 day past due balance OR Discounts for early payments Calendar Accounting Codes Tax Collectors Tax Rates Tax Categories NOTE Most laboratories should start by simply modifying the Standard Net Terms You can create your own but Admin Tools it is faster and easier to just customize the ones provided Invoice Terms If you charge a service charge on past due balances starting at 30 days from the invoice date change the Service Charge Percentage in the table By default the service charge rate is set to 2 per month 24 per year To change the percentage from 2 to 1 5 change the current rate of 0 0200 to 0 0150 in each of the lines You can also add additional Invoice Term Periods by clicking on the Add New button System New Edit
360. l Create Technician Access Group with more alae nial AnP ep TR i S ELENE List Access Groups restrictions to menu items than not a 1 Click on System Admin Tools and then Ac amp cess Groups S Access Groups 2 Clicking on the Add All Restrictions This will populate the restrictions list with EVERY menu i item 3 Go through the list and delete each item from the restriction list that the group member CAN ac 2 cess 7 4 To delete an item from the list click on the box to the left of the item This will highlight the item 5 Press the Delete button on the keyboard to de ultraGridData lete it 6 Change the Admin password before the login process will start 7 Click Save Changes on the Group Access System New Edit List Reports Help Ciba E Access Groups Edit 1eg MYOS Edit Access Groups screen or all your work will be lost m EERE ones 4 g AppFunctionName z Editing an Existing Access Group i 1 Click on System 5 Admin Tools and then lise this screen to define what Lab Access Groups Manager reports and features this group is NOT to have access to To 2 At the Edit Access Groups screen click on add restrictions start by clicking on the name of the Access group to edit the Add All Restrictions and then i remove only those items that this ae 3 At the List Access Groups screen click on goup can access or click on the Add the Access Group RESTRICTIONS and edit 4 Click Save Changes
361. l Balance report provides up to the minute account s receivable information 5 Know what your doctors owe and what they have paid This report lists current month to date Main M charges 30 60 90 days past due charges and the total account balance for each doctor Billing Collections Production General Journal Labels Tax Reports Marketing Account History The Aged Trial Balance can be viewed or printed anytime during the month as well to verify that all account balances are correct anytime osk Invoice Details List 1032307 ase Account Ledger WARN N G BEFORE PRINTING STATEMENTS at the end of the month choose Simulate Aging so that the report will match the statements which may include service charges This report should be printed at the end of the month to capture Current charges Past due charges Payments Service charges and account balances on paper It is a useful tool in determining errors before printing the end of month statements New ATB Job Tab at Aged Trial Balance E aasan E eanan aana na GENE ATB Report e Exclude Accounts With No Activity check box Aged Trial Balance When this has a check in the box accounts that do l l not h ave a b al ance or a ctivity with cases or paym ents Printer BRN_DODA4A on http 192 168 1 131 redirected 4 Tray 0 i t will di The Aged Trial Balance Report will show you the current will not Mp If the box is left blank it will list OVE unstatemented amounts and the amoun
362. l Form LSR QC Style New Vertical Perf 8 1 2 x 11 1 Part Blue Form used with Laser and Inkjet Printers 1234 Overall Fit Individual Fit Proximal Contacts Occlusion Contours Embrasures Pontic Design si Polish si i Shade g D g Glaze Rx followed u S oF On Time Lower Arch 4 Patient Satisfied LSR Style Horizontal Perf 1 Part Blue Form 8 1 2 x 11 used with Laser and Inkjet Printers Statements Tab System New Edit List Reports Help GEE Report Manager Use this section to select a pre designed statement style Choose a paper form from the drop down list The basic styles are listed below See the samples on the next page 1g yNdIyOYS Statement 10 2307 ase DBL DBLBL This style prints two identical statements printed side by side on one sheet It is designed to give you a copy for the lab and a copy to be sent to the doctor Statement LSR It can be printed on blank paper or use our DBL or BL forms landscape 8 1 2 x 11 available at 800 677 1120 DBL DBLEBL This prints two identical statements side by side LSR This prints one etatamant oan the chee LSR QC Needs Our DBL and BL forms have a vertical perfora correct description tion down the center LSR QC This style prints one statement per page plus a summary printed on the right hand side LSR This style prints one statement per page It can printed on blank pa
363. lator Tag Optional This field can be used to define an articulator number if one is used FlighTags checkbox Optional Check this box to have this count towards FlighTag Rewards Mark checkbox Optional Check this box to mark this specific case Normally this is only used for sorting and searching marked cases Work Ticket Needs Printing checkbox Feature only available for Production and Scheduling Modules This is automatically checked and becomes unchecked after the work ticket has been printed If a work ticket needs to be reprinted place the check back in the box Shade Optional This field exists to be compatible with older versions of Lab Manager In this version of Lab Manager it is recommended that the shade be entered in the product area of the case In this way each product can have a different shade if necessary Start Date Optional This field defaults to today s date and is used to tell Lab Manager what date to schedule the case from While this is usually the same as the received date is can be a future date Example If using the Scheduling module to pre schedule a case into the future use this field to define when the case is to be started Finish Date Optional This field can be used to define when the case was finished Pickup Date Optional This field can be used to define when the case was or is to be picked up There are pick up related reports that can use this date Date Picked Up Optional This field can be used def
364. ld empty If this employee is ever deleted Lab Manager will place C asaneu J oaee agi a date in this field that will indi cate the employee has been deleted retired This will remove the employee from certain reports and lists Click the Clear Button C in the date retired field to remove the date and this will make the employee an active employee again e Birth Date Optional Type the birth date of the employee here e Phone Number Optional Type the phone number of the employee here e Notes Optional This space can be used to keep notes on the employee sade Edit Employees Manage Reports Picture Bia B te me aael 6 a ce a te elas oe 0 Edit Employees LocatorlID 13 Name Richard Address 1718 E Rose Lane City Phoenix State Province AZ Postal Code 85016 Tax ID Date Retired C Birth Date Phone Number 602 264 5913 Notes Bi m SalesPerson Ed Technician O Driver Check all that apply eSalesperson Optional Place a check mark in the box if this employee is a salesperson These are people that are responsible for bringing new accounts into the business Lab Manager has the ability to create a commission report showing the amount of sales that have been made by the accounts of each salesperson along with commission information eTechnician Optional Place a check mark in the box if this employee is a technician Technicians can be assigned production steps in th
365. ld Wizard Click on the Next button to continue the installation Fig 2 Destination Folder Itis recommend that you use the default folder and click Next If you do need to change the program folder use the Change button to select a different drive and or folder Fig 3 The database location will be de fined later during the database setup Lab Manager Installation from CD 1 Insert CD into the CD drive When the installation begins the program will say Preparing to Install Fig 1 InstallShield Wizard Click on the Next button to continue the installation Fig 2 Destination Folder Itis recommend that you use the default folder and click Next If you do need to change the program folder use the Change button to select a different drive and or folder Fig 3 The database location will be de fined later during the database setup Installing on a Network If you are installing on a network two or more computers connected together you will need to first install Lab Manager on the SERVER the computer containing the data and then repeat the installation on each workstation See instructions for Complete Install for a Server or Single Computers and Custom Install for Workstation Installation Only on the following pages Typical Network Installation Use Complete Install process on a Single Com a Puter or Server Server Where LM Data is stored e and the LM Server Tools are used Network Rou
366. ld can be used to select a product by the ID number Type the ID into the field or use the dropdown list button Click on the drop down list button and pick the product you wish to add to the case The products are sorted numerically by ID in this list e Product This field can be used to select a product by its name Either type in the name of the product or use the dropdown list button and pick the product you wish to add to the case The products are sorted alphabetically in this list e Quantity Use this field to define the quantity of the product you want The default is 1 e Unit Price This field shows the unit single quantity price of the product This price can be changed on the fly without affecting other cases Example If the normal price of the selected product is 123 50 but you wish to give the account a special price on just this case you can change the price by simply highlighting it and typing over it e Unit Price Discount This field can be used to discount a product Only positive numbers can be entered into this field Entering a positive num ber into this field will reduce the product total accordingly Example If the selected product normally sells for 123 50 but you want to sell it for 100 00 on this case only you can simply type 23 50 into this field The 23 50 will be subtracted from the 123 50 to show a Sub Total amount of 100 00 e Sub Total This field shows the total of the selected product as it will appear on
367. lick the Add to All button which will add all doctors to the grid 5 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost Deleting Doctors from a Technician 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Employees 2 On the Edit Employee screen click the Tech for Doctors tab Select the Doctor in the grid by clicking the square to the left of the doctor s name 3 Press Delete on your keyboard and the line item will disappear 4 To delete all doctors assigned to this technician click the Remove From All button This will clear the grid 5 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all your work will be lost Main Call Tracking List Employees Steps Tab at Edit Employees Screen Ed it Em plovees Picture Tech for Accounts Tech For Doctors LocatorlD Bo b Step number 1 Ste 1 Step number 3 Step3 Name Step number 2 Step 2 Ciy Lu Add State Province Move Up i ee This feature allows an employee that is assigned as a technician to also be assigned to production steps when scheduling a case Production Steps can be set up at System Production and then Steps e Description Column This is the description of the production step as it will appear on the work ticket e Sort Order Column This shows the order by giving the production step a number The number given will determine the order the production steps are shown on the work ticket e Move Up Button When the cursor is on a produ
368. line to the grid click on the drop down list button in that line and select the company database Image 1 If this user can access more than one database then be sure to repeat this proc ess and add any other databases as well To do this use the User Databases window Image 2 Assigning Workstations to a User Users can be restricted to one or more workstations preventing them from accessing Lab Manager from some computers Workstations are added to a user just like databases were Click on the Workstations tab Image 3 and then click on the Add New button in that window In the new line that was added use the drop down list button to the right of the line to select the workstation s that this user can access 99 System Menu Admin Tools System Menu Administrator Tools Baar i System New Edit List Reports Help Run Aging Control Panel Case Entry Production enu WARNING we donot RECOMMEND CHANGING THE a Accounting Codes FOLLOWING SELECTIONS UNLESS YOU ARE ADVISED TO BY THE LABORATORY SYSTEMS GROUP SUPPORT DEPARTMENT Admin Tools Excise Tax Log Access Groups Workstations This section is only used if aging was not done during the state PSSZ CAZIN ment process This cannot be undone once selected Only use after speak with the technical support department This option is found at System Accounting and then Run Aging Master Config Users Ma nually Run Aging Special
369. ll of the items click the Show Retired check box at the top of the screen This will show all holidays that have been retired along with current holidays System New Edit List Reports Help Modify Existing Company Holidays 1 Click on System Calendar and then Company Holidays 2 Click on the name of the holiday under the Description column 3 Modify the name 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Main Edit Holidays 1eg IMIS E Show Retired Holidays Add Additional Holidays 3 HolidayID Description DateRetired 1 Click on System Calendar and then Company Holidays 6 Christmas 2 Click on Add New button at the bottom of the screen This is will add a new line item to the p 31 Independence D grid Labor Day 3 In the new line item in the grid under the Description column type the name of the holiday Memorial Day 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all holidays have been entered New Years Day 5 You do not have to type a holiday ID an ID will be assigned automatically when the changes Thanksgiving have been saved Weekends 6 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Delete Existing Holidays 1 Click on System Calendar and then Company Holidays 2 Place a date in the Date Retired column next to the name of the holiday that needs to be retired Do this for all holidays that need retiring 3 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost
370. llected Taxes Invoiced This report lists the tax amount invoiced for Filtered By Between 10 1 2012 AND 10 31 2012 each account for the period defined by the Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Starting and Ending dates A Account Category Tax Name Rate Tax Account Name Dr George Franks Phoenix AZ City Phoenix 0 01500 17 61 e Tax Category Dr George Franks Phoenix AZ County Maricopa 0 05000 58 66 e Name of the Tax Dr George Franks Phoenix AZ State Arizona 0 05000 58 66 e Tax Rate Dr John Killdare Phoenix AZ City Phoenix 0 01500 7 95 e Grand Total 195 88 C Taxes Invoiced by Rate Taxes Collected 2 Taxes Collected 2 This report lists the name of the tax rate how Filtered By Between 10 1 2012 AND 10 31 2012 much was done in taxable sales and what the actual tax liability is from those sales Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name rie Tax Rate Taxable Sales Tax Liability e Tax Rate State Arizona 1 703 28 85 16 e Taxable Sales County Maricopa 1 703 28 85 16 e Tax Liability City Phoenix 1 703 28 25 56 195 88 165 lt ole umm aE oTa iae Ml continued Account History Screen and Report The Account History Report lists payments and cases that have been issued to an account The report is sorted by date showing the most recent entries first e Account drop down list Using the drop down list select the name of the Account e ID Account drop down list Using the dr
371. lled out per account average amounts billed and the percentage that they bring in e Product Price List This report shows all of the products sorted by Price List e Materials Price List This report lists the materials along with the prices associated with those materials e Commissions This report shows the commission amounts earned by each salesperson e Taxes with Sales This report shows tax amounts from sales between a specified time period e FlighTags Use this report to print a FlighTags Report e FlighTags Travel Credits Use this screen to print a FlighTags Report 180 Report Menu Billing Invoice aX oleae TA mdi ale mm Continued z System New Edit List Reports Help Invoices Accounting General Main Billing Invoices Production Invoices are printed and delivered with the case or mailed to the doctor itemizing the charges on a case This table shows a list of the invoices that need to be printed Invoice Register To create a case go to the Case Entry screen enter case information then invoice out by clicking Invoice Invoice with Defaults or Save and Invoice The case can now be printed by going to Reports Billing and then Invoices Refer to the section of Case Entry in this manual for more information on entering a case Labels Cash Receipts Marketing gt Current Sales Scheduling Statements pom sey s TEP FLHLELS Year To Date Reports Note Correct and Reprint
372. lling Terms Step 2 Tax Setup OPTIONAL Step 3 Delivery Methods OPTIONAL Step 4 Company Information Step 5 Form Selection Step 6 Departments Step 7 Employees Step 8 Accounts Doctors Locations Step 9 Vendors OPTIONAL Step 10 Production Steps SCHEDULING MODULE ONLY Step 11 Products Step 12 Materials Step 13 Doctor s Items OPTIONAL Step 14 Calendar SCHEDULING MODULE ONLY System New Edit List Reports Help Elem Lab Manager v7 Setup Wizard Lab Manager v7 Setup Wizard This form will allow you to input all information in a logical order starting from step one Some of the steps are optional and are noted as such Even if you are not using one of the steps listed here we recommend you review them If you need to add information start by clicking Add New for that step After you have finished the initial entry any further entries would be completed by clicking Add Next 101207 sep ea IMOS If you are finished adding entries or reviewing a step and no changes need to be made continue to the next step All of the infor mation you enter using the setup wizard can be modified or changed at any time after you have entered it here Step 1 Billing Terms This tells Lab Manager when to charge service charges or apply discounts for billing purposes Several terms have been predefined We suaaest vou review these and if one works for vou or can be modified continue to the next step Add New Revie
373. loyees Sun g 2 At List Employees tab at the Search Field 1 LocatoID Y Name Y Address VY City screen using the default selection of Name Primary alue click the Search button 3 The List Employees tab will now show all em naman ployees 4 Select the employee name and that will bring up the Edit Employee screen gt Rosalie M 1718ERoseLan Phoenix 13 Richard Log out 11 27 30 16 Mandi Log out 10 59 30 OVFIO ashy Create a New Employee 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Employees 2 Click on Add New at the bottom of the screen 3 Define the employee 4 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost Delete an Employee 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Employees 2 The search area will appear and you choose from 2 options Type in the name of the employee and click Search or to see a whole list of em ployees leave the search area blank and just click Search 3 This will populate a grid Fig 1 Click on the Locator ID of the employee you wish to delete and this will open their Employee information 4 Click the Delete button at the bottom of the screen This will put a date in the Date Retired field 5 Click Save Changes at the bottom of the screen if clicking Delete did not close the screen or all of your work will be lost Skip this section if you don t own the Scheduling Module Tech for Accounts Tab at Edit Employees Scr
374. lp you With your permission this technology allows us to remotely connect to your computer and quickly fix problems that would otherwise be difficult to fix over the phone FREE HELP Options Helpful Text This help feature appears in Lab Manager in many screens as blue text as you use the program User Manual In the Lab Manager program you can access the user manual by clicking on the Help menu at the top of the screen and then Manual Support Plans Prepaid Plans A single stand alone computer qualifies for the Single User Plan If your lab has installed Lab Manager on two or more computers networked or not then you qualify for the Multi user Plan Get live telephone and virtual support as well as e mail and fax answers Email and fax available only with pre paid plans 3 Months 6 Months 12 Months Single User 1 computer ere Call for pricing Multi User 2 or more computers After Hours AF Not during Call for pricing office hours No Prepaid Plans The rate for a No Prepaid Support Plan is listed below When you call for support customer service will ask for a credit card number E mail and fax answers are not available with this option For users with no wi T support plan Call for pricing Available by Credit Card Only e Active plans remain in force under current terms until they expire Support plans may only be chosen from plans of fered at the time of expiration e All calls to our s
375. lude Date Retired checkbox Optional Place a check in the box to include accounts that have been retired S ar Se eee System New Edit List Reports Help OENES PEAGE Acct Exp Date Report Account Expiration Date Reminders Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 A ps A Z ap ioe 2 103230 ase MTD Ending Date 09 30 2012 a Report Type Radio Buttons Choose One Today e Report A dot in the circle will cause the list to print in a Fiscal YT report format I Include On Hold e Label A dot in the circle will print in label format and can I Include Date Retired be printed on Avery 5160 style labels Report Type Report Lab Preview or Print the Account Expiration Date Reminders Report or Labels 1 Click on Reports General and then Account Expiration Date Reminders 2 Choose a Date Range 3 Select the Report Type Report or Label 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen This report includes Call Tracking Account Reminders e Account ID Filtered By e Account Name ae Account ID Account Name Expiration Date e Expiration Date Dr Susan Smith 10 21 2012 Dr George Franks 104 2 2012 Dr John Killdare 104 3 2012 Labels includes e Account Name e Account Address Dr Susan Smith Dr George Franks Dr John Killdare e Account City State Zip 444 N 16th St 728 S E 60 TH 2400 E Indian School Phoenix 4z 85000 Phoenix Az 85000 Phoenix 4z 85000 179
376. m opens click on the Server Menu then on Setup New Lab Manager 4 You should see a screen similar to this one If you used all of the default settings during the installation process then click on the Run button at the bottom of the screen This process may take several minutes 5 You will know the process has completed successfully when you see the message in the table say Finished You may now close this screen 6 Click Close to exit 7 This menu option will become unavailable once the initial setup has been completed lf the paths above are correct click the Run button below Status Messages MessagelD Message DateOfMessage gt 1 Testing Connection To SQL Server 04 10 2006 Regular Login Failed testing default sa login to Master 04 10 2006 2 3 Ea We were able to login with the Default SA password we are now changing SA Password 04 10 2006 Successfully changed the SA password 04 10 2006 Checking for Existing LM_Master Database on Server 04 10 2006 Cd Lab Manager Server Too Server Help Create New Company Database Setup New Lab Manage Set Up Your Company Database Right click on the Server Tool icon Left click on Run As or Run As Administrator If Run As is used you should see a check box with the text of Protect my computer and data from unauthorized program activity Uncheck this box and click OK When the program opens click on the Server Menu then on Setup New
377. m in the grid under the Description column type the name of the Market ing Contact Code Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until all new marketing contact codes have been entered You do not have to type a marketing contact code ID as an ID will be assigned automatically when the changes have been saved Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Modify Existing Marketing Contact Codes 1 2 Click on System Codes and then Marketing At the Edit Marketing Contact Codes screen click on and modify the name in the Descrip tion column 3 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Delete Existing Marketing Contact Codes 1 2 At the Edit Marketing Contact Codes screen place a date in the Date Retired column Do this for all codes that need retiring 3 Click on System Codes and then Marketing Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost 92 ystem New Edit List Reports Help System New Edit List Reports Help ieg IMOS User Status OEE Material Code Choices Edit Material Codes E Show Retired Material Code Choices MaterialCodeID Description DateRetired Sysxem New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel Case Entry Production enu Calendar Accounting Case Admin Tools Vendor Exit Employee Product Material Patient User Status remit nE Marketing Contact Code
378. mber identifies the batch of the material from the ven dor in the event that a contaminate or some other problem is found with the material If the lot number is defined here then it is possible to locate all of the cases patients that this material was used in e Notes These are notes about this material e Imported Teeth This is a read only field and provides the tooth numbers from imported cases e Date Created This Date field will be filled in for the user automatically and cannot be changed e OutSourced Vendor ID If this case has been outsourced then the name of the company that the product has been sent to will be selected from a drop down list e OutSourced Date Due Back If this case has been outsourced then the date that the case is supposed to be returned to the lab should be placed in this field e Safety Info Use this field to document the safety information for the material e Remake check box Place a check into the Remake check box to indicate that this material is a remake Marking a material as a remake will not affect it financially If you discount remakes use the Discount field to reduce the selling price unless you have defined a remake discount at Ac counts 106 New Menu Case EAC LO mM t continued Section Saving Completing a Case When you have finished entering this case you must select one of these options e Add New button This button creates a new case while the existing case is still availa
379. me Automatically fills wnen the Start Call is clicked Change the employee s name by clicking on name and using the drop down list choose the correct employee We recommend making sure that the correct employee is selected at the top of Call Tracking screen instead of changing each name in the call e Talked With Notate with wnom the employee spoke Type the name of the person that the conversation was with e Start Time Automatically fills when the Start Call is clicked Modified the time by clicking on the time stamp and modifying it in the box e End Time You must notate the end of call Click in the empty End Time box and it will fill it with the current time e Call Notes Type in the call notes describing the conversation Call notes can be searched using the Search Notes tab next to the Call Track ing tab at the top of the page e Assigned To When an employee s name is selected it will place a note in that employee s assigned call area When the employee looks at that list they will be able to read the notes and mark it as a completed task e Finished Checkbox Notate the Assigned To employee has completed the task assigned to them System New Edit List Reports Help com Call Tracking Add Calls into Call Grid rvu Oll salesPersans Technicians Select an Employee from the Employee dropdown Search for an Use this section to document calls and correspondence with doc Call Tracking Account and click on their name below
380. ment Click Add New at the bottom of the screen At the Edit Payments screen select the Account Locator ID the payment is for using the drop down list Enter in the Amount of the payment Enter an optional Reference Number Check number Change the Payment Date if necessary Choose a Payment Type from the drop down list Click Save Changes or all your work will be lost Modifying a Payment using the List Menu At the Menu Bar click List and then Payments Search for the payment you are looking for or click Search for a complete list of payments Click on the Account Name for the payment you wish to edit Make any changes to the Payment you need Click Save Changes or all your work will be lost oR WN Deleting a Payment using List Menu At the Menu Bar click List and then Payments Search for the payment you are looking for or click Search for a complete list of payments Click on the Account Name for the payment you wish to edit Click the Delete button at the bottom of the screen If a payment has been statemented it should not be deleted Click Save Changes or all your work will be lost OoOonNDoOsA 1 2 3 Refunding Money There are two types of refunds Type 1 A positive payment positive number is entered when an account HAS NOT PAID for that case the account owes The positive payment pays off all or a portion of the outstanding balance Type 2 A negat
381. ment Account Note See New and then Bulk Payment to enter only one payment or search for exiting payments A A eo e A a e Doctor Product Material Vendor Main ListAccounts Call Tracking List Marketing Contacts Cash Receipts Report Bulk Pay ments Marketing Contact Bulk Entry Payments CASH ACCOUNT 1718E Rose Negative Payments cannot be entered here only dt the reqular Edit Payments fo Edit Pay ments Phoenix AZ 85016 Last Statement 0 00 Current Balance 0 00 Bulk Payment Entry Account Amount Payment Date Payment Type Notes CASH ACCOUNT 11 07 2012 Check Use this screen to enter multiple payments at once After you are done entering the payments in the grid above click the Save button payments you ve entered in the grid click the Cancel button below Enter Multiple Payments Using the List Bulk Payments 1 At the Menu Bar click New Bulk Payments and the Add Payment button at the bottom of the screen 2 A payment line will appear In the grid Use either the ID or Account drop down lists to select the Account That account will then be displayed and include their Last Statement amount and Current Balance 3 Enter the Payment Amount in the grid Also the optional Reference Number Date if necessary and the Payment Type Repeat Steps 2 3 if there are more payments to enter 5 When all payments have been entered click Save Changes on the Bulk Entry Payments scree
382. ments jobs that have been created e Exclude Retired Accounts check box Leave the check in the box if you do not want retired accounts to be printed during statements e All balances check box Placing a check in the box prints all accounts regardless of their balance e Exclude Accounts with a Balance less than Place a dollar figure in the field Only statements with balances with an amount greater than that Statements figure print EJ Exclude Retired Accounts e Include Accounts with a Credit Balance greater than Place a dollar figure in the field Only state ments that have a credit balance greater than that System New Edit List Reports Help OENE Stmts Report Statements Statement LSR Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Tray 0 10 2307 SL figure will print BB All Balances e Any Bal Not Zero button Prints any statements Bi ees E auth dharani that do not have a balance of 0 00 f m Include Accounts with a Credit Balance greater than e Save Settings button This saves selected settings ny ba ot Zero for future statement printing Click on Reports Billing and then Statements rime een eon Using the By Month tab select a statement job out of the Statement drop down list 3 Leave the Exclude Retired Accounts check box marked unless you want to print retired account statements 4 If you want to only print statements with balances above a certain value place a check in the Exclude Accounts with a B
383. mple Last statement job was 7 31 12 but 9 you want the date range of current unstatemented cases to start with the first unstatemented case dated 8 5 12 The 3 ree fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as _ ee Type of Date Radio Buttons Choose One l Doctor Date This is the date that the doctor needs the case ras a dai mee Unstateme back by Ending Date 09 30 2012 ynD e Finish Date This is the date that case was completed CEE Today e Invoice Date This is the date that the case was invoiced Fiscal yD e Ship By Date This is the date that the case needs to leave Doctor Date the laboratory Finish Date invoice Date Ship By Date How to Preview or Print the Deliveries Report 1 Click on Reports Production and then Delivery Report Optional Select an account from the drop down or leave it blank to show all accounts Optional Select route to only show cases that would be on a specific route Select type of date range to filter by The Unstatemented Invoice is the default Fill in a date range Choose type of Date the report will filter by Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen oO o1 BR W NY Delivery Deliveries based on Doctor Date range between 11 1 2012 And 11 30 2012 Thursday November 15 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Dr s Date Ship By Date Ship By Time Finish Date Case Patient Account Name Route Stop Pan 11 15 2012 0806 0002 Black
384. mployees Vendors Salespersons Invoices Marketing Contacts Dr Account Locations System New Edit List Reports Help Employee Labels Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Sort LocatorID O Name Report Menu Labels Vendor amp Salesperson ace oleae mi ca 0m ales mmm continued Vendor Labels System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting General Main Mj Biting Production ieg yNd 10US DTS DEGUSSA CORP DENTSPLY 6385 W 52 AVE ST6 3900 S CLINTON AWE 570 W COLLEGE AVE ARVADA CO 80002 SOUTH PLAINFIELD NEVY JERSEY 07080 YORK PA 17405 0872 Accounts Marketing gt Doctors A Ea A a A a p i Scheduling gt Products Materials DLDS FLIGHTAGS IYOCLAR 610 E MAIN ST 2733 6TH AVE P O BOX 1004 BRANFORD CT 06405 DES MOINES 14 50313 4124 BUFFALO N Y 14240 Employees Vendors Salespersons Invoices Marketing Contacts Dr Account Locations Use this screen to print mailing labels with the Vendor Name and Address This provides a label designed to print on an Avery 5160 style label sheet which provides 30 different labels per sheet System New Edit List Reports Help Sort By Radio Buttons Choose One e Locator ID A dot in the circle will sort the labels in numerical order e Name A dot in the circle will sort the labels in alphabetical order OENE Vendor Lbi Report Vendor Labels Printer Brother H
385. ms and shipping mailing locations Accounts need to be defined before Doctors can be created e Locator ID Do not enter anything here This is the accounts ID number You can use this num ber to locate or identify an account This number can contain both letters and numbers If left blank Lab Manager will automatically assign it a sequential number starting with 1 e Account Name Define the name of the account or practice name here If the account consists of a single doctor then type the name of the doctor here Example Dr John Smith DDS If the account consists of two or more doctors define the name of the account or practice here Exam ple Dr John Smith DDS or South Dental Clinic e Credit Limit Optional This can be used to define the accounts credit limit If defined it will be displayed on the account ledger screen e Price List Use this field to assign the account to one of the existing price lists Lab Manager supports an unlimited number of price lists How ever it comes with 12 price lists already set up The small and L button to the right of Price List field can be Ysed to Add a new price list or List L the existing price lists Either function can be used to add new prices lists For more information on price lists refer to the Price List section of this manual e Phone Optional This is the phone number for the account e Ext Optional This is the extension that goes with the phone number e Email
386. n O Locator ID fe S O Prices Related Products Related Materials Codes Notes Steps Image S Products a specitcodes Product Prices m A Modifying a Product Using Edit Menu E ivisibie EJ include Produc BB Discountable Eq Allow Remake Discount 1 At the Menu Bar click Edit then Product pq Production Product Taxable aka Count 2 At the Find Product box type in the product s Loca tor ID or use the Select dropdown list and click GO EJ Allow Commission Use this screen to define new products or Image 1 to edit existing ones g 3 At Edit Product modify the items that need to be PSE A TAA E E zi an changed Image 2 crowns bridges dentures etc that you make The prices you sell this product for Use this tab to add this product to existing price lists and to 4 In this manual see Section New Product for more can be defined here also To change a change this product s prices price simply change it next to the information on using this screen eared pial 5 Click Save Changes on the Edit Product Screen or all your work will be lost 146 Edit Menu Material amp Vendor Edit Menu Material Edit Materials at Edit Menu i System New Edit List Reports Help Account This area is used to pull up a specific material This does not give you the same search options that List provides This is for existing materials only If you know the Locator ID or want to select the nam
387. n LM Admin User Admin 1 Owners LSGAdmin L5G Admin ResKNmfl dzivK 1 Owners E in Continued on next page 98 System Menu Admin Tools System Menu Administrator Tools Beare Users Tab continued Image 1 System New Edit List Reports Help OEE List Users 10 807 ase Users LoginName VY FullName Y Password YW AccessGroupID W Access Group YW HidePatientinformation fv HideDoctorlinfor mation w DenyAccess Vi LM Admin User Admin Owners LSGAdmin LSG Admin Rc amp 8KNmflL d2vK Owners 7 e A mp aol a Add New Export To Excel Export To PDF e Login Name e Full Name e Password e Access Group e Hide Patient Information e Hide Doctor Information e Deny Access System New Edit List Reports Help Image 2 Geanies Edit Users Edit Users ieg myoys fik Login Name ELE iia Databases SEALE LE Full Name LSG Admin User Databases Password Rc8KNmfl d2JvkyO DatabaselD WS Hide PatientInformation 10 8307 ase BS Hide DoctorInformation WB Deny Access User Workstations WorkstationID gt A1192eb30 846 Cee Se es es S Assigning Databases to each User Each person can have their own login name and password and each person needs to be assigned to an Access Group As you set up each user then you must assign the user which database s they are allowed to access Click on the Add New button to add a
388. n School e Aging 31 to 60 Days The amount of money Address 2 Address 2 owed during the 31 to 60 Days time range City State Zip Phoenix Az 85000 City State Zip Phoenix Az 85000 e Aging 61 to 90 Days The amount of money Phone 6025559984 Phone 6025559984 owed during the 61 to 90 Days time range i Aging 91 Days The amount of money owed YTD Purchase 0 00 Last Paid 10 2 2012 during the 90 plus Days time range e Service Charges Lists the amount that is owed during the current time period in service charges e UnStatemented Payments Lists the amount Tax Rate 0 0000 Last Statement 175 24 Service Charge 2 0000 Current Charges 201 86 CreditLim amp 0 00 Aging 0 to 30 Days 0 00 Aging 31 to 60 Days 0 00 of payments that have been entered but not issued on a statement Total Due This is the full amount that the ac count owes as of the time the report was re quested 168 Aging 61 to 90 Days 0 00 Aging 91 Days 0 00 Service Charges 0 00 UnStatemented Payments 173 36 Total Due 173 38 Reports Menu General Reports Menu General Accounts This report prints a general list of Accounts and their address Bees AAEE and phone number Accounting Doctors This report prints a general list of Doctors that are assigned to General Accounts Accounts Billing Doctors Products This report prints a general list of Products with their ID and the Production Products department that t
389. n Steps Step 10 Production Steps Skip this page if you don t own the Scheduling Module Production Steps are those processes your technicians perform in the lab on a day to day basis These steps in a Crown and Bridge lab might include Preparatory Frame Wax up Sprue Invest and Cast Frame Finish Porcelain Buildup Porcelain Contour Final Finish and De liver At some time these production steps are assigned to the various products To enter new steps or to edit information on existing steps click System Production and then Steps stem New Edit List Reports Help Elem List Steps Steps Description VY PostProductionDays W DateCreated WV DateRetired VY Step alue W TimeToFinish VW Code Y Label VY Mark VW StepColor VY Sun Y Mon Y Tue Y Wed Y Thu gt Stepnumber1 0 01 03 2011 0 00 0 i o 0 99 99 99 99 Step number2 St 0 01 03 2011 0 00 0 m 0 99 99 99 Step number 3 St 0 01 03 2011 0 00 0 m m 0 99 99 System New Edit List Reports Help AE tacee Edit Steps Edit Steps Adding New Steps ieg MIYOS 1 Click on System Production and then Steps 2 At List Steps click Add New at the bottom of the screen 3 From the Edit Step screen type in the Description Value Time to Fin ish and review check boxes Description Step number 1 Stepi 10 8307 ase 4 Define how many units can be done per day on the right side of the ca CS screen Yalue 0 00 5 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your
390. n in the grid Descripl produch Prices CREAM 3 Make any modifications to the price list Date Retired TS see 4 Add additional products to the price list by clicking the Add ProductlID button in the lower left of the Product Prices tab This will create a line item in the grid ETIT oe Use the drop down list in the new line item to select the product name Click in UNT S100 the price field on that same line item and type in the dollar value DISCOUNT 1 00 5 Modify the price of an existing product by clicking in the price field next to the PISCOLINTED TAXFD ream product and updating the dollar value Add vn 6 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost Delete a Product Price List 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Price Lists 2 Click on the name of the Price list under the Description column in the grid 3 At the Edit Price List screen place a date in the Date Retired field or click Delete at the bottom of the screen 4 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost Note Click the Clear Button C in the Date Retired field to remove the date and this will make the price list active again 58 System Menu Control Panel SMELT el ale mm Ore alige N at la mm continued Edit Price List Screen continued Change Prices Tab at Edit Price List Screen E Change Prices MCE This tab is used to change the prices on a specific
391. n option to print all or only marked marketing contacts 4 Optional Choose a salesperson that marketing contact is assigned to or leave it blank to show all sales people 5 Select sort Default setting Follow Up Date Can be sorted by Marketing ID or Name Postal Code Follow Up Time Phone or Contact 6 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Marketing Follow Ups Filtered By Between 10 1 2012 AND 11 15 2012 Thursday November 15 2012 ID Name ABC Dental Studio Ceramics Studio Denture Studio Tooth Dental Studio Sorted By FollowUpDate FollowUpTime Postal Code Follow Up Date 65016 10 2 2012 Contact Follow Up Time Sally Smith 42 45 00 5016 1045 2012 104 7 2012 13 45 00 12 00 00 12 45 00 1016 2012 222 Your Company Name Goes Here Phone 1 Phone 2 602 264 5913 602 264 5913 602 264 5913 602 264 5913 Report Menu Marketing Marketing Calendar ALEJ salma litle Cl d ale B continued Marketing Calendar System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting General Labels This gives a visual display of marketing calls that are scheduled for followups Bar Coding Billing Production Marketing Marketing Contacts Marketing Face Sheet 1018207 ase ea IMOS Scheduling gt Marketing Follow Up Call Lis Marketing Calendar System New Edit List Reports Help Marketing Follow Up Calls Calend
392. n or all your work will be lost A 115 New Menu Statements Statements at List Menu Typically at the end of the month you will send your accounts a statement This is a summary of their account activity such cases and payments adjustments etc The cases listed do not show case detail as that is provided on the original invoice you provided with the case Before Setting Up a Statement Job starting balances and balances owed are correct during this statement period they owe during this statement period Review reports to make sure all payments and invoices have been entered for the month Be sure to make sure that 1 At the Menu Bar click Reports Billing then Invoice Register Print and review this report that lists all the cases that have been invoiced for this statement period 2 At the Menu Bar click Reports Billing then Cash Receipts Print and review this report that lists all the payments that have been entered 3 At the Menu Bar click Report Accounting then Aged Trial Balance Print and review this report that lists all the accounts and how much New Menu Statements System New Edit List Reports Help Case Search Case ieg yNdy0ysS Payment Bulk Payment Statement Account Doctor Product Material Vendor Marketing Contact Setting up a Statement Job statement job ton you can use Lab Manager s default settings Month Processing 4 Click on the Save New button Pri
393. n the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year GEE Gen Journal Report General Journal Printer BRN_DODA4A on http 192 168 1 131 redirected 4 Tray 0 1032307 asez ieg yNIyoYS Starting Date 3 01 2012 custom Fiscal Om Ending Date 93 31 2012 mo Today Preview or Print the General Journal 1 Click on Reports Accounting and then General Oom Pen o on Journal 2 Choose a Date Range Edit the Starting Date if nec essary Edit the Ending Date if necessary 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen o This report Includes General Journal e Transaction ID Filtered By Between 1 1 2012 AND 8 7 2012 e Date Stamp of Transaction Tuesday August 07 2012 LSG Prod New e Transaction Description IJE ID Date Created IJ Description GL Account Debit Credit Taxed Payment e General Ledger Account 190784 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Checks R 251 00 0 00 Check GL Account 190786 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Checks R 88 00 0 00 Check e Debit Amount 190787 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM el made with no payable Owed To Customer 0 00 332 00 Credit Card e Credit Amount 190768 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Payment made with no payable Credit R 332 00 0 00 Credit Card e Taxed Not Tax iii 190790 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Checks R 52 00 0 00 Check e Type of Payment 190791 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Payment made with no payable Owed To Customer 0 00 54 00 Credit Card invoices 190792 1 2 2012 12 00 00 AM Payment
394. nalFiles lsg CustomReports 103220 2529 INYOICE MESSAGES Logo for Reports Inv Msq1 Inv Msq2 Inv Msq3 CALMDBs ExternalFiles Isg Thu mb_LSGLogo bmp was not found Stmt Msq1 STATEMENT MESSAGES Stmt Msq2 Stmt Msq3 e Custom Reports Path This defines where your custom reports are stored It is recommended that you leave this set to its default setting If you are using this on a network with multiple workstations you will need to set this network location to where the individual reports are going to be stored To modify the paths click on the Browse button and redefine the path e Logo for Reports This is used to store a logo that may appear on your invoices or statements To add your logo right click on the grey window then left click on Choose file Navigate to the image you want to use and select it A thumbnail version of the selected image will appear in the Logo window Now that image can be added to your invoices and or statements e Invoice Statement Messages Anything entered on these lines will be available to print at the bottom of your Invoices or Statements 46 System Menu Control Panel SET dale Ore al ine Mar li mm continued Edit Company Preferences and Settings Screen continued Reports Tab at Edit Company Preferences o Default to having the Min Balance CheckedBox EJ Show Bar Codes On Reports MB Sum Service Charges On Statement setto Checked Workticket Header Doctor s Date
395. nd end ing dates e Today A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date e Fiscal YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year e Unstatemented A dot in the circle will fill in the start and end date for cases that have not Report Menu Billing Taxes with Sales System New Edit List Reports Help 1018207 ase ea IMOS Accounting General Main Billing Invoices Production Invoice Register Labels Cash Receipts Marketing Current Sales Scheduling Statements Year To Date Reports Product Sales Material Sales Account Analysis Product Price List Materials Price List Commissions Taxes with Sales FlighTags FlighTags Travel Credits yet been statemented Example Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want the date range of current unstatemented cases to start with the first unstatemented case dated 8 5 12 The system will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today System New Edit List Reports Help Elam Taxes w Sales Report Preview or Print the Taxes Collected with Product and Material Report 1 Click on Reports Billing and then Taxes with Sales 2 Choose a date range 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen e ag A Z 3 as a ei a A i e A oe ional e
396. ndar At Calendar you can edit or view RE Production e Company Holidays This area tells Lab Manager which holidays the laboratory is closed aera e Shipper Holidays This area tells Lab Manager which holidays shipping companies are closed e Calendar This displays the calendar for the laboratory ae Admin Tools Shipper Holidays Calendar Exit System New Edit List Reports Help Company Holidays Control Panel This area allows you to create a list of observed holidays the laboratory is closed Lab Manager comes with mia several holidays already in the list To create holidays go to the top of the screen and click on System Calendar and then Company Holidays Once these holidays are defined they can be assigned to the calendar Production Calendar Company Holidays Accounting Shipper Holidays Codes Calendar Admin Tools The Edit Company Holidays screen allows you to define information about your holidays e Holiday ID This is the ID that the system automatically assigns to the Holiday e Description This is the name of the Holiday e Date Retired This is the date that the Holiday has been retired deleted e Show Retired This check box is used to show the retired Holiday in the list If the retired events are not showing check mark the box and it will add in the retired events Exit Note If you are looking at the list of holidays and do not see a
397. new products or to edit existing ones Products are the labor items such as the Add New eromwne hridaoc doanturoac ate that wou Product Pr Modifying a Product column in the table 2 At Edit Product modify the items that need to be changed 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost 34 1 Click List Products Search button table will populate with all of your doctors At List Products tab click the product s Description Step 12 Materials Setup Wizard Step 12 Materials Materials are the items such as gold teeth and attachments you purchase from a vendor Because materials are normally in inventory Lab Manager has several fields in the material area that are unique to an inventory control system Lab Manager s Inventory Report shows the profit made on the materials used when in the Edit Material screen you enter the material purchase price and define a mark up As materials are added to a case the quantity used is deducted from the In Stock value for the material Other useful fields related to materials are the Reorder Level and Reorder Quantity When setting up MATERIALS it is important that you define the fields that are in BOLD The BOLD fields are required The other fields are optional gt System New Edit List Reports Help GEE Edit Materials Edit Materials In Stock id Markup ieg MYOS 10 8307 ase Safety Info Special Code
398. ng 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Step number 2 5 Step number 3 5 E E gt W N Step4 code Cases by Step Number and Date Due Filtered By All Cases wi Steps Scheduled Between 11 1 2012 AND 11 30 2012 Sorted By Your Company Name Goes Here Step Case Account Status Pan Patient Product Tooth s Qty 6 Final finish Finish 1211 0003 Dr George scheduling test 3 4 GOLD CROWN 11 27 12 1 00 Franks Step Total Deliver Deliver 1211 0003 Dr George scheduling test 3 4 GOLD CROWN 11 27 12 1 00 Franks Step Total Grand Total 228 Reports Menu Scheduling Cases To Be Finished Early A T oola Se Lo CIILA ETATE continued Cases To Be Finished Early Report System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting General The Cases To Be Finished Early Report lists the cases that will be finished early and can be sorted by Ship By Date or Doctors Date Billing Production Labels Date Radio Buttons Choose One e Ship By Date This will sort the report by the ship by date on the case e Doctors Date This will sort the report by the doctors date list on the case Marketing 1012207 ase ea IMOS Scheduling Case Completion Technician Production Steps Past Due Cases Due Cases To Be Finished Ear Step Status Product Steps Production Steps System New Edit List Reports Help OENE Early Cases Report
399. ng Tax Collectors Imported Collecto Imported Collecto 1 Click on System Accounting and then Tax Collectors 2 Place a date in the Date Retired column next to the name of the tax collector that needs to Add New be retired Do this for all items that need retiring 3 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost 82 System Menu Accounting SEL CTU Cela em mevererelelalilateie continued Tax Rates Sysxem New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel Here you define the name or description and value of the Tax Rate and assign it to a Tax Collector entity ae Production enu Calendar Each Tax Rate needs to be assigned to a Tax Collector Example The City of Phoenix Taxable tax rate would be assigned to the City of Phoenix tax collector Accounting Tax Collectors Codes Tax Rates Admin Tools Tax Categories Non taxable rates are necessary for some Tax Collectors Authorities because they want to track the sales of non taxable items so to do business with Doctors in the City of Phoenix you would also need a Non Taxable Items tax rate that was assigned to Tax Category Phoenix Non Taxable Exit Invoice Terms Tax Rates are for only one tax collector Taxing Authority To define Tax Rates click on System Accounting and then Tax Rates The List and Edit Tax Rates screen allows you to define information about your tax rates e Description Descrip
400. ng contact Most marketing accounts will only have one location but if the marketing account has a billing and a shipping address that are different than Location 2 can be used Name Type in the name of the contact just as you want it to appear Address1 Type the address of the contact here Address2 If additional address information is needed type it here City Type the city name here State Province Type the state or province here Postal Code Type of zip or postal code here Country Use the dropdown list and select the country Phone 1 with Ext The telephone number goes here The extension can be typed in the next box Phone 2 with Ext An optional phone number can go here The extension can be typed in the next box FAX The fax number can go here Email Address Optional email address can go here Web Optional If the doctor has a website the internet address can go here Contact An additional contact name can go here Owner The name of the owner can be typed here Date Retired Do nothing If this contact is ever deleted Lab Manager will place a date in this field indicating that the contact has been deleted retired Follow Up Date Place a date in this field to create a report to remind you to re contact this account e Follow Up Time Use the dropdown list for time to re contact this account A date has to be in the Follow Up Date field for this function to work e Mark checkbox Optional Placing a check in
401. ng for click on the Search button to the right Lab Man ager will then look for any matches and then display those matches in a table for you to review To see more of a case that is listed in the table just click on the case number in the first column of the table Click on Reset to clear the criteria to do a different search Search Field 2 and Oon J Search Field 2 the first white field is a drop down list that allows you to filter out those cases that have been Statemented Search Field 2 The default answer is Official Status This is done so that you only see the current month s cases The default answer is Not Equal To If all of the cases past and fal present where showing you might confuse old cases with current ones Not Equal To Primary Value If you want to find an older case one that has been Statemented simply click on the C button to the right of the Function drop down list field The C button clears the search criteria in that search field Statemented AND OR Above Search Field 2 and Search Field 3 there ihe eli Tim eT is the option to perform an AND search or an OR search These functions are used when you Search Field 1 Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Search Field 3 are using two or more search criteria Patient f Doctor Bads o Ae BB Doctor Function Function Function Function Function Example if you
402. ns Choose One Labels Marketing Scheduling Lab Status Doctors Production YTD Product Production 10 2 07 ase e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Custom Place a dot in the circle to choose your own start and end dates e MTD Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and ending dates e YTD Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates e Today Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date e Fiscal YTD Place a dot in the circle the system will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year e Unstatemented Place a dot in the circle the system will fill in the start and end date for cases that have not yet been statemented Example Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want the date range of current unstatemented cases to start with the first unstatemented case dated 8 5 12 The system will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today Material Production Account Production Material Usage Cases ata Glance Case Tracking Material Reorders Materials Remake Usage Out
403. nstallation Click Install to begin the installation IF you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard isa _corcel _ Installation and Setup Custom Install for Workstation Installation Only Note This can only be done after the server has been completely setup and has a working database 1 Select the Custom option and click Next to proceed Click on the disk icon to the left of Server Components to see a list of options Click on This feature will not be available This prevents the server tools and the databases from being installed on this computer Note Installing the server tools and databases on more than one computer should NOT be done Click on the Next button to proceed 4 Click on the Install button to begin the installation of Lab Manager and all of its related components Some of these first time processes will take several minutes 5 At this point you should see the message InstallShield Wizard Completed Click on the Finish button to exit the Installation Wizard You should now have the Lab Manager 7 icon on your desktop 6 Double click the Lab Manager 7 icon and the database from the server should be available in the dropdown list If this is a workstation installation it is complete if Lab Manager 7 InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Completed The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed Lab Manager 7
404. nt Smith John 0105 0001 Anderson Richard 0 00 73 66 0105 0003 Riggs John 0 00 412 36 Qty Products Materials Tooth Amount gt 0105 0004 Guerrero Albert 0 00 312 42 1 00 3 4 GOLD CROWN 77 00 0105 0006 Burns Frank 0 00 135 22 Subtotal 7700 P 1003 0001 test1 0 00 125 21 Tax Amount Subtotal 0 00 1 058 87 State Arizona 3 85 County Maricopa 3 85 Case Type Patient Reference Credit Charge City Phoenix 1 16 Check 12345 123 45 0 00 ed toward Case s 0105 0004 Total Tax 8 86 hoo Discount 50 00 0 00 ed toward Case s 0105 0004 boo Credit credt 25 00 0 00 ed toward Case s 0105 0004 boo Check 333 3 800 00 0 00 ed toward Case s 0105 0001 0105 0003 0105 0004 0105 0006 1003 0001 R41 booo Check 2222 10 00 0 00 Lower Arch Invoice Total 95 86 10 00 0 00 Applied toward Case s R41 Subtotal 4 019 45 0 00 Total 4 018 45 1 058 87 V7 Features e Perform Multiple Operations From a Single Screen e U S Federal Excise Tax Capable i e Unlimited Price Lists B Laboratory e Track Outsourced Cases F ball e Customize All Printed Forms amp Reports roup Inc 1718 East Rose Lane Phoenix AZ 85016 e Store Images With Cases e Easy Bulk Payment Entry Screen Sai 41s PSP ST e Assign Doctors to U S or International Tooth Charts Arizona does not observe daylight savings time Schedule Case Production by the Minute Support calls outside these h
405. ntain that name in it See the Navigation Tools section that covers searching and sorting in the List Menu i System New Edit List Reports Help Search Field 1 Oand or Search Field 2 Oand or Search Field 3 N eji ejj unction Primary Value Function ry Value Prima ss Function Primary Value BB Show Retired M showsq marked BM System New Edit List Reports Help System New Edit List Reports Help Cases Accounts Doctors ieg IMOS Main Payments Products Materials Case Completion 1032307 ase Vendors Marketing Contacts Statements Invoices OERE List Marketing Contacts search Marketing Contacts Phonel 602 264 59 Y StateProvincee Y PostalCode Y 85016 Y Name AY Addessi Y Address Y test 5 City LocatorlD gt 414 123 main phoenix az 4 eseo pes Imos Add a New Marketing Contact Using the List New 1 At the Menu Bar click List Marketing Contacts and the Add New button at the bottom of the screen 2 For full instructions see the New Marketing Contacts section of this manual Modify an existing Marketing Contact Using the List Menu 1 Click List Marketing Contacts then the Search button The grid will list all of your marketing contacts 2 Click the Marketing Contacts name in the table of the marketing contacts you w
406. nting Statement Job System New Edit List Reports Help DEERING Edit Statements 1eg IMOS Edit Statements Use this screen to define a statement job Start by selecting a Statement Date and then verify or change the options to the right To see which accounts meet the criteria you have selected click on the Fill Grid button When finished click on the Save Changes button Now you can print statements by going to Reports gt Billing gt Statements where you will select this statement job from a list and click on the Print button 10 8 07 ase Statement Date 05 31 2012 Accounts With Activity Meeting The Criteria Defined Above Record 1 of 254 Once the information on the reports is correct it is time to create a 1 At the Menu Bar click New Statement and the Add New but 2 Define the statement job by modifying the dates In most cases Start Date Last Statements End Date Reprinting Statements from Any Statement Job System New Edit List Reports Help Withee List Statements StatementDate iT 05 31 2012 01 01 1970 01 01 1970 1 ase Jes jNPOYs y 30 2012 3 Mark The Statement Marks The End of the Month checkbox Note Unlike previous LM versions Lab Manager v7 requires NO End of 1 At the Menu Bar click Reports Billing and then Statements 2 Select the statement job you just created using the dropdown list and then click Print or Preview 3 Click Preview to see the st
407. ntinued Menu Production Doctors Production YTD System New Edit List Reports Help Doctors Production YTD Report The Doctors Production YTD Report shows how many products have been produced for each doctor e Pick a date only this year is important Select a date in the date field 1018207 ase ea IMOS System New Edit List Reports Help OENE Dr Prod Report Doctors Production Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 101207 ase ea myu Pick a date only the year is importa 99 26 2012 Main Accounting General Main Billing Production Work Tickets Labels Lab Status Marketing gt Doctors Production YTD Scheduling gt Product Production Material Production Account Production Material Usage Cases ata Glance Case Tracking Material Reorders Materials Remake Usage Outsourced Cases Quotes Daily Delivery List Delivery Report Preview or Print the Doctors Production YTD Report 1 Click on Reports Production and then Doctors Production YTD 2 Choose a date 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen YTD Doctors Production For the Year 2012 Friday October 12 2012 Department Jan Feb Mar May Jun Jul Account 3 Dr Susan Smith Doctor 3 Dr Susan Smith 20 Placeholder 0 0 Dr Subtotal 0 0 Total 0 0 Account 4 Dr Fred Markus Doctor 4 Dr Fred Markus 20 Pl
408. ock Items e Doctor Item Dropdown List Choose from the dropdown list the item that was received with the case e Notes These are notes about this item e Date Created This Date field will be filled in for the user automatically and cannot be changed e Add New button Click the Add New button to add a new line item in the grid so as to add another item Adding Doctor Items to a Case On the case that the doctor items need to be notated click on the Doctor Items tab from the Case Entry screen 1 Click the Add New button on the bottom of the Doctor Items tab 2 In the line item that appears click in the Doctor Item field From the drop down list choose the item that was received 3 Fill in the notes field if necessary Repeat Steps 2 4 to add all Doctors Items 4 Click Save across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost Main DoctorItems Notes Teeth Images Patient Codes Ci Notes Tab at the Case Entry Screen Standard Notes Aisa Standard Notes at Notes Tab in Case Entry Case Notes These Notes are only stored onthe case e Case Notes This area provides a place for notes to be stored with the case Information placed in this box will not print on the invoice or work ticket e Notes for Invoice This area provides a place for notes to be printed on the invoice and it is also stored on the case e Notes for Work Ticket This area provides a place for the notes to be printed on the wo
409. oduction Material Production Account Production Material Usage e Pick a date only current year is important Select a date in the date field i Cases ata Glance System New Edit List Reports Help GENE Accts Prod Report Accounts Production Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 1018207 ase ea IMOS Pick a date only the year is importa 09 26 2012 Preview or Print the Account Production Report 1 Click on Reports Production and then Account Production 2 Choose a Date 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen YTD Account Production For the Year 2012 Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Department Jan Mar Apr May Jun Sep Oct Nov Dec Yearly Total Account 3 Dr Susan Smith 20 Placeholder 0 Account 4 Dr Fred Markus 20 Placeholder 0 Account 2 Dr George Franks 20 Placeholder 0 Dent Denture 0 17 Ceramics 0 18 Misc 0 Account 5 Dr John Killdare Dent Denture 17 Ceramics 18 Misc Account 1 Dr John Smith 20 Placeholder 203 Report Menu Production Material Usage continued Report Menu Production System New Edit List Reports Help Material Usage Report Main Accounting General The Material Usage Report shows how many materials sold profit inventory and value over a specific time period Billing Main amp ieg IMOS Production Work Tickets Date Range Radio Butto
410. oduction Material Production Account Production Material Usage Cases ata Glance Case Tracking Material Reorders Materials Remake Usage Outsourced Cases Quotes Daily Delivery List Delivery Report The work ticket is designed to be printed and attached to the case pan so that the technician will know the work that needs to be done and when it needs to be finished The top date and color can be defined at Company Preferences Production Module Work Tickets These work tickets will list a date at the top Doctors information Case Number Patient Name a listing of the Products and Materials that make up the case Doctor Preferences Items Received and Notes Scheduling Module Work Tickets In addition to the items from the Production Module Work Tickets Scheduling prints each step dates to complete a step Technician name if it is assigned and a barcode if activated There will be a number listed at the top telling how many work tickets there are to print in the whole system Then click on the Print 4 5 or Preview button at the bottom of the screen Preview or Print Work Tickets 1 Click on Reports Production and then Work Tickets 2 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen 3 Click Close to exit out of the Work Tickets screen 4 Once the work tickets have printed at the Did the Work Tickets Print Correctly box click Yes to clear the list OR 5 Click No if the work tickets did not print correctly Th
411. of knowledge most users do not have therefore they must rely on a support per son friends or family members to help them when there are problems A person simply should not expect to be able to buy a computer and printer install software from several companies and expect it to work together the first time Software support is a fact of life just like an auto mechanic is important if you own a Car Fair and Reasonable When a computer consultant comes out to your lab you expect to be charged for their time and service While we analyze your problem over the phone our highly trained technicians offer the same level of knowledge and expertise We work very hard to minimize the need for phone support through our documentation If your lab calls for help you can expect to get our best effort Our goal is to ensure your success Live Tech Support Our support department is located in Phoenix Arizona at the office of Laboratory Systems Group Inc We do not use a foreign call center When you call us we guar antee you will be assisted by a highly trained English speaking technician E mail and Fax Support E mails or faxes received during business hours are typically returned that business day E mails and faxes received after hours will be returned the next business day Fax to 602 279 3633 and e mail to sup port labsysgrp com Virtual Support f you have a high speed internet connec tion and need real time assistance we can he
412. oice Detail Report Ending Date a 1 Click on Reports Accounting and then Invoice Today Details List 2 Choose either an Account or ID by using the drop down list 3 Choose a Date Range Edit the Starting Date if nec essary Edit the Ending Date if necessary 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen This report includes Tax Rate Name n Taxable Sales Amount Invoice Details Tax Liability Amount Tax Owed Grand Total Filtered By Dr John Killdare between Between 10 1 2012 AND 10 31 2012 Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Case Patient Inv Date Qty Products Materials Unit Price Unit Disc Item Disc Amount Killdare John 1007 0001 Smith Sandy 10 1242 1 00 3 4 GOLD CROWN 77 00 77 00 1 00 UPPER BITE RIM 21 00 21 00 o 98 00 Note For this report to work you must select an account 0901 0001 Miller Jessica 10422 1 00 FULL CAST GOLD CR 84 00 84 00 o o 84 00 0806 0005 Jackson Scott 104242 1 00 3 4 GOLD CROWN 34 00 34 00 000 34 00 0806 0002 Black Mark 10422 2 00 3 4 GOLD CROAN 34 00 167 00 167 00 0106 0002 Crouse Robert 104242 1 00 ALBACAST CROWN 91 00 0 00 91 00 4 25 GOLD GATE ARGEN 72 1 42 0 00 6 04 0 00 97 04 Total Disc Total invoiced 1 00 530 04 Grand Total Disc Grand Total Invoiced 1 00 530 04 167 Report Menu Accounting Account Ledger lt ole umm TE oTa ia E continued Account Ledger System
413. olumn need to be assigned to this product click the Add All button instead and this will place the step s in the Selected Steps column 3 Repeat Steps 2A B until all steps have been added to the Selected Steps column that need to be on this product 4 If the steps located in the Selected Steps column are not in the correct order click on the step that needs to be moved up or down in the list and then click either Move Up or Move Down 5 Repeat Step 4 until all steps have been moved to the correct order 6 Click Save Changes on the Edit Products screen or all your work will be lost Deleting a Step from a Product 1 At the Edit Products screen locate the Steps tab 2 Click on the step in the Selected Steps column that needs to be removed from this product and then click the Remove button If all the steps in the Selected Steps column need to be removed from this product click the Remove All button instead This will place the step s in the Available Steps column 3 Repeat step 2 until all steps have been removed to the Available Steps column 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Products screen or all your work will be lost 134 New Menu Products hiss bee Lmage CNA lal od Kolo Lik Continued Image Tab at Edit Products Screen Sections TABS Prices Related Products Related Materials Codes Notes The Image tab allows the user to save an image of the product Compatible Image File Formats BMP GIF JPG PNG and TI
414. on at the bottom of the screen This is will add a new line item to the grid 3 In the new line item in the grid under the Description column type the name of the Doctor Item 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all new doctors items have been entered 5 You do not have to type a Doctor Item ID An ID will be assigned auto matically when the changes have been saved 6 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost FJ Close on Save 36 Setup Wizard Step 14 Calendar Step 14 Calendar Skip this page if you don t own the Scheduling Module The Edit Holiday screen tells Lab Manager which observed holidays the laboratory is closed Lab Manager comes with some predefined holidays already in the list field Note If you are looking at the list of holidays and do not see all of the items click the Show Retired check box at the top of the screen This will show all holidays that have been retired along with current holidays System New Edit List Reports Help GENE Holidays Edit Holidays HS Show Retired 1eg NOUS Modify Existing Holidays 1 Click on System Calendar and then Holidays 2 Click on the name of the holiday under the Description column 1038307 3529 3 Modify the name Holidays 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost HolidayID Description DateRetired 6 Christmas Add Additional Holidays gt l independence p Labor Day 1 Click on System Cal
415. on the Server Tool icon Step 1 Left click on Run As or Run As Administrator If Run As is used you should see a check box with the text of Protect my computer and data from unau thorized program activity Uncheck this box and click OK When the program opens click on the Server Menu then on Setup New Lab Manager Click on the Backup Database button You will then be asked for the location where you would like to back up the data Browse to the location you would like your data saved at Once at that location click Save Step 2 3 When the progress bar shows 100 the backup is finished The grid will say Completed Backup of DB Repeat steps 4 5 if you have more than one company Lab Manager Server Tool Server Help Backup Company DB Server Tools 2 MessagelD Backup Associated Files Message DateOfMessage 15 5 168 setup zip My TE 3 Thumbs db Documents My Computer z My Network Places File name Save as type Lab Manager Server Tool Server Help Backup Company DB STDENT_LMDBO4_N ov_2010_08_43_36 bak Cancel Backing up Custom Reports and Images 1 2 Right click on the Server Tool icon Step 1 Left click on Run As or Run As Administrator If Run As is used you should see a check box with the text of Protect my computer and data from unau thorized program activity Uncheck thi
416. on the screen Schedule This button is used to schedule the steps of the case This feature is only available with the Scheduling Module Search Once you have selected a field to search a search function and typed in what you are looking for click on the Search but ton Lab Manager will then look for any matches and then display those matches in a table for you to review Transfer data When using the QuickBooks Interface payment totals can be transferred from Lab Manager to QuickBooks 40 Advanced Case Search There are 2 ways to access the Advanced Case Search a System On the Menu bar click New and then Case Search Mew Edit List Reports Help vair OR List of Criteria Use these criteria when searching single or multiple fields Mark Put a check in the Mark box if specific cases have previously been selected using the Mark function Include Statemented This causes Status to be ignored Check this box to in clude Statemented cases in your search Include Retired Check this box when searching for retired deleted cases Status Use this drop down to select whether the case is Open Invoiced State mented or Not Statemented It defaults to Not Statemented to show you only not yet statemented User Status Use this user definable field to find cases that you have assigned a custom status to Example Try In Die Trims If you have assigned cases to these custom statuses you can find a list of all of them here
417. op down list select the account by ID num ber e Starting Date field Fill in the Starting Date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format Report Menu Accounting Account History System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting Aged Trial Balance Short General Aged Trial Balance Main Mi Biting Production Collections A e A ao a General Journal Labels Tax Reports Marketing Account History 1032307 ase Scheduling Invoice Details List Account Ledger e Ending Date field Fill in the Ending Date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One e Custom A dot in the circle will choose your own start and end dates e MTD A dot in the circle will fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and ending dates automatically e YTD A dot in the circle will fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates automatically e Today A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date e Fiscal A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year ieg yNIyOYsS Preview or Print the Account History Report 1 Click on Reports Accounting and then Account History 2 Choose either an Account or ID by using the drop down list 3 Choose a Date Range AK 5 Click Print or Preview
418. or all the work will be lost oO 123 New Menu Account NEA Ea EA lla E continued Adding Modifying and Deleting Accounts Adding a New Account Using the New Menu At the Menu Bar click on New then Account At the Edit Account screen define the Account Name Price List and Invoice Terms All other fields are optional Click Add Location on the Account Locations tab The Account Location Edit box will appear At the Account Location Edit screen type in the address and contact information and then click Save At the Edit Account screen click on the Doctor tab Click on the Add Doctor button For Instructions on adding a doctor refer to section Adding a New Doctor from the Edit Account screen Save the Doctor s information and that will bring you back to the Edit Account screen Click Save New on the Edit Account screen or all your work will be lost ONOTA WH Adding a New Account Using List Accounts At the Menu Bar click on List and then Accounts Click Add New button at the bottom of the screen At the Edit Account screen define the Account Name Price List and Invoice Terms All other fields are optional Click Add Location on the Account Locations tab At the Account Location Edit screen type in the address and contact information and then click Save At the Edit Account screen click on the Doctor tab Click on the Add Doctor button For Instructions on adding a doctor refer to section
419. ored in Lab Manager cucioreetmanes bath can be moved to a separate drive if necessary However in most cases it is recommended to leave these settings as is SalesPerson Images Path C LMDBs ExternalFiles isqg SalesPersonImages The paths that are editable are Company Image Path Graphics that are company specific such as your logo Case Images Path These are where images are stored after they have been saved to a case Doctor Images Path This is the path for the images that are saved at Edit Doctors Employee Images Path This is the path for the images that are saved at Edit Employees Materials Images Path This is the path for the images that are saved at Edit Materials Product Images Path This is the path for the images that are saved at Edit Products Modifying Images Paths at Edit Company Preferences 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Company Preferences and Settings 2 To modify the paths click on the Browse button and redefine the path 3 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all your work will be lost Reports Tab at Edit Company Preferences Screen Use this tab to tell Lab Manager where the custom reports are located define your company logo and create the editable invoice and statement mes sages here System New Edit List Reports Help GEE Company Prefs Edit Com i y Preferences ieg jNd 104S ban General Image Paths Custom Reports Path cA MDBs Exter
420. ot in the circle will sort the employees on the report in alphabetical order System New Edit List Reports Help reel iiesem Employees List Report Emplovees List Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Preview or Print the Employees List Report 1 Click on Reports General and then Employees 2 Choose a Date Retired option Active Only is the default setting 3 Choose how to sort the report Employee Name is the default setting Date Retired lIgnore oO 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen O Active Only Note If the Ignore option is selected both active and retired Employee ID employees will show up on the report O Employee This report includes e Employee ID Employee List e Employee Name Sorted By Employee e Employee Address Filtered By DateRetired is Blank e Employee City State Zip Friday September 21 2012 LSG Prod New e Employee Phone ID Name Address City State Zip Phone 16 Mandi 1718 E Rose Lane Phoenix AZ 65016 13 Richard 1716 E Rose Lane Phoenix AZ 65016 10 Rosalie M 1718 E Rose Lane Phoenix AZ 85016 174 Reports Menu General Departments List aXe elem mca mel Jal le l continued Departments Report System New Edit List Repwrts Help Accounting General Accounts This report prints a general list of Department Names and their ID Billing Baii ieg IMOS Note If the retired option is selected it will put a retired date to the right of
421. ours are after hour e Reprint Statements From Any Month SUpport ana are pieg separately e Manage Communication for Account and Marketing Contacts Support 602 264 5913 e Multi Level User Security Fax 602 279 3633 E mail support labsysgrp com Monday Friday PAGE w N on nN A 9 9 10 10 11 12 12 13 14 ike 15 15 16 17 17 18 18 19 20 21 23 23 24 27 28 30 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 38 38 38 39 39 41 42 Table of Contents Lab Manager e Features and Modules e Warranty e Phone Support Installing Lab Manager Setting Up Lab Manager Creating and Keying a New Company Importing Lab Manager Professional 5 5 Data Server Tools e Setup New Lab Manager e Clear Logged In Users e Upgrade Server e Create New Company Database e Reset Admin Password e Import v5 and 5 5 Professional Data e Import v6 Data e Backup a Company DB e Restore a Company DB e Server Tool Configuration e Delete a Company DB e Change License e Aging Scheduler e Misc Administrator Tools e Copy Database e Attach Company Database Lab Manager Setup Wizard e Step 1 Billing Terms e Step 2 Tax Setup OPTIONAL e Step 3 Delivery Methods OPTIONAL e Step 4 Company Information e Step 5 Forms Selection e Step 6 Departments e Step 7 Employees e Step 8 Accounts Doctors Locations e Step 9 Vendors OPTIONAL e Step 10 Production Steps SCHEDULING MODULE ONLY e Step 11 Products e Step 12 Materials
422. ox is editable from this screen This is used to post things that everyone is allowed to see when they log into the call tracking area It can be used to post when people will be away from the office or when the company is taking a vacation Every user can modify the bulletin board Click inside the Bulletin Board box and type in new items or modify existing text and then click the Save Button above the Bulletin Board field e Bulletin Board Save Click this button to save the changes made in the Bulletin Board Bulletin Board in Call Tracking The Bulletin Board will show up for all employees that are logged into Call Tracking This can be a list of holidays people on vacation or office meetings count Account Notes lose cash account Note To add a new line in the bulletin board use Ctrl Enter on the keyboard Also notes can be typed in Word or Notepad and copied pasted into this box Copy is Ctrl C and Paste is Ctrl V Bulletin Board Es July 23 24 Mandi gone Adding Notes to the Bulletin Board Oct 10 Richard gone 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Call Tracking Bulletin Board field 2 Click in the box for the Bulletin Board and type in the items needed or paste in text from a word processor using Ctrl V 3 Make any line adjustments by creating new lines Ctrl Enter 4 Once the information is entered click the Save button above the Bulletin Board 01 1970 DENTAL CANADA couldn t add dr
423. pany Preferences and Settings and then the Global Dr Pref tab e Department ID drop down This drop down lists the departments that the preference is associated with e Preference This field is used to type in the preferences that will show on the work ticket e Date Created This is the date that the preference was created e Date Retired Leave this field empty if this is a valid Preference gt Please trim margins MISC Please trim margit See Account before shipping MISC See Account befor Adding a Doctor Preference to An Account 1 Click List Accounts then the Search button table will populate with all of your accounts Click the Account Name in the table of the account you wish to edit 2 At Edit Account screen click on the Dr Pref Defaults tab 3 Click on the Add New button 4 If there are global Doctor Preferences set up use the Global Dr Pref ID column and choose it from the list See Global Dr Prefs Tab at Edit Company Preferences Section 5 If there are no global preferences click in the Department ID dropdown list and select the Department you would like this preference assigned to 6 In the Preference field type the text you would like to see on your work tickets and within cases 7 Click Save New Save Changes or all the work will be lost Modifying a Doctor Preference on An Account 1 Click List Accounts then the Search button table will populate with all of your accounts Click the Account
424. paratory Prep Frame Finish FrmFin Deliver Deliver 231 Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray Auto Select Reports Menu Scheduling Production Steps Acolo aK a o 0I aTe MTAL mmm continued System New Edit List Reports Help Production Steps Report Accounting General The Production Steps report lists the Steps how many minutes it takes to complete the step Billin the value of the step and how many units can be done per day Production Labels Marketing Scheduling Case Completion 1012207 se sea IMOS Technician Production Steps Past Due Cases Due Cases To BeFinished Early Step Status Product Steps Production Steps System New Edit List Reports Help OENE Prod Steps Report ieg IMOS Production Steps Preview or Print the Production Steps Report Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray Auto Select 1 Click on Reports Scheduling and then Production Steps 2 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen 10 8307 ase Production Steps List Tuesday Movember 27 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Step ID Description Code Minutes To Finish Value Sun Mon Tue WedThu Fri Sat Deliver Deliver Deliver 120 10 0000 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Final finish Finish Finish 1200 40000 O iW 100 100 10 10 100 Frame Finish FrmFin FrmFin e0000 60 G 60 G 60 G BU Frame Wax up Waxup Waxup s0000 2 20 202 20 20 20 202 Inspect Check Check 10 0000 60 amp O amp bO
425. patient that was entered on the case This is listed in 15 minute increments Invoice Date Type in the date that the case was invoiced Ship By Date Type in the date that the case was shipped back to the doctor Ship By Time Use the drop down list and choose the time the case was shipped Finish Date Type in the date the case was finished in the lab Delivered Date Type in the date that the case was delivered to the doctor Pick Up Date Type in the date that the lab picked up the case from the doctor Retired Date Type in the date that the case was retired deleted Search Use this button after all the criteria for the search has been entered Reset Use this button to clear all the search criteria to search again 5 Ways to Search Fields Containing Dates using the dropdown list AUN Ignore This will not search a date and this is the default Has Any Value This will look for cases with that date available Has No Value This will look for cases that does not have a date Equals Use this status when matching a specific date Between Use this status when looking between 2 different dates This will display two more date fields Enter in the Start Date in the first box and the End Date in the last box Using the Advanced Case Search oRWwNM 41 Or at the Main Menu tab click on the Case Search Button Navigation Tools Case Entry amp Update eS nx Case Search Report Menu Maintenance Menu
426. pe in the description of the product in this field e Product Class Not used at this time e Special Codes Optional Use this optional field to assign special codes to the product for the purpose of grouping products e Department Use this drop down list to assign this product to an existing department You can add your own products by clicking on the or the L button to the right of the field e Definable This optional field can be used to store additional information about the product e Notes for Case These notes will show up on the case when this product is entered onto a case in Case Entry e Invisible checkbox If this checkbox is checked the product on the invoice will be hidden and will not charge the doctor for it This option makes it possible to include products on a case for tracking purposes without the product showing up on the invoice e Discountable checkbox When checked this product will have a discount applied When left unchecked this product will not have discounts applied e Is Production Product aka Count checkbox When checked this product will be included on the production reports Otherwise it will be ignored e Allow Commission checkbox When this box is checked this product can have a commission percentage calculated If the box is not checked a salesperson will not get a commission percentage from this product if it is added to a case in Case Entry e Include Product checkbox When checked this produc
427. per or use our LSR form portrait 8 1 2 x 11 available at 800 677 1120 It can printed on blank paper or use our QC form portrait 8 1 2 x 11 avail able at 800 677 1120 Our LSR form has a horizontal perforation 1 3 of the way from the top of the form Our QC form has one vertical perforation 2 3 of the way from the left 52 SIARRA Ore alige N at li mm continued Statement Examples These artist renditions show you the statement paper styles we support We carry the DBL DBL BL LSR LSR QC TAB LAB forms For more information call the sales department at 800 677 1120 Your Company Name Your Company Name Your Address Statement Your Address Statement Your City State Zip Your City State Zip Page 1 Page 1 Biling Date 06 31 1997 Biling Date 06 31 1997 Your Client s Name Your Client s Name Your Address Your Address Your City State Zip l Your City State Zip Dale CasekType Patient Reference Credis hayes Dale Cseipe Patent Refrence 5 09 97 9602 0007 Mueller 322 47 5 09 97 9602 0007 Mueller 5 09 97 Adjustment 888 Thank You 24 95 5 09 97 Adjustment 888 Thank You 5 11 97 Credit 123 Thank You 123 45 5 11 97 Credit 123 Thank You 5 11 97 Discount 112 Thank You 100 00 11 97 Discount 112 Thank You 5 15 97 Credit Casd Mueller Mandi Thank You 50 00 5 15 97 Credit Casd Mueller Mandi Thank You 5 16 97 Payment 1111 Thank You 534 25 16 97 Payment 1111 Thank You
428. ppears Left click on the Choose File option and Lab Manager will display a Select Image window Use this to locate and select the image on your computer After you have selected the image a small thumbnail image will appear in the image window To view a larger copy of the image right click on the image and then left click on View To change the image right click again and repeat Steps 2 5 To delete the image right click and select Delete 8 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost oR W NY O N 54 system Menu Control Panel ETC dale Ore al ige N at l mm continued Edit Employees Screen Picture List Employees Picture SAn teed a Tech For Doctors Steps Edit an Existing Employee 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Employees 2 The search area will appear and you choose from 2 options Type in the name of the employee and click Search or to see a whole list of employees leave the search area blank and just click Search 3 This will populate a grid Click on the Locator ID of the employee you wish to edit and this will open their Employee information 4 Edit the items needed 5 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost eee Show Retire FRR cea T Search for Existing Employee Search Field 1 S EOCEEN List Employees 1 Click on System Control Panel and then 2 Emp
429. py 1 Tray 0 1 Click on Reports Labels and then Salespersons 2 Choose how to sort the labels 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen 1012207 asen sea jnIpoYys Sot locatorlb Oname 217 Report Menu Labels Invoice amp Marketing Contacts lt ole am 0 10mm i e CE continued Invoice Labels This screen is Read Only i System New Edit List Repurts Help Accounting General Dr George Franks Dr George Franks Dr George Franks White Racheal Farquart Martha Nakasuji Frank 44 0106 0001 0105 0012 5 16 2002 12 00 00 0105 0011 6 15 2001 12 00 00 ieg IMOS Billing Production Labels Accounts Marketing Doctors Scheduling Products A a oe 2 Dr George Franks Dr George Franks Dr George Franks a Fields Mrs J Price Richard Lee Richard 101 0105 0010 0105 0009 6 8 2001 12 00 00 0105 0008 5 29 2001 12 00 00 Materials Employees Vendors Salespersons Use this screen to print a special mailing label with the Doctor Name Patient Name and amen Case Number designed to accompany the invoice This is designed to print on an Avery wheat aia 5160 style label sheet which provides 30 different labels per sheet Dr Account Locations Note The Invoice Labels screen is Read Only OEE Invoice Labels Report Invoice La bels 1 Use this screen to print a special maili designed to accompany the invoice 1018201 asez a IMOS
430. r out on the page Print a Gog oar E me mw Backward 4 Forward CP Print Button Used to print an example of this report seghnayioyus P Search Used to search Pages Used to move the report for given text from page to page LSG Prod New Invoice LSG Prod New 1716 E Rose Lane 1718 E Rose Lan Note To use preset standard invoice work ticket or statement styles see the section covering Easy Report Manager 69 SIM ea Oxo al ige ml at lA gm continued Manage Reports Identifying a Report The best way to identify the form Lab Manager is using is to go to the Manage Reports section of the program This can be found by going to System Control Panel and then Manage Reports using the menu bar at the top of the screen To find out which invoice form is in use scroll down until you see Invoices in the center column Then look to the right to see which form is currently being used for invoices In this case it is the Invoice DBL Main form system Menu Control Panel System New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel gt Company Preferences and Settings Case Entry Easy Report Manager Production Employees Calendar Price Lists Accounting Quickbooks Transfer Codes Call Tracking Admin Tools Shortcut Bar Exit ShortCut Menu Items Show All Dock Bars Manage Reports lt System New Edit List Reports Help As mentioned previously there can be two or more pieces to a report
431. r the report e Sort By Choose from Follow Up Date Time Lo cator ID Account Name Zip Phone or Contact Select a date range for the report Name continued Custom A dot in the circle will choose your own start and end dates MTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and ending dates YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates Today A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Report Menu Marketing Marketing Follow up Call List 1012207 ase ea IMOS System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting General Labels Bar Coding Billing Production Marketing Marketing Contacts Scheduling Marketing Face Sheet Marketing Follow Up Call List Marketing Calendar System New Edit List Reports Help OGEDE Marketing Follow Up Report Printer 1001 ase ea myu Marketina Follow Up Calls List pl omemecemmremery o e O Custom mI Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Starting Date Unstateme 09 26 2012 09 26 2012 Ending Date yvD O Today Oo DateRange ai Marked Salesperson Sort By ollow Up Date Time Preview or Print the Marketing Follow Up Call List Report 1 Click on Reports Marketing and then Marketing Follow Up Call List 2 3 Optional There is also a
432. r user definable lists Oand or Oand or Search Field 2 Search Field 3 Function Function Primary Yalue Primary Yalue Example Combine TWO or more search criteria At List Cases Search Field enter pa tient s name in Search Field 1 and doctor s name in Search Field 2 Lab Manager will only show cases that match BOTH the patient name and the doctor name The Search screen hides itself when the cursor is moved off of the search area If it disap pears simply point the mouse at the Search Tab and the screen reappears Using multiple Search Fields at one time allows you to combine multiple search criteria to create custom searches in seconds Search Field Search Field 1 s first white field is a drop down list that allows you to select the case field you Reset want to search You can select from a list including Account Name Case Number Doctor Name Patient Name Pan Number and Multiple Date Criteria The default answer is set to Patient Name Search Field 1 Account Name Function Contains Primary Yalue Function Search Field 1 s second white field is a drop down list of common functions used to find the data you are looking for The default an swer is set to Contains because it is easier to find a name that contains a portion of the name Example When searching for patient John W Smith go to Function and enter Contains In Primary Value enter Smith By specifying
433. ravel Credits 1 Click on Reports Billing and then FlighTags Travel Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Credits 2 Select a Cut Off Date 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen 1012207 ase ea IMOS Cut Off Date 09 25 2012 SES men Flightags Travel Credits Report Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here ID Name Sales Credit Awarded 5 Dr John Killdare 48 08 1 Total 48 08 1 196 Report Menu Production Report Menu Production System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting gt Work Tickets The work ticket is designed to be printed and attached to the case pan so that the technician will know the work that needs to be done and when it needs to be finished Lab Status This report summarizes production sales and receivables all Production b Work Tickets on one easy to read page labels 4 Lab Status Doctors Production YTD This report shows how many products have been produced for each doctor Product Production This report shows how many products or remakes a aa aan have been produced over a specific time period Account Production Material Production This report shows the quantity of materials used over oe a specific time period Cases at a Glance Account Production This report shows how many products have been tae produced for each account Material Reorders Material Usage The report lists each material with its starting inventory e
434. reated This Date field will be filled in for the user automatically and cannot be changed e OutSourced Vendor ID If this case has been outsourced then the name of the company that the product has been sent to will be selected from a drop down list e OutSourced Date Due Back If this case has been outsourced then the date that the case is supposed to be returned to the lab should be placed in this field e OutSourced Date Returned If the case was outsourced and it has been returned to the lab a date can be typed in this field to mark that it is no longer outsourced 105 New Menu Case EEA CLO MOrsky u continued Materials Grid on the Main Tab of Case Entry Screen Section Materials on Case Materials ELLEN Quantity MaterialTeeth Related Qty TakenFrominy Unit Price MISC 1 10 11 0 00 Materials are the billable items that you purchase from a vendor such gold teeth and attachments This grid has a scroll bar that allows you to see all the columns You can also click in one of the fields and use the tab key on the keyboard to go to each field e New Material button This button creates a new line item in the grid or click on Alt M on the keyboard e ID The ID field can be used to select a material by the ID number To use click inside the field and you will see a dropdown list button Click on the dropdown list button and pick the material you wish to add to the case The materials are sorted numerically by their ID number in this l
435. reen define Title First and Last Name and Degree Verify Account name or use drop down to change account name At the Shipping Location drop down list select the address that the cases are shipped to These addresses are setup from the Edit Account screens and then Edit Locations tab At the Tooth Number System drop down list select system All other fields are optional 6 Click Save New on the Edit Doctors screen or all your work will be lost ROD z Modifying an Existing Doctor from the Edit Account Screen 1 At the Edit Account screen click the Doctors tab In the Doctors grid click on doctor s Locator ID and Edit Doctors screen will appear 2 At Edit Doctors modify the items that need to be changed 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Doctors screen or all your work will be lost This will return you to the Edit Accounts screen Modifying an Existing Doctor Using List Doctors 1 Click List Doctors Search button table will populate with all of your doctors At List Doctor tab click the accounts Locator ID in the table 2 At Edit Doctors modify the items that need to be changed 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Doctors screen or all your work will be lost Modifying an Existing Doctor Using the Edit Menu 1 At the Menu Bar click Edit then Doctor At the Find Doctor box type in the doctor s Locator ID or use the Select drop down list and click GO 2 At Edit Doctors modify the items that need to be
436. ress i 8 e Address2 Lists second line City State Zip Phoenix Az 85000 Aging 0 to 30 Days of the address on r a0 ae ing 31 to 60 Days e City State Zip Lists the Phone Ext 6025559984 ging y city state and zip in sepa YTD Purchase ___ o0 Aging 61 to 90 Days rate boxes Tax Rate Aging 91 Days 0 00 e Phone Ext Lists the phone number first box and lists the extension number second box e YTD Purchase Lists the value of how much that ac count has purchased year to date e Tax Rate This field adds all the tax rates together for this account to give a single tax rate e Service Charge Percentage Lists the percentage of the service charge that is issued when cases are not paid on time e Credit Limit List the value of the credit limit e Last Paid This field lists the date that the ac count last paid o Service Charges Service Charge Percentage 2 00 Credit Limit 0 00 UnStatemented Payments Total Due bA H w o w oo o e Last Statement Lists the amount that the Account Ledger account owed on the last statement e Current Charges List the amount that the account has been billed for but has not been Monday Novernber 26 2012 Your Company Name Goes issued on a statement Here e Aging 0 to 30 Days The amount of money Account IDMame 0 Dr John Killdare Statement Location owed during the 0 to 30 Days time range Address 2400 E Indian School Address 2400 E India
437. rf 8 1 2 x 11 1 Part Blue Form used with Laser Inkjet and Bubble jet Sub Total Discount Total Tax Total Label Invoice on the left and right sides Lower left has a peel off label and right side has room for a the invoice on the left left and right sides a Your Company Name Invoice Your Company Name Your Address Your Address Your City State Zip Your City State Zip Page 1 Invoice Number 9706 0029 Your Client s Name Your City State Zip Setup Wizard Step 5 Invoice Forms Selection The Easy Report Manager is located at System Control Panel and then Easy Report Menu It is used to change the form style of invoices work tickets and statements Each tab has a dropdown list to tell you if Lab Manager is currently configured to use one of the standard reports for Invoices Statements and Work Tickets You may also change the Report style to a different type l e if the Invoice dropdown displays Invoice LSR and you wish to use the DBL report form you can select Invoice DBL in that dropdown and then click Save Changes If a dropdown is empty it means that Lab Manager is cur rently configured to use a custom style for that category of report If you change a blank dropdown to one of the items in the list and Save Changes you will reapply that stan dard Report style to that type of report Invoice Page 1 Invoice Number 9706 0029 Invoice Date 06 13 1997 Invoice Example
438. rge number of individuals who need access to Lab Manager the assigning process to cecal Rak shorten this is to create a few users with each name representing a group of users Thus reducing the ieee number of users to just a few View Accounts GL Status Group Method Create one name for all managers that have the same access privileges Call this man ager group Manager Define a password Manager Assign Manager to the Manage ment Access Group Group Method Individual Method OR Create one name for all technicians that have the same access privileges Call this See Oe ee eon User technician group Technician Define a password Technician Assign Technician Owner Group C Individual ner Individual to the Management Access Group Owner Individual All managers would log in using the Manager login name and the Technicians would Manager Group ___ nqviual Manager indiviaual log in using the Technician login name Manager Individual Technician Group Individual Technician Individual Individual Technician Individual Individual Data Entry Group C Individual Data Entry Individual Ea Data Entry Individual Delivery Group ndividual Individual Delivery Individual Delivery Individual System Mew Edit List Reports Help a ESENE List Users im E ml m Users LoginName w Fulla me ETA Password Yo AccessGroupl gt w Access Group w HidePatientnformation w HideDoctomwnformation w E a Admi
439. rial Production e Current Fiscal Year A dot in the circle will show data Select Account PE only for the current fiscal year Date Range QO Limit To Current Year Only a 2 Last 12 Months Preview or Print the Yearly Reports See 1 Click on Reports Billing and Year To Date Reports Current Fiscal Year 2 Select a Report Type 3 Select an Account if necessary 5 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Yearly Account Sales Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Account Name Jul Au Se Oct Noy Dec Yearly Total Dr John Smith 0 00 4 018 45 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 4 018 45 Dr George 0 00 900 00 0 00 1 173 24 0 00 0 00 2 073 24 Franks Dr Susan Smith 0 00 2 516 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 2 516 00 Dr Fred Markus 0 00 600 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 600 00 Dr John Killdare 0 00 0 00 0 00 530 04 0 00 0 00 530 04 0 00 8 034 45 0 00 1 703 28 0 00 0 00 9 737 73 Yearly Doctor Sales Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Doctor Name Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Yearly Smith John 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 4 016 45 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 4 018 45 Franks George 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 900 00 0 00 1 175 24 0 00 0 00 2 073 24 Smith Susan 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 2 516 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 2 516 00 Markus Fred 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 600 00 0 00
440. rial Re make Usage 2 Choose a Date Range MTD is the default setting 3 Place a check in the box for the appropriate type of status for the case 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen 1012207 ase ea IMOS GEDE Materials Remake Usage Materials Remake Usage 209 Printer Starting Date Ending Date 09 01 2012 09 30 2012 E In Process o Invoiced E statemented Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray Auto Select custom Omp vD Today Unstateme Report Menu Production Outsourced Cases lt ole a mm a1 0mm ea cele lelerile a Mm continued Outsourced Cases Report System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting General M a j n iY Billing Production Work Tickets Labels This Outsourced Cases Report can be used to track when cases have been outsourced when they need to be returned and when they were returned e Vendor dropdown list Leave the dropdown list blank for all vendors or choose an indi vidual vendor for a report only on them e Account dropdown list Filter the report by account by selecting an account from the list e Locator ID dropdown list Filter the report by account ID by selecting an account ID from the list Account Production Lab Status Marketing Doctors Production YTD Scheduling Product Production 1012207 ase ea IMOS Material Production Material Usage
441. rial screen or all your work will be lost 138 New Menu Materials iris ieee Related Materials Bui Related Materials Tab at Edit Material Screen Sections TABS The Related Materials tab is used to tie selected materials related to another material It will cause any or all Related Material related materials to be added to a case each time the main material is added Example You add Material 1 to a case Lab Manager will automatically add Material 2 and Material 3 to the case because they have been MISC connected using the Related Materials tab Note If a material name is not available in the drop down list under the Related Materialscolumn it will need to be added into the system e Related Material ID dropdown This is a list of current materials p The Image tab allows the user to save an image of the material Aika New Adding a Related Material to a Material 1 At the Edit Materials screen locate the Related Materials tab and then click on the Add New button 2 This will create a new line item in the grid Click on the drop down list under the Related Material ID column and select the material that will be associated with the main material 3 Repeat step 2 until all related materials have been entered 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Materials screen or all your work will be lost Modifying a Related Material on a Material 1 At the Edit Materials screen locate the Related Materials tab 2
442. rials Codes Notes Steps Image Product Codes Products can be given codes to identify them for some special reason Example if your laboratory outsources certain products to another lab you could give those products a code to indicate that they are outsourced This information could be helpful for creating reports if a product is outsourced Note If a new code needs to be added to the product but it is not available in the drop down then it will need to be added at System Codes and then Products Once this has been added it will be available in the drop down list from the Codes tab at Edit Products Also see Edit Product Codes Section e Code drop down This is a list of all current product codes available in the system Adding a Code to a Product 1 At the Edit Products screen click Codes tab then the Add New button 2 This will create a new line item in the grid Click on the dropdown list under the Code column and select the code that will be associated with the main product Repeat step 2 until all codes have been entered 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Products screen or all your work will be lost Modifying Codes on a Product 1 At the Edit Products screen click the Codes tab Find the code in the grid that needs to be modified 2 Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost Deleting a Codes from a Product 1 At the Edit Products screen click the Codes tab Find the code in the
443. rials together for the purpose of making it easier to edit like materials These materials can be grouped by type vendor or any code Simply enter a code a number or word or combination into this field using the same code for each material in the same group Then when editing materials it is easy to sort or filter the material list 3 gt gt enu by this code putting all like materials together in the list manne Control Panel gt Case Entry Accounting Start at System and then click on Codes At Codes you can edit or view mags Admin Tools Vendor l Exit Employee Case Codes Case codes are user definable codes that you can use to categorize cases Example The case code may be used to categorize the case as a remake or a certain type of remake Vendor Codes Vendors can be given codes to identify them for a special reason This information could be helpful for creating reports sorted or filtered by this code E Employee Codes Employees can be given codes to identify them Example Salary Part Time or Hourly T etc This information could be helpful for creating reports sorted or filtered by this code Product Codes Products can be given codes to identify them for a special reason Example If your laboratory outsources certain products to another lab you could give those products a code to indicate that they are outsourced Now an Outsourced Case Report can be created Material Codes Materials can be given codes to i
444. ription Schedule Tooth s 1 Porcelain Gold 1 7 Dr Preferences Use doctors gold Use thin margins Notes rau 5 Upper Arch S K Lf P V aS Dr s Date 4 23 12 Monday Account 1 Dr John Smith 1234 N Anywhere Phoenix AZ 85016 602 555 1234 Setup Wizard Step 5 Work Ticket Forms Selection System New Edit List Reports Help OENE Report Manager 1eg IMOS A a A m 2 A amp Dr s Date Monday Account 1 Case Number 9704 0029 Dr John Smith Dr s Date 04 28 1997 1234 N Anywhere Received 04 15 1997 Phoenix AZ 85016 602 555 1234 Ship by date 04 28 1997 Patient Mueller Qty Product Description Schedule Tooth s 1 Porcelain Gold 1 7 Dr Preferences Use doctors gold DBL DBLBL This prints two differant raees cida hw idea DBL Style Horizontal Perf used with Laser Inkjet and Bubble jet LSR QC Needs carrect deccrintian LSR This prints one raa an the cheet Work Ticket Examples These artist renditions are here to show you the paper styles we support We carry the DBL DBL BL LSR LSR QC TAB LAB forms For more information call the sales department at 800 677 1120 1 Part Blank Form Case Number 9704 0029 Dr s Date 04 28 1997 Case Number 9704 0029 Drs Date 04 28 1997 Use thin margins Notes F A 8 1 2 x 11 S L ID Upper Arch Lower Arch Qy L Y Dr s Date Monday Case Number 9704 0029 Dr s D
445. rk Ticket Tab System Menu Control Panel e e Your Company Name Invoice Your Company Name Invoice Your Address Your Address Your City State Zip Your City State Zip Page 1 Page 1 Invoice Number 9706 0029 Invoice Number 9706 0029 Invoice Date 06 13 1997 Invoice Date 06 13 1997 Patient name John Smith Patient name John Smith Ship By Date 06 20 1997 Shade C2 Your Client s Name a ian C2 ie 1 Your Client s Name Your Address i Your Address Your City State Zip i Your City State Zip DBL Style Horizontal Perf 8 1 2 x11 1 Part Blank Form used with Laser and Inkjet Printers Your Company Name Invoice Invoice Your Address Your City State Zip __ Page 1 Dr John Smith Sub Total 186 20 mio eee ogra vice Number 9706 0029 Discount 0 00 Invoice Date invoice Date 06 13 1967 Total Tax 12 48 Patient name John Smith Total Your Client s Name Your Address Ship By Date 06 20 1997 Your City State Zip Shade C2 Porcelain Gold Argen Y 80 LABEL amp Tab Style With Perfs 8 1 2 x11 1 Part Blue Form used with Laser and Inkjet Printers Sub Total Discount 0 00 Total Tax Upper Arch Quality Control Form 1234 Lower Arch Tooth Chart can be added Overall Fit Individual Fit Proximal Contacts Shnnglatel O Se On Time Patient Satisfied System New Edit List Reports
446. rk box A technician can also be selected to notate which cases they have completed Figure 1 Production Steps Cases Tab From this tab a case can be selected to notate which case a technician worked on so they can get credit for that Figure 2 OENE Case Completion Steps Tab From this tab a step can be selected to notate which step this technician com pleted on a specific case Figure 3 ieg IMyHOYS How Technicians Clock in and Out Techs MENSE Features Coming Soon Choose a Technician then click Select or Cloe 10 8307 ase TechnicianName ClockedIn 1 1 Tom Mueller How To Mark Which Steps Technicians have Completed 1 Click on Reports Scheduling and then Case Completion 2 Click the Select button on the far right to pick a specific technician Figure 1 3 Click the Select button on the far right to pick the case that the technician worked on Figure 2 4 Click the Select button on the far right to select the step Cate that the technician finished Figure 3 5 Once the step has been selected it will disappear from the list and other steps can be marked done System New Edit List Reports Help OENE Case Completion Tech 1 Tom Mueller ieg yNdy0YS Figure 2 Cases Beja Choose a Case then click Select 0002 0002 Smith Margaret Select 0103 0002 Bean Mr 0104 0001 Thather Margaret 0104 0002 Mueller Tom 0104 0003 Nixon Richard 04 25 2001
447. rk ticket and it is also stored on the case Notes for These Notes are printed on the Invoice Invoice beng Notes to a Case On the case that the notes need to be stored click on the Notes tab from the Case Entry screen Click on the Standard Notes tab 3 Notes can be entered in Case Notes Notes for Invoices and Notes for Work Ticket Items can be entered into one section or all sections 4 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost Notes for These Notes are printed on the Work Ticke Work Ticket 4 Multi Notes at Notes Tab at the Case Entry Screen Main DoctorItems Notes Teeth Images Patient Codes Case Codes Case Le The RTF Rich Text File editor is used to enter notes in Lab Manager that can be stored Ree g Multi Notes with the case and or printed on the invoice and work ticket Customize the font and text size Notes RTF This button opens the Rich Text File editor which can be used to type up notes Notes This is just a link to your notes file and should be ignored Invoice Checkbox Place a check in this checkbox to include these notes on the invoice Work Ticket Checkbox Place a check in this checkbox to include these notes on the work ticket e Date Created This field will automatically fill and cannot be changed Invoice Work Ticket Date Created Rich Text Editor Box Marino 1 On the case that the notes need to be stored click on the Notes tab Fil
448. rketing b b Production gt Work Tickets b d Doctors Production YTD b A a A a e A a e Scheduling Product Production Material Production Account Production Filter By Radio Buttons Choose One ee e Case Created Default Setting Place a dot in the circle to filter the report by the date that Case Tracking the case was created Material Reorders e Ship By Date Place a dot in the circle to filter the report by the ship by date listed on the Materials Remake Usage case Doctor Date Place a dot in the circle to filter the report by the doctors date listed on the case Finish Date Place a dot in the circle to filter the report by the finish date listed on the case Invoice Date Place a dot in the circle to filter the report by the date that the case was invoiced Received Date Place a dot in the circle to filter the report by the received date that was entered on the case In Process check box Place a check in the box if you want to filter the report with cases that do not have an invoiced or statemented status The In Process status cannot be used in combination with Invoice Date since it will have no invoiced date Invoice checkbox Default setting Placing a check in this box will show all invoiced cases that match the other criteria e Statemented checkbox Default setting Placing a check in this box will show all statemented cases that match the other criteria System New Ed
449. rly pe and can be sorted by Ship By Date or Doctors Date Step Status Use this report to check the status of steps on a case Product Steps This report lists the product and each scheduling step assigned to that product Production Steps The Production Steps report lists the Steps how many minutes it takes to complete the step the value of the step and how many units can be done per day General Billing ieg IMOS Marketing 1032307 SL Scheduling Case Completion Product Steps Production Steps 224 Reports Menu Scheduling Case Completion AJ ofo acmerogal TelUl aTe MTAL mmm continued Case Completion Report System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting General The Case Completion screen is typically used on a computer in or near easy lab technician access ieg IMOS Billing Production Labels As a technician completes a step they use this screen to mark that they have completed a certain step on a certain case From this information a Technician Production report can be generated Marketing A w A A oe e Scheduling Case Completion Technician Production i i 3 3 i i i Steps Past Due Technicians Time Worked is collected at this screen using the Clock in and Clock out field R Cases To BeFinished Early Step Status Product Steps Tech Tab From this tab technicians can be clocked in and out by placing a check mark box in the Clock In check ma
450. rop down list Once the Dr s name has been selected the Doctors Contact Infor mation boxes to the right will have their address and phone number Verify that it is the correct information You can add new Doctors by clicking on the or see all of them by clicking on the L button to the right of the Dr field e Dr ID drop down list Choose the Doctor ID number from the drop down list Once the Dr s ID has been selected the Doctors Contact Information boxes to the right will have their address and phone number Verify that it is the correct information e Doctors Contact Information boxes Once a doctor has been selected this should show the doctors address and phone number This is the address that appears on the invoice Continued on next page 103 OF TY m AAE continued Main Tab at Case Entry Screen Section Patient Info Part A New Menu Case Patient Use this field to define the name of the patient associated with this case The name can be typed in any way you want however there is an advantage to typing the name in with the last name first Doctor Items Notes Jeeth Images Patient Codes Case Codes Case Level Discount Account Hist Patient O E Flightags W Mark EQ Work Ticket Needs Printing followed by the first name Example Smith John If you use this format then it is easy to create a list of cases that is sorted by ae CH Shade sd patient last name Received 08 08 2012 Start Date 08 08 2012
451. rop down or leave it blank to show all vendors Optional Select an account or account ID to only show cases outsourced for specific account Select the type of date range you want to filter by The Unstatemented Invoice is the default Fill in a date range Select the type of date Outsourcing Due Date Back Default Setting Date Returned Start Date or Invoice Date Select how to sort the report Outsourcing Due Date Back is the default setting If the cases have been statemented place check in Include Statemented Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen CON OD OB WD Outsourced Cases Filtered By Sorted By Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Vendor Phone Case Patient Account Inv Date Prod Mat Start Date Due Returned ODONTO 238 5526 1007 0001 Smith Sandy Dr John Killdare UPPER BITE RIM 1045 2012 LABORATORY SYSTEM GROUF 1 602 264 59131007 0001 Smith Sandy Dr John Killdare 3 4 GOLD CROWN 1016 2012 210 Report Menu Production Quotes lt ole a TALTE ea cece Toii o 1E continued System New Edit List Reports Help Quotes Main Accounting Create Quotes for estimating of cost of products and services to your accounts B General lz Mai sling Production Work Tickets i a Labels Lab Status Please Choose Radio Buttons Choose One ia iain ge ere e All This numerical number is the total of quotes in the system that have not been printed
452. ropdown list Use the dropdown list to get a report during the specified time period for a given account Sort By Radio Buttons Choose one e Account Name Default Setting Placing a dot in the circle will sort the payments on the report in alphabetical order by account e Payment Date A dot in the circle will sort the payments by the payment date Preview or Print the Cash Receipts Report 1 Click on Reports Billing and then Cash Receipts 2 Choose a date range If necessary select an account to only show payments for a specific account 3 Choose how to sort the report 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Cash Receipts Journal Payment Date Between 10 12 2012 And 1042 2012 Main Accounting gt General Production gt Labels gt Marketing gt Scheduling gt Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Tray 0 Starting Date 10 12 2012 Invoices Invoice Register Cash Receipts Current Sales Statements Year To Date Reports Product Sales Material Sales Account Analysis Product Price List Materials Price List Commissions Taxes with Sales FlighTags FlighTags Travel Credits Custom MTD Ending Date 10 12 2012 Today Fiscal YTD Unstatemented Invoices Sort By OdAccount Name oO Payment Date ESS E ES Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Account Name Date Paid Refer
453. rsion 5 5 Professional data click on the Choose File button and use the browse window to locate your data Use the drop down list to choose the database into which the data is to be imported Choose a v6 DB to Import the data INTO 2 Click on the drop down list button and pick the com pany database from the list that was created earlier It should be the only item in the list NOTE If there is no database in the drop down list simply close the server tool and reopen it 3 Click on the Phase 1 button to start the first part of the import process This portion imports everything except cases 4 Optional You can change the starting date to elimi nate very old cases Otherwise Lab Manager will import all of your data by default 5 Click on the Phase 2 button to start importing cases This process can take several minutes to many hours depending on how much data you have to transfer and the speed of your computer When prompted click on the Phase 3 button to continue 6 When importing is done you will see the message Finished You may now close this screen 7 Click on the Close button to exit MessagelD Message Click on the Phase 1 button to begin the first phase of the import Import the 1st Set of Tables hase 1 V Assume USA for address with no Country If you wish to exclude very old cases select a different date range of cases to import Date Range for Case Data Click on the Phase 2 button to complete the
454. rt area on the previous page 4 You will notice that custom reports have a green background color in the drop down list to distinguish them from default reports 5 If you customized a sub report or sub form like the detail area of the invoice be sure to make that substitution on this screen as well 6 Click Save Changes once you have assigned these Editing Sub Forms or Sub Reports Sometimes you need to make changes to a sub form or report such as adding tooth numbers or shade to the product area on the invoice Click on System Control Panel and then Manager Reports Go to the Standard Reports tab This area lists all of the reports and their sub reports Example To modify the detail area of the LSR invoice find it listed in the forth column and then click on the button in the first column LoadDesigner to launch the Invoice Report Filter so that you can click on the Design button to make changes to the sub report 3 When you have finished making your changes be sure to save the sub report using the Save As function and save the report in the Custom Reports folder giving the report a name such as Custom nvoiceDetail 4 Then you can add the new custom report to the list of custom reports as de scribed previously Finally substitute the new custom sub report on the Report Function tab 5 In this case look for Invoice Detail in the center column and select your new detail report in the forth column and save changes 6 Cli
455. rts like accounts products materials etc Billing Monthly billing and receivables reports Production Production and Scheduling only This contains production related reports Label Create sheets of labels for your accounts products materials etc Marketing Create face sheets marketing contacts and follow up reports Scheduling Technician based reports along with cases due and status of production steps in the lab Report Menu Accounting System New E Reports Help This group of reports includes two versions of the Aged Trial Balance report a Collec ease SSS tions report the General Journal Taxes Collected and the Taxes By Collector report ae Ba ao The first Aged Trial Balance report includes detailed aging information where as the Main Mi bimn Collections Aged Trial Bal Short report does not include the detailed aging en General Journal Labels Tax Reports ieg yNd 0yNs Marketing Account History 10 2307 ase Aged Trial Balance Short This style of the Aged Trial Balance is similar to the same reports in Lab Manager Professional This report can be printed at any time Account Ledger to summarize each of the doctor s accounts The report shows the total of any payments made current charges 30 60 and 90 day past due balances etc Aged Trial Balance This report can be printed at any time to summarize each of the doctor s accounts The report shows the total of any payments made current charg
456. ry 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen This report includes e Account ID e Account Name ieee pais Aged Trial Balance e Last Statement Balance Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here e Amount of Over Payment Acct ID AccountName LastPaid LastStmt Over Paid Current Payments 0to30 31to60 61to9 I SC Due e Current Invoiced Charges Dental Laboratory 374 42 0 00 90 00 000 374 42 90 00 0 00 374 42 e Payments Dr Susan Smith 2 442 85 0 00 0 00 2 442 85 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 e Oto 30 Days Field Dr George Franks 400 00 000 1173 24 400 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 i 1 173 24 e 31 to 60 Days Field Dr John Kildare 175 24 0 00 530 04 200 00 154 50 e 61 to 90 Days Field e 91 Day Field e Service Charges S C e Amount Due e Totals for all Fields Continued on next page 158 Report Menu Accounting Aged Trial Balance Short lt olola mm sale mm Cexevel bial diate Mm continued System New Edit List Reports Help Existing Job Tab DEDE ATB 2 Report e ATB 2 Job Drop Down List Select a an item from the drop down list to Aqed Trial Balance 2 See a previously viewed Aged Trial Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Tray 0 Balance e Delete Job Button Click this but ton to delete an ATB Job from the drop down list Re Mieweeeieme Existing Jobs 11 27 2012 5 21 46 AM 11 27 2012 5 21 08 AM 10 12 2012 9 31 29 AM 10 12 2012 9 30 41 AM 10 12 2012 9 27 01 AM 10 12 201
457. s SSe TaN aalala lke mm Koo owe continued i System New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel Master Config at Admin Tools Case Entry Production No modification needed on this screen Make sure that the Allow Workstations To Auto Config check box is checked enu Calendar Accounting Codes System New Edit List Reports Help ZENE Master Config Admin Tools Excise Tax Log Access Groups Workstations Master Config 1eg IMOS Master Config Users Special Tools Run Aging 10 2307 ase View Accounts GL Status E4 Allow Workstations To Auto Config Helpful Blue Text Will Be Here Soon System Menu Administrator Tools Users Tab System New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel Case Entry Production The term User typically refers to an individual but user can also refer to a group of individuals Deter enu mines how an individual is granted or denied access to areas in Lab Manager Calendar Accounting Codes To Start set up process go to Access Groups set up first Admin Tools Excise Tax Log Individual Method To grant access to an individual first assign he she to an Access Group Owner Access Groups mgr etc then assign them a User name their name Each individual can have their own login name Workstations and password and each person needs to be assigned to an Access Group Master Config If there is a la
458. s These artist renditions are here to show you the paper styles we support We carry the DBL DBL BL LSR LSR QC TAB LAB forms For more informa tion call the sales department at 800 677 1120 Patient name John Smith Ship By Date 06 20 1997 Shade C2 Tooth Chart can be added Sub Total Discount 0 00 Total Tax Total Your Company Name 7 7 Your Address Invoice Invoice Your City State Zip aa age Dr John Smith Invoice Number 9706 0029 i Invoice Date 06 9 1997 Invoice Number 9706 0028 Invoice Date 06 13 1997 Patient name John Smith Your Client s N Your Address Ship By Date 06201967 Your City State Zip Shade C2 Porcelain Gold Argen Y 80 LABEL amp Tab Style with Perfs 8 1 2 x 11 1 Part Blue Form used with Laser Inkjet and Bubble jet Sub Total 186 20 Discount 0 00 Total Tax 12 48 Total 198 68 Quality Control Form Overall Fit Individual Fit Proximal Contacts Shipping Label a Pontic Design Polish Shade Glaze Rx followed n Time Patient Satisfied 24 Step 5 Forms Selection Use this section to select a pre designed work ticket style Choose a paper form from the drop down list The basic styles are listed to the right Dr s Date Monday Account 1 Case Number 9704 0029 Dr John Smith Dr s Date 04 28 1997 1234 N Anywhere Received 04 15 1997 Phoenix AZ 85016 602 555 1234 Ship by date 04 28 1997 Patient Mueller Qty Product Desc
459. s O Vendor Material Codes WAE RAELA E TELE La Material Codes MaterialCodeID Price 0 00 Reorder Level i Reorder Quantity Gl Composition Notes for Cases WS Discountable B Invisible HB Hazardous Taxable BB Allow Remake Discount Use this screen to define your billable materials such as gold teeth and attachments BB Allow Commission At the Menu Bar click New then Material At the Edit Material screen type in the Material Name under description Define the Unit Type by using the drop down list Example Each DWT Pennyweight etc In the Cost field type in the cost for this material in the units you SELL the material in In the In Stock field type the quantity that is in the lab of the material In the Markup field type in a markup percentage This will take the information from cost and calculate the price according to the markup percentage Use the drop down list for Department and assign this material to a department Place a check in the Discountable check box if this material is allowed to be discounted Place a check in the Taxable check box if this is a taxable material Review all other fields and check boxes to see if they apply to your lab 0 Click Save New on the Edit Material screen or all your work will be lost Adding a New Material oRWND O N Modifying a Material Using List Materials 1 Click List Materials then the Search button ta
460. s Copy 1 Tray 0 Preview or Print the Materials List Report 2 1 Click on Reports General and then Materials List 2 Choose a Date Retired option Active Only is the Date Retired ignore Retire default setting O Active Only 3 Choose how to sort the report Material Description is the default setting 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Sort By Material ID O Material Description Note If the Ignore option is selected both active and re tired materials will show up on the report me Preven eign aoe Close This report includes e Material Locator ID Materials List e Material Description Sorted By Material Description e Material Department Filtered By DateRetired is Blank e Material Units Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Locator ID Description Department Units 5 1X6 BB IPN HRD ANT Billing Set 7 1X6 BB PLAST ANTER Billing Set 8 1X6 BF IPN HAR ANT Billing Set 10 1x6 BF PLAST ANTER Billing Set 15 1X6 SLR VAC FIR AN Billing Set 19 1X8 BF IPN 20 POST Billing Set 18 1X8 BF IPN 30 POST Billing Set 17 1X8 BF IPN 33 POST Billing Set 20 1X8 BF IPN ANL POS Billing Set 21 1X8 BF IPN MNL POS Billing Set 26 1x8 BF PLST 20 POS Billing Set 16 1X8 BS IPN POSTER Billing Set 32 1x8 BT BLD 33 POST Denture Set 33 1X8 BT FUNCT POST Denture Set 35 1X8 BT RAT BLCK PT Denture Set 34 1X8 BT RATION POST Denture Set 38 1x8 CLASSICS Denture Set 36 1X8 DNT 20 POSTER Denture Set 31 1X8 NH
461. s then the Search button The grid will list all of your accounts 2 Click the Account Name in the table of the account you wish to edit 3 At Edit Account modify the items that need to be changed 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Account screen or all your work will be lost 150 List Menu Doctors amp Payments List Menu Doctors Doctors at List Menu i System New Edit List Reports Help Cases Accounts The many List screens are used to view a list of items or locate information The list might contain all of the items or it might be limited to just a few of the available items ieg IMOS Doctors Payments Products Example At the List Doctors screen in the search area using no search criteria will give you a list containing ALL doctors in the system On the other hand in the search screen if you search for all doctors with a specific address then the list will display only doctors with that address See the Navigation Tools section that covers searching and sorting in the List Menu Materials Case Completion bhJe207 ase New Edit List Reports Help 3 System System New Edit List Reports Help OENE List Doctors search IB ShowRetired E showsq W Marked Oand or Oand or Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Search Field 3 Last Name CO rower ase es IMOS LocatoriD Y AcountName Y Title VY FirstName vY LastName Y E ey CASH ACCOUNT CA
462. s Travel Credits e Unstatemented Place a dot in the circle the system will fill in the start and end date for cases that have not yet been statemented Example Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want the date range of current unstatemented cases to start with the first unstatemented case dated 8 5 12 The system will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today System New Edit List Reports Help GENE Material Sales Report Material Sales Preview or Print the Material Sales Report Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 ieg IMOS 1 Click on Reports Billing and then Material Sales 2 Choose a date range 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen 1032907 ase Starting Date 99 94 2012 custom QOUnstateme nD Ending Date 09 21 2012 O YTD Today Fiscal YD ES Es ES Material Sales Filtered By Between 10 12 2012 AND 10 12 2012 Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Material Qty Sold Amount Sold Average ARGEN 77 2 0000 37 66 ERA ATTACHMENT OV 12 5000 441 00 GOLDIGATE ARGEN 72 4 2500 6 04 Totals 18 7500 534 70 189 aX oleae mi CaO Mm md ale mm Continued Account Analysis Report Report Menu Billing Account Analysis System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting Main The Account Analysis Report shows dollar amount billed out per account for a specific time period plus it shows the av
463. s box and click OK When the program opens click on the Server Menu then on Setup New Lab Manager Click on the Server Menu then on Backup A Company DB Select your com pany name or database name that you wish to backup Step 4 If you have any Custom Reports or Images in Lab Manager click on Backup Associated Files after backing up your data Step 4 Choose your location to save this and click Save When the progress bar shows 100 the backup is complete The grid will note when it has been completed Step 5 14 re COMPLETED Backup of DB TESTDENT_LMDB to E TESTDENT_LMDBO4_Nov_2010_0364 se UDISK E BOOTEX LOG My Flscadk iE Documents e Thumbs db Desktop ocuments T My Computer fi My Network Places File name Save as type Sy TESTDENT _ LMDB04_Nov_2010_08_43_36 bak Server Tools EEEE TO ST a am Keke mm continued Restore a Company DB Data Base WARNING DO NOT double click on your backup to review your data as this may corrupt your backup Clear Logged In Users la Upgrade Server Create New Company Database This function is used to restore or replace the current database with one that was backed up previ ously Restoring a database will erase all data in your current database and replace it ee Reset Admin Password with the data being restored Tool Import
464. s company File Rock Castle Construction any time even if QuickBooks is not running Access rights Read and modify QuickBooks data finchuding personal data Enhance the QuickBooks user interface System New Edit List Reports View Help Misc Quickbooks Interface Config Quickbooks Interface Configuration Gy Select Your Bank Account from the list of Quickbooks General Ledge Penk Ong _ E 3 Click the Close button at the bottom of the form Click the Create Suggested QB Accounts button Create Suggested OB Accounts WARN N G WE DO NOT RECOMMEND changing the Ex Click the Close button at the bottom of the fom tended tab within the Configuration Screen unless you are advised to by the Laboratory Systems Group Support Department 1 2 3 72 System Menu Control Panel SME Can cae Ore alge Marl as fm continued System New Edit List Reports Help Toolbar Control Panel Company Preferences and Settings To reactivate the Toolbar in the event that it has closed Case Entry Easy Report Manager Production Employees E 1 click on System Control Panel and then Toolbar co ioe 2 When the menu item is clicked it will not open the Toolbar but it should be made available to eun 9 habia loa mouse over towards the top of Lab Manager a S z Admin Tools Shortcut Bar Exit ShortCut Menu Items Show All Dock Bars Manage Reports QuickBooks Interface Toolbar Case Locator View Eas
465. s to look for a case choose one of the following e Type in the Case Number with all the numbers and the dash Example 1201 0001 e Type in the Pan Number or choose the pan number from the drop down list e Type in the Patient name or choose the name from the drop down list Click on Go to be taken to the case Click Reset if you want to clear the information on the screen and do a new search en Click Refresh if a user on a different workstation adds a case or updates an existing case clicking the Refresh button will refresh it all to include that new updated data 6 Move your mouse away from the Case Locator and it will slide back to the left OAO Refresh 38 Navigation Tools Multitasking Perform multiple jobs or tasks simultaneously without closing screens or exiting System New Edit list Reports Help eh ee Ce he List Payments Edit Payments Call Tracking Search gt Nii aah ee This screen shows 4 jobs or tasks running simultaneously Each of the tabs represents a task that you have started Example You are logging in a case when the phone rings The caller is a doctor who wants to pay their bill using a credit card Without closing the case screen using the menu bar at the top of the screen click on New then Payments and enter the payment When you have finished entering the payment and saved it that task along with its tab will close You can move from one task to another simply by clickin
466. s with the current date e Fiscal YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year System New Edit List Reports Help e Unstatemented A dot in the circle will fill in the start and end NEM Steps Past Due Report date for cases that have not yet been statemented Example Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want the date range of current unstatemented cases to start with first unstatemented case dated 8 5 12 The system will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today e Include Statemented checkbox Place a check in the box to include steps from cases that have been statemented Steps Past Due Cases Due Cases To BeFinished Early Step Status Product Steps Production Steps Steps Past Due Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray Auto Select 1018207 ase ea IMOS Depart ment Preview or Print the Steps Past Due Report a e aa Click on Reports Scheduling and then Steps Past Due ina Aig Choose a Department if necessary E Choose a Date Range MTD is the default setting Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Hl Include statemented hae ade la Steps Past Due Tuesday November 27 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Case Account Status Pan Patient Product Step Qty Dept 1 Crown and Bridge 1211 0004 2 test for scheduling production step 1 0000 test Case Total 1 Dept Total 1 Dept 2 Dent
467. screen you search for all cases for a given account then the list will display only cases for that doctor Accounts Doctors ieg IMOS Payments Products Materials Case Completion 10 8307 ase e See the Navigation Tools section that covers searching and sorting in the List Menu e See the New Cases to add new cases Vendors Marketing Contacts c ps es i System New Edit List Reports Help System New Edit List Reports Help Oand or Oand or E Show Retired E showsq E Marked A 9 Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Search Field 3 Z Etien Official status 5 as Function Function Function a oti J not eauare 6 ee eg li eg n CaseNumber VY Patient Y AccountName Y OfficialStatus Y UserStatus Y In O p 1212 0001 Lee Brian CASH ACCOUNT Open A M E Add a New Case at the List Menu 1 At the Menu Bar click List Cases then the Add New at the bottom of the screen 2 For full instructions see the Case Entry section of this manual Search for an Existing Case at the List Menu 1 At the Menu Bar click List then Cases 2 Search for the case you are looking for or click Search for a complete list of cases 3 Click on the Case Number of the case you wish to edit or view This will take you to the case List Menu Accounts System New Edit List Reports Help Accounts at List Menu The many List scr
468. se Remake entry screen Here you will see a list of the existing case codes To select one or more codes place a Open check mark inside the Selected check box Closed e Description This field contains the names of the existing case codes Finished e Date Retired This field shows the date that this patient code was deleted anise e Selected Use this field to select the desired codes by placing a check in the desired box es TEN Adding a Case Code to a Case 1 On the case that needs to have a case code selected click on Case Codes tab from the Case Entry screen 2 Place a check in the box under the Selected column to notate which case codes apply to this case Multiple Items can be selected 3 Click Save Changes on the case to save the changes Dr Prefs Tab at the Case Entry Screen ase Entry This screen is Read Only Preferences cannot be added to cases accounts or doctors from this screen l as a a ee Dr Pets SEE Doctor Preferences are notes to remind you or a technician that this doctor pre a a fers a process done in a way that you may not normally perform it These doctor Dept BLSisLence preferences appear on the work ticket and in case entry Note Dr Preferences MISC Please trim margins only appear in this area if the Dr preferences have been assigned MISC See Account before shipping e Dept This is the department that the Doctor Preference is assigned to e Preference This is the
469. see buttons to increase or decrease the year Stick Pin Clicking on the small Stick Pin in the upper right corner of the Shortcut Bar or Case Locator will lock the bar into place Clicking on the Stick Pin again will unlock the bar and allow it to slide away when not in use If the Shortcut bar ever gets closed or disappears you can go to Sys tem Control Panel and Show All Dock Bar or bring the bar back by either closing Lab Manager and then restarting it When the Shortcut Bar is locked open using the Stick Pin the bar can be dragged to another location in the program x Little Black X The little black X toward the top right corner of Lab Manager v7 will close the specific tab that is displayed 39 Control Buttons Add New Boffo x Close on Save or m1 qu a rE DeInvoice Export To PDF Export To Excel Find Search Load Financial Z 0 z D cr E JB B obbGB oad Follow Ups New Product Print Quote Run Aging Save Changes Save and New Transfer Data Navigation Tools These control buttons are found throughout the program Add Button This button can be used to add new items of this type to your list Add New This button creates a new Account Doctor Product Material Case etc Cancel If you accidentally erase or change something on a screen and if you haven t saved the accidental changes just click the Cancel button to cancel the changes Clear
470. selec Product Production Material Production e Individual Case drop down Use the drop down list to select a specific quote to print Account Production Material Usage Cases ata Glance Case Tracking ES Quotes Report Material Reorders Materials Remake Usage Quotes Outsourced Cases Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Quotes Daily Delivery List Delivery Report Please Choose AII 1 Olndividual Case 1212 9001 Helpful Blue Text Will Be Here Soon Preview or Print Quotes 1 Click on Reports Production and a aa ES ES 2 Select from All or Individual Case 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Your Company Name Goes Here Your Company Address Goes Here Your City State and ZIP Goes Here Case 1112 0001 Inv Date Dr George Franks 728 5 E 60 TH Shade A2 Phoenix Az 85000 Ship Via Account ID 2 Dr George Franks Patient Smith John Qty Products Materials Unit Price Unit Disc Item Disc Amount 1 00 3 4 GOLD CROWN 100 00 0 00 0 00 100 00 0 00 100 00 Tax Amount City Phoenix 1 50 County Maricopa 5 00 State Arizona 5 00 Total Tax 11 50 Quote Total 111 50 211 Report Menu Production Daily Delivery List lt olola Tal Mm ea cece Toii ol 1E continued System New Edit List Reports Help Daily Delivery List Report 2 Main Accounting The Daily Delivery Report lists cases to be
471. select a country The United States and Canada are at the top of the list e Contact This is the name of the person to Send Statements to this Address m County United States Route Address Address2 FAX Number Days Open contact at the doctor s location TaxCategoy EQ PlaceHoldertaxable ss HEHEEEES GB e Phone with Ext Optional Used to store Non TexCategonr El PlacetolderNon Table M T Wh F Sa Su the phone number to this location e Phone 2 with Ext Optional Additional phone and extension number e Fax Number Optional Used to define the _ Save New Add New account s fax number e Tax Category Use this field to select a Tax Category if you have one This applies if you charge tax on some items and not others Items that you charge tax on should be assigned to a valid tax category The default tax collectors need to be set up at Systems Control Panel Com pany Preferences and Settings at the Accounts Default tab e Non Tax Category Use this field to select a Non Tax Category if you have one Items you do not charge tax on are assigned to this Non Tax Category The default tax collectors need to be set up at Systems Control Panel Company Preferences and Settings at the Accounts De fault tab e Send Invoices to this Address check box This box needs to be checked if invoices are sent to this address e Send Statements to this Address check box This box needs to be checked if st
472. set Admin Password Import v5 Data Backup a Company DB Restore a Company DB Server Tool Config Delete a Company DB Change License Aging Scheduler Misc Admin Tools Copy Database Attach Company DB 7 Click Close when you are finished Misc Admin istrator Tools This area is Read Only and is only used for diagnostic purposes Eal Tool Use Miscellaneous Administration Tools 1 Right click on the Server Tool icon Left click on Run As or Run As Administrator If Run As is used you should see a check box with the text of Protect my computer and data from unauthorized program activity 3 Uncheck this box and click OK When the program opens click on the Server Menu then on Setup New Lab Manager Click on the Server Menu then on Misc Admin Tools This is just a list and cannot be edited Click Close to exit out a Server Help Misc Tools Status Messages Message Checking for Orphaned SQL Agent Steps MessagelD This screen performs a set of automatic diagnostic procedures and attempts appropnate fixes ee tup New Lab Manager Clear Logged In Users Upgrade Server Create New Company Database Reset Admin Password Import v5 Data Backup a Company DB Restore a Company DB Server Tool Config Delete a Company DB Change License Aging Scheduler Misc Admin Tools Copy Database Attach Company DB DateOfMess
473. show on the work ticket e Set Close on Save or Cancel to True on all applicable forms Main Form Background Image e Checked Place a check in the box to have the program automati cally close the current tab screen when you click Save Unchecked If there is no check in the box the user will have to click Exit after they have clicked Save to close the tab screen e Remember Login Place a check the box to remember the login information Warning Only check Remember Password if you have NO un secured employees e Show Group By Area on Grids Place a check in the box to allow data to be filtered within grids e Ask New Statement Questions Place a check in the box to pop up a reminder box prior to creating a statement job to print and review your reports We recommend this be left checked e Default Auto Complete Mode Suggest Append This is our recommended setting which allows you to start typing into a field and it automatically finds anything with that specific combination of characters and displays them for you Suggest Append None Default e Default Auto Suggest Filter Mode e Contains This is our recommended setting which in combination with Auto Complete Mode allows you to find what you are typing as specified in Auto Complete Mode The Contains feature will find a word or part of word in the list Starts With Use when you want to match the beginning of a word or words Default e Most Recently Used MRU
474. sing and releasing the ALT button and then pressing the letter that is un derlined on the menu bar to open that menu The arrow keys can also be used to access menu items once the Menu Bar is selected Buttons Buttons on the screen can be pressed using the key board by holding down the ALT key while at the same time pressing the letter on the keyboard corresponding to the underlined letter on the button For example to save any changes you make to information on the screen you can press ALT and S or you can simply click on the Save Changes button with the mouse Doctor Date EB October 2006 J Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 ME 24 25 26 237 2 29 30 3 1 23 4 Today 10 23 2006 Bold Fields When setting up accounts products materials etc it is important that you define the fields that are BOLD The BOLD fields are required Date Fields Throughout Lab Manager you will find fields to enter dates in Dates can be typed into the field using your keyboard or you can click on the drop down list button to the right of the date field to pop up a small calendar The calendar can be used to select the date you want by simply clicking on it Buttons are provided in the upper portion of the calendar to move forward and backward in time Also if you if you click on the Month you will get a list of months to choose from or if you click on the year you will
475. sourced Cases Quotes Daily Delivery List Delivery Report System New Edit List Reports Help GEDE Material Usage Report ieg myu Material Usage Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Preview or Print the Material Usage Report 0017 ase 1 Click on Reports Production and then Material Us eee diag O Unstateme MTD age Ending Date 99 21 2012 yp 2 Choose a Date Range roday 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Fiscal yD This report lists e Each Material with Starting Inventory Quantity e Quantity Sold for the Month e The Cost of Materials Sold e Sales e Profit e Current Inventory Level e The Inventory Value Materials Usage Your Company Name Goes Here Friday October 12 2012 Profit 04 24 3 02 Current 11 0000 15 7500 31 0000 25 0000 99 0000 86 5000 87 0000 466 0000 455 0000 9 0000 9 0000 6 0000 0 0000 9 0000 9 0000 9 0000 9 0000 9 0000 6 0000 Sold 2 0000 4 2500 Sales 07 66 6 04 Inventory 18 81 11 18 16 74 12 75 2 682 90 2 422 00 2 496 90 11 650 00 29 575 00 235 35 99 00 6 00 0 00 21 60 138 15 113 40 119 25 117 00 101 20 Reserve 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Locator ID Description ARGEN 77 GOLD GATE ARGEN 72 JCB ARGEN 63 OLY ARGEN 45 1
476. ss Of Date ample Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want the date range of Sine roate current unstatemented cases to start with the first unstatemented case dated 8 5 12 The system will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today Status Tab Optional Starting Date 03 01 2012 custom Unstateme m nm e User Status drop down list This is a list of user statuses that can be Ending Date Orn defined at System Codes and User Status These would have to be Today assigned to a case before you can sort in this area with these e Official Status drop down list This is a list that cannot be modified Bil Exclude Cases with Delivered Date The options are none Open Invoiced or Statemented e Exclude Cases with Delivered Date check box Place a check in the box if you do not want cases that had a delivered date to show up on the report System New Edit List Reports Help ele a E aG Cases Glance Report Cases At A Glance Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 ea IMOS Preview or Print the Cases at a Glance Report Date Range Status 1 Click on Reports Production and then Cases at a Glance 2 On the Date Range tab select what type of date range you want to 1018207 ase filter by The default setting is to show all regardless of the date User Status 3 Choose a Date Range if necessary 4 On the Status tab select what type of cases will show up on the Official Status
477. ssagelD Message DateOfMessage Attempting to Start DTC Service a part of the Operating System necessary for the import process 08 27 2012 2 Successfully Started DTC Service 08 27 2012 import process This portion imports everything except cases 4 Optional You can change the starting date to elimi nate very old cases Otherwise Lab Manager will im port all of your data by default 5 Click on the Phase 2 button to start importing cases This process can take several minutes to many hours depending on how much data you have to transfer and the speed of your computer When prompted click on the Phase 3 button to continue 6 When importing is done you will see the message Finished You may now close this screen 7 Click on the Close button to exit You can now exit the Server Tools program by clicking on the X in the upper right corner of the screen Server Tools Description and Features of the Lab Manager Server 14 Lab Manager Too h Server Help Server E a This process is only done on a server or a single computer LM 7 Server Skip this page and the rest of the setup if you are installing this Lab Lo Manager on a Workstation The only thing that needs to be installed on a workstation is the program The server tools are not needed on a workstation Server Help Setup New Lab Manager Clear Logged In Users Upgrade Server Create New Company Database Reset Admin
478. st have a NAME defined here otherwise no calls will be allowed to be logged Name Al Address2 61 System Menu Control Panel SAARNA Ore al ige N at li mm continued se Call Tracking Continued 2 Search Criteria Name Phore Name casH ac section Search Area E OAaccounts Marketing Contacts aiieieo Address Select Search Type Radio Buttons Choose One M ee e Search Criteria Type the name or account ID number of the item you are 11 Dental Laboratory a CSZ Phoenix searching for based on the search criteria you have selected gt 3 Dr Susan Smith nnn Phone e Accounts Place a dot in the circle to specify that you are searching for some aaki thing in the accounts area Choose one Accounts or Marketing Contacts If you choose accounts it will not search marketing contacts e Marketing Contacts Place a dot in the circle to specify that you are searching Who Is On field Reg for something out of the marketing area If you choose marketing contacts it will eva le not search accounts e Name Place a dot in the circle to search by typing part or all of a name oo e Phone Place a dot in the circle to search by typing part or all of a phone number e Address Place a dot in the circle to search by typing part or all of an address e ID Place a dot in circle to search by typing part or all of a Locator ID e Name This box will provide a list of accounts or marketing contacts that have been found by sear
479. st of workstations that can access this database Master Config Users A user is usually an individual but it can be a description representing a group of individuals Example Set up a User for each person who needs to access Lab Manager Each person can have their own login name and password and each person needs to be assigned to an Access Group Special Tools Run Aging View Accounts GL Status Excise Tax Log Coming Soon 94 Control Panel gt Case Entry Production Calendar Accounting Codes Admin Tools Excise Tax Log Access Groups Workstations Master Config Users Special Tools Run Aging View Accounts GL Status System New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel Case Entry Production Calendar Accounting Codes Admin Tools gt Excise Tax Log Access Groups Workstations Master Config Users Special Tools Run Aging View Accounts GL Status System Menu Admin Tools SSe meCelalialeciig lie mm Koe ows continued Access Groups at Admin Tools ee eaaa aat ete PASSWORD PROTECTED SECURITY SYSTEM Keeps sensitive data secure and away from unauthorized individuals You get complete protection by controlling the access of an individual or a group of individuals When setting up the passwords every one of Lab Manager s menu items can be individually allowed or restricted thus giving you total customized sec
480. st that was created earlier It should be the only item in the list NOTE If there is no database in the drop down list simply close the server tool and reopen it 2 3 4 5 6 gt Server Help Import v5 Data Lab Manager Server Tool Server Help Setup New Lab Manager Clear Logged In Users Upgrade Server Create New Company Database O Reset Admin Password Import 5 Data Backup a Company DB LM 5 aerver Tool Restore a Company DB Server Tool Config Delete a Company DB Change License Select the Version 5 database that is to be imported if it is not already shown here Choose a v5 Database to Import Data FROM Choose File Use the drop down list to choose the database into which the data is to be imported Choose a v6 DB to Import the data INTO Click on the Phase 1 button to begin the first phase of the import Import the Ist Set of Tables Phase 1 V Assume USA for address with no Country If you wish to exclude very old cases select a different date range of cases to import Date Range for Case Data Click on the Phase 2 button to complete the 2nd phase in the import process Import the Case Data Phase 2 Click on the Phase 3 button to complete the 3rd phase in the import process 3 Click on the Phase 1 button to start the first part of the Create the 30 60 90 Day Statement PE Status Messages Me
481. stem Codes ere and then Employee Calendar The Edit Employee Code screen allows you to define information about your employee codes A Accounting e Employee Code ID This is the ID that the system automatically assigns to the Employee Code Case e Description This is the name of the Employee Code Admin Tools Rennie e Date Retired This is the date that the Employee Code has been retired deleted Exit mae e Show Retired This checkbox is used to show the retired Employee Codes in the list If the retired codes E are not showing checkmark the box and it will add in the retired codes T Marketing Add Additional Employee Codes patient 1 Click on System Codes and then Employee ieee 2 At the Edit Employee Codes screen click on Add New button at the bottom of the screen 3 In the new line item in the grid under the Description column type the name of the Employee Code 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until all new employee codes have been entered 5 You do not have to type a Employee Code ID as an ID will be assigned automatically when the f EAEG Employee Code Choices changes have been saved 6 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Edit Em ployee Codes Modify Existing Employee Codes E Show Retired 1 Click on System Codes and then Employee Employee Code Choices 2 At the Edit Employee Codes screen click on and modify the name under the Description column EmploveeCodelD niai DateRetired 3 Click Save at the bot
482. sts and reports e Days Open The days open section is used to mark which days the doctor s office is open This is helpful when the doctor closes on a specific day of the week Example This location is closed Friday Saturday and Sunday so there would only be check marks in M T W Th boxes 121 New Menu Account NEAL Ea mae exerelUlai continued Enter a New Account Location 1 Click List Accounts then the Search button table will populate with all of your doctors Click on the Account Name in the table of the ac count you wish to add a location to At the Edit Account screen click on the Account Locations tab then the Add Location button Type in the location name address and contact information Under Tax Category and Non Tax Category select the type of tax rates need to be charged to this account In the Send Invoices to this Address check box and Send Statements to this Address check box select if this address is for invoices and or if this address is for statements by placing a check in the box if you have more than one location All other fields are optional 7 Click Save New or all the work will be lost oR W DY O Edit Delete an Existing Account Location 1 Click List Accounts then the Search button table will populate with all of your doctors Click on the Account Name in the table of the ac count you wish to edit At the Edit Account screen click on the Account Locations tab t
483. t 2 Choose how to sort the report Department is the omni default setting Doctor 3 Optional Select an Account or a Doctor from the drop down list 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen 1038207 ase s IMOS This report includes e Account ID Name Doctor Preference List e Dr ID Name Sorted By e Department Friday September 21 2012 LSG Prod New e Dr Preferences Acct ID Name Dr ID Name Department Preferences CASH ACCOUNT CASH ACCOUNT Please trim margins See Account before shipping 177 Reports Menu General Marketing Calls Assigned List aXe elem cm cae mel Jal le l continued Marketing Calls Assigned To Report i System New Edit List Reports Help 3 Accounting This report prints the Calls Assigned To everyone or an individual Between a Specific General Accounts Time Period or what has been Marked Finished 5 Billing Doctors Production Products Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One Labels mr e Starting Date Field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in o Employees the date in MM DD YYYY format Scheduling Departments e Ending Date Field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in Vendors the date in MM DD YYYY format Doctor Preferences e Use Date Range check box Optional Place a check in the box to use the date Calls Assigned To range listed in the start and end date fields Account Exp Date Reminders e Custom Place a dot in
484. t 4 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Helpful Blue Text Will Be Here Soon Close on Save or save changes conse xH 81 system Menu Accounting System Menu Accounting Syscem New Edit List Reports Help Start at System and then click on Accounting At Accounting you can edit or view Control Panel Case Entry e Tax Collectors Tax Jurisdictions If you charge tax in your laboratory you MUST define your Tax Collectors Tax Jurisdictions and tax rates These are simply the names of the organizations that you pay taxes to such as State of Arizona City of Phoenix City of Mesa Maricopa County etc e Tax Rates If you charge tax you need to define the actual tax percentages rates e Tax Categories If you charge tax you also need to define one or more tax categories These can be geographic or categories that require different tax rates such as Business Residential or Non Profit If your city charges the same tax rate for all categories then you need only one tax category If there is a different rate for Profit and Non profit Organizations then you should define those different categories so that Lab Manager will Know what to charge for each Production enu Calendar Accounting Tax Collectors Codes Tax Rates Admin Tools Tax Categories Exit Invoice Terms e Invoice Terms Invoice Terms or Billing Terms are the terms you offer your accounts Collectors Categories Example If you o
485. t prints on the invoice 4 When you are finished click Save Changes all your work will be lost 5 Click the Close button at the bottom of the screen to return to the List Cases screen System New Edit List Reports Help Search Oand or Search Field 3 Oand or Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Invoice Date Ce eo List Menu Invoices amp Dr Account Locations Function Function Primary Value 09 12 2012 Secondary Value 09 12 2012 powa asez a IMOS Primary Value Primary Value System Mew Edit List Reports Help Elie List Invoices ANH 1208 0002 oJ asez es Jmus Function E show sai Patient BLx2 G SCOTT wo InvoiceDate 08 01 2012 LSG Prod New System New Edit List Reports Help DEDERIS na Edit Invoices Edit Invoices Case Numb Invoice Date MJIS D 1032307 SL p earan Invoice Terms EJ Invoice Needs Printing EJ Invoice Label Needs Printing 156 ieg yNdy0YUS A amp A A oe mp x Close on Save or System New Edit List Reports Help Cases Accounts Doctors Payments Products Materials Case Completion Vendors Marketing Contacts Statements Invoices Report Menu Report Menu Categories The following the major categories of the report menu Accounting This contains all accounting based reports General This contains repo
486. t Dr Prefs Department Preference DateRetired Accom Adding a Doctor Using EmelAdiess __ the New Tab sh Da sheng 1 At System Bar click New then Doctors Pes iba 2 In the Doctors grid click on doc at Ss tor s Locator ID and Edit Doctors lc screen will appear a 3 At Edit Doctors modify the items elias that need to be changed Helpful Blue Text Will Be Here Soon a 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Doctors screen or all your work will be lost Mm IIs a For New Users Only Enter Starting Balances Entering Starting Balances At accounts if this account has an existing balance click the Starting Balance button at accounts to define that amount 31 eum Optional setup Wizard Step 9 Vendors Vendors are companies from which you purchase materials This information is integrated with Lab Manager s inventory control system so that it can notify you when materials need to be reordered and from whom you normally purchase them Vendors can be given codes to identify them for creating reports sorted or filtered by this code Note If a material code is not available in the drop down then it will need to be added at System Codes and then Vendors Once this has been added it will be available in the drop down list at Edit Vendors Also see Edit Vendor Codes section System New Edit List Repo elp DENEAN Edit Vendors 1eg jNDy0YUS Edit Ve ndors Vendor Codes a Adding a Code to a Ven
487. t Reports Help Materials Price List Report 1012207 ase ea IMOS Preview or Print the Material Price List Report 1 Click on Reports Billing and then Material Price List 2 Choose a Date Retired option 3 Choose how to sort the report 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen ieg yNdy0YUsS 107230 ase Report Menu Billing Material Price List Materials Price List Report Printer ultraLabell Date Retired ignore System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting General Billing Production Labels Marketing Scheduling Active Only Sort By O LocatorID Description Helpful Blue Text Will Be Here Soon Invoices Invoice Register Cash Receipts Current Sales Statements Year To Date Reports Product Sales Material Sales Account Analysis Product Price List Materials Price List Commissions Taxes with Sales FlighTags FlighTags Travel Credits Materials Price List Sorted By Description Friday October 12 2012 Locator ID Description 5 1X6 BB IPN HRD ANT f 1X6 BB PLAST ANTER 8 1X6 BF IPN HAR ANT 10 1X6 BF PLAST ANTER 15 1X6 SLR VAC FIR AN 19 1x8 BF IPN 20 POST 16 1x0 BF IPN 30 POST 17 1x8 BF IPN 33 POST 20 1x8 BF IPN ANL POS 21 1x8 BF IPN MNL POS 26 1x8 BF PLST 20 POS 16 1x8 BS IPN POSTER 32 1X8 BT BLD 33 POST 33 1x8 BT FUNCT POST 35 1X8 BT RAT BLCK PT 34 1x8 BT RATION POST 38 1x8 CLASSICS 36 1x8 DNT 20 POSTER 31 1x8 NH PLST 0 POST 30 1x8
488. t all of your doctors pay the TE same price then you only need to define one price for each product We suggest that you use Price List 1 Scenario 2 Lab has multiple Prices per Product If you use more than 1 price per product be sure to add each price list you use to the product above and define a price for each price list Scenario 3 Each doctor has their own price per Product If each account has their own set of prices then individual pricelists must be set up for each account Refer to Section on Price Lists for more information e Dollar Amount When there is a dot in the circle and the change prices option is being used it will increase all prices all Price Lists on this spe cific product by the dollar amount specified Example Raising all the prices for this product by 5 would be done by clicking dollar amount and in the box below typing 5 After clicking Change Prices all the prices for this product would be 5 higher e Percent When there is a dot in the circle and the change option is being used it will increase all prices all Price Lists on this specific product by the percentage Example Raising all the prices for this product by 2 would be done by clicking percentage and in the box below typing 2 00 After clicking Change Prices all the prices for this product would be 2 higher e Dollar Amount Percent Field This box can change depending if the Dollar Amount or Percent options are selected e Changes Prices bu
489. t can be modified Description 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your arias work will be lost ieg MYOS Edit Departments QC QC Invoice Workticket 10 8307 ase Add Additional Departments 1 Click on System Production and then Depart ments 2 Click on the Add New button at the bottom of the screen It will bring up the Edit Departments screen You do not have to type a department ID as an ID will be assigned automatically when the changes have been saved In the Description field type the name of the department Leave the Date Retired field blank Type in questions in the QC Invoice for quality control questions to print on the invoice Type in questions in the QC Work Ticket for quality control questions to print on the work ticket Production and Scheduling Modules Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost CO NO OB W Delete Existing Departments 1 Click on System Production and then Departments 2 Click on the name of the department item under the Description column 3 Place a date in the Date Retired field or click the Delete button at the bottom of the screen 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost TT SME Cte calm ad Kee eleite a mmm continued QC Quality Control Invoice and QC Work Ticket Boxes in Edit Departments A custom designed Quality Control sheet of the your own design can be automatically printed
490. t due for each account ACCOUN Helpful Blue Text Will Be e Exclude On Hold Accounts check box When this Here Soon has a check in the box accounts that are checked On Hold on the Edit Accounts screen will not show up on the report If the box is left blank all accounts will show up e Save Job Place a check in the box to save this ATB Job so that it can be printed at a different time e Locator ID Radio button Placing a dot in the circle will sort the report by the Locator ID of the account ak Ae e Account Name Radio button Placing a dot in the circle will sort the report by the Account Name in alphabetical order Aging Radio Buttons Choose one it Pee oom e Do Nothing Place a dot in the circle if the report should not have aging features such as service charges e Simulate Aging Place a dot in the circle if the report needs to match the end of month reports with service charges e Run Aging Place a dot in the circle to actually run aging EJ Exclude Accounts With No Activity EJ Save Job Ba Exclude OnHold Accounts locatorID O Account N Print or Preview a New Aged Trial Balance 1 Click on Reports Accounting and then Aged Trial Balance 2 On the New ATB Job tab select if the report needs to exclude include Accounts with no activity or On Hold 3 Select a sort order of the report from Locator ID or Accounts Select an option from the Aging category 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen
491. t owes as of right now e Amount Type a number in this field to enter in the payment amount e Use Current Bal button This button allows the user to have the amount field filled in for them The amount is filled in with the current balance e Reference Number This field is used for documenting check numbers or other notations e Payment Date Type in the date that the payment was received e Payment Type drop down Use the dropdown list to select the type of payment Check Credit Card Credit Adjustment Discount etc e Notes Type notes here to be stored with the payment e Invoiced Cases with Balances This area appears when the Used Current Bal Button is clicked This will list cases that can be selected to issue refunds e Selected check box The check boxes are used to select the cases that are refunds returns Adding a New Payment using the New Menu 1 At the Menu Bar click New and then Payment At the Edit Payments screen select the Account Locator ID the payment is for using the drop down list Enter in the Amount of the payment Enter an optional Reference Number Check number Change the Payment Date if necessary Choose a Payment Type from the drop down list Click Save Changes or all your work will be lost On RR W NH 113 New Menu Payment NEA CTU LAL continued CONDOAARWDND gt okRWND Adding a New Payment using the List Menu At the Menu Bar click List then Pay
492. t will be included on the product price list e Allow Remake Discount checkbox When this box is checked the remake discount will be applied to a product that is marked remake on a case in Case Entry e Taxable checkbox When checked this product will be taxed if and only if the doctor has been assigned to a valid tax rate 129 New Menu Products CA lal od keke e eqac Continued Adding a New Product Using New Menu At the Menu Bar click New then Product At the Edit Products screen define the product information At the Department drop down list assign this product to a department At the Prices tab on the insert screen click the Add New button At the Price List drop down select an existing price list To define a brand new price list go to System Control Panel then Price Lists In the Price column next to Price List tab assign the price for this product Repeat steps 4 6 until all price lists and prices have been added to this product Click Save New on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost ONOOARWNH Adding a New Product Using List Products At the Menu Bar click List then Product Click Add New at the bottom of the screen At the Edit Product screen define the product information Use the Department drop down list to assign this product to a department At the Prices tab on the insert screen click the Add New button At the Price List drop down select an existing pric
493. t yet been statemented Example Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want the date range of current unstatemented cases to start with first unstatemented case dated 8 5 12 The system will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today Official Status Radio Buttons Choose One ee eee e All A dot in the circle to have cases with any type of status o Cases Duc Report show on the report e Open A dot in the circle to have cases with only an Open status Cases Due show on the report e Invoiced A dot in the circle to have cases with only an Invoiced status show up on the report e Statemented A dot in the circle to only have cases with a state mented status on the report e Select Steps Button This brings up the Edit Steps Included in Printer ultraLabell A a A A a onal e Reports Window Starting Date 09 01 2012 custom Unstateme e Edit Steps Included on Report Window In the Include In Re Omp port column place a check remove a check to include remove Ending Date vn steps from the report and then click Save Changes at the bottom Today of the screen Official Status QAII oO Open invoiced O Statemented Edit Steps Included in Reports How to Preview or Print the Cases Due Report Stepp 1 Click on Reports Scheduling and then Cases Due Step number 1 x 2 Choose a Date Range MTD is the default setting 3 Choose an Official Status All is the default setti
494. t you sell the material for Example If you purchase a certain gold material for 23 00 per pennyweight and you want to sell the same material for 46 00 per pennyweight then you would use this mark up field to tell Lab Manager that you want to mark up the material 100 To enter a markup of 100 percent enter 1 00 To enter a markup of 50 percent type in 50 etc Price This is the price of the material that will show up on the invoice Reorder Level This field tells Lab Manager how low you will allow the In Stock value to go before it reminds you to reorder some more Reorder Quantity This field is used to recommend how much to reorder when your In Stock value reaches the Reorder value Composition Optional The composition field can be used to describe what this material is made of and can be printed on some reports Notes for Cases Optional This field is used to type notes for the material that will be with the case Date Retired If you delete this material Lab Manager will place a date in this field to indicate that the material is no longer a valid material It is important that the material not actually be removed from the system because there could be cases in the system that involved that material Re moving a material that was used at one time could affect reports on archived or older data For this reason deleted item are simply retired and not removed from the system e Updated Optional This field is currently not in use e Safety
495. table will list all your materials Click on the Materials Name you wish to delete 2 Place a date in the Date Retired field of the material that you would like to delete 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Materials screen or all your work will be lost Deleting a Material Using Edit Menu At the Menu Bar click on Edit then Materials 2 At the Find Material box type in the material s Locator ID or use the Select dropdown list and click GO 3 Place a date in the Date Retired field of the material that you would like to delete 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Materials screen or all your work will be lost Restoring a Deleted Retired Material Any material that is deleted retired is still in the system but does not show up on reports To reactivate a material click on List and Materials In the Search area place a check in the Show Retired checkbox The search can be further defined with the name of the material Click Search and the grid will be populated with all current and retired materials Click on the name of the material that needs to become active From the Edit Materials screen remove the date from the Retired Date field Click Save Changes on the Edit Materials screen or all your work will be lost Material Codes at Edit Material Screen Sections TABS Material Codes Sisal dob Material Codes Materials can be given codes to identify them in your own way This information could be helpful for creating
496. tact screen or all your work will be lost Click List Marketing Contact then the Search button table will populate with all of your marketing contacts Click the Marketing Contact Name in the table of the marketing contact you wish to edit At Edit Marketing Contact modify the items that need to be changed Click Save Changes on the Edit Marketing Contact screen or all your work will be lost CONDOR W Deleting an existing Marketing Contact using List Menu l 2 3 Transferring a Marketing Contact to Accounts Once a Marketing Contact becomes a client you can transfer their name addresses phone numbers notes and even calls into their account 1 2 3 Adding a Call to the Call Grid in Edit Market Contacts Screen 1 2 In the Call Grid make sure the correct Salesperson name is showing up if it is not in the dropdown list and select the correct name Type the name of the person you spoke with in the Talked With column Type in what happened during the call in the Call Notes column To assign this call to someone use the dropdown list in the Assigned To column and select a name Click in the white box in the End Time column and it will put in the end time of the call Click Save Changes on the Edit Marketing Contact screen or all your work will be lost Click List Marketing Contact then the Search button table will populate with all of your marketing contacts Click the Marketing Contact Name in the
497. taining ALL products in the system On the other hand in the search screen if you search for a specific product then it will pull up all the products that have that name in it Materials Case Completion 1032307 ase Vendors See the Navigation Tools section that covers searching and sorting in the List Menu System New Edit List Reports Help System New Edit List Reports Help ETS a DISCOUNTED TA 5 S RSEN List Products e Oand or Oand or I ShowRetired IB show sau g Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Search Field 3 2 5 S Function Function Function Description Y LocatoID Y IncludeProduct w ProductClass VY Notes Primary Value Primary Value Primary Value n oo iL 4 O gt DISCOUNT 4 5 Add a New Product Using the List Products 1 At the Menu Bar click List Products and the Add New button at the bottom of the screen 2 For full instructions see the New Products section of this manual Modify an Existing Product Using the List Products 1 Click List Product then the Search button The grid will list all of your products 2 Click the Product name in the table of the product you wish to edit 3 At Edit Doctor modify the items that need to be changed 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Products screen or all your work will be lost List Menu Materials System New Edit List Reports Help Materials at List Menu i
498. tart Call button to start a new call This will create a new line item in the call grid below 8 In the Call Grid click in the Talked With field on the new call and enter in the name of the person you spoke to The Call Date Employee and Start Time will be filled in for you 9 Click in the Call Notes field on the new call and type in what the conversation was about 10 If necessary click in the Assigned To field and use the drop down list to select an employee this call needs to be followed up with Optional DO NOT click the Finished check mark box if you want this call to be assigned this is only checked after the person assigned has dealt with the call 11 Click the End Time field and this will fill in a time for the call 12 Click the Reset button at the bottom of the screen after the call has been ended to enter in another account or marketing contact s call notes Repeat Steps 3 through 11 08 19 2011 Rosalie M vm 8 44 AM 08 45 30 lft 800 told ablout sale Delete a Call in the Call Grid 1 Click on the square to the left of the Call Date and click delete on the keyboard 63 system Menu Control Panel SIARRA Ore al ige mar li mm continued Call Tracking Continued w Search Notes Tab in Call Tracking Bee ed Search Notes Using the Search Notes tab in Call Tracking you ee ee can search for key words that have been typed into un oMarketing Contacts Call Notes in the past The grid will list
499. tarting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Custom Place a dot in the circle to choose your own start and end dates e MTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and ending dates e YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates e Today A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date e Fiscal YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year e Unstatemented A dot in the circle will fill in the start and end date for cases that have not yet been statemented System New Edit List Reports Help Example Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want the date ODER SAAS Cash Receipts Report range of current unstatemented cases to start with the first un statemented case dated 8 5 12 The system will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today e Unstatemented Payments A dot in the circle will fill in the start and end date for the payments that have not been statemented yet See example in Unstatemented ieg MYOS Cash Receipts 1038307 SL e Special Codes dropdown list Codes that are assigned to ac counts e Account d
500. tem New Edit List Reports Help ous e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar MGi tace sheet tepon function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format g e 60 Days Default Setting Place a dot in the circle and the report Face Sheet will show the last 60 days worth of calls that have been entered _ Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 onto this marketing contact p e Month To Date A dot in the circle to have it fill in the Month 5 pa To Date MTD starting and ending dates automatically This e ance gt ae Date gi will give you only the calls that have been entered on this mar Ending Date 99 26 2012 year To Date keting contact for the month to date time frame e Year To Date A dot in the circle to have it fill in the Year To A ane Date YTD starting and ending dates automatically This will ee ey ITs 4 give you only the calls that have been entered on this marketing E Marked Only contact for the year to date time frame Bl All Marketing Contacts e All A dot in the circle to have all calls that have been entered on this specific marketing contract show up on the report e Select A Marketing Contact drop down list If no marketing contact name is selected face sheets for all marketing contacts will be generated If a marketing contact is selected from the list only that marketing contact s face sheet prints e Marked Only check box A check in the box creates a report base
501. tem this doctor uses e Start Date This is the date that this doctor was created in the system e Retired Date Leave this field empty if this is a valid Doctor To delete this Doctor click in the Date Retired field for the Doctor you wish to de lete and use the drop down calendar to assign a date If this is ever deleted Lab Manager will place a date in this field that will indicate the record has been deleted retired This will remove the item from your Doctor List To reactivate highlight the date and press delete on your keyboard to remove the date 125 New Menu Doctors CNA Cele NA Bleler ve E W continued Adding a New Doctor from the Edit Account Screen At the Edit Account screen click the Doctors tab then the Add Doctor button At the Edit Doctors screen define Title First and Last Name and Degree Verify Account name or use drop down to change account name At the Shipping Location drop down list select the address that the cases are shipped to These addresses are setup from the Edit Account screens and then Edit Locations tab At the Tooth Number System drop down list select system All other fields are optional 6 Click Save New on the Edit Doctors screen or all your work will be lost This will return you to the Edit Account screen AOUN z Adding a New Doctor Using List Doctors At the Menu Bar click on List and then Doctors Click Add New at the bottom of the screen At the Edit Doctors sc
502. temented cases to start with the first unstatemented case dated 8 5 12 The system will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today Preview or Print the Case Tracking Report 1 Click on Reports Production and then Case Tracking 2 Select a product an account or a department from a drop down list 3 Select the type of date range you want to filter by The Case Created Date is the default 4 Select the type of cases that will show up on the report such as In Progress Invoiced and or Statemented The default is both Invoiced and Statemented cases on the report 5 Choose a Date Range 6 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Report Options Saino and End Case Tracking ing Date Optional Product Friday October 12 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Optional Account Description Case Dept Qty Value Tooth s Finish Date Ship by Time Date Pan Patient Account Name Optional Depart 12 14 11 ment Items 3 4 GOLD CROWN 1112 0001 Denture 1 00 Smith John Dr George Franks 12 14 11 Grand Total 207 Report Menu Production Material Reorders lt ole a TALTE ea cece Toii o 1E continued System New Edit List Reports Help Material Reorders Report Accounting General The Material Reorder Report shows the materials that need to be reordered Main M oe Production Work Tickets Labels Lab Status Marketing gt Doctors Production YTD
503. ter Hub or Switch Use Custom Install process on Workstations Workstations Using only the LM Program InstallShield Wizard 4 ie Lab Manager InstallShield Wizard Installation and Setup Preparing to Install Lab Manager Setup is preparing the InstallShield Wizard which will guide you through the program setup process Please wait Extracting Lab Manager msi Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Lab Manager The InstallShield R Wizard will install Lab Manager on your computer To continue click Next WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Click Next to install to this Folder or click Change to install to a different Folder Install Lab Manager to CALME lt tok ee gt Installing Lab Manager Most Lab Manager users will install Lab Manager using the Complete option The Complete option installs both portions of Lab Manager the Server portion database and related utilities and the Application portion the Lab Manager program and related files Use the Complete option when installing Lab Manager on the Server or on a Single com puter one that is not connect to another computer Use the Custom option when installing Lab Manager on a Workstation that is connected to other computers or to a Server Complete Install for a Server or Single Computers 1 Select the Complete option and click Next to proceed 2 Click on th
504. that has not been paid and is 91 days plus late since it was invoiced e Service Charges This is the amount that the account was charged in service charges during the statement period e UnStatemented Payments This is the amount of payments that have been entered into the system but not yet applied to a statement job e Total Due This amount is what the customer owes as of this moment 118 New Menu Account AAA Ea EA lla E continued y Section Data Tab Data Tab at Edit Account Screen The Data tab provides a way to assign salespeople to ac Referred By fs Special Codes WW Suppress Quality Control counts along with the terms on invoicing Other fields provide dates and ways to retire the account Financial Tab at Edit Account Screen Use this scre define or edit the doctors you send bills to This screen is Read Only Financial information a a cannot be changed here BEICEE Ejnancial Sot al co ee a The Financial tab is used to display common finan This data cannot be modified Last Month cial information about this account i n Last Stm NEN Cae vip e Current Invoice Summary This is a list of z cases that have not been statemented g l a _ Last Pai 03 06 2011 e Last Month field This displays the dollar l value that this account was billed for the last ea Notes Tab at Edit Account Screen This area can be used to keep extensive notes about the account These notes do show up in case entry and can be ref
505. the Accounts screen Employees Vendors Salespersons Invoices Marketing Contacts Dr Account Locations gt System New Edit List Reports Help Ue a aliienaies Doctor Account Locations Expor Export the Dr Account Locations aA E E E E E 1 Click on Reports Labels and then Dr Account Locations e aa a i e Ae E 2 Choose how to sort the labels 3 piini 3 Choose the Address Type E 4 Click Export to Excel to export this list to Excel 219 Report Menu Marketing Marketing Contacts Report Menu Marketing System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting Marketing Contacts Use this screen to print a general list of Marketing Contacts with their ID Name address and phone number Marketing Face Sheet This is used to give a general overview of the marketing contact and it also lists all contact people and notes A list of calls entered in the call grid for the last 90 days will also show up on the report Marketing Follow Up Call List This report lists all the marketing contacts that need to be followed up on according to the dates and times Marketing Calendar This gives a visual display of the calls that are scheduled for E follow ups Marketing Calendar General Labels Bar Coding Billing Production Marketing Marketing Contacts A Z ios oS lt A a vA A A oe e e Scheduling Marketing Face Sheet cy ole am RA
506. the Company Database in order to Delete it Server Tool Config DB you wish to Delete and select the name of Delete a Company DB 4 the company 1 Select the Company DB you wish to DELETE E ERE 2 Type in the box below that I Do Enter the text Do in this textbox oek 3 Place a check in the box next to Remove Data 2 Misc Admin Tools base to remove everything connected to this database Click the Remove Database button to denial 3 Remove Database Also physically DELETE the SQL files for the Company DB Attach Company DB delete the database 4 Click Close to exit out 4 15 EREET AA am ele mm continued Change License Use this function to add additional features or to change the name of the company Change License e Right click on the Server Tool icon Manager e Click on the Server Menu then on Change License ple Quality Dental Lab Inc other than the comma and the period Click on the Create Key 1 button NO Oo f l 4 Lab Manager Server Toc Server Help Change a Company DB s License Select the Company DBwhose LICENSE you wish to CHANGE Major Version Limit 6 Minor 255 Expiration Date Modules E Production Pickups Barcoding C Shipping Quickbooks F Scheduling Type your company name here exactly as it is to appear in the program Company Name Click on Create Key 1 and then call LSG at 1 800 677 1120 and request Key 2 Create Ke
507. the case e In Process checkbox Place a check in the box if you want to filter the report with cases that do not have an invoiced or statemented status The In Process status can not be used in combination with Invoice Date since it will have no invoiced date e Invoice checkbox Default setting Check this box to show all invoiced cases that match the other criteria e Statemented check box Default setting Check box to show all statemented cases that match the other criteria Labels Lab Status Marketing Doctors Production YTD 103230 ase Scheduling Product Production Material Production Account Production Material Usage Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format CEDE Product Production Analysis e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Custom Place a dot in the circle to choose your own start and end dates e MTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Month Filter By Case Created E in Process To Date MTD starting and ending dates a Re FF Invoices e YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Year Finish Date eee To Date YTD starting and ending dates Olnvoice Date e Today A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the start ing and ending dates with the current date Star
508. the circle to choose your own start and end dates e MTD Place a dot in the circle to have it fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and ending dates automatically e YTD Place a dot in the circle to have it fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates automatically e Today Place a dot in the circle to have it automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date e Fiscal YTD Place a dot in the circle to have it automati cally fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year e Unstatemented A dot in the circle will fill in the dates for the cases that have not been statemented yet e Assigned To dropdown list Use the dropdown list to System New Edit List Reports Help CEDERA PEDAG Calls Assigned To Report Marketing Calls Assiqned To Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 1012207 ase a IMOS Starting Date 09 01 2012 custom Unstateme select an employee name that the calls are assigned to i Omp Ending Date 09 30 2012 9 30 2012 yD Today Type of Calls Radio Buttons Choose One Hl Use DateRange Fiscal 1D e All Calls This will show all the calls that are assigned to people or one person Assigned e Only Finished This will show only the calls marked bias finished that are assigned to people or one person Aii calls e Only UnFinished This will show only the calls that Oniy Finished have not been marked finished that are assi
509. the current price It is not mandatory but it is recommended as there is a limited window of time that data can be transferred from an older version to the current version Compatibility Lab Manager provides a program to convert the data from the previous Lab Manager to the next version If aversion is skipped manual data entry may be necessary To avoid incompatibility Lab Manager should be updated with each new release Disclaimer Features functions and reports may vary from those described in this manual because of variations in computer systems and program versions Laboratory Systems Group Inc LSG Money Back Guarantee Each first time purchase of Lab Manager software comes with a 90 day money back guarantee The following conditions must be met in order for the purchaser to be eligible for a refund 1 Upon receipt of your Lab Manager purchase you must promptly complete and return the Sales and Warranty Agreement as instructed 2 Your Lab Manager software must be installed and placed in use promptly after receiving it If you do not intend to install it immediately you need to contact Laboratory Systems Group Inc and notify us of your intent to delay using the software until a future date 3 Each first time purchase of Lab Manager software comes with an initial amount of phone support This does not include upgrades or updates You must make the effort to contact the technical support department at Laboratory Systems Group
510. the date e Employee Name Automatically fills wnen the Start Call is clicked Change the employee s name by clicking on name and using the drop down list choose the correct employee e Talked With Type the name of the person that the conversation was with e Start Time Automatically fills when the Start Call is clicked Modify the time by clicking on the time date and editing it in the box e End Time You must notate the end of the call Click in the empty End Time box and it will fill it with the current time e Call Notes Type in the call notes describing the conversation Call notes can be searched using the Search Notes tab next to the Call Track ing tab at the top of the page e Assigned To When an employee s name is selected it will place a note in that employee s assigned call area When the employee looks at that list they will be able to read the notes and mark it as a completed task e Finished Checkbox Place a check in the box notates the Assigned To employee has completed the task assigned to them Adding Call in Call Grid 1 Click List Accounts then the Search button table will populate with all of your doctors Click on the Account Name in the table of the ac count you wish to start a call 2 At the Edit Account screen click on the Calls tab in the grid Click on the Start Call to start a new call This will create a new line item in the call grid below 4 In the Call Grid click in the Talked With field on
511. the date range of current unstatemented cases to start with the first unstatemented case dated 8 5 12 The system will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today System New Edit List Reports Help ID A dot in the circle will sort the report by the account ID Account Name A dot in the circle will sort the accounts on the report in alphabetical order Total Dollar Value Default setting This will sort the report by the total dollar value instead of by the account OENE Acct Analysis Report 1 Click on Reports Billing and then Account Analysis 2 Choose a date range 3 Choose how to sort the report 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Account Analysis Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Starting Date custom Q Unstateme Om vD Today Fiscal YD 09 01 2012 09 30 2012 Ending Date O Account Name Sort By Account Analysis Date Range Between 10 1 2012 AND 10 31 2012 Friday October 12 2012 ID Name 2 Dr George Franks 5 Dr John Killdare Total Charges for Date Range 1 308 17 590 99 1 899 16 190 Inv Count Your Company Name Goes Here of Total 68 88 31 12 Avg 10 130 82 5 118 20 Report Menu Billing Product Price List aooaa Jill lale mmm continued Product Price List Report System New Edit List Reports Help Accounting General Main Billing Invoices Production Labels M
512. the invoice This total will include discounts and modified Unit Prices e Product Teeth This is a button click here to see a tooth chart Use the tooth chart to click on the teeth associated with this product The tooth numbering system will automatically appear in the same system the doctor uses To change the numbering system simply right click on the chart and then left click on the desired numbering system See Edit Doctors to modify the tooth chart for a doctor Products Related Schedule Shade Remake Date Created OutSourceVendorlID OutSourceDateDueBack OutSourceDateReturned Rush Case DISCOUNT PACKAGE 08 15 2012 08 22 2012 e Related This field is a button that opens a screen used to modify which products are to be related to the product on this case This function will have no affect unless other products have been tied related to the selected product For more information on related products refer to the Related Products Tab at Edit Products Screen section of this manual e Notes These are notes about this product e Schedule Scheduling module only This lists the order the products will be scheduled in e Shade Use this field to define the shade for the selected product This shade will be printed on the invoice e Remake checkbox Place a check in the Remake checkbox to indicate that this product is a remake Marking a product as a remake will not affect it financially unless you have defined it at accounts e Date C
513. the retired items are not showing check mark the box and it show the retired items Exit Invoice Terms Note If you are looking at the list of Tax Collectors and do not see all of the items click the Show Retired check box at the top of the screen This will show all tax collectors that have been retired along with current tax collector Modify Existing Tax Collectors 1 Click on System Accounting and then Tax Collectors 2 In the Edit Tax Collectors screen click on the name of the tax collector under the Description column 3 Modify the name 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Add Additional Tax Collectors 1 Click on System Accounting and then Tax Collectors System cw Edit List eports Help 2 Click on Add New button at the right bottom of the screen This is will add a new line item to Eo ORE Tax Collectors the grid 3 In the new line item in the grid under the Description column type the name of the tax col Edit Tax Collectors lector 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all new tax collectors have been entered 5 You do not have to type a Tax Collector ID an ID will be assigned automatically when the changes have been saved 6 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost E Show Retired Tax Collectors TaxCollectonD Description DateRetired Imported Collecto 5 W A 2 W R A s H S lt a Delete Existi
514. ther fields are optional Click Save New on the Edit Marketing Contacts or all your work will be lost Adding a New Marketing Contact using List New Click on List Marketing Contact and then the Add New button at the bottom of the screen At the Edit Marketing Contacts screen define the Marketing Contact Name under Location 1 Name Enter the address into Address 1 City State and Zip United States is the default Country All other fields are optional Type in the phone into the Phone 1 field Type in the contact into the Contact field Locate the Salesperson dropdown list and select a person from the list This is required before calls can be logged in Type in a follow up date in the Follow Up Date field This is optional but highly recommended All other fields are optional Click Save New on the Edit Marketing Contacts or all your work will be lost Modifying an existing Marketing Contact using the Edit Menu ls 2 3 Modifying an existing Marketing Contact using List Menu 1 2 3 At the Menu Bar click on New then Marketing Contact At the Edit Marketing Contacts screen define the Marketing Contact Name under Location 1 Name At the Menu Bar click on Edit then Marketing Contact At the Find Marketing Contact box type in the contacts Locator ID or use the Se lect drop down list and click GO At Edit Marketing Contacts modify the items that need to be changed Click Save Changes on the Edit Marketing Con
515. this box tells Lab Manager that this marketing contact is something that you want to sort by 142 New Menu Marketing Contacts CEMA Cea UW Fela Ce aTe fel ai tle continued Section Main Tab Main Tab at Edit Marketing Contact m Mark Follow Up Date 08 16 2012 ow Up Time 12 45PM e Days Open M T W Th F Sa Su Place an X in the boxes for the days that the office is open This helps Main BSR in determining which days to make follow up calls Example Notate when an office is closed on Fridays Des Ope e Transferred To Accounts checkbox If the Send to Accounts button is used when a marketing contact 7 es ES ES a 7 m becomes a customer and is made into an Account a check will automatically be placed in this box e On Hold checkbox Optional A check in the box places this marketing contact on hold e Do Not Call checkbox Optional Place a check in the box to notate that this marketing contact should not E on Hold be called HB Do Not Call e Sales Person dropdown list Use the drop down list to select the person that will be contacting this mar keting contact There has to be a sales person selected before calls can be entered ae e Commission Place the percentage amount that the salesperson will receive if this marketing contact aon becomes an account It can be transferred to an account with the Send to Accounts button Codes Tab at Edit Marketing Contact Screen Section Main Tab GENE Codes Milas
516. ting Date e Fiscal YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the ua mD starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year ean ee e Unstatemented A dot in the circle will fill in the start and end date for cases that have not yet been statemented Account Hl Example Last statement job was 7 31 12 but you want a the date range of current unstatemented cases to start I Include Oniy Production Products with the first unstatemented case dated 8 5 12 The sys tem will fill in the start date as 8 5 12 and the end date as of today e Account dropdown list Select an account from the dropdown list to only show information for one account e Include Only Production Products check box Check the box if you only want to show products specifically marked as Production Products or count from the Edit Products screen System New Edit List Reports Help Product Production Analysis Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 1018207 ase ea yn custom OUunstateme Preview or Print the Product Production Report 1 Click on Reports Production and then Product Production 2 Select the type of date range to filter by The Invoice Date is the default 3 Select the type of cases to show on the re port such as In Progress Invoiced and or Statemented Default setting is both Invoiced Product Production Analysis and Statemented cases showing on the re ort 4 Fase a Date Range al i on eet pice
517. ting contacts only If you know the Locator ID or want to select the name from jee a drop down then from the Menu Bar click Edit and then Marketing Contact Material Vendor Marketing Contact For more information on editing a doctor go to Section New Marketing Contact 10 807 ase Image 1 Image 2 System New Edit List Reports Help Find Marketing Contact Marketing Contact Name O DENE Gae Marketing Contacts Edit Ma rketing Contact Locator ID OO Start Date Follow Up Date E mark Follow Up Time Ouse On Label se On Label Location 1 Location 2 Line 2 Line 2 Fax Postal Postal o COT e BB Do Not Call Code Code Select E AS 10 2307 aseD M T Modifying Marketing Contact using the Edit Menu ia ie owner Sales Person Commission 1 At the Menu Bar click Edit then Marketing Contact Se wens A 2 At the Find Marketing Contact box type in the mar i sen tacts keting contact s Locator ID or use the Select drop down list and click GO Image 1 3 At Edit Marketing Contacts modify the items that need to be changed 4 In this manual see Section New Marketing Con tact for more information on using this screen Image 2 5 Click Save Changes on the Edit Marketing Contact m screen or all your work will be lost CallDate SalesPerson TalkedWith StartTime CallNotes AssignedTo Finished _ 148 List Menu Cases Search for a specific case or see a whol
518. tion This is the name of the department e Date Created This is the date that this department was created in the SoU a list GEIE List Departments SEERE aai eee Olsen elie e Date Retired Leave this field empty If this department is ever deleted Lab Manager will place a date in this field that will indicate the depart SSS SS SSS ment has been deleted retired This will remove the department from certain reports and lists Click the blue Clear Button C in the date re tired field to remove the date and this will make the department an active department again Denture 07 14 2003 e QC Invoice This is a Quality Control ticket that prints on the Invoice labeled sadn Different QCs will print depending on what department is listed for the iai ednas product that was billed out aiia nnn e QC Work Ticket Production and Scheduling Modules This is a r Cherie Quality Control ticket that prints on the Work Ticket ieg NOUS Account Accounting 01 06 2005 Crown and Bridge 07 14 2003 1032307 ase The menu selection will take you to a list of your departments Click on the department Description in the list to open it Modify Existing Departments gt System New Edit List Reports Help 1 Click on System Production and then Depart Ne ee ments 2 Click on the name of the department item under the Description column 3 From the Edit Departments screen the Descrip tion Date Retired QC Invoice and the QC Besaid Workticke
519. tion of the Tax Rate Example City of Phoenix Taxable e Tax Collector Use this drop down list button to select the Tax Collector If you need to add addi tional Tax Collectors refer to Tax Collectors Section City of Phoenix Taxable e Rate Type the tax rate as a percentage here Example To enter a tax rate of 1 5 type in 0 015 Won Taxable e Minimum Tax Not implemented at this time Collectors Categories Chari e Maximum Tax Not implemented at this time me e Min Invoice Amount Not implemented at this time Maricopa County Taxable e Max Invoice Amount Not implemented at this time State of Arizona Taxable e Date Retired If you ever delete this Tax Rate Lab Manager will place a date in this field to indi cate that the tax rate has been Retired deleted Denes item New Edit List Reports Help GEIE List Tax Rates Search Tax Rates Description VY TaxCollectoID WV TaxCollector W Rate VY MinimumTax Y MaximumTax VY MinimuminvoiceAmount VY MaximuminvoiceAmount Vv GLCategoryID VY GLCatege AZDOR 0 00000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Sales Tax City Of Phoenix 0 09300 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Sales Tax State Arizona No AZDOR 0 00000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Sales Tax County Maricop 1 2 ni City Phoenix Non 2 City Of Phoenix 0 00000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Sales Tax 1 ni City Of Phoenix City Paradise Val AZDOR 0 00000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Sales Tax State Arizona O AZDOR 0 00000 0 0000 0 0000 0 00
520. to insure you haven t missed any returns from your accounts Account Use the drop down to select an account Doctor Use the drop down to select a doctor Patient Type in a partial name or a full name We recommend typing in last name only to eliminate the chance of excluding a patient because the name was misspelled or entered in a different order Case Enter in either a partial or a whole case number with a dash RX Enter in either a partial or whole RX number Prescription Number Pan Enter in the work pan number Tooth Enter in the tooth number Product Shade Enter in a shade for a product This will only search the shades that have been assigned to a product Material Shade Enter in a shade for a material This will only search the shade that have been assigned to a material Case Shade Enter in a tooth shade s This allows a search for shades entered in a case but not assigned to a product or material Case Code Enter in a case code Articulator Enter in a partial or whole articulator number Lot Enter in a partial or a whole lot number PO Enter in a partial or a whole PO number Received Date Type in the date that the case was received Start Date Type in the date that was entered on the case when case was started Doctors Date Type in the date that was entered on the case indicating when the doctor needs the case back by Chair Time Use the dropdown list and choose the chair time for the
521. tock field type the material quantity that physically is in the lab In the Markup Field type in a markup percentage Lab Manager will multiple the percentage times the Cost and calculate the price Use the dropdown list for Department and assign this material to a department Place a check in the Discountable checkbox if this material is allowed to be discounted Place a check in the Taxable checkbox if this is a taxable material 10 Review all other fields and checkboxes to see if they apply to your lab 11 Click Save New on the Edit Materials screen or all your work will be lost OONDARWN gt Modifying a Material Using List Materials 1 Click List Materials then the Search button table will list all your materials Click on the Materials Name you wish to edit 2 At Edit Materials modify the items that need to be changed 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Materials screen or all your work will be lost Modifying a Material Using Edit Menu 1 At the Menu Bar click on Edit then Materials 2 At the Find Material box type in the material s Locator ID or use the Select dropdown list and click GO 3 At Edit Materials modify the items that need to be changed 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Materials screen or all your work will be lost 137 New Menu Materials CCUM eRe aE LEM continued 1 Oak wWNM Deleting a Material Using List Materials 1 Click List Material then the Search button
522. tom of the screen or all your work will be lost Delete Existing Employee Codes 1 Click on System Codes and then Employee 2 At the Edit Employee Codes screen place a date in the Date Retired column Do this for all codes that need retiring 3 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost System New Edit List Reports Hel Product y p p Control Panel gt Products can be coded to identify them for special purposes such as products that are outsourced to another lab mains This information could be helpful for creating reports based on if a product is outsourced or not To enter new prod Production uct codes or to edit information on existing product codes click System Codes and then Product s Accounting The Edit Product Code screen allows you to define information about your product codes Case e Product Code ID This is the ID that the system automatically assigns to the Product Code ae Vendor e Description This is the name of the Product Code as Employee e Date Retired This is the date that the Product Code has been retired deleted e Show Retired This checkbox is used to show the retired Product Codes in the list If the retired codes are not oe showing checkmark the box and it will add in the retired codes Marketing Patient User Status i Additional Product Codes Click on System Codes and then Product At the Edit Product Codes screen click on Add
523. trim margi MISC Please trim marg Account LI CASH ACCOUNT See Account befor MISC See Account befo Email Address Select R 10 2 0 SLJ Birth Date 01 03 2011 rie EPS R 1718 E Rose Reg Number X Modifying an Existing Doctor Using the Edit Menu Reg Date 1 At the Menu Bar click Edit then Doctor 2 At the Find Doctor box type in the Doctor s Locator Tooth Number System Universal ID or use the Select dropdown list and click GO alia Image 1 Date Retired c 3 At Edit Doctor modify the items that need to be Helpful Blue Text Will Be Here Soon Add changed Image2 In this manual see Section New Doctor for more information on using this screen 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Doctor screen or all your work will be lost Edit Menu Product Edit Products at Edit Menu System New Eait List Reports Help Account This area is used to pull up a specific product This does not give you the same search options that List provides 2 Bors This is for existing products only If you know the Locator ID or want to select the name from a drop down then from Product the Menu Bar click Edit and then Product PEEN Vendor Marketing Contact For more information on editing a product go to Section New Products Image 1 Image 2 System New Edit List Reports Help H Find Product GENE Edit Products ieg yNDyoyS loam O OE Edit Products Product Descriptio
524. trol Panel Case Entry Production Calendar Accounting System New Edit List Reports Help Company Preferences and Settings Easy Report Manager Employees Price Lists Quickbooks Transfer e Some of the steps are optional and are noted as such Even if you are not using one of Codes Call Tracking the steps listed here we recommended you review them empires anit Ret e f you need to add information start by clicking Add New for that step After you have Sa ee i finished the initial entry any further entries would be completed by clicking Add New a e If you are finished adding entries or reviewing a step and no changes need to be made sae ieee check the completed check box and continue to the next step ae e All of the information you enter using the Setup Wizard can be modified or changed at Case Locator View Easy Menus any time after you have entered it here e When you have completed a Step put a checkmark in the Completed box Setup Wizard System New Edit List Reports Help Elem Lab Manager v7 Setup Wizard Lab Manager v7 Setup Wizard This form will allow you to input all information in a logical order starting from step one Some of the steps are optional and are noted as such Even if you are not using one of the steps listed here we recommend you review them If you need to add information start by clicking Add New for that step After you have finished the initial entry any further entries would
525. ts screen locate the Prices tab Find the price list in the grid that needs to be deleted Click on the box to the left of the Price List name This will select the line On your keyboard press delete Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost ORRON Changing the Prices on a Product by a Dollar Amount 1 At the Edit Products screen click the Prices tab 2 Place a dot in the circle to select the Dollar Amount option 3 Place the dollar amount that you want to increase the product value by in the field below 4 Click the Change Prices button This will update all the Price Lists for this one product only 5 Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost Changing the Prices on a Product by a Percentage At the Edit Products screen click the Prices tab Place a dot in the circle to select the Percentage option Place the percentage amount that you want to increase the product value by in the field below Click the Change Prices button This will update all the Price Lists for this one product only Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost ok wWD 131 New Menu Products CA Cla od Kolo Lik Continued Related Products Tab at Edit Products Screen Sections TABS lail Related Products SEENEL E oT C lo oe Te Related Products The Related Products tab is used to tie certain products toget
526. ts to choose a product Aticuatrtaa Delivery Method fl i Grand Total Tab or use the mouse to move To add additional products re To add materials to the case Tab or use the mouse to move New Menu Case System New Edit List Reports Help Case Search Payment Bulk Payment Statement Account 1032307 ase Doctor Product Material Vendor Marketing Contact Lab Manager will assign a date FERS RTEQtre you wish to use and then define Pan Number and Shade if you like all are optional WFE Doctoritems Notes Jeeth Images Patient Codes CaseCodes Case level Discount Account History Outsourcing Tojed0 ose Shipping Zone to the Quantity column and Products define it To add tooth numbers Product Quantity Unit Price UnitPriceDiscount SubTotal ProductTeeth Related click the button in the Product Teeth field and use the chart to choose your teeth Close the chart when you are finished 5 peat steps 5 6 click on the New Material button on the left of the Materials grid or use the hot key of Alt M Material Quantity MaterialTeeth Related Qty TakenFrominv Unit Price Unit Pric When filling in the blank material record you can use the Material or ID dropdown lists button to choose a material to the Quantity column and define it repeat steps 8 9 Save and Close Saves the case and closes the Case Entry screen This does not
527. tton This button is used to change the prices by a dollar amount or a percentage e Add To All Price Lists button Click this button if you would like to add this new product to all of the price lists instead of selecting individual Price Lists e Price List The Price List column provides a drop down list with all of the price lists that have been created From this column the user can select only specific price lists to have this product e Price The Price column lists the prices for this product according to the price lists assigned to this product e Add New button This button is used to add a new line to the grid so another price list can be assigned to this product Adding a Price List to a Product 1 At the Edit Products screen locate the Prices tab and then click on the Add New button 2 This will create a new line item in the grid Click on the drop down list under the Price List column and select the price list you would like to add to the product 3 In the Price column next to the newly added price list name fill in the price 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost Modifying an Existing Price List on a Product 1 At the Edit Products screen locate the Prices tab 2 Find the price list in the grid that needs to be modified and change the price 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost Deleting a Price List from a Product At the Edit Produc
528. ucts Excise Tax Unlimited Customizable Invoice YTD Reports Store Scanned Images Track Shades amp Tooth s and Statement Forms Supports Color Printing Account Photos Automatic Tax Calculations Reprint Invoices and Statements Employee amp Salesperson Photos Automatic Discounting Anytime Account Screen Include Photo with Case Note Fields amp Attachable Docs EOM amp Mid Month Statements Customer Relations Mgr Material amp Product Photos Balances amp Acct History Your Scanned Company Logo Quality Control Tickets Reports Billing amp Shipping Addresses External Quality Control QC Customizable Report Preferences Marketing with Call Tracking Internal Quality Control QC Aged Trial Balance Retires Accounts Department Sensitive QC Cash Receipts Journal Fax Numbers Credit Limit Lab Manager v7 Production Module Requires Lab Manager v7 Billing Module Get additional case management with simple work ticket a vast array of production and financial reports This module adds another layer of man agement information through work tickets reports on lab status basic inventory department production remakes and sales information Typically used by owners who keep a close watch on sales and production Work Tickets Production Group Practice Sales MTD Account Analysis Remake Reports Steps Not Included Lab Status YTD Account Analysis By Account Color Coded Work Tickets Outsource Tracking Pick up and Delivery By Department Multiple Wor
529. ucts have been entered 5 Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost Modifying Related Products on a Product 1 At the Edit Products screen click the Related Product tab 2 Find the related product in the grid that needs to be modified and change the name or quantity 3 Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost Deleting a Related Product from a Product 1 At the Edit Products screen click the Related Product tab 2 Find the related product in the grid that needs to be deleted 3 Click on the box to the left of the Related Product name This will select the line 4 On your keyboard press delete 5 Click Save Changes on the Edit Product screen or all your work will be lost Related Materials Tab at Edit Products Screen Sections TABS PIS SUS Related Materials CEE E The Related Material tab is used to tie selected materials to a product When a material is tied related to a product it will cause any or all related materials to be added to a case each time the main product is added Example If Material 1 is tied to Material 2 and 3 then anytime you add Material 1 to a case Lab Manager will automatically add Material 2 and 3 to the case because they have been related using the Related Material tab Note If a material name is not available in the dropdown list under the Related Material column it will need to be added into the system Add a new mater
530. ue report See different section If a you want to add a field to the report that is not here simply submit that request to LSG for consideration Report This area provides an easy way to select one of the report sections Example To edit the Detail area you can either click on the word Detail to the left or click somewhere inside the detail area on the report itself 67 Custom Report Design OTE Colne NX ole a i DIXI Te 1E continued Section The Parts of a Main Form or Report Page Header Section This area is for items that are These fields contain the These fields contain the to appear at the top of ALL pages of this form Re Lab s Company name Ad The big box in the back name and address of the serve this area for things like the Today s Date the dress line 1 Address line 2 ground is where the Logo account the invoice is being Company Name and Address and other text that ap and the City State and Zip goes mailed to plies to all pages of every invoice Lab Manager Report Editor Text and Image Box Editor See below Edit Preview Lie Ne Group Header Section This area is for items that change from one invoice to another things like the account A E PageHeader P E E E name case number and patient cCompanyNarag SARE RED Ts Invoice CompanyName name aj ompanyAddrass m CompanyAddress KhTextBox _ ompanyCityStateZip i E CompanyCityStat
531. ully typed in click on the Validate Key 2 button This will verify that the keys were entered properly 6 Click on the Create Company Database button at the bottom of the screen and you will see a pop up window Fig 1 Use this window to locate where the Master Database will be placed It will normally be in the C LMDBs folder To use the default folder simply click OK This process may take several minutes 7 When complete the Status Messages table at the bottom will say Finished You may now close this screen 8 Click on the Close button to exit Ld Lab Manager Server Toc Server Help Setup New Company 1 Type your company name here exactly as it is to appear in the program Company Name Click on Create Key 1 and then call LSG at 1 800 677 1120 and request Key 2 Create Key 1 Connect to my conter Let Us Help You Taea Major Version 7 Minor Version 0 3 Read Key 1 to LSG Sales Representative i a emai Key 1 A Type the key given to you by LSG into Key 2 Key 2 Qo Documents and Settings Click on Validate 2 G2 Dos 5 ee Each Company Should have a different Root Dir for Ext Files a Downloads Validate Key 2 Root Dir for THIS Company s External Files Change Path Custom DB Name LicenseTool LM m6 G ServerTool Modules odImages G E Production 7 Pickups Barcoding Scheduling Shipping Z Quickbooks Cowes D MessagelD Message DateO
532. un Aging until you are very familiar with the way Lab Manager calculates and applies service charges Sum Service Charges on Statement Place a check in the box to summarize the service charges on the statements This will list a single line item service charge Suppress Material Qty on Invoices Place a check in the box to suppress the material quantity This will keep the number of units of that ma terial from printing but the dollar value will still print on the invoice Announce Dr Prefs on Work Ticket Place a check in the box to have Doctor Preferences print on the work tickets If there is NO check mark the Doctor Preferences will not print on the work tickets Default to having the Min Minimum Balance Checked Box set to Checked Place a check in this box to exclude accounts from printing a statement if they have a balance less than this dollar value here When a dollar value is set on this screen it will update the Statements screen Example If an account owes 0 and the Exclude Accounts with a Balance Less Than is activated at 1 00 then all statements that owe 99 or less will not print If there is a credit on the account it will also not print a statement Default to having the Credit Min Minimum Balance Checked Box set to Checked Place a check in this box to include accounts on the statement if they have a credit balance greater than this dollar value When a dollar value is set on this screen it will updat
533. upport department are subject to the sup port plan you carry at that time e No guarantee is made to support all software Likewise not all issues have a solution Sometimes hardware or soft ware damage is beyond repair e Program updates or upgrades DO NOT automatically in clude free support unless otherwise stated e Support Plans are subject to change without notice Support Hours Monday Friday 8 AM Noon amp 1PM 5PM MST Arizona does not observe daylight savings time Calls outside these hours are after hour support and are billed separately Support 602 264 5913 Fax 602 279 3633 E mail support labsysgrp com Installing Lab Manager Preparing to Install Lab Manager E 2 3 Make sure you are logged in as the Administrator with full rights We recommend temporarily turn off your firewall and virus protection If installing in Vista or Windows 7 turn off User Account Control If you have internet access make sure you are up to date with all Windows updates prior to insatlling Lab Manager Installation from the Website www labsysgrp com 1 We suggest that you use the default settings for the installation If you have downloaded the installation program from the website Setup exe instead of using an installation CD locate the Setup exe file now and double click on it to start the installation When the installation begins the program will say Preparing to Install Fig 1 InstallShie
534. ure 1112 0001 2 smith John 3 4 GOLD Final finish Finish 1 0000 CROWN 2 smith John 3 4 GOLD Deliver Deliver 1 0000 CROWN Case Total 2 1211 0003 2 scheduling test 3 4 GOLD Final finish Finish 1 0000 CROWN 2 scheduling test 3 4 GOLD Deliver Deliver 1 0000 CROWN Case Total 2 Dept Total 4 Grand Total 5 227 Reports Menu Scheduling Cases Due A T oLolacomeleral teleliiale Mila 0 mmm continued Cases Due Report The Cases Due Report lists all cases by Status Providing the Account Pan Patient Due Date and Units Status Totals and Grand Totals are also included Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One e Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format Custom A dot in the circle to choose your own start and end dates MTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Month To Date MTD starting and ending dates YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the Year To Date YTD starting and ending dates Today A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates with the current date Fiscal YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year Unstatemented A dot in the circle will fill in the start and end date for cases that have no
535. urity Control Panel gt Case Entry Production Calendar Accounting Codes Admin Tools Excise Tax Log An Access Group can be a single individual or a group of individuals Tip Setting up groups of individuals is faster and easier than setting up access for each person Access Groups Workstations e Owner or Management Group typically has access to everything Master Config e Technician Group typically has access to items critical to production and or shipping es e Data Entry Group typically has access to everything except critical financial details e Delivery Group typically has access to delivery items Special Tools Run Aging View Accounts GL Status Step 1 Start by defining your Access Groups Step 2 Define Passwords Group Method Individual Method Access Access Group User Group tise Individual Owner Individual Owner Group individual Owner Individual Individual Manager Individual Management Group L Individual Manager Individual s Individual ici ivj Technician Group L individual Technician _lpdividual Individual Data Entr Individual Data Entry Group CL Individual Data Entry Individual i Individual Deliver Individual Delivery Group Lo indvidual Delivery Individual System New Edit List Reports Help GEIE List Access Groups 1eg Impos Access Groups Create No Restriction Access Group with access to everything in Lab Manager Description ii 1 Click System Menu Admin Tools and t
536. v5 Data Backup a Company DB Restore a Company DB Restore an Older Database 1 Right click on the Server Tool icon 2 Left click on Run As or Run As Administrator If Run As is used you should see a check box with the text of Protect my computer and data from unauthorized program activity 3 Uncheck this box and click OK When the program opens click on the Server Menu then on Setup New Lab Manager 4 Click on the Server Menu then on Restore a Company 5 Select the Company DB that you wish to restore your data to by using the drop down list button show to the right 6 Click on the Restore Company DB button When the progress bar shows 100 the backup has been restored 7 You will then be asked for the locations you would like to restore your data from Browse to the location to where the database is e p Restore A Company DB Change License Aging Scheduler Misc Admin Tools 5 Company DB Copy Database 6 Restore Company DB 0 0 Attach Company DB Status Messages MessagelD Message DateOfMessage Server Tool Config uration Server Help Setup New Lab Manager This function is used to edit the paths to Lab Manager s data Under normal circumstances there is no reason to ever change these settings Lab Manager defines these paths during the installation process and this should not need to be changed Clear Logged In Users Upgrade Server
537. vendors on the report in alphabetical order ia acento see OENE Vendors List Report Vendors List Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Preview or Print the Vendors List Report a m Date Retired Ignore 1 Click on Reports General and then Vendors Ace Only 2 Choose a Date Retired option Active Only is the default setting 3 Choose how to sort the report Vendor Name is the default setting 4 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Sort By Vendor ID vendor Name Note If the Ignore option is selected both active and retired vendors will show up on the report This report includes e Vendor ID e Vendor Name e Vendor Address e Vendor City State Zip e Vendor Phone Vendor List Sorted By Vendor Name Filtered By DateRetired is Blank Friday October 12 2012 ID Name Your Company Name Goes Here Address City State Zip Phone ARGEN AUSTENAL BRASSELER COLUMBIA CORRUGATE DEGUSSA CORP DENTSPLY DLDS FLIGHTAGS IVOCLAR LABORATORY SYSTEM ODONTO SYCOM 380 MIRSLANI DR P O BOX 97364 800 KING GEORGE BOULEVARD 12777 SAW TUALATIN SHERVYOOD RD 3900 S CLINTON AVE 570 W COLLEGE AVE 810 E MAIN ST 2733 6TH AVE P O BOX 1004 1716 E ROSE LANE 15 SE 22 WEST BELTLINE HIGHWAY 176 SAN DIEGOCA CHOCAGOILL SAVANNSHGEORGIA TUALATINOR SOUTH PLAINFIELDNEVY JERSEY YORKPA BRANFORDCT DES MOINESIA BUFFALON Y PHOENIXAZ PORTLANDOR MADISON
538. w Retired check box The search can be further defined with the name of the doctor or click Search and the grid will populate with all current and retired doctors 2 Click on the name of the doctor that needs to be reactivated 3 From the Edit Doctor screen remove the date from the Retired Date field 4 Click Save Changes on the Edit Doctor screen or all your work will be lost 126 New Menu Doctors CENA Cele NA BXelei ve k continued a Preferences Tab at Edit Doctor Section Tab at Edit Doctors Preferences Doctor Preferences are notes to remind a technician that this doctor prefers a Please trim margins process unique to them These doctor preferences can appear on the work ticket and in Case Entry Note While the field can accept a large number of characters it is best to limit the preference to 30 characters or less so that it will fit well on the work ticket e Account Dr Preferences This column is used when there are account preferences that have been set up at Edit Account screen e Department dropdown This dropdown lists the departments that the pref erence is associated with e Preference This field is used to type in the preferences that will show on the work ticket Account Dr Prefs Department Preference DateRetired Please trim marg e Date Retired Leave this field empty if this is a valid preference To delete Aga this preference click in the Date Retired field for the Preference you
539. w m Completed Step 2 Tax Setup If you charge Taxes to any of your Accounts you will first need to define your tax collectors rates and categories Tax Collectors Add New Review O Completed Tax Rates Add New Review E completed Tax Categories Add New Review m Completed Step 3 Delivery Methods optional This is used to define the different methods you use to deliver your cases We have predefined several standard methods for you already bed Diew Rexion m Compite Step 4 Company Information Provide your contact information default preferences and more Enter Review m Completed Step 5 Form Selection This will allow you to choose the invoice work ticket and statement styles you will print out Enter Review m Completed Step 6 Departments Departments describe the major categories of the products you produce Add New Review E Completed Step 7 Employees Employees are the people that work in the lab such as technicians salespeople drivers etc Add New Review O Completed Step 8 Accounts Locations Doctors Accounts are the practices that have a single or multiple locations that individual or multiple doctors work at Locations are the addresses you send bills and work to Doctors are assigned to Accounts and their individual Locations Acd New Review a Baiada Step 9 Vendors optional Vendors are the companies you purchase materials from Add New Review m Completed Step 10 Production Steps
540. w the account Doctors Click on the Locator ID in the grid to select and view the doctor Payments Click on the Account Name in the grid to select and view the payment Products Click on the Description in the grid to select and view the product Materials Click on the Description in the grid to select and view the material Vendors Click on the Locator ID in the grid to select and view the vendor Marketing Contacts Click on the Locator ID in the grid to select and view the marketing contact Invoices Click on the Invoice ID in the grid to select and view the Invoice terms for a case 43 System Menu Control Panel System Menu Control Panel To get to the Control Panel Menu start at System then click on Control Panel At the Con Wa trol Panel you can edit or view any of these topics Control Panel gt Company Preferences and Settings Case Entry Easy Report Manager Production Employees Company Preferences and Settings This area is used to define the company contact infor mation and basic defaults used throughout the program ade e Easy Report Manager This area is used to change the paper style of invoices work tickets codes Call Tracking and statements J Admin Tools Shortcut Bar Employees This area is used to define information on your individual employees They can Exit TE bend tems be classified as salespeople technicians drivers or all of the these positions Show All Dock Bars Price Lists T
541. want to find a case with a Patient Corsins Comans oia E J Not Equal To nd onon x Name of Smith AND the case was for Doctor Bud Soe diet dle AMANNA EA ee Jones you would enter search criteria like the iak es ate chal ones example shown to the right This example will find ALL cases past and present To narrow the search down to just current cases enter your search criteria like this next example Search Results After you have typed in your search criteria and clicked on the Search button the results aND OOF SAND OOR of the search will be displayed in a table like the one below pay Search Field 1 Search Field 2 Search Field 3 The search criteria for the table below looked like the example to the right searched for a Patient f Official Status v vi patient named Mueller with an Official Status Not Equal To Statements In other Function O Function Function z words all current cases with a patient name containing Mueller Contains v c F Not Equal To vj c Primary Value Primary Value Primary Value Now that you can see a list of possible matches to see Mueller j Statemented an entire case click on the case number in the first Reset column Fatient YO AccountName W OfficialStatus w LUserStatus WW Doctor Yo LabTocthNumberpstem W Doctor oothNumberSyst 0610 0007 SMueller Tet Account Invoiced Universal Universal 1b sions Woete Taw Taaccown woo
542. want to show up on the Shortcut Bar 3 Once all desired items have been selected click on Save at the bottom of the screen 4 Click Close to exit the Edit Shortcut Bar Items Screen 5 Review these selections by placing your mouse over the Shortcut Bar tab in the upper left corner of the screen Report Cases ata G View Aging Form Report Case Trackin view PDF Manual Report Delivery Rep Special Tools Report Outsourced Report Quotes List Users List Access Groups List Workstations Labels Accounts Labels Products x Edit Master Config Labels Materials Report Marketing Fac Labels Employees f Report Marketing Foll Labels Vendors View Marketing Calen Report Marketing Co Labels Doctors Labels Salesperson Report Technician Pr Labels Invoices Report Cases To Be Fi Labels Purchase Ory Labels York Tickets Labels Marketing Ci BC Product Labels Report Step Status Report Materials Rem Report Product Steps Case Completion BC Material Labels Report Steps Past Du BC Employee Labels Report Cases Due BC Time Clock Labe Report Producti amp on 65 System Menu Control Panel SEC Cela Ore al ige Ml at lA gm continued Show All Dock Bars gt Syscem New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel Company Preferences and Settings To reactivate all the docked items on the left of the Lab Manager screen in the event that they are all closed Case Entry Easy Report Manager
543. will be lost O AOUN 141 New Menu Marketing Contacts New Menu Marketing Contact Marketing Contacts are potential accounts who are not currently clients but accounts you are contacting in an effort to make them a new client This information can be used for mailings contacts seminars etc This is a place to put names addresses and other contact information for accounts who are not using your services System New Edit List Reports Help Case Search Case Payment To create a new marketing contact move the mouse to the top of the screen and click on List and then on Marketing EA Contacts Click on the Add New button at the bottom of the screen To modify or update an existing marketing contact click on the Locator ID in the table When setting up MARKETING ACCOUNTS it is important that you define the fields that are in BOLD The BOLD fields are required All other fields are optional Statement Account Doctor Product Material Vendor Marketing Contact System New Edit List Reports Help Ceri dd eelniclaces Marketing Contacts Edit Marketing Contact tatom 1 Start Date 08 08 2012 Follow Up Date 03 16 2012 E Mark I ieg yNdy0yS as code 2525 barn Code 85215 v Sales Person R Rosalie M Commission z maar Ji Ouse On Label Use On Label Date Retired J 94 14 2011 9 Follow Up Time 12 45 AM Location 1 Location 2 l A l Main KATEA p
544. will populate with all of your doctors At List Doctor tab click the account s Locator ID in the table Click on the Preferences tab at the Edit Doctor screen Place a date in the Date Retired field This preference is now deleted Click Save Changes or all the work will be lost 127 New Menu Doctors CNA Cela NA BXeler ve k continued Image Tab at Edit Doctor Preferences mage Technicians Image tab allows the user to save an image of the doctor Compatible Image File Formats BMP GIF Jpeg JPG PNG and TIFF Note We recommend saving images to Case Images in the C LMDBs companyname Caselmages folder Lab Manager does NOT store any images It only displays those images you have pointed to It links to the image If you are adding images to cases make sure you save them at Case Images and backup associated files with the LM Server tool Adding An Image at Edit Doctor 1 To assign an image to a doctor click List Doctors then the Search button table will populate with all of your doctors At List Doctor tab click the account s Locator ID in the table Click the Image tab in the insert at the Edit Doctor screen Right click inside the Image window in Lab Manager as shown to the right You will see a small menu containing the words Choose File View Full and Delete Left click on Choose File Windows will display a common Select an Image browse window In the Select an Image window click on
545. would like a bulk discount Billy Bob Mueller 10 12 2012 Randy Mueller 10 14 00 10 15 00 Called Tom back and spoke about how to Billy Bob accomidate his preferences Mueller 10 08 2012 Mandi Mueller 10 04 00 10 06 00 He would like you to call him on Wednesday Billy Bob Mueller 221 Report Menu Marketing Marketing Follow Up Call List The Marketing Follow Up Call List Report lists all the marketing contacts that need a follow up based on the dates and times in Edit Marketing Contacts The report lists Marketing ID and Name Follow Up Date and Time Postal Code Contact and Phone Number s Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One Starting Date field Fill in the starting date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format e Ending Date field Fill in the ending date by using the calendar function or type in the date in MM DD YYYY format starting and ending dates with the current date e Fiscal YTD A dot in the circle will automatically fill in the starting and ending dates of the Fiscal Year e Unstatemented Not applicable e Date Range Default Setting A dot in the circle to use the date range e Marked A dot in the circle to only show follow up calls from marketing contacts that have been marked with the Mark function at Edit Marketing Contact e All A dot in the circle to list all the marketing con tacts e Salesperson Choose a name of a sales person from the list to filte
546. x collector tracks the sales of non taxable items A Non Taxable atte ieee oo Items tax rate is needed Assigned to tax category Phoenix Non Taxable The State of Arizona tax collector tracks the sales of non taxable items A Non Taxable Items tax rate is needed Assigned to tax category Arizona Non Taxable Non Taxable Modify Existing Tax Collectors System New Edit List Reports Help 1 Click on System Accounting and then Tax Collectors 2 In the Edit Tax Collectors screen click on the name of the tax collector under the De aa Ta Collectors scription column 2 3 Modify the name i Edit Tax Collectors 4 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost T 2 E Show Retired one Additional Tax Collectors Tax Collectors Click on System Accounting and then Tax Collectors E TN en Click on Add New button at the right bottom of the screen This is will add a new line item imported Collecto to the grid 3 In the new line item in the grid under the Description column type the name of the tax sain daria collector Imported Collecto 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all new tax collectors have been entered 5 You do not have to type a Tax Collector ID an ID will be assigned automatically when the changes have been saved 6 Click Save at the bottom of the screen or all your work will be lost Part B Assigning Tax Rates Each defined Tax Rate is assigned to a Tax Collector BA
547. y 4 If you want Pick Ups included on the report place check in the box 5 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen Pick up and Delivery List Thursday November 15 2012 Pick Ups and Deliveries based upon Doctor Date Thursday November 15 2012 Your Company Name Goes Here Account ID 5 Phone 6025559964 Account Name Dr John Killdare Route North P denoted Pickup case Address 2400 E Indian School Stop D denoted Deliver case City State Zip Phoenix Az 85000 Case Patient signature Dr s Date Time 0806 0002 Black Mark 11 15 2012 0806 0005 Jackson Scott 11 15 2012 0901 0001 Miller Jessica Account ID 2 Phone 602 555 1234 Account Name Dr George Franks Route North Address 726 5 E 60 TH Stop City State Zip Phoenix Az 85000 Case Patient Signature Dr s Date 1005 0001 Jones Sherry 11 15 2012 212 Report Menu Production Delivery Report lt ole a TALTE ea cele Toii o 1E continued System New Edit List Reports Help Delivery Report Accounting General The Delivery Report lists all cases to be delivered on a Given Date Between Two Dates for a Given Account Department or Route The report can be sorted by Ship by Date Doctor Date or Finished Date Billing ieg IMOS Production Work Tickets Labels Lab Status e Account drop down list Optional Use the drop down list to only show cases for a spe ae Doctors Production TID cific account
548. y 1 Read Key 1 to LSG Sales Representative Key 1 Type the key given to you by LSG into Key 2 Key 2 Click on Validate Key 2 Validate Key 2 Major Version Limit 255 Expiration Date Modules E Production Pickups Update Company DB with New License C Barcoding Z Scheduling 16 e Left click on Run As or Run As Administrator If Run As is used you should see a check box with the text of Protect my computer and data from unauthorized program activity e Uncheck this box and click OK When the program opens click on the Server Menu then on Setup New Lab E Shipping 1 Use the drop down list at the top of the screen to select the name of your current database 2 Type in your company name into the Company Name field This needs to be EXACTLY the same as the name you will be using in Lab Manager to identify your company on your reports invoices and statements For exam When typing in your Company Name use letter and or numbers but be careful not use special symbols Call our office for Key 2 We can be reached during office hours in Phoenix Arizona at 1 800 677 1120 We will ask for your Company Name exactly as you typed it in Step 2 and Key 1 and give you back a number to type into Key 2 Once Key 2 has been successfully typed in click on the Validate Key 2 button This will verify that the keys were entered properly Click on the Update Company DB with New License button at th
549. y Leave the dropdown blank for all vendors or choose an individual vendor for a report on only them 2 Filter By Radio Buttons Choose One Account ai e Out Sourcing Date Due Back This is the date that the e case is supposed to be back in the laboratory Starting Date 99 04 2012 custom OUnstateme e Date Returned This is the actual date that the case was CPO e _ mr returned to the laboratory nae til e Start Date This is the date that the case was started in the Fiscal 1D laboratory e Invoice Date This is the date that the case was invoiced ee S naa o a E hi a Sort By Case Number Date Returned Sort By Radio Buttons Choose One n micas e Case Number This is the 8 digit case number or invoice EEE CED SL oo number I Include Statemented e Account This sorts the accounts on the list in alphabetical order Out Sourcing Date Due Back This sorts the list by the date that the case is supposed to come back to the laboratory Date Returned This sorts the list by the date that the case was returned to the laboratory Start Date This sorts the list by the date that the case was started in the laboratory Invoice Date This sorts the list by the date that the case was invoiced Include Statemented check box Check mark the box to have statemented cases show on the report Preview or Print the Vendor Outsourcing Report 1 Click on Reports Production and then Outsourced Cases Select a vendor from the d
550. y Menus Setup Wizard Case Locator System New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel gt Company Preferences and Settings This is used to reactivate the Case Locator in the event that it has closed os Easy Report Manager Production Employees Calendar Price Lists 1 Click on System Control Panel and then Case Locator 2 When the menu item is clicked it will not open the Case Locator but it should be made avail able to mouse over on the far left side of Lab Manager Accounting Quickbooks Transfer Codes Call Tracking Shortcut Bar ShortCut Menu Items Admin Tools Exit Show All Dock Bars Manage Reports QuickBooks Interface Toolbar Case Locator View Easy Menus Setup Wizard View Easy Menus System New Edit List Reports Help Control Panel gt Company Preferences and Settings Case Entry Easy Report Manager The Easy Menu format is found on the Main Menu screen of Lab Manager v7 J Production eee It has the familiar look and feel of previous versions of Lab Manager i Caa z Accounting Quickbooks Transfer Click on System Control Panel and View Easy Menus This opens the Main Menu tab with button selections for Case Entry amp Update Case Search Report Menu Maintenance Menu Help Quit eg ale Exit Admin Tools Shortcut Bar Exit ShortCut Menu Items Show All Dock Bars Manage Reports QuickBooks Interface Toolbar System New Edit List R
551. y Report Manager Production mployees unlimited number of price lists but comes with 12 price lists already set up This screen can be eee ma aa used to copy price lists change prices change the names of your price lists and create new price lists pie EIEEEI To modify or add a new price list click on System Control Panel and then Price Lists The tab will Codes Call Tracking display the price list name under Description a Date Created in the next column and a Date Retired Admin Tools Shortcut Bar if the price list has been deleted Click on the Add New button in the lower left to add a new Price List Exit Cherie ben Rem To edit an existing Price List click on the name of the list 3 Reportinvol ShowAllDock Bars X View Market Di Report Mark Manage Reports QuickBooks Interface Toolbar When setting up a PRICE LIST it is important that you define the fields that are in BOLD The BOLD fields are required The other fields are optional 9 List Account D List Products 3 List Material List Marketir Case Locator System New Edit List Reports Help View Easy Menus Setup Wizard Hdd Edit Price Lists Main Edit Price List e Description The price list List Employees name can be a number letter or even the name of a specific account to give a custom price list to an 1032307 35V faii Product Prices Sair ae gia ge elo dl RE A account g Product Prices e Date Create
552. y time toni ES Place Holder Tax Category Use the drop down list and choose a category that will charge tax on a case with products that are taxable e Place Holder Non Tax Category Use the drop down list and choose a category that will list the non tax categories Default Country dropdown list This automatically populates the Country field for Account Locations The drop down list has over 200 countries listed in alphabetical order with the exception of the United States and Canada at the top of the list Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all your work will be lost Terms for all new Accounts for Aging purposes Example Cash Net SESS eIreerennrrreny a 15 Net 30 etc The terms can be changed on the Account screen any fJ time as well Default Price List Use the dropdown list to define the initial price list Default Invoice Terms for new Accounts Default Price List Retired button R If you need to see items that are retired click on the ace hiiia Tes Eao retired button They will then be available in the dropdown list Place Holder Non Tax Category Note To create a new Invoice Term click on System Accounting and Invoice Terms See List Invoice Terms for more information To create a new Price Lists click on System Control Panel and Price List To Create a new Tax Categories click on System Accounting and Tax Category 48 System Menu Control Panel SET cl ale Ore alige Ml
553. year Note the R button when selected will include those doctors that have been retired in your dropdown list e Product Sales A report showing the sales in dollars for products only for the current year last 12 months or a given year e Material Sales A report showing the sales in dollars for materials only for the current year last 12 months or a given year FlighTags e Product Production A report showing the sale amount of units for products only for FlighTags Travel Credits the current year last 12 months or a given year e Material Production A report showing the sales amount of units for materials only for the current year last 12 months or a given year Yearly Sales Summary This report shows total sales broken down by year e Select Account drop down list Select the name of the account if you only want a specific account on a report Product Price List Materials Price List Commissions Taxes with Sales i System New Edit List Reports Help GEDE Yearly Reports Report Yearly Reports Date Range Radio Buttons Choose One Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 e Limit To Current Year Only A dot in the circle will only give data for this current year Select Report Type Account Sales e Last 12 Months A dot in the circle will give a report show aaa ing the last 12 months Material Sales e Chosen Year A dot in the circle will show data only for Product Production the specified year Mate
554. you wish to export the data to 3 Start Lab Manager 4 At Lab Manager s Main screen select System Control Panel and then QuickBooks Interface 5 Lab Manager will attempt to interface with QuickBooks If Lab Manager finds QuickBooks and is able to communicate with it then you will see Image A 6 Select the option Yes whenever this QuickBooks company file is open Arrow 1 7 Select Allow this application to access personal data Arrow 2 QuickBooks Application with No Certificate amp Clickonine Continue button 9 If the Confirm to Proceed screen appears select Yes to allow Lab Manager to interface with QuickBooks See Image B 10 If the Access Confirmation screen appears click on the Done button to complete the connection See Image C An application without a certificate is reques Following QuickBooks company file Rock Castle Constru Access may include reading and modifying Q enhancing the QuickBooks user interface The Application Calls Itself Lab Manager Certificate Information This application does not have a cert cannot verify the developer s identit QuickBooks Solutions Marketplace Search for information about this applicatica QuickBooks Solutions Marketplace Do you want to allow this application to read and modify this company file O No Yes prompt each time Yes whenever this QuickBooks company file is open Yes always allow access even if QuickBooks is not running
555. your image and then click on the Open button A thumbnail view of your image will appear in the Image tab Lab Manager does NOT store any images It only displays those images you have pointed to It links to the image If you are adding images to cases make sure you save them at Caselmages and backup associated files with the LM Server tool 8 This image link will be saved when the case is saved NO O01 BR W DO View the Image in High Resolution After an image has been added to a Doctor it can be viewed in high resolution Click the Image tab in the insert at the Edit Doctor screen Right click inside the Image window in Lab Manager as shown to the right You will see a small menu containing the words Choose File View Full and Delete To view the high resolution image right click on the small menu and left click on View Full To close the image box use the Red X at the top of the pop up screen Oar WN Deleting Images on a Case 1 On the doctor that needs to have a photo deleted click on the Image tab from the Edit Doctor screen 2 Right click the Image tab that is already saved on the doctor 3 You will see a small menu containing the words Add and Delete Left click on Delete 4 Click Save Changes across the bottom once completed or all of your work will be lost Technicians Tab at Edit Doctor aise ele ENG Technicians Use this screen to assign Technicians to Doctors This feature is only used in t
556. ystem New Edit List Reports Help Sam Johnson 1718 E Rose Lane Phoenix AZ 85016 Rosalie Mueller 1718 E Rose Lane Phoenix AZ 85016 on an Avery 5160 style label sheet which provides 30 different labels per sheet Sort By Radio Buttons Choose One e Locator ID A dot in the circle will sort the labels in numerical or der e Name A dot in the circle will sort the labels in alphabetical order ous Preview or Print the Employee Labels 1 Click on Reports Labels and then Employees 2 Choose how to sort the labels 3 Click Print or Preview at the bottom of the screen 101207 ase ea myu 216 Report Menu Labels Material amp Employee System New Edit List Re cs Help GENE Material Labels Report Material Labels Accounting General Billing Production Labels Marketing Accounts Doctors Scheduling gt Products Materials Employees Vendors Salespersons Invoices Marketing Contacts Dr Account Locations Printer Brother HL 5370DW series Copy 1 Tray 0 Sort By LocatorlD O Description System New Edit List Reports Help 2022207 ase ea IMOS OGEDE Employee Labels Report Accounting General Billing Production Labels Marketing Accounts Doctors Scheduling gt Products Materials E

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manual - ghv Vertriebs-GmbH  ステアリングリモコンアダプター  Un petit paradis de verdure  Samsung L210 دليل المستخدم  2) UP 6)HDMI-OUT  User`s Manual - Planetechusa.com  Bedienungsanleitung  Stratos™ PowerMonster Adapter 取扱説明書  Aspergillus niger PCR Detection Kit - Protocol  Philips AE6360/14 User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file